NMRA DCC Reference ManualFor
QSI Quantum® 3, 2, and 1
Equipped Locomotives
Version 5.2.0
For Firmware Versions 7, 8 and 9
5-August-2015

New in DCC Reference Manual Version 5.2.0
Added Reverser Type to CV51.3
Added CV52.20 Snifter Valve Volume and CV116.20 Snifter Valve Balance
Added CV52.41 Reverser Volume and CV116.41 Reverser Balance
Added Head End Power to CV53.
Added CV55.1.1 Horn Type and CV55.1.2 Alternate Horn Type
Added CV55.1.10 Horn Reverb Amount
Added CV55.1.11 Horn Reverb Distance
CV55.3.6 Bell Ring Period: each unit represents 0.01 second.
Added CV55.3.7 User-defined Bell Metallurgy
Added CV55.5.SI Dynamic Brakes Fans
Added CV55.8.SI Cooling Fans
Added CV55.76.SI Mars Light Strobe with Horn
Added CV55.76.5 Mars Light Strobe Hold Time
Added CV55.80.SI Rear Mars Light Strobe with Horn
Added CV55.80.5 Rear Mars Light Strobe Hold Time
Added CV55.104.2 Automatic Front Marker Lights2 Config
Added CV55.104.3 Automatic Front Marker Lights3 Config
Added CV55.104.13 Front Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Added CV55.104.14 Front Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Added CV55.106.2 Automatic Rear Marker Lights2 Config
Added CV55.106.3 Automatic Rear Marker Lights3 Config
Added CV55.104.13 Rear Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Added CV55.104.14 Rear Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Added CV55.122.21 Firebox2 Min Intensity
Added CV55.122.22 Firebox2 Max Intensity
Added CV55.122.23 Firebox2 Mid Intensity
Added CV55.122.27 Firebox2 Ramp Up Time
Added CV55.122.28 Firebox2 Ramp Down Time
Added CV56.36.0 Consist Address Active for F13-F20
Added CV56.36.1 Consist Address Active for F21-F28
Added CV115.5.0 Dynamic Brakes Fans Port
Added CV115.8.0 Cooling Fans Port
Added CV115.104.1 Front Marker Lights2 Port and CV115.104.2 Front Marker Lights3 Port
Added CV115.106.1 Rear Marker Lights2 Port and CV115.106.2 Rear Marker Lights3 Port
Added CV120.10.0 Bell Hold Time
Added CV127.0.SI User-defined Horn Component Volume
Added CV127.40.SI User-defined Alternate Horn Component Volume
Added CV128.0.SI User-defined Horn Component Balance
Added CV128.40.SI User-defined Alternate Horn Component Balance
Added CV130 User-defined Horn Component Pitch
Added CV131 User-defined Alternate Horn Component Pitch
Added CV133.1.0 Locomotive Type
Added CV133.2.0 Chuff Intensity
Added CV135.PI.SI Upon Stopping Scenario Configuration

New in DCC Reference Manual Version 5.1.0
Added descriptions of F13…F28 default features to section 1.
Added CV51.16 Atmospherics Level
Added CV52.30 Air Dryer Volume and CV116.30 Air Dryer Volume Balance.
Added CV52.47 User Recorded Sound Effect2 Volume and CV116.47 User Recorded Sound Effect2 Volume Balance.
Added CV52.50 Verbal Feedback Volume and CV116.50 Verbal Feedback Volume Balance.
Added new features to CV53:

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 2 of 468

5-Aug-15

“Engine Room Lights”“Engine Room2 Lights”“Shut Down”“User Recorded Sound Effect2”“Calibrate BEMF to SMPH”
Added CV55.3.6 Bell Ring Period
Added CV55.13.1 Air Dryer Minimum Interval and CV55.13.2 Air Dryer Maximum Interval
Added CV55.21.1 Low Idle Timeout.
Added CV55.92.19 OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity
Added CV55.96.19 Rear OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity
Added Prime Beacon X4 effect to OHBL (CV55.92.SI) and Rear OHBL (CV55.96.SI).
Added Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect to OHBL (CV55.92.SI) and Rear OHBL (CV55.96.SI).
Added CV55.109.12 Truck Lights Max Intensity.
Added CV55.109.17 Truck Lights Ramp Time.
Added CV55.113.12 Step Lights Max Intensity.
Added CV55.113.17 Step Lights Ramp Time.
Added CV55.120.12 Engine Room Lights Max Intensity.
Added CV55.120.17 Engine Room Lights Ramp Time.
Added CV55.128.0 bit 6 Trip Odometer Readout.
Added CV56.0 bit 2 Antialiased BEMF Measurements
Added CV56.1 QSI System Configuration 1.
For 2 byte CV’s (CV56.7.0-1, CV56.24.0-1, CV56.25.0-1, and CV56.26.0-1)
Added instructions to program high byte first, then low byte for verbal acknowledgment.
Corrected examples.
Added CV58.5.0-1 Trip Odometer
Added CV58.10.0-1 Power Conversion Stopping Distance
Added CV58.20.0-1 BEMF to SMPH Calibration Distance
Added CV115.109.0 Truck Lights Port
Added CV115.113.0 Step Lights Port
Added CV115.120.0 Engine Room Lights Port
Added CV115.121.0 Engine Room2 Lights Port
Changed CV118.PI Individual Sound Pitch Shift to CV118.PI.SI
Added CV127.PI.SI Component Sound Volumes.
Added CV128.PI.SI Component Sound Balance Controls.
Added CV129.PI.SI Diesel Motor Configuration

New in DCC Reference Manual Version 5.0.2
Added CV 6 V-Mid.
Added Bell Actuator Sound enable to CV51.2 Special Sound Effects Enable.
Added CV51.3 Special Sound Effects Enable.
Added CV51.14 System Volume Balance.
Added CV51.15 System Pitch Shift.
Added CV51.20 Motive State Change Warning Signals.
Added several new CV52.PI Individual Sound Volumes.
Added several new CV53 Feature Identifiers.
Added default CV53 feature to output mappings for outputs 15…30.
Added CV55.12.SI Spitter Valve Configuration.
Added CV55.70.0 bit 7 Gas Turbine Transition Light Behavior
For all lights:
Added CV55.PI.17 Light Ramp Up Time.
Added CV55.PI.18 Light Ramp Down Time.
Added CV56.6 Speed Step 1 Delay
Added CV56.7.SI SMPH/BEMF Ratio
Added CV56.8 BEMF Offset
Added CV56.14 Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution
Added CV56.26.SI Scale Wheel Diameter
Added CV115.PI.SI Feature to Port Mapping.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 3 of 468

5-Aug-15

Added CV116.PI Individual Sound Volume Balance.
Added CV117.PI.SI Individual Sound Selection
Added CV118.PI Individual Sound Pitch Shift.
Added CV120.PI.SI Ready to Move Scenario.

New in DCC Reference Manual Version 4.6.1
Added hoot/fancy ending to CV55.154.SI Grade Crossing Horn Signal.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 4 of 468

5-Aug-15

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 5 of 468

5-Aug-15

Table of Contents
Table of Contents _______________________________________________________________________________________ 6
Digital Command Control Explained ______________________________________________________________________ 16
This Manual __________________________________________________________________________________________ 17
1

Locomotive Operation in DCC _______________________________________________________________________ 19
1.1

Getting Started ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 19

1.2

Basic Throttle and Direction Control _________________________________________________________________________ 19
Locomotive Directional States ________________________________________________________________________________ 19

1.3

Throttle Control Modes ____________________________________________________________________________________ 20

1.5

Function Keys ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 21
1.5.1 Common Feature Function Key Assignments __________________________________________________________________ 21

1.6

Automatic Features _______________________________________________________________________________________ 22

1.7

Horn/Whistle and Bell Buttons (F2 Key and F1 Key) ____________________________________________________________ 23

1.8

Coupler and Coupler Crash Sounds (F3 Key) __________________________________________________________________ 23

1.9

Sound-of-Power™ ________________________________________________________________________________________ 24

1.10

Dynamic Brakes (F5 Key) ________________________________________________________________________________ 24

1.11
Doppler Shift (F6 in Forward and Reverse) _________________________________________________________________ 25
1.11.1 Horn Button Method _____________________________________________________________________________________ 25
1.11.2 F6 Doppler Shift Operation Method _________________________________________________________________________ 25
1.12

Squealing Brakes and Flanges (F7 in Forward or Reverse) ____________________________________________________ 26

1.13

Air Brakes (F7 in Forward or Reverse) _____________________________________________________________________ 26

1.14

Audio Mute (F8 Key) ____________________________________________________________________________________ 27

1.15

Heavy Load (F9 in Forward or Reverse) ____________________________________________________________________ 27

1.16

Status Report (F10)_____________________________________________________________________________________ 28

1.17

Alternate Horn Selection (F11) ___________________________________________________________________________ 28

1.18
Three Stages of Shut Down: Disconnect, Standby and Total Shut Down (F9 in Neutral) ____________________________ 29
Stage One: Disconnect ________________________________________________________________________________________ 29
Stage Two: Standby __________________________________________________________________________________________ 29
Stage Three: Total Shut Down __________________________________________________________________________________ 29
1.19
Start Up (F6 in Neutral) __________________________________________________________________________________ 31
Start Up from Disconnect ______________________________________________________________________________________ 31
Start Up from Standby _________________________________________________________________________________________ 31
Start Up from Total Shut Down __________________________________________________________________________________ 31
1.20

System Volume Decrease and Increase (F13 and F14 Keys) ___________________________________________________ 32

1.21

Grade Crossing (F15 Key in Forward or Reverse) ____________________________________________________________ 32

1.22

Fuel Loading Scenario (F26 Key in Neutral) ________________________________________________________________ 33

1.23

Maintenance Scenario (F27 Key in Neutral) _________________________________________________________________ 33

1.24

Water Loading Scenario (F28 Key in Neutral) _______________________________________________________________ 33

1.25

Water Scoop Scenario (F28 Key in Forward or Reverse) ______________________________________________________ 33

1.26

Function Key Operation in Neutral ________________________________________________________________________ 34

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 6 of 468

5-Aug-15

2

Programming Configuration Variables ________________________________________________________________ 35
2.1

Service Mode Programming ________________________________________________________________________________ 35

2.2

Operations Mode Programming _____________________________________________________________________________ 36

2.3

List of CV’s supported by Quantum Locomotives ______________________________________________________________ 37

3

CV’s 1-29: NMRA Standard CV’s _____________________________________________________________________ 41
3.1

CV 1 Primary Address Control ______________________________________________________________________________ 41

3.2

CV 2 V-Start _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 42

3.3

CV 3 Acceleration Rate ____________________________________________________________________________________ 43

3.4

CV 4 Deceleration Rate ____________________________________________________________________________________ 44

3.5

CV 5 V-High _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 45

3.6

CV6 V-Mid _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 47

3.7

CV 7 Manufacturer’s Version Number ________________________________________________________________________ 48

3.8

CV 8 Manufacturer’s ID ____________________________________________________________________________________ 49

3.9

CV 11 Packet Time-Out Value _______________________________________________________________________________ 50

3.10
CV 17, 18 Extended Address _____________________________________________________________________________ 51
3.9.1 Entering Extended Address into CV 17 and CV 18 Directly: _______________________________________________________ 51
3.11

CV 19 Consist Address _________________________________________________________________________________ 54

3.12

CV 21 Consist Address Active for F1-F8 ___________________________________________________________________ 55

3.13

CV 22 Consist Address Active for FL and F9-F12 ____________________________________________________________ 57

3.14

CV 23 Acceleration Adjustment __________________________________________________________________________ 59

3.15

CV 24 Deceleration Adjustment __________________________________________________________________________ 60

3.16
CV 25 Quantum Speed Table Selection ____________________________________________________________________ 61
Additional Information for the Curious Regarding QSI Speed Curves: ____________________________________________________ 61
3.17

4

CV 29 Configuration Data _______________________________________________________________________________ 63

CV’s 33-46: Output Locations _______________________________________________________________________ 66
4.1

Overview ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 66

4.2

CV 33 Output Location for FL(f) _____________________________________________________________________________ 68

4.3

CV 34 Output Location for FL(r) _____________________________________________________________________________ 70

4.4

CV 35 Output Location for F1 _______________________________________________________________________________ 72

4.5

CV 36 Output Location for F2 _______________________________________________________________________________ 74

4.6

CV 37 Output Location for F3 _______________________________________________________________________________ 76

4.7

CV 38 Output Location for F4 _______________________________________________________________________________ 78

4.8

CV 39 Output Location for F5 _______________________________________________________________________________ 80

4.9

CV 40 Output Location for F6 _______________________________________________________________________________ 82

4.10

CV 41 Output Location for F7 ____________________________________________________________________________ 84

4.11

CV 42 Output Location for F8 ____________________________________________________________________________ 86

4.12

CV 43 Output Location for F9 ____________________________________________________________________________ 88

4.13

CV 44 Output Location for F10 ___________________________________________________________________________ 90

4.14

CV 45 Output Location for F11 ___________________________________________________________________________ 92

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 7 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.15

5

CV 46 Output Location for F12 ___________________________________________________________________________ 94

CV’s 49-64: QSI Unique CV’s ________________________________________________________________________ 96
5.1

Overview ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 96
5.1.1
Warehouse Analogy __________________________________________________________________________________ 97

5.2

CV 49 QSI Primary Index __________________________________________________________________________________ 100

5.3

CV 50 QSI Secondary Index _______________________________________________________________________________ 101

5.4

CV 51.PI QSI System Sound Control ________________________________________________________________________ 102
5.4.1
CV 51.0 Operations Mode System Volume (PI = 0) _________________________________________________________ 102
5.4.2
CV 51.1 Operations Mode Mute Volume (PI = 1) ___________________________________________________________ 103
5.4.3
CV 51.2 Special Sound Effects Enable (PI = 2) ____________________________________________________________ 104
5.4.4
CV 51.3 Special Sound Effects Enable (PI = 3) ____________________________________________________________ 107
5.4.5
CV 51.5 Automatic Mute Timeout Value (PI = 5) ___________________________________________________________ 108
5.4.6
CV 51.10 Chuff Cutoff Minimum Inertia (PI = 10) ___________________________________________________________ 109
5.4.7
CV 51.12 Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor (PI = 12) ___________________________________________________ 110
5.4.8
CV 51.13 Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor (PI = 13) __________________________________________________ 111
5.4.9
CV 51.14 System Volume Balance (PI = 14) ______________________________________________________________ 112
5.4.10 CV 51.15 System Pitch Shift (PI = 15) ___________________________________________________________________ 113
5.4.11 CV 51.16 Atmospherics Level (PI = 16) __________________________________________________________________ 114
5.4.12
CV 51.20 Motive State Change Warning Signals (PI = 20) _________________________________________________ 115

5.5

CV 52.PI QSI Individual Sound Volume Control _______________________________________________________________ 117
5.5.1
Individual Sound Identifiers ____________________________________________________________________________ 118

5.6

CV 53.PI.SI Output Feature Assignment _____________________________________________________________________ 119
5.6.1
QSI Feature Identification Numbers used with CV 53 ________________________________________________________ 121
5.6.2
CV 53 Factory Default Settings _________________________________________________________________________ 126

5.7

CV 55.PI.SI QSI Feature Configuration ______________________________________________________________________ 127
5.7.1
CV 55.1.SI Horn ____________________________________________________________________________________ 127
5.7.1.1 CV 55.1.1 Horn Type ______________________________________________________________________________ 127
5.7.1.2 CV 55.1.2 Alternate Horn Type ______________________________________________________________________ 130
5.7.1.3 CV 55.1.10 Horn Reverb Amount ____________________________________________________________________ 131
5.7.1.4 CV 55.1.11 Horn Reverb Distance ____________________________________________________________________ 132
5.7.2
CV 55.3.SI Bell _____________________________________________________________________________________ 133
5.7.2.1 CV 55.3.0 Maximum Bell Index ______________________________________________________________________ 133
5.7.2.2 CV 55.3.1 Bell Type _______________________________________________________________________________ 134
5.7.2.3 CV 55.3.5 Automatic Bell ___________________________________________________________________________ 136
5.7.2.4 CV 55.3.6 User-defined Bell Ring Period _______________________________________________________________ 137
5.7.2.5 CV 55.3.7 User-defined Bell Metallurgy ________________________________________________________________ 138
5.7.3
CV 55.5.SI Dynamic Brakes Fans _______________________________________________________________________ 139
5.7.3.1 CV 55.5.12 Dynamic Brakes Fans Max Power __________________________________________________________ 139
5.7.3.2 CV 55.5.17 Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Up Time _______________________________________________________ 140
5.7.3.3 CV 55.5.18 Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Down Time _____________________________________________________ 141
5.7.4
CV 55.8.SI Cooling Fans ______________________________________________________________________________ 142
5.7.4.1 CV 55.8.12 Cooling Fans Max Power _________________________________________________________________ 142
5.7.4.2 CV 55.8.17 Cooling Fans Ramp Up Time ______________________________________________________________ 143
5.7.4.3 CV 55.8.18 Cooling Fans Ramp Down Time ____________________________________________________________ 144
5.7.5
CV 55.12.SI Spitter Valve _____________________________________________________________________________ 146
5.7.5.1 CV 55.12.1 Spitter Valve Minimum Interval _____________________________________________________________ 146
5.7.5.2 CV 55.12.2 Spitter Valve Maximum Interval ____________________________________________________________ 147
5.7.6
CV 55.13.SI Air Dryer ________________________________________________________________________________ 148
5.7.6.1 CV 55.13.1 Air Dryer Minimum Interval ________________________________________________________________ 148
5.7.6.2 CV 55.13.2 Air Dryer Maximum Interval ________________________________________________________________ 149
5.7.7
CV 55.21.SI Diesel Motor Parameters ___________________________________________________________________ 150
5.7.7.1 CV 55.21.0 Speed Steps Per Notch ___________________________________________________________________ 150
5.7.7.2 CV 55.21.1 Low Idle Timeout ________________________________________________________________________ 152
5.7.8
CV 55.70.SI Headlight ________________________________________________________________________________ 153
5.7.8.1 CV 55.70.0 Headlight Initial State ____________________________________________________________________ 154

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 8 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.2 CV 55.70.1 Automatic Headlight Configuration __________________________________________________________ 155
5.7.8.3 CV 55.70.10 Headlight Dim Intensity __________________________________________________________________ 156
5.7.8.4 CV 55.70.12 Headlight Max Intensity __________________________________________________________________ 157
5.7.8.5 CV 55.70.15 Headlight Ramp Up Rate ________________________________________________________________ 158
5.7.8.6 CV 55.70.16 Headlight Ramp Down Rate ______________________________________________________________ 159
5.7.8.7 CV 55.70.17 Headlight Ramp Up Time ________________________________________________________________ 160
5.7.8.8 CV 55.70.18 Headlight Ramp Down Time ______________________________________________________________ 161
5.7.8.9 CV 55.70.SI Headlight Examples _____________________________________________________________________ 162
5.7.9
CV 55.73.SI Reverse Light ____________________________________________________________________________ 163
5.7.9.1 CV 55.73.0 Reverse Light Initial State _________________________________________________________________ 164
5.7.9.2 CV 55.73.1 Automatic Reverse Light Configuration _______________________________________________________ 165
5.7.9.3 CV 55.73.10 Reverse Light Dim Intensity ______________________________________________________________ 166
5.7.9.4 CV 55.73.12 Reverse Light Max Intensity ______________________________________________________________ 167
5.7.9.5 CV 55.73.15 Reverse Light Ramp Up Rate _____________________________________________________________ 168
5.7.9.6 CV 55.73.16 Reverse Light Ramp Down Rate ___________________________________________________________ 169
5.7.9.7 CV 55.73.17 Reverse Light Ramp Up Time _____________________________________________________________ 170
5.7.9.8 CV 55.73.18 Reverse Light Ramp Down Time __________________________________________________________ 171
5.7.9.9 CV 55.73.SI Reverse Light Examples _________________________________________________________________ 172
5.7.10CV 55.76.SI Mars Light ____________________________________________________________________________ 173
5.7.10.1 CV 55.76.0 Mars Light Initial State ____________________________________________________________________ 174
5.7.10.2 CV 55.76.1 Automatic Mars Light FWD Configuration _____________________________________________________ 175
5.7.10.3 CV 55.76.2 Automatic Mars Light NFF Configuration _____________________________________________________ 176
5.7.10.4 CV 55.76.3 Automatic Mars Light REV Configuration _____________________________________________________ 177
5.7.10.5 CV 55.76.4 Automatic Mars Light NFR Configuration _____________________________________________________ 178
5.7.10.6 CV 55.76.5 Mars Light Strobe Hold Time ______________________________________________________________ 179
5.7.10.7 CV 55.76.6 Mars Light Strobe Period _________________________________________________________________ 180
5.7.10.8 CV 55.76.10 Mars Light Dim Intensity _________________________________________________________________ 181
5.7.10.9 CV 55.76.11 Mars Light Min Intensity _________________________________________________________________ 182
5.7.10.10 CV 55.76.12 Mars Light Max Intensity ______________________________________________________________ 183
5.7.10.11 CV 55.76.13 Mars Light Mid Intensity _______________________________________________________________ 184
5.7.10.12 CV 55.76.15 Mars Light Ramp Up Rate _____________________________________________________________ 185
5.7.10.13 CV 55.76.16 Mars Light Ramp Down Rate ___________________________________________________________ 186
5.7.10.14 CV 55.76.17 Mars Light Ramp Up Time _____________________________________________________________ 187
5.7.10.15 CV 55.76.18 Mars Light Ramp Down Time __________________________________________________________ 188
5.7.10.16 CV 55.76.SI Mars Light Examples _________________________________________________________________ 189
5.7.11
CV 55.80.SI Rear Mars Light ________________________________________________________________________ 190
5.7.11.1 CV 55.80.0 Rear Mars Light Initial State _______________________________________________________________ 191
5.7.11.2 CV 55.80.1 Automatic Rear Mars Light FWD Configuration ________________________________________________ 192
5.7.11.3 CV 55.80.2 Automatic Rear Mars Light NFF Configuration _________________________________________________ 193
5.7.11.4 CV 55.80.3 Automatic Rear Mars Light REV Configuration _________________________________________________ 194
5.7.11.5 CV 55.80.4 Automatic Rear Mars Light NFR Configuration _________________________________________________ 195
5.7.11.6 CV 55.80.5 Rear Mars Light Strobe Hold Time __________________________________________________________ 196
5.7.11.7 CV 55.80.6 Rear Mars Light Strobe Period _____________________________________________________________ 197
5.7.11.8 CV 55.80.10 Rear Mars Light Dim Intensity _____________________________________________________________ 198
5.7.11.9 CV 55.80.11 Rear Mars Light Min Intensity _____________________________________________________________ 199
5.7.11.10 CV 55.80.12 Rear Mars Light Max Intensity __________________________________________________________ 200
5.7.11.11 CV 55.80.13 Rear Mars Light Mid Intensity __________________________________________________________ 201
5.7.11.12 CV 55.80.15 Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Rate _________________________________________________________ 202
5.7.11.13 CV 55.80.16 Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Rate ______________________________________________________ 203
5.7.11.14 CV 55.80.17 Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Time ________________________________________________________ 204
5.7.11.15 CV 55.80.18 Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Time ______________________________________________________ 205
5.7.11.16 CV 55.80.SI Rear Mars Light Examples _____________________________________________________________ 206
5.7.12
CV 55.84.SI Ditch Lights ___________________________________________________________________________ 207
5.7.12.1 CV 55.84.0 Ditch Lights Initial State ___________________________________________________________________ 208
5.7.12.2 CV 55.84.1 Automatic Ditch Lights FWD Configuration ____________________________________________________ 209
5.7.12.3 CV 55.84.2 Automatic Ditch Lights NFF Configuration ____________________________________________________ 210
5.7.12.4 CV 55.84.3 Automatic Ditch Lights REV Configuration ____________________________________________________ 211
5.7.12.5 CV 55.84.4 Automatic Ditch Lights NFR Configuration ____________________________________________________ 212
5.7.12.6 CV 55.84.5 Ditch Lights Strobe Hold Time _____________________________________________________________ 213

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 9 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.7 CV 55.84.6 Ditch Lights Strobe Period ________________________________________________________________ 214
5.7.12.8 CV 55.84.10 Ditch Lights Dim Intensity ________________________________________________________________ 215
5.7.12.9 CV 55.84.11 Ditch Lights Min Intensity ________________________________________________________________ 216
5.7.12.10 CV 55.84.12 Ditch Lights Max Intensity _____________________________________________________________ 217
5.7.12.11 CV 55.84.15 Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate ____________________________________________________________ 218
5.7.12.12 CV 55.84.16 Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate __________________________________________________________ 219
5.7.12.13 CV 55.84.17 Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time ____________________________________________________________ 220
5.7.12.14 CV 55.84.18 Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time _________________________________________________________ 221
5.7.12.15 CV 55.84.SI Ditch Lights Examples ________________________________________________________________ 222
5.7.13
CV 55.88.SI Rear Ditch Lights _______________________________________________________________________ 223
5.7.13.1 CV 55.88.0 Rear Ditch Lights Initial State ______________________________________________________________ 224
5.7.13.2 CV 55.88.1 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights FWD Configuration _______________________________________________ 225
5.7.13.3 CV 55.88.2 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFF Configuration ________________________________________________ 226
5.7.13.4 CV 55.88.3 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights REV Configuration ________________________________________________ 227
5.7.13.5 CV 55.88.4 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFR Configuration ________________________________________________ 228
5.7.13.6 CV 55.88.5 Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Hold Time _________________________________________________________ 229
5.7.13.7 CV 55.88.6 Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Period ____________________________________________________________ 230
5.7.13.8 CV 55.88.10 Rear Ditch Lights Dim Intensity ____________________________________________________________ 231
5.7.13.9 CV 55.88.11 Rear Ditch Lights Min Intensity ____________________________________________________________ 232
5.7.13.10 CV 55.88.12 Rear Ditch Lights Max Intensity _________________________________________________________ 233
5.7.13.11 CV 55.88.15 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate ________________________________________________________ 234
5.7.13.12 CV 55.88.16 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate _____________________________________________________ 235
5.7.13.13 CV 55.88.17 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time _______________________________________________________ 236
5.7.13.14 CV 55.88.18 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time _____________________________________________________ 237
5.7.13.15 CV 55.88.SI Rear Ditch Lights Examples ____________________________________________________________ 238
5.7.14 CV 55.92.SI Overhead Beacon Light _______________________________________________________________________ 239
5.7.14.1 CV 55.92.0 OHBL Initial State _______________________________________________________________________ 240
5.7.14.2 CV 55.92.1 Automatic OHBL Configuration _____________________________________________________________ 241
5.7.14.3 CV 55.92.6 OHBL Period ___________________________________________________________________________ 242
5.7.14.4 CV 55.92.11 OHBL Min Intensity _____________________________________________________________________ 243
5.7.14.5 CV 55.92.12 OHBL Max Intensity ____________________________________________________________________ 244
5.7.14.6 CV 55.92.15 OHBL Ramp Up Rate ___________________________________________________________________ 245
5.7.14.7 CV 55.92.16 OHBL Ramp Down Rate _________________________________________________________________ 246
5.7.14.8 CV 55.92.17 OHBL Ramp Up Time ___________________________________________________________________ 247
5.7.14.9 CV 55.92.18 OHBL Ramp Down Time _________________________________________________________________ 248
5.7.14.10 CV 55.92.19 OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity ___________________________________________________________ 249
5.7.15 CV 55.96.SI Rear Overhead Beacon Light __________________________________________________________________ 250
5.7.15.1 CV 55.96.0 Rear OHBL Initial State ___________________________________________________________________ 252
5.7.15.2 CV 55.96.1 Automatic Rear OHBL Configuration ________________________________________________________ 253
5.7.15.3 CV 55.96.6 Rear OHBL Period ______________________________________________________________________ 254
5.7.15.4 CV 55.96.11 Rear OHBL Min Intensity ________________________________________________________________ 255
5.7.15.5 CV 55.96.12 Rear OHBL Max Intensity ________________________________________________________________ 256
5.7.15.6 CV 55.96.15 Rear OHBL Ramp Up Rate _______________________________________________________________ 257
5.7.15.7 CV 55.96.16 Rear OHBL Ramp Down Rate ____________________________________________________________ 258
5.7.15.8 CV 55.96.17 Rear OHBL Ramp Up Time ______________________________________________________________ 259
5.7.15.9 CV 55.96.18 Rear OHBL Ramp Down Time ____________________________________________________________ 260
5.7.15.10 CV 55.96.19 Rear OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity _______________________________________________________ 261
5.7.16
CV 55.100.SI Front Number Board Lights ______________________________________________________________ 262
5.7.16.1 CV 55.100.0 Front Number Board Lights Initial State _____________________________________________________ 263
5.7.16.2 CV 55.100.1 Automatic Front Number Board Lights Configuration ___________________________________________ 264
5.7.16.3 CV 55.100.12 Front Number Board Lights Max Intensity ___________________________________________________ 265
5.7.16.4 CV 55.100.15 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate _________________________________________________ 266
5.7.16.5 CV 55.100.16 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate _______________________________________________ 267
5.7.16.6 CV 55.100.17 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time _________________________________________________ 268
5.7.16.7 CV 55.100.18 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time _______________________________________________ 269
5.7.16.6 CV 55.100.SI Front Number Board Lights Examples ______________________________________________________ 270
5.7.17
CV 55.102.SI Rear Number Board Lights ______________________________________________________________ 271
5.7.17.1 CV 55.102.0 Rear Number Board Lights Initial State ______________________________________________________ 272
5.7.17.2 CV 55.102.1 Automatic Rear Number Board Lights Configuration ___________________________________________ 273

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 10 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.3 CV 55.102.12 Rear Number Board Lights Max Intensity ___________________________________________________ 274
5.7.17.4 CV 55.102.15 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate __________________________________________________ 275
5.7.17.5 CV 55.102.16 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate _______________________________________________ 276
5.7.17.6 CV 55.100.17 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time _________________________________________________ 277
5.7.17.7 CV 55.102.18 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time _______________________________________________ 278
5.7.17.6 CV 55.102.SI Rear Number Board Lights Examples ______________________________________________________ 279
5.7.18
CV 55.104.SI Front Marker Lights ____________________________________________________________________ 280
5.7.18.1 CV 55.104.0 Front Marker Lights Initial State ___________________________________________________________ 281
5.7.18.2 CV 55.104.1 Automatic Front Marker Lights1 Configuration ________________________________________________ 282
5.7.18.3 CV 55.104.2 Automatic Front Marker Lights2 Configuration ________________________________________________ 283
5.7.18.4 CV 55.104.3 Automatic Front Marker Lights3 Configuration ________________________________________________ 284
5.7.18.5 CV 55.104.12 Front Marker Lights1 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 285
5.7.18.6 CV 55.104.13 Front Marker Lights2 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 286
5.7.18.7 CV 55.104.14 Front Marker Lights3 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 287
5.7.18.8 CV 55.104.15 Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate _______________________________________________________ 288
5.7.18.9 CV 55.104.16 Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate _____________________________________________________ 289
5.7.18.10 CV 55.104.17 Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Time _____________________________________________________ 290
5.7.18.11 CV 55.104.18 Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Time __________________________________________________ 291
5.7.18.12 CV 55.104.SI Front Marker Lights Examples _________________________________________________________ 292
5.7.19CV 55.106.SI Rear Marker Lights ____________________________________________________________________ 293
5.7.19.1 CV 55.106.0 Rear Marker Lights Initial State ____________________________________________________________ 294
5.7.19.2 CV 55.106.1 Automatic Rear Marker Lights1 Configuration ________________________________________________ 295
5.7.19.3 CV 55.106.2 Automatic Rear Marker Lights2 Configuration ________________________________________________ 296
5.7.19.4 CV 55.106.3 Automatic Rear Marker Lights3 Configuration ________________________________________________ 297
5.7.19.5 CV 55.106.12 Rear Marker Lights1 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 298
5.7.19.6 CV 55.106.13 Rear Marker Lights2 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 299
5.7.19.7 CV 55.106.14 Rear Marker Lights3 Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 300
5.7.19.8 CV 55.106.15 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate ________________________________________________________ 301
5.7.19.9 CV 55.106.16 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate _____________________________________________________ 302
5.7.19.10 CV 55.106.17 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Time _____________________________________________________ 303
5.7.19.11 CV 55.106.18 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Time ___________________________________________________ 304
5.7.19.12 CV 55.106.SI Rear Marker Lights Examples _________________________________________________________ 305
5.7.20CV 55.109.SI Truck Lights __________________________________________________________________________ 306
5.7.20.1 CV 55.109.12 Truck Lights Max Intensity ______________________________________________________________ 307
5.7.20.2 CV 55.109.17 Truck Lights Ramp Time ________________________________________________________________ 308
5.7.21
CV 55.113.SI Step Lights ___________________________________________________________________________ 309
5.7.21.1 CV 55.113.12 Step Lights Max Intensity _______________________________________________________________ 310
5.7.21.2 CV 55.109.17 Step Lights Ramp Time _________________________________________________________________ 311
5.7.22
CV 55.116.SI Front Cab Lights ______________________________________________________________________ 312
5.7.22.1 CV 55.116.0 Front Cab Lights Initial State ______________________________________________________________ 313
5.7.22.2 CV 55.116.1 Automatic Front Cab Lights Configuration ___________________________________________________ 314
5.7.22.3 CV 55.116.12 Front Cab Lights Max Intensity ___________________________________________________________ 315
5.7.22.4 CV 55.116.15 Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate __________________________________________________________ 316
5.7.22.5 CV 55.116.16 Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate _______________________________________________________ 317
5.7.22.6 CV 55.116.17 Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Time _________________________________________________________ 318
5.7.22.7 CV 55.116.18 Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Time _______________________________________________________ 319
5.7.22.8 CV 55.116.SI Front Cab Lights Examples ______________________________________________________________ 320
5.7.23
CV 55.118.SI Rear Cab Lights _______________________________________________________________________ 321
5.7.23.1 CV 55.118.0 Rear Cab Lights Initial State ______________________________________________________________ 322
5.7.23.2 CV 55.118.1 Automatic Rear Cab Lights Configuration ____________________________________________________ 323
5.7.23.3 CV 55.118.12 Rear Cab Lights Max Intensity ___________________________________________________________ 324
5.7.23.4 CV 55.118.15 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate __________________________________________________________ 325
5.7.23.5 CV 55.118.16 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate ________________________________________________________ 326
5.7.23.6 CV 55.118.17 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Time __________________________________________________________ 327
5.7.23.7 CV 55.118.18 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Time________________________________________________________ 328
5.7.23.8 CV 55.118.SI Rear Cab Lights Examples ______________________________________________________________ 329
5.7.24
CV 55.120.SI Engine Room Lights ___________________________________________________________________ 330
5.7.24.1 CV 55.120.12 Engine Room Lights Max Intensity ________________________________________________________ 331
5.7.24.2 CV 55.120.17 Engine Room Lights Ramp Time _________________________________________________________ 332

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 11 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25
CV 55.122.SI Firebox ______________________________________________________________________________ 333
5.7.25.1 CV 55.122.11 Firebox Min Intensity ___________________________________________________________________ 334
5.7.25.2 CV 55.122.12 Firebox Max Intensity __________________________________________________________________ 335
5.7.25.3 CV 55.122.13 Firebox Mid Intensity ___________________________________________________________________ 336
5.7.25.4 CV 55.122.15 Firebox Ramp Up Rate _________________________________________________________________ 337
5.7.25.5 CV 55.122.16 Firebox Ramp Down Rate _______________________________________________________________ 338
5.7.25.6 CV 55.122.17 Firebox Ramp Up Time _________________________________________________________________ 339
5.7.25.7 CV 55.122.18 Firebox Ramp Down Time ______________________________________________________________ 340
5.7.25.8 CV 55.122.21 Firebox2 Min Intensity __________________________________________________________________ 341
5.7.25.9 CV 55.122.22 Firebox2 Max Intensity _________________________________________________________________ 342
5.7.25.10 CV 55.122.23 Firebox2 Mid Intensity _______________________________________________________________ 343
5.7.25.11 CV 55.122.27 Firebox2 Ramp Up Time _____________________________________________________________ 344
5.7.25.12 CV 55.122.28 Firebox2 Ramp Down Time ___________________________________________________________ 345
5.7.26
CV 55.134.0 Exterior Lights Initial State _______________________________________________________________ 346
5.7.27
CV 55.135.0 Interior Lights Initial State ________________________________________________________________ 347
5.7.28
CV 55.136.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #1 _____________________________________________________________ 348
5.7.29CV 55.137.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #2 _____________________________________________________________ 349
5.7.30CV 55.138.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #3 _____________________________________________________________ 350
5.7.31
CV 55.154.SI Grade Crossing Horn Signal _____________________________________________________________ 351
5.7.32
CV 55.178.SI Status Report _________________________________________________________________________ 355
5.7.32.1 CV 55.178.0 Status Report Configuration ______________________________________________________________ 356
5.8 CV 56.PI.SI QSI Configuration ________________________________________________________________________________ 357
5.8.1
CV 56.0: QSI System Configuration 0 (PI = 0) _____________________________________________________________ 357
5.8.2
CV 56.1: QSI System Configuration 1 (PI = 1) _____________________________________________________________ 359
5.8.3
CV 56.4: QSI Throttle Mode (PI = 4) _____________________________________________________________________ 360
5.8.4
CV 56.5: Regulated Throttle Control (RTC) Minimum Back EMF (PI = 5) ________________________________________ 362
5.8.5
CV 56.6: Speed Step 1 Delay (PI = 6) ____________________________________________________________________ 363
5.8.6
CV 56.7.SI: SMPH/BEMF Ratio (PI = 7, SI = 0,1) ___________________________________________________________ 364
5.8.6.1 Calibrating BEMF to SMPH (Q3) _____________________________________________________________________ 365(1) Calibrate BEMF Synchronized Chuff Rate ________________________________________________________________ 365(2) Use the Trip Odometer Calibration Procedure _____________________________________________________________ 365(3) Use a Commercial Speedometer _______________________________________________________________________ 365(4) Use a Stopwatch and Tape Measure ____________________________________________________________________ 365(5) Graph SMPH vs BEMF _______________________________________________________________________________ 366
5.8.6.2 Calibrating BEMF Synchronized Chuff Rate (Q3) ________________________________________________________ 367
5.8.7
CV 56.8: BEMF Offset (PI = 8) _________________________________________________________________________ 368
5.8.8
CV 56.9: BEMF to SMPH Trim (PI = 9) ___________________________________________________________________ 369
5.8.8.1 Calibrating BEMF to SMPH (Q1 and Q2) _______________________________________________________________ 369(1) Using a Commercial Speedometer ______________________________________________________________________ 369(2) Using a Stopwatch and Tape Measure ___________________________________________________________________ 370(3) Using the Locomotive’s Odometer ______________________________________________________________________ 370
5.8.9
CV 56.10: Speed Step to SMPH Scale Factor (PI = 10) ______________________________________________________ 372
5.8.10 CV 56.12: Chuff Interval Scale Factor (PI = 12) ____________________________________________________________ 373
5.8.11 CV 56.13: Chuff Interval Trim (PI = 13) ___________________________________________________________________ 374
5.8.12 CV 56.14: Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution (PI = 14) __________________________________________________________ 375
5.8.13 CV 56.18-21.SI: Quantum PID Parameters________________________________________________________________ 376
5.8.13.1 CV 56.18.SI PID Parameters for Very Slow Speed (PI=18, SI = 0,1,2) _____________________________________________ 377
5.8.13.2
CV 56.19.SI PID Parameters for Slow Speed (PI=19, SI = 0,1,2) _________________________________________ 378
5.8.13.3
CV 56.20.SI PID Parameters for Medium Speed (PI=20, SI = 0,1,2) _______________________________________ 379
5.8.13.4 CV 56.21.SI PID Parameters for High Speed (PI=21, SI = 0,1,2) ____________________________________________ 380
5.8.13.5 Setting PID Parameters for Quantum Equipped Model Locomotives: _________________________________________ 381
5.8.13.6 General Hints for Setting PID Parameters: _____________________________________________________________ 382
5.8.14 CV 56.24.SI: Wheel Diameter (PI = 24, SI = 0,1) ___________________________________________________________ 383
5.8.15 CV 56.25.SI: Locomotive Scale (PI = 25, SI = 0,1) __________________________________________________________ 384
5.8.16 CV 56.26.SI: Scale Wheel Diameter (PI = 26, SI = 0,1) ______________________________________________________ 385
5.8.17 CV 56.32.0: Room Temperature (PI = 32, SI = 0) ___________________________________________________________ 386
5.8.18 CV 56.36.0: Consist Address Active for F13-F20 (PI = 36, SI = 0) ______________________________________________ 387
5.8.19 CV 56.36.1: Consist Address Active for F21-F28 (PI = 36, SI = 1) ______________________________________________ 388
5.8.20 CV 56.128: Reset to Factory Default (PI = 128) ____________________________________________________________ 389

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 12 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.215.8.22
5.8.23
5.9

CV 56.129: Locomotive ID Access (PI = 129) ___________________________________________________________ 390
CV 56.254: About Quantum Decoder (PI = 254) ___________________________________________________________ 392
CV 56.255: Play Build Information (PI = 255) ______________________________________________________________ 393

CV 58.PI.SI Odometer (Q2 and Q1) __________________________________________________________________________ 394
5.9.1
CV 58.1.SI Odometer (Q2 and Q1) ______________________________________________________________________ 394
5.9.1.1 Odometer Reset ___________________________________________________________________________________ 394
5.9.1.2 Ops Mode Odometer Read Out ________________________________________________________________________ 394
5.9.1.3 Service Mode Odometer Read Back _____________________________________________________________________ 395
5.9.1.3.1
BEMF Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “0”) ___________________________________________________________ 395
5.9.1.3.2
CAM Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “1”) ____________________________________________________________ 395

5.10
CV 58.PI.SI Odometer (Q3) ______________________________________________________________________________ 397
5.10.1 CV 58.1.SI Odometer ________________________________________________________________________________ 397
5.10.1.1 Odometer Reset ___________________________________________________________________________________ 397
5.10.1.2 Ops Mode Odometer Read Out ________________________________________________________________________ 397
5.10.1.3 Service Mode Odometer Read Back _____________________________________________________________________ 398
5.10.1.3.1
BEMF Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “0”) ___________________________________________________________ 398
5.10.1.3.2
CAM Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “1”) ____________________________________________________________ 398
5.10.2
CV 58.5.SI Trip Odometer ____________________________________________________________________________ 400
5.10.2.1 Trip Odometer Reset ________________________________________________________________________________ 400
5.10.2.2 Ops Mode Trip Odometer Read Out _____________________________________________________________________ 400
5.10.2.3 Service Mode Trip Odometer Read Back __________________________________________________________________ 400
5.10.3
CV 58.10.SI Power Conversion Stopping Distance _________________________________________________________ 402
5.10.4
CV 58.20.SI BEMF to SMPH Calibration Distance __________________________________________________________ 403
5.11

CV 62 QSI Control _____________________________________________________________________________________ 404

5.12

CV 64 CV Numeric Verbal Readout (Verbal CV Inquiry) ______________________________________________________ 406

6

CV’s 66-95: NMRA Standard CV’s ___________________________________________________________________ 407
6.1

CV 66 Forward Trim ______________________________________________________________________________________ 407

6.2

CV 67-94 User Defined Speed Table ________________________________________________________________________ 408

6.3

CV 95 Reverse Trim ______________________________________________________________________________________ 409

7

CV’s 112-256: QSI Unique CV’s _____________________________________________________________________ 410
7.1

CV 115.PI.SI Feature to Port Mapping _______________________________________________________________________ 410

7.2

CV 116.PI Individual Sound Balance Control _________________________________________________________________ 412

7.3

CV 117.PI.SI QSI Individual Sound Selection _________________________________________________________________ 413

7.4

CV 118.PI.SI Individual Sound Pitch Shift ____________________________________________________________________ 414

7.5

CV 120.PI.SI Ready to Move Scenario _______________________________________________________________________ 415
7.5.1
CV 120.PI.SI Silent Period Duration _____________________________________________________________________ 417
7.5.2
CV 120.PI.SI Horn Blast Duration _______________________________________________________________________ 418
7.5.3
CV 120.10.0 Bell Hold Time ___________________________________________________________________________ 419

7.6

CV 127.PI.SI QSI Component Sound Volume Control __________________________________________________________ 420
7.6.1
User-defined Horn Component Volume Identifiers __________________________________________________________ 421
7.6.2
Prime Mover1 Component Volume Identifiers ______________________________________________________________ 421
7.6.3
Prime Mover2 Component Volume Identifiers ______________________________________________________________ 421
7.6.4
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Volume Identifiers __________________________________________________ 422

7.7

CV 128.PI.SI QSI Component Sound Balance Control __________________________________________________________ 423
7.7.1
User-defined Horn Component Balance Identifiers __________________________________________________________ 424
7.7.2
Prime Mover1 Component Balance Identifiers _____________________________________________________________ 424
7.7.3
Prime Mover2 Component Balance Identifiers _____________________________________________________________ 424
7.7.4
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Balance Identifiers __________________________________________________ 424

7.8

CV 129.PI.SI Diesel Motor Configuration _____________________________________________________________________ 425
7.8.1 CV 129.1.0 Speed Steps Per Notch _________________________________________________________________________ 425

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 13 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.2 CV129.2.0 Low Idle Timeout ______________________________________________________________________________ 427
7.8.3 CV 129.10.0 Motor Sound Effects __________________________________________________________________________ 428
7.8.4 CV 129.50.0 Transition 1 SMPH ___________________________________________________________________________ 429
7.8.5 CV 129.51.0 Transition 2 SMPH ___________________________________________________________________________ 430
7.8.6 CV 129.55.0 Transition RPM Drop Time _____________________________________________________________________ 431
7.9

CV 130.PI.SI User-defined Horn Component Pitch _____________________________________________________________ 432
7.9.1 CV 130.1-6.0 UDH Chime 1-6 Semitone _____________________________________________________________________ 432
7.9.2 CV 130.1-6.1 UDH Chime 1-6 De-tune ______________________________________________________________________ 432

7.10
CV 131.PI.SI User-defined Alternate Horn Component Pitch __________________________________________________ 434
7.10.1 CV 131.1-6.0 UDAH Chime 1-6 Semitone ___________________________________________________________________ 434
7.10.2 CV 131.1-6.1 UDAH Chime 1-6 De-tune ____________________________________________________________________ 435
7.11
CV 133.PI.SI Chuff Configuration ________________________________________________________________________ 436
7.11.1 CV 133.1.0 Locomotive Type _____________________________________________________________________________ 436
7.11.2 CV 133.2.0 Chuff Intensity _______________________________________________________________________________ 437
7.12
CV 135.PI.SI Upon Stopping Scenario ____________________________________________________________________ 438
7.12.1 CV 135.PI.SI Silent Period Duration _____________________________________________________________________ 439
7.12.2 CV 135.PI.SI Horn Blast Duration _______________________________________________________________________ 440
7.12.3 CV 135.6.0 Bell Hold Time _______________________________________________________________________________ 441

Appendix I ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 442
Recommended DCC Command Stations __________________________________________________________________________ 442

Appendix II A ________________________________________________________________________________________ 444
Programming a Long Address on Digitrax ________________________________________________________________________ 444

Appendix II B ________________________________________________________________________________________ 445
Programming a Long Address on North Coast Engineering (NCE) ____________________________________________________ 445

Appendix III __________________________________________________________________________________________ 447
DCC Troubleshooting _________________________________________________________________________________________ 447
Operations Mode ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 447
Service Mode Operation using the Program Track __________________________________________________________________ 449

Appendix IV _________________________________________________________________________________________ 450
Using the Quantum Hardware Reset and Volume Controls: __________________________________________________________ 450

Appendix V __________________________________________________________________________________________ 453
Recommended Reading: _______________________________________________________________________________________ 453

Appendix VI _________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Application Notes: ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Using DC Power Conversion for Block Signal Control _______________________________________________________________ 454
DC Power____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
DCC AC Power _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
DCC AC Power _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Insulator ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Conducting Rail Joiner ________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
DCC Section _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Conducting Rail Joiner ________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Insulator ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
DC Section __________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 14 of 468

5-Aug-15

DCC Section _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
Direction of Travel ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
SW2 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
SPST Switch _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
D2 __________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454
D1 __________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 454

Appendix VII _________________________________________________________________________________________ 456
Binary, Hexadecimal, Decimal Conversions _______________________________________________________________________ 456

Appendix VIII ________________________________________________________________________________________ 457
QS Industries License Agreement _______________________________________________________________________________ 457

Index _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 460

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 15 of 468

5-Aug-15

Digital Command Control Explained
Digital Command Control (DCC) is the standard adopted by the National Model Railroad Association (NMRA) in 19941
to allow compatible operation of all locomotives and Command Stations regardless of manufacturer.
DCC differs from Analog control in that DCC applies full voltage to the track at all times and controls the speed andfunctions of different locomotives by addressing each locomotive separately using assigned locomotive ID numbers.
Because each locomotive can be addressed separately, you can independently control speed, lights, and sounds on
different locomotives on the same powered track.
DCC provides features and opportunities that are usually not available under conventional Analog Control 2, but does
require you to commit to a new and more complex operating system.
All Quantum equipped locomotives operate using NMRA DCC control. The three most common locomotives are
Steam, Diesel and Electric, although others, such as trolleys, powered commuter cars, subways, etc. can be operated
under DCC as well.
Quantum equipped locomotives have been designed to operate directly out of the box under NMRA standards for
either conventional Analog DC operation or Digital Command Control. There are no switches in the locomotive thatneed to be set to select the type of control system. The Quantum System responds directly to the type of signal on the
track.

1 The Electrical and Communication Standards were adopted by the NRMA in Portland OR in July, 1994. The basic Recommended Practices (RP’s) were accepted in 1995 in
Atlanta Georgia and the Service Mode RP’s were established in 1996.
2 Quantum systems use an advanced Analog control system called QARC™ (Quantum Analog Remote Control) Technology that does provide many of the same features
available in DCC. See the Quantum Analog Reference Manual for details.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 16 of 468

5-Aug-15

This ManualThis manual is divided into seven parts:
The first section summarizes how to operate your Quantum equipped locomotive in DCC. Read this and you
will quickly have your locomotive up and running.

The second section summarizes the programming of Configuration Variables (CV’s). Read this when you areready to customize your locomotive’s operation.



The third section describes in detail NMRA standard CV’s supported by Quantum equipped locomotives.
Skim over this to get a general idea of what it contains. You will often refer to it when you want to solve a
particular problem.

The fourth section outlines in excruciating detail the NMRA standard CV’s that assign outputs to function
keys. Normally you do not have to be concerned with these CV’s, but sometimes this section is important, forexample if you ever have to configure your locomotive to operate with a DCC controller having a small
number of function keys.

The fifth section describes in detail CV’s that are unique to Quantum equipped locomotives. Skim over this toget an idea of the degree of flexibility built into Quantum decoders. Refer to this section whenever you want tocustomize volume levels, change the features that are assigned to function key outputs, configure thebehavior of these features, or tweak your locomotive’s running performance.



The sixth section describes in detail additional NMRA standard CV’s that you may find useful if you want tofine-tune your locomotive’s running performance.



The seventh section describes additional CV’s unique to Quantum 3 equipped locomotives.



The appendices describe operation with different DCC Digital Command Stations, troubleshooting andApplications Notes.

Most operations of Quantum equipped locomotives, such as turning the Bell on and off, changing direction, blowing a
Horn or a Whistle, are the same across all locomotive types. Special operations for different types of Quantum
equipped locomotives are described in the Operation Manuals that come with the locomotives. Any special features
included in this Reference Manual will be described in sidebars or notes.

Please Note
This reference manual completely describes all features currently available in DCC when operatinga Quantum equipped locomotive that has version 7, version 8, or version 9 firmware. If yourlocomotive has version 6 or earlier firmware, use the Quantum DCC Reference Manual Version 3.
To determine the firmware version read the contents of CV 7 (In Ops Mode, set CV 64 to 7 and hearverbal response).
Many of the new features described in version 5.1 of this manual are available only with version 8
or version 9 firmware that runs on Q3 decoders.
For the most up-to-date information about which CV’s are supported by the version of firmware inyour decoder, refer to the “VersionXCVSupport” files in the Files section of the QSIndustries Yahoo
Group:

http://groups.yahoo.com/group/QSIndustries/files/
Although reading the first section, “Locomotive Operation in DCC”, will allow you to begin
operating your Quantum locomotive immediately, the purpose of this manual is not to teach you
how to use DCC. We assume that you already have the working knowledge and experience tooperate the different DCC features and program CV’s. If you are just getting started in DCC, there
are several books listed in the appendices to instruct you in the operation of DCC layouts, turnouts,
accessories, programming Configuration Variables (CV’s), etc.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 17 of 468

5-Aug-15

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 18 of 468

5-Aug-15

1 Locomotive Operation in DCC
1.1

Getting Started

Although DCC operation can be very complex, it does not have to be. Your Quantum locomotive is factory configured
to operate the common and more popular features. The following brief instructions will get you up and running quickly.
To start operating your Quantum equipped locomotive immediately:1) Select locomotive number 32) Set your controller to 128 (preferred) or 28 (acceptable) speed step range33) Start your locomotive by turning up the throttle

1.2

Basic Throttle and Direction Control

When you turn up the throttle, the locomotive starts moving and produces sounds appropriate to its moving state. The
Headlight, Mars Light, and Reverse Light change intensity depending on the direction of movement.
When you reduce the throttle setting to zero, the locomotive comes to a complete stop and automatically enters
Neutral. You will hear special background sounds appropriate to its resting state. If the locomotive was moving
forward, the Headlight (or operating Mars Light) dims when it stops and enters neutral. This was common practice for
prototype locomotives under Rule 174. You will hear a Short Air Let-off whenever the locomotive enters Neutral.
If you leave your Steam locomotive in Neutral for at least 25 seconds and then slowly turn up the throttle, thelocomotive plays Cylinder Cocks sounds as it starts moving. The Cylinder Cocks sounds automatically terminate after
16 repetitions or when the locomotive reaches a speed greater than 12 smph.
The direction of your locomotive changes when you press the direction key. If the locomotive was moving at the time
you pressed the direction button, the locomotive slows at a speed determined by the deceleration setting in CV 4,
come to a complete stop and then accelerates in the other direction as determined by the CV 3 acceleration setting.
CV 3 and CV 4 are described in the section “Programming Configuration Variables”.

Locomotive Directional States
Quantum locomotives have four distinct Directional States:
Forward (FWD): If the locomotive is set to the Forward Direction and is moving, it is in the “Forward” state.
Neutral from Forward (NFF): If the locomotive is set to the Forward Direction, and the throttle is turned down tozero speed step and the locomotive is stopped, it will be in a Neutral State called “Neutral from Forward”.
Reverse (REV): If the locomotive is set to the Reverse Direction and is moving, it is in the “Reverse” state.
Neutral from Reverse (NFR): If the locomotive is set to the Reverse Direction, and the throttle is turned down tozero speed step and the locomotive is stopped, it will be in a Neutral State called “Neutral from Reverse”.

3 If you set your controller to 14 speed-step operation without reconfiguring your Quantum system to the same speed steps in CV 29, your Directional Lighting will not operatecorrectly.
4 Rule 17, followed by prototype railroads, states: The headlight will be displayed to the front of every train by night, but must be dimmed or concealed when a train turns out tomeet another and the entire train has stopped clear of main track, or is standing to meet trains at the end of double track or at junctions.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 19 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.3

Throttle Control Modes

There are four ways your locomotive can respond to your throttle.

Standard Throttle Control (STC): Under STC, the percentage of full power applied to the motor is directly
related to the throttle setting (speed step). Since the power to the motor is constant for a given throttle setting, thelocomotive’s speed varies depending on the load. The locomotive may easily stall at low speeds from minor gear
binding, turnouts, and curves.

Calibrated Speed Control (CSC): Under CSC, the power applied to the motor is varied to maintain constant
speed regardless of varying load conditions. The throttle setting (using 128 speed steps specifies the locomotive’s
speed in 1 smph (scale miles per hour) increments. If your throttle is set at 35, the locomotive tries to maintain 35
smph on level track, uphill, and downhill. If locomotives in a consist differ even slightly in speed calibration, someof the locomotives do all the work while the other locomotives are dragged along.



Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control (BEMFSC): Under BEMFSC, each speed step corresponds to atarget BEMF value. The locomotive adjusts the power applied to the motor so that the locomotive’s measured
BEMF matches the target BEMF.

Regulated Throttle Control (RTC): RTC combines the best of STC and Speed Control. It is the preferred
method when multiple heading Quantum locomotives together because it automatically equalizes power between
locomotives. Like Speed Control, RTC allows you to run your locomotive at very slow speeds without concern that
it will abruptly stop from minor impediments such as misaligned track joints, tight curves, or rough switches. RTC
operates your locomotive as though it has huge mass; your locomotive will resist changes in speed once it ismoving and will resist starting up quickly if at rest.

For further explanation of these four modes, see CV 56.4: QSI Throttle Mode.
The default mode is RTC. You can change to STC using CV 56.4.
Quantum equipped locomotives will produce labored sounds under acceleration and lighter non-labored sounds under
deceleration. The level of labored sounds is proportional to the value of CV 3 plus CV23, and of CV 4 plus CV24 andhow much the throttle is increased or decreased. Diesel locomotives produce louder motor sounds under accelerationand softer motor sounds under deceleration. Steam locomotives produce louder chuffs under acceleration and softer
chuffs under deceleration.
Important Legal Notice
BEMF Speed Control and Calibrated Speed Control under DCC operation are not included in your Q1 or Q2 equipped
locomotive model. These functions have been declined by model railroad importers of Quantum equipped locomotives
because of threats of litigation by Mike’s Train House. QSI believes the claim by Mikes Train House is unfoundedbecause these control features were developed by QSI and others and were in use long before Mike’s Train House
claims to have invented them. QSI does not believe that Quantum Sound System infringes any MTH patent.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 20 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.5

Function Keys

Quantum decoders support the 0-12 Function Key standard as now accepted by the NMRA. The old 0-8 standard is
not supported.

1.5.1 Common Feature Function Key Assignments
The following table lists features that have been pre-assigned to your DCC Function Keys for common operation
across the different types of Quantum locomotives. Check the Operation Manual that comes with your locomotive to
see which of these common features are offered or what additional custom features have been included.
These common features are described in detail in the following sections.
Notice that some keys operate different features in Forward/Reverse than in Neutral.

F-Key
FL(f)5F5F6F7FWD/REV
Headlight,, Reverse Light, and Hazard
Light Directional Lighting
Headlight, Reverse Light, and Hazard
Light Directional Lighting
Bell on/off (if assigned7)
Horn/Whistle w/ Doppler Shift
Coupler Crash/Coupler FireSteam Blower Hiss/
Diesel Fans and Louvers/
Electric Cooling Fans
Dynamic Brakes
Doppler Shift
Squealing Brakes/Flanges and Air Brakes

F8
F9

Audio Mute
Heavy Load8

F10
F11

Status Report (SMPH)
Alternate Horn Selection
Number Board or Marker Lights on/off
Automatic Cab Lights
System Volume Decrease (Ver 8, 9 only)
System Volume Increase (Ver 8, 9 only)
Grade Crossing (Ver 8, 9 only)FL(r)6
F1
F2
F3
F4

F12
F13
F14
F15
F26
F27
F28

Water Scoop Scenario (Ver 8, 9 steam
only)

NFF/NFR
Headlight, Reverse Light, and Hazard
Light Directional Lighting
Headlight, Reverse Light, and Hazard
Light Directional Lighting
Bell on/off (if assigned)
Horn/Whistle
Coupler Arm (Enable) or Coupler FireSteam Blower Hiss/
Diesel Fans and Louvers/
Electric Cooling Fans
Dynamic Brakes
Locomotive Start Up
Steam Cylinder Cocks Arm
Diesel Long Air Let-off
Electric Long Air Let-off
Gas Turbine/Diesel Transition
Audio Mute
Shut Down9: Disconnect-Standby-Total
Shut Down
Status Report (ID’s, etc.)
Alternate Horn Selection/
Number Board or Marker Lights on/off
Automatic Cab Lights
System Volume Decrease (Ver 8, 9 only)
System Volume Increase (Ver 8, 9 only)
Fuel Loading Scenario (Ver 8, 9 only)
Maintenance Scenario (Ver 8, 9 only)
Water Loading Scenario (Ver 8, 9 only)

5 The FL Key is labeled “F0”, “Headlights” “Lights” or “Directional Lighting” on some DCC controllers.
6 FL(f) and FL(r) activate/deactivate the automatic behavior of the Headlight, Reverse Light, and Hazard Directional Lighting regardless of which direction the train is moving.
7 If the prototype did not have a bell, the bell feature is not assigned to F1 and no other feature is assigned in its place.
8 Early Q1 BLI and Lionel locomotives used F9 for Cruise Control, which was only available on locomotives equipped with Speed Control.
9 There are three stages to Shut Down. You double click the F9 key to advance to each stage.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 21 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.6

Automatic Features

Automatic Quantum Features depend on the directional state of the locomotive. Automatic Control can be enabled or
disabled by their indicated function keys. The state of each Automatic feature in each direction is shown in the tablebelow for all locomotive types including steam, diesel and electric.
FeatureHeadlight
Rear Tender Light
Mars Light
Ditch Lights
Number Board
LightsMarker Lights
Cab Lights

Function Key
F0 or FL
F0 or FL
F0 or FL
F0 or FL

Forward
BrightDim11
Strobing
On

Neutral from Forward
Dim10
Dim
Steady On
Off

ReverseDim
BrightSteady On
Off

Neutral from Reverse
Dim
Dim
Steady On
Off

F11

On

On

On

On

F11
F12

On
Off after 15 seconds

On
On after 10 seconds.

On
Off after 15 seconds

On
On after 10 seconds.

Steam Blowers

F4

Off after 10 seconds.

On after 10 seconds.

Off after 10 seconds.

On after 10 seconds.

Vents & Cooling
Fans
Cylinder Cocks12F4

On after 20 seconds.

Off after 10 seconds.

On After 20 seconds.

Off after 10 seconds.

F7

If armed, plays Cylinder
Cocks for 16 times oruntil speed exceeds
12 smph.

Cylinder Cocks armed
after 25 seconds.

If armed, plays Cylinder
Cocks for 16 times oruntil speed exceeds
12 smph.

Cylinder Cocks armed
after 25 seconds.

When an indicated function key enables an “automatic” light feature, the associated lights operate according to thestates shown in the table. For instance, enabling the Automatic Mars Light in Neutral will not cause the Mars Light tostrobe since their automatic behavior would have them at a steady-on setting in that directional state; however, it you
then entered Forward, the Mars Light would begin to strobe. When an indicated function key disables an “automatic”
feature, all lights will be off. For instance, disabling the “Automatic Mars Light” will immediately shut off the Mars Lightin any direction and they will not turn on again until the automatic feature is enabled.
Note:

Use CV 55 to change the behavior of lights from what is shown in the above table and description.

Note:

Not all automatic features may be included in your locomotive model.

Note:

Lights and other features can be assigned to function keys and configured to different kinds of operation andinitial conditions in CV 53 (Output Feature Assignment) and CV 55 (QSI Feature Configuration). See theQuantum DCC Reference Manual, version 4.

Note:

Cylinder Cocks can also be armed in Neutral with the F7 key or the F6 Start Up key without having to wait forthe 25 time out period.

Note:

The start up state for directional lighting is “activated”. See CV 55 for further information.

Note:

Most steam locomotives use a steam-powered generator, called a Dynamo, to supply electricity to the lights.
When the lighting system is turned on, the brightness of the headlight increases slowly as the steam
generator revs up to full power. Check your Operation Manual to see if your steam model has a Dynamo.

Note:

If your FL key does not predictably affect the Headlight or Reverse Light, see the troubleshooting section in
the appendices.

10 If your locomotive has the Mars Light, the Headlight will be off (instead of “Dim”) in all states except Forward where it will be Bright.
11 On Q1 decoders Reverse Lights cannot be dimmed; they only have bright and off settings. In these cases, “Dim” is equivalent to “Off”.
12 Cylinder Cocks arming after Start Up and/or after 25 seconds in Neutral can be set using CV 51.2. The settings in this CV apply to both Analog and DCC operation.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 22 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.7

Horn/Whistle and Bell Buttons (F2 Key and F1 Key)

Some DCC controllers have separate horn/whistle and bell buttons, in addition to Function Keys assigned tohorn/whistle and bell operation. The bell is usually assigned to F1, and the horn is usually assigned to F2.
The F2 key behaves differently than the Horn button.
Pressing F2 and releasing it will cause the horn/whistle to come on and stay on until you press F2 again.

Pressing the Horn button will blow the horn/whistle only as long as you hold the button down.

There is no difference in operation between the Bell button and its corresponding function key. Pressing F1 andreleasing it will cause the bell to come on and stay on until you press F1 again.
Horns and whistles have start up and shut down effects and a short hoot record for short duration horn/whistle blasts.
Some models have an additional fancy ending (playing the horn/whistle). On these models, you can activate the fancy
ending by tapping the horn button at the end of the horn blast.
If your locomotive is equipped with Ditch Lights, they will automatically strobe when the horn is being blown, and willcontinue to strobe until five seconds after the horn signal has stopped 13.
With Diesel, Electric, and Gas Turbine models, since the prototype horn uses compressed air, you will hear Air Pumpsounds turn on after the Horn is operated.
Note:

If your DCC controller has assigned the Bell to F3, you can reassign your Quantum decoder’s F3 to the bell
output (see CV 37). Remember to reassign the F1 Function to some other output besides 3 (see CV 35).

1.8

Coupler and Coupler Crash Sounds (F3 Key)

There are two ways to use the F3 key.
1) In Forward or Reverse, as your locomotive is moving to couple up to a string of cars, press F3 to trigger thecrashing sound of a locomotive coupling. Press F3 again as the locomotive is moving out to produce thesame sound as the slack is taken up in the cars.
2) Press F3 in Neutral to produce uncoupling sounds as you disconnect cars over uncoupler magnets. Press F3
once to produce the sound of the lift bar and coupling pin being raised. This first press also arms theuncoupling sound effect. Press F3 again while moving or in Neutral to produce the sound of the coupler
knuckle opening and the air-lines parting.
If you armed the Coupler in Neutral and your locomotive is now in Forward or Reverse, pressing F3 produces thesound of the coupler opening. Thereafter, as the locomotive continues in Forward or Reverse, pressing F3 willproduce coupler crash sounds.

13 The hold time for strobing Ditch Lights after the horn button is released can be set in CV 55.84.5.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 23 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.9Sound-of-Power™

If CV 3, or CV 23 and CV 4, or CV 24 has been set to non-zero positive values, your locomotive will produce
additional labored engine sounds under acceleration and lighter engine sounds under deceleration. The level oflabored sounds is proportional to the values for these four CV’s, and how much the throttle is increased or decreased.
Laboring is different for the three primary types of locomotives:
Diesel Motor RPM: Quantum has all eight diesel-motor throttle “notches” found on prototype locomotives. As you
increase the throttle, you will hear the Rpm’s increase for every increase in ten speed steps (at 128 speed stepsetting). Idle is considered Notch 0 and occurs for speed step 0. Notch 1 ranges from 1 to 10, Notch 2 from 11 to 20,
Notch 3 from 21 to 30, etc. If your controller has an option to increment or decrement your throttle set setting by ten
speed steps, it is very easy and predicable to set your notch value. 14
Steam Exhaust: Under acceleration the steam exhaust is labored and loud and under decelerating, the steam
exhaust is lighter. Also, when starting out after an extended period in Neutral (over 25 seconds), you will hear steam
and water vented from the Cylinder Cocks when it starts out. The Cylinder Cocks will vent 16 times or until speed
exceeds 12 smph.
Electric Traction Motors: Under acceleration, hear the traction motors rev up and strain as the Electric locomotive
gains full speed. Under deceleration, the traction motors are not labored and rev down as the locomotive slows.

1.10 Dynamic Brakes (F5 Key)
Diesel Locomotives: The prototype Dynamic Brakes, found on most diesels, cause the train to slow down by using
the traction motors in generator mode. This helps dissipate the energy of a moving train by applying electrical powerfrom the traction motors to a large air-cooled resistor load in the locomotive. These resistor grids can get quite hot andrequire cooling by fans located on the roofs of the locomotives.

Pressing F5 in Forward/Reverse will set the Diesel Motor sound to idle at the lowest Sound of Power setting
and turn on the powerful Dynamic Brake Cooling Fans.



Pressing F5 in Neutral does not turn the Dynamic Brake Fans on unless the locomotive is in Disconnect (seeF9 “Disconnect” below).

Electric Locomotives: Early Electric locomotives did not have Dynamic Brakes. However, the Dynamic Brakefunction has been included to make Electric locomotives consistent with other Quantum equipped locomotives.

Pressing F5 in Forward/Reverse will set the Electric Traction Motor Sound-of-Power to the lowest setting
allowing these early Electric locomotives to behave consistently 15 with other locomotives that do have
Dynamic Brake sounds in multiple unit Consists.



If an Electric locomotive does have Dynamic Brakes with resistor grids and cooling fans, the locomotive will
behave in a similar manner to Diesels.

Steam Locomotives: Prototype Steam locomotives do not have Dynamic Brake sounds. However, the Dynamic
Brake function has been included to make Steam locomotives consistent with other Quantum equipped locomotives.

Pressing F5 in Forward/Reverse will set the Steam Exhaust Sound-of-Power to the lowest setting allowing theSteam locomotive to behave consistently16 with other locomotives that do have Dynamic Brake sounds in
multiple unit Consists.

The Dynamic Brakes feature automatically turns off when entering or leaving Neutral, or the speed of the locomotive
drops below 8 smph, or if the throttle is turned up. The Dynamic Brakes cannot be turned on in Forward or Reverse
unless the locomotive is traveling over 9 smph.

14 Use CV55.21.0 to change the number of speed steps per notch.
15 It would be inconsistent for the Electric Locomotive to be working at full Sound-of-Power while brakes are being applied in other locomotives within the same consist.
16 It would be inconsistent for the Steam Locomotives to be working at full Sound-of-Power while brakes are being applied in other locomotives within the same consist.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 24 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.11 Doppler Shift (F6 in Forward and Reverse)
There are two ways to initiate the Doppler Shift effect.

1.11.1 Horn Button Method17
1) If your controller has a horn button in addition to the F2 key, press the horn button to turn on the Horn/Whistle
while the locomotive is moving towards you.
2) Wait at least one second while the Horn/Whistle is blowing
3) Release and re-press the horn button quickly so the Horn/Whistle does not shut off. You will hear theHorn/Whistle and other locomotive sounds increase in volume and shift in pitch as the locomotive passes by andthen reduce in volume.
4) Release the horn button or continue blowing long and short blasts. Five to seven seconds after releasing the horn
button, the sounds will gradually return to normal.

1.11.2 F6 Doppler Shift Operation Method
1) Start the Horn/Whistle by pressing and releasing the F2 key.
2) Press F6 as the locomotive is moving towards you. The Horn/Whistle and other locomotive sounds increase involume and shift in pitch as the locomotive passes by and then reduce in volume.
3) Press F2 button again to shut off the Horn/Whistle or continue blowing long and short blasts by pressing and repressing F2. If you shut off the Horn/Whistle for more than five to seven seconds, the sounds will gradually return
to normal.
If the bell was on during Doppler Shift, it will automatically turn off prior to the sounds returning to normal.
If Doppler Shift is initiated without the Horn/Whistle blowing, the sounds return to normal soon after the Doppler Shiftis finished.
Doppler Shift is speed dependent. The greater the speed, the greater the amount of pitch change as the locomotive
passes by. There is no Doppler Shift at speeds less than 15 scale miles per hour (smph); instead you will hear a short
air let-off when F6 is pressed.
Try using the F6 key to affect chuffing sounds (sans Whistle or Bell) to create interesting environmental effects.
Note:Some base stations produce an intermittent and independent horn signal interruption that causes an
unexpected Doppler Shift. If this happens frequently, you may want to disable the horn triggered Doppler Shiftby setting CV 51.2 bit 0 to 0.

Note:

With some Command Stations, using the horn button to activate the Horn/Whistle, and then while this button
is held down, pressing F6 causes the Horn/Whistle to shut off instead of causing a Doppler Shift effect.

17

This is similar to the method used in Analog DC to trigger a Doppler Shift.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 25 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.12 Squealing Brakes and Flanges (F7 in Forward or Reverse)
Quantum locomotives provide automatic Brake Squeal as a locomotive slows to a stop. To enable automatic
Squealing Brakes operate the locomotive over 40 smph (64 skph). When the speed is reduced to less than 20 smph
(32 skph), squealing Brake sounds will sound automatically.
When the locomotive is moving, you can also manually activate continuous or variable brake sounds when slowing or
stopping the locomotive or to simulate the sounds of squealing flanges on curved track.
1) Press F7 to start Squealing Brake sounds.
2) The Squealing Brakes sounds end automatically, but you can press F7 while the brake squeal is occurring to
re-trigger the squealing sounds. This allows you to continue the squealing brake sounds without any deadperiod for an indefinite period.
The squealing brake sounds will terminate abruptly when the locomotive stops and enters Neutral.
Note:

If you lower the throttle to speed step 0, pressing F7 will apply Air Brakes instead of activating squealing
brake sounds.

1.13 Air Brakes (F7 in Forward or Reverse)
If you have selected any non-zero deceleration inertia value in CV 4 and/or CV 24, the F7 key can be used to apply
Air Brakes to stop the locomotive more quickly than it would normally stop from the inertia settings 18. To use Air
Brakes:Turn the throttle down to speed step 0 on a moving locomotive; this enables the F7 key to act as a brake.

Press the F7 key. Hear a brief brake squeal sound and air being released from the brake lines continually.
The longer the air is released the greater the braking action.

Press the F7 key again to stop the air release. The train will continue to slow at the last braking value.
Note:



F7 will apply brakes when set to1 and stop the air release when set to 0. Depending on the initial
setting for F7 when you turn your throttle down to speed step zero, you may need to press the F7 key
twice to first apply brakes.
If you want to apply more braking, press the F7 key again to release more air. When you reach the desired
amount of braking, press F7 again to stop the air release.

Turn up the throttle to any value above 0 to release the brakes; this action resets the locomotive’s
deceleration to a value determined by the sum of CV 4 and CV 24.



If the locomotive is in Neutral when the F7 key is pressed, the Cylinder Cocks will arm.19

Note:

If the throttle is set to any speed step except 0, Air Brakes are not enabled; instead the F7 key will now
manually activate Squealing Brake/Flange sounds but will not affect the locomotive’s deceleration.

Note:

If the direction state is changed while moving, F7 is enabled to act as a brake without the need to reduce thethrottle to speed step 0. After stopping and changing direction, the loco will accelerate back to its original
speed. If CV 4 or CV 24 is non-zero, F7 can be used to apply Air Brakes to stop a moving locomotive more
quickly than it would normally stop from the inertia settings 20.

18 CV 4 and CV 24 determine the deceleration rate. Applying the brakes increases the deceleration rate temporarily.
19 If the optional Cylinder Cocks feature is not include in your model, the F7 key will produce a long Air Let-off.
20 CV 4 and CV 24 determine the deceleration rate. Applying the brakes temporarily increases the rate of deceleration.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 26 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.14 Audio Mute (F8 Key)You can temporarily reduce the System Volume to a lower level or increase it back to its original setting using the F8
key. This is useful when you need to reduce the sound to engage in a conversation or to answer the phone.
1) Set F8 to “1”. All sounds, including the Whistle, Bells, Motors and Chuff will gradually go off.
2) Set F8 to “0”. All sounds, including the Whistle, Bells, Motors and Chuff will gradually return to normal volume.
If you have many locomotives operating at once, you can reduce the volume on all those that are running in the backof the layout and increase the volume of the closest locomotive. The Mute feature changes the sound gradually overa couple of seconds, which allows the sound to increase or decrease realistically as the locomotive approaches orrecedes from the observer.
The Mute state is not retained if track power is turned off. On power up the locomotive returns to full system volume.
Note: You can set the Mute volume in CV 51.1 if you want to be able to quickly quiet your locomotive without having
the sounds turn completely off.

1.15 Heavy Load (F9 in Forward or Reverse)
Heavy Load is applied while the train is moving; it maintains the train at a nearly steady speed while allowing you tohave control over the sound effects of a working locomotive. Heavy Load represents a train that would take over ten
minutes to accelerate to full speed or to bring to a complete stop. It is independent of any inertia values set in CV3, 4,
23, or 24.
Under Heavy Load, changing the throttle will have little effect on the locomotive’s speed. Instead you use the throttle
to control Sound-of-Power effects. When you approach a grade under Heavy Load, increase the throttle and hear the
locomotive produce heavy laboring sounds. When the locomotive goes down a grade, reduce the throttle to hear the
locomotive drop to light laboring sounds. You control labored sounds by how much the throttle is increased or
decreased from its initial position (where Heavy Load was turned on).
1) Press F9 and hear one short hoot when Heavy Load is turned on 21. You can apply Heavy Load as soon as
you start moving, or wait until you are up to speed.
2) Press F9 and hear two short hoots when Heavy Load is turned off. Before turning Heavy Load off, return thethrottle to its initial setting (where Heavy Load was turned on) to avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration.
Heavy Load can only be turned on or off in Forward or Reverse22. If turned on, it will remain on in Neutral. If you want
it off when you start out from Neutral, turn it off immediately after increasing the throttle.
Heavy Load is automatically turned off when track power is turned off.
Under RTC and Heavy Load, grades, tight curves or other real loading effects, will have little effect on the speed of
the train. But under STC and Heavy Load, grades, curves, loading, etc. will affect the train speed.

2122This feedback can be disabled via CV51.2 bit 3.
You can turn Heavy Load on and off in Neutral if you set CV53.x.1 to 179, the Heavy Load feature ID.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 27 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.16 Status Report (F10)
Quantum locomotives provide verbal information about a locomotive’s current operating state when the locomotive isin Neutral or the locomotive’s current speed when the locomotive is moving.



Press F10 in Neutral; the locomotive will verbally report first its currently enabled long or short DCC address
followed by its consist ID if it has one, followed by its Shut Down state (Disconnect, Standby or Shut Down).

Press F10 in Forward or Reverse; the locomotive will verbally report the locomotive’s speed in scale miles perhour (smph) or scale kilometers per hour (skph). (You can select between scale miles per hour (smph) or
scale kilometers per hour (skph) in CV56.0.)

Note:

When a Status Report or Verbal Speedometer Readout begins, the locomotive’s sounds will reduce to one
half their current volume settings. Locomotive sounds return to normal volume when the report has ended.

Note:

The Status Report in Forward and Reverse can be configured to also report the Back EMF value and/or motor
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) value. See CV 55.178.0.

Note:

In a consist, all locomotives will simultaneously report their status when the F10 key is pressed unlessdisabled in CV 22.

1.17 Alternate Horn Selection (F11)
Some prototype steam locomotives had both a steam whistle and an air horn. The whistles worked best in areas
where it was necessary for the sound to carry a long way, while the horn was more useful in the city or fogy areas
where it was easier to tell the location of the locomotive by its higher pitched sound. Some diesels and electric
locomotives used two horns for similar reasons. The Alternate Horn Selection key allows you to choose between two
Horn/Whistle sounds.



Press the Alternate Horn Selection key, F11, to select between the alternate Horn and the primary Horn or the
Whistle. Hear a short hoot to indicate which one has been selected.

Operate the selected Horn or Whistle with the F2 key.

Note: The feedback hoots can be disabled/enabled in CV51.2.
Note: Setting F11 to “1” selects the primary Horn or the Whistle. Setting F11 to “0” selects the alternate Horn.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 28 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.18 Three Stages of Shut Down: Disconnect, Standby and Total Shut Down
(F9 in Neutral)
Locomotive Shut Down has three distinct stages, each entered by double-clicking or double-pressing the F9 Key23.

Stage One: Disconnect
1) In Neutral, double-press F9 to enter Disconnect. You will hear a Long Air Let-off, which represents the pneumatic
reverse lever on a Steam locomotive being placed in the Neutral position or the Diesel transition level being
placed in the off or disconnect position. Your locomotive’s motor drive is disconnected.
2) To leave Disconnect, either double-press the F6 Start Up key as described in the Start Up section or double-press
F9 again to reach the next stage of Shut Down, Standby.
A locomotive in Disconnect continues to respond to all function keys.
For a Diesel locomotive in Disconnect, if the throttle is increased or decreased, the motor sounds will rev up and down
but the locomotive will not move. If the Dynamic Brakes are activated, the motors sounds will be labored under Soundof Power control as the throttle is increased and decreased. Prototype Diesel Motor/Generator power output is often
tested under Dynamic Brake load in disconnect.
For an Electric locomotive in Disconnect, there is no action or sound associated with moving the throttle up and down
and no affect from having the Dynamic Brakes activated.
For a Steam locomotive in Disconnect, if the throttle is increased/decreased, the hissing sound of venting steam will
get louder/softer but the locomotive will not move. Prototype Steam locomotives would sometimes vent steam in
Neutral to clear rust debris from the super-heaters that can affect the throttle.

Stage Two: Standby
1) In Disconnect, double press F9 to enter Standby. You will hear a Long Air Let-off followed by the Directional
Lighting turning off. The motor will remain disconnected, while the Air Pumps, automatic Steam Blower/Cooling
Fan operation, Number Board Lights and Cab Lights will continue to operate.
2) To leave Standby, either double-press the F6 Start Up key described in the Start Up section or double-press F9
again to reach the final stage of Shut Down, Total Shut Down.
In Standby, the locomotive will not respond to the throttle or most function keys 24. The three exceptions are the F6Start Up Function Key (described below), the F8 Mute Key (described above) and the F10 Status Key (describedabove).
Standby in Diesel locomotives, called Low Idle, has more utility than Standby in Steam and Electric locomotives. It
allows a Diesel to be left on a siding inactive with only the motor running at its special “Low Idle” sounds. For Steamand Electric locomotives, the locomotive will appear to be completely inactive except for Cab and Number Board
lights, occasional Air Pump sounds, and Blower or Fan sounds.

Stage Three: Total Shut Down
1) In Standby, double-press F9 to enter Total Shut Down. You will hear a Long Air Let-off followed by the sounds ofa shut down procedure specific to your type of locomotive.
Diesel Locomotives: Low Idle Diesel Motors will return to normal idle sounds. Then the Air Pumps will turn off,
as will the Number Board Lights, followed by the sounds of the Cooling Fans shutting off, the Louvers closing,the Diesel Motor(s) shutting down, Cab Lights shutting off, and finally the engineer’s door opening and shutting.
Electric Locomotives: The Air Pumps will turn off, Cab Lights will turn off, followed by the sounds of theLouvers being closed and the engineer’s door being opened and shut.
Steam Locomotives: The Air Pumps will turn off, followed by the sounds of Pop Off operating for about ten
seconds, the Cab Lights shutting off, and finally the Blower Hiss will die out.
2) To leave Total Shut Down, double-press the F6 key.
23 Double-clicking ensures that Shut Down stages are not entered or exited accidentally. Doubling-pressing is defined as two F9 presses within two seconds. Note that the F9 key
may have to be pressed three times the first time you use it due to the command station and locomotive having different initial states for F9.
24
Pressing a Function Key will only produce a Short Air Let-off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 29 of 468

5-Aug-15

In Total Shut Down, the locomotive will not respond to any function keys except the F6 Start Up Function Key(described below) and the F10 Status Key (described above).
Total Shut Down allows you to take a locomotive “off-line” (turn off sounds, lights, ignore throttle and functioncommands (except turn on)) independent of the operating session; that is, the locomotive will still be “off line” whenpower is reapplied for the next operating session.
If power is turned off at any stage of Shut Down (Disconnect, Standby or Total Shut Down) or during a Shut Down
procedure, the locomotive will remember its last Shut Down stage, and will power up in that Shut Down stage.
If Start Up is initiated during any of the above Shut Down procedures, Shut Down is aborted and the locomotive
returns to normal operation.
Note: The “Shut Down” feature (ID=143) 25 can be assigned to a function key as an alternative to the“Disconnect/Standby/Total Shutdown” feature (ID=145). The two features are similar, both requiring a double press.
The “Shut Down” feature puts the locomotive directly into Total Shut Down, bypassing the Disconnect and Standby
states.

25

The “Shut Down” feature (ID=143) is currently available only with Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 30 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.19 Start Up (F6 in Neutral)
If your locomotive is in any of the Shut Down stages, you can return your locomotive to normal operation by doublepressing26 the F6 Key. Start Up will be different for each stage of Shut Down, but always begins with a Long Air Let-off
and ends by the locomotive entering normal operation 27.

Start Up from DisconnectDouble press F6 in Disconnect, the locomotive will produce a Long Air Let-off and enter normal operation.

Start Up from Standby


Double press F6 in Standby, the locomotive will produce a Long Air Let-off, the Directional Lighting will turnon and then the locomotive will enter normal operation.

Start Up from Total Shut Down

Double press F6 in Total Shut Down; the locomotive will produce a Long Air Let-off, and begin a full start up
procedure.
Diesel Locomotives: The Long Air Let-off is followed by the sound of the engineer’s door opening andclosing. Cab Lights turn on, Number Boards come on, and Directional Lighting turns on. Then the Vents openand Fans start up, the Diesel Motor or Motors start up, the Air Pumps turn on, and finally the locomotive
enters normal operation.
Electric Locomotives: The Long Air Let-off is followed by the sound of the engineer’s door opening andclosing. Cab Lights turn on, Number Boards and Marker Lights turn on, and Directional Lighting turns on.
Then the Vents open and Fans start up, the Air Pumps turn on, and finally the locomotive enters normal
operation.
Steam Locomotives: After the Long Air Let-off, the Dynamo revs up and the Directional Lighting turns on.
Then Cab Lights turn on, followed by the Air Pumps and the Steam Blower turning on, and finally the
locomotive enters normal operation.

During the Start Up from Total Shut Down procedure, a Quantum locomotive will not respond to any function key.
However, if the throttle is turned up, the Start Up procedure abruptly terminates and the locomotive immediately
enters normal operation.
Note:

Whenever a locomotive receives a Start Up command, regardless of whether the locomotive is in a Shut
Down stage or operating normally, the locomotive will restore all automatic operations and return all featurefunction states to their initial states as specified in CV55.

Note:

Whenever F6 Start Up key is double-pressed in Neutral for a steam locomotive, the Cylinder Cocks28 will be
armed. Cylinder Cocks sounds will play when the throttle is turned up to leave Neutral.

26 Double-pressing ensures that Start Up is not entered or exited accidentally. Doubling-pressing is defined as two F6 presses within two seconds. Note that the F6 Key may haveto be pressed three times the first time you use it due to the command station and locomotive having different initial states for F6.
27 The locomotive enters Neutral with Long Air Let-off if speed step is zero. If speed step is non-zero, the locomotive will enter either forward or reverse.
28 Not all steam models have Cylinder Cocks feature.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 31 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.20 System Volume Decrease and Increase (F13 and F14 Keys)
You can decrease the System Volume by 2db by pressing the F13 key. You can increase the System Volume by 2db
by pressing the F14 key.
Each type you press the F13 or F14 key you will hear a horn hoot at the new system volume. If the system volume isalready at the maximum when you press the F14 key, the volume will not increase and the locomotive will speak theword “Max”.
Both F13 and F14 are inactive when the locomotive is in shutdown.
Pressing F13/F14 decreases/increases the value of CV51.0 System Volume.
Note: These F13/F14 features are currently available only with Q3 decoders.

1.21 Grade Crossing (F15 Key in Forward or Reverse)
Prototype railroads use horn or whistle codes of long and short blasts for communication or warning signals. One of
the most common is the code of two longs, a short and a long horn signal to warn of approaching a grade crossing.
Although you can perform these signals with the Horn button, we have made it even more convenient.
When the locomotive is in FWD/REV, press the F15 key once to trigger the grade crossing horn signal.
If you press the Horn key during the Grade Crossing scenario, you will terminate this feature and take control of theHorn.
You can use CV55.154.SI to change the number of horn blasts and length of each horn blast in the grade crossing
signal.
Note: The Grade Crossing feature is currently assigned to F15 by default only with Q3 decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 32 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.22 Fuel Loading Scenario (F26 Key in Neutral)
Press the F26 key when the locomotive is in NFF/NFR to trigger a fuel loading scenario.
For diesel, electric, and gas turbine locomotives, you will hear sounds of diesel fuel being pumped into thelocomotive’s fuel tank.
For steam locomotives, there are two types of scenarios available: coal loading and oil loading. You can select thetype of fuel using CV51.3.
For locomotives using coal, you will hear sounds of coal begin dumped into the tender.
For locomotives using oil, you will hear sounds of oil being pumped into the locomotive’s oil tank.
Note: The Fuel Loading Scenario is available only with Q3 decoders.

1.23 Maintenance Scenario (F27 Key in Neutral)
Press the F27 key when the locomotive is in NFF/NFR to trigger a maintenance scenario.
For diesel and gas turbine locomotives, you will hear sounds of the diesel motor being rev’ed up and down.
Fore electric locomotives, you will hear electrical sparking sounds caused by a short, and the sound of a fire being
extinguished.
For steam locomotives, you will hear lubrication sounds followed by blowdown sounds.
Note: The Maintenance Scenario is available only with Q3 decoders.

1.24 Water Loading Scenario (F28 Key in Neutral)
Press the F28 when the locomotive is in NFF/NFR to trigger a water loading scenario.
For all locomotives, you will hear sounds of water being run into the locomotive’s water tank.
Note: The Water Loading Scenario is available only with Q3 decoders.

1.25 Water Scoop Scenario (F28 Key in Forward or Reverse)
Press the F28 when the steam locomotive is in FWD/REV to trigger a water scoop scenario.
You will hear sounds of the water scoop begin lowered, water scooped into the locomotive’s tender, and the water
scoop raised.
Note: The Water Scoop Scenario is available only with Q3 steam decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 33 of 468

5-Aug-15

1.26 Function Key Operation in Neutral
Some function keys used in Forward and Reverse will have different effects when used in Neutral:

Pressing F6 results in Doppler shift for a moving locomotive but activates Start Up in Neutral.



The F7 key produces Squealing Brake Sounds or applies brakes for a moving locomotive but produces aLong Air Let-off in Neutral in Diesels or enables Cylinder Cocks in Steam locomotives.

Pressing F9 turns on/off the Heavy Load feature in a moving locomotive but activates Shut Down in Neutral.



Pressing F15 triggers the grade crossing scenario, but only in Forward or Reverse.

Pressing F26 triggers the fuel loading scenario, but only in Neutral.



Pressing F27 triggers the maintenance scenario, but only in Neutral.



Pressing F28 triggers the water loading scenario in Neutral, but the steam locomotive water scoop scenario in
Forward or Reverse.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 34 of 468

5-Aug-15

2

Programming Configuration Variables

2.1

Service Mode Programming 29

To perform Service Mode Programming, place your locomotive on an isolated track, called a Programming Track,electrically insulated from the main line and separately connected to a special output from your Command Station.
There are two advantages to programming in Service Mode.
1. On the Programming Track, no Locomotive Address is required to program your locomotive. This is important if
you have forgotten your locomotive’s ID numbers or have programmed them incorrectly. This is also why
programming must be done on an isolated track section. Otherwise, CV’s of all locomotives on your layout would
be programmed with the same value.
2. On the Programming Track, the locomotive responds with Service Mode Acknowledgements to command station
requests to verify the contents of a CV. In this way the command station is able to read back the current value ofa CV. This is important if you want to change a CV by some amount but need to know its current value before youenter a new value.
Some Command Stations restrict the amount of power that can be delivered to the Programming Track to prevent
damage to improperly installed aftermarket decoders. If the decoder were wired correctly, the Programming Trackwould provide enough power to allow it to be programmed. If the decoder were wired incorrectly and a short circuit
occurred, the limited current from the command station would not be enough to damage the decoder, allowing theoperator another chance to wire it correctly.
To accommodate command stations that restrict power during Service Mode programming, the Quantum System
reduces its power consumption to a minimum by shutting off all lights, sound and other operations during Service
Mode operation. Even so, a Quantum Sound Decoder still requires more current than most non-sound decoders. If
your Quantum System will not program with your particular command station, you may need to program on the Main
(Ops Mode Programming). You can also purchase from Tony’s Train Exchange® 30, a simple, inexpensive power
booster (PowerPak™ by DCC Specialties) that will allow you to program on the program track with any DCC
command station.

Note: Some Command Stations will not operate Quantum Systems in Service Mode due to insufficient power
output or timing problems. (Check the appendices for a listing of recommended command stations). If you
cannot operate in Service Mode, use Ops Mode programming.

29 All four methods are supported: Address-Only Mode, Physical Register Addressing Mode, Paged CV Addressing Mode, and Direct CV Addressing Mode.
30 Tony’s Train Exchange; 1-800-978-3472; info@ttx-dcc.com .

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 35 of 468

5-Aug-15

2.2

Operations Mode Programming 31

Operations Mode Programming is also called Ops Mode Programming or Programming on the Main
In this programming mode, you do not move your locomotive to an isolated programming track. You program it inplace on the Main track as you are operating it.
The Quantum System will allow you to program all CV’s, including address CV’s (CV 1, CV 17 and CV 18), in
Operations Mode.
There are advantages and disadvantages to using Operations Mode Programming.
1) One disadvantage is that, in Ops Mode, Quantum decoders do not support any advanced acknowledgement
mechanism, as defined by the NMRA. If you are using a command station that provides readout for your CV’s in
Ops Mode, it can only indicate which CV you are addressing and the value you want to program. You will not beable to determine what value is already entered in that CV or that the new value has been accepted and iscorrect.
Note: In Ops Mode, Quantum locomotives do give verbal feedback during CV programming. If CV Verbal
Acknowledgement is enabled (see CV 62), the CV number and its new value are announced over the
locomotive’s sound system when a CV is programmed.
Note: In Ops Mode, you can command a Quantum locomotive to speak out the current value of any CV (see CV64).
2) Another disadvantage with Programming on the Main is that you need to address your locomotive with its ID
number in order to change its CV values. This could be a problem if you have forgotten your locomotive’s ID
number. Or you might use the wrong address and program the wrong locomotive. It could happen that you findyourself unable to communicate with your locomotive. If this does happen, you can move your locomotive to a
Programming Track and change your locomotive’s ID using Service Mode Programming. Or you can do a
hardware reset by pulling the reset jumper on the circuit board or by using the Magnetic Wand 32,, which will set
the locomotive’s ID to short address 3 (See your locomotive’s operating manual for further information on
performing a hardware reset.).
Note: Some command stations do not support programming address CV’s on the main. See notes in trouble
shooting and related CV’s (1, 17, 18, 56.129) for possible solutions to this problem.
3) One advantage of programming on the main is that you often can observe an immediate change to yourlocomotive’s behavior when you program a CV. For example, you can hear the System Volume or an individualfeature sound volume change immediately after you program its new CV value. In Service Mode, you have to
move the locomotive from the Service Mode Programming track to the Main track to see the effect of changing aCV.

31 Both the short form and the long form of the CV access instructions are supported.
32 A magnetically activated switch on the circuit board replaced the jumper on later Quantum equipped locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 36 of 468

5-Aug-15

2.3

List of CV’s supported by Quantum Locomotives

The following table lists all CV’s. The third column, labeled “NMRA”, indicates whether these CV’s are mandatory (M),recommended (R), or optional (O). The fourth column indicates if this CV is supported by QSI and the fifth column
indicates the common default value.
CV#

CV NameNMRA

QSISupported

1
2

Default
Value
DecimalComment

Primary Address

M

Y

3

V-Start

R

Y

32

3

Acceleration Rate

R

Y

0

4

Deceleration Rate

R

Y

0

5

V-HighO

Y

1

Either 1 or 0 in this CV disables V-High

6

V-Mid

O

Y

0

Either 1 or 0 in this CV disables V-Mid

7

Manufacturer Version No.

M

Y

-

See CV 56.254 and CV 56.255 foradditional information on Quantum
Version numbers.

8

Manufacturer’s ID

M

Y

113

9

Total PWM Period33

O

N

-

Not needed with our motor control

10

EMF Feedback Cutout2

O

N

-

Not needed with our BEMF detection.

11

Packet Time-Out Value

R

Y

0

12

Power Source Conversion

O

N

-

13

Analog Mode Function Status

O

N

-

14

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

15

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

16

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

17

Extended Address

O

Y

0

18

Extended Address

O

Y

0

19

Consist Address

O

Y

0

20

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

21

Consist Address Active for F1-F8

O

Y

0

22

Consist Address Active for FL andF9-F12

O

Y

0

23

Acceleration Adjustment

O

Y

0

24

Deceleration Adjustment

O

Y

0

25

Speed Table Selection

O

Y

2

26

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

27

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

28

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

-

29

Configuration Data #1

M

Y

6

30

Error Information

O

N

-

31

Configuration Data #2

O

N

-

Reserved by NMRA for future use.

32

Configuration Data #3

O

N

-

Reserved by NMRA for future use.

33

Output Location for FL(f)

O

Y

1

By default set to directional lighting.

34

Output Location for FL(r)

O

Y

3

By default set to directional lighting.

35

Output Location for F1

O

Y

4

By default set to bell output.

36

Output Location for F2

O

Y

8

By default set to whistle output.

37

Output Location for F3

O

Y

16

By default set to coupler sounds output.

38

Output Location for F4

O

Y

4

By default set to Cooling Fans output.

This number may change fromlocomotive to locomotive.

CV 17 and 18 form a paired CV. CV 17
must be written first followed by CV 18

Linear28 speed step mode. Power Source
Conversion enabled.

33 Changes are not allowed. The PWM is already optimized for Quantum equipped locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 37 of 468

5-Aug-15

39

Output Location for F5

O

Y

8

By default set to Dynamic Brakes output.

40

Output Location for F6

O

Y

16

By default set to Doppler output.

41

Output Location for F7

O

Y

32

By default set to Air Brakes output.

42

Output Location for F8

O

Y

64

By default set to Mute output.

43

Output Location for F9

O

Y

16

By default set to Heavy Load output.

44

Output Location for F10

O

Y

32

By default set to Status Report output.

45

Output Location for F11

O

Y

64

By default set to Number Boards output.

46

Output Location for F12

O

Y

128

By default set to Cab Lights output.

47

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

48

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

49

QSI Primary Index

O

Y

0

“PI” for short.

50

QSI Secondary Index

O

Y

0

“SI” for short.

51

QSI System Sound Control

OY

1-dimensional table[PI]52

QSI Individual Sound Volume
ControlOY

1-dimensional table[PI]53

QSI Function Output Feature
AssignmentOY2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

54

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

55

QSI Feature ConfigurationOY

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]56

QSI ConfigurationOY

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

57

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

58

Odometer--

59

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

60

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

61

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

62

QSI Control

O

Y

63

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

64

Verbal CV Inquiry

O

Y

65

Kick Start

O

N

-

66

Forward Trim

O

Y

128

67

Speed Step 1

O

Y

0

68

Speed Step 2

O

Y

9

69

Speed Step 3

O

Y

18

70

Speed Step 4

O

Y

28

71

Speed Step 5

O

Y

37

72

Speed Step 6

O

Y

47

73

Speed Step 7

O

Y

56

74

Speed Step 8

O

Y

66

75

Speed Step 9

O

Y

75

76

Speed Step 10

O

Y

85

77

Speed Step 11

O

Y

94

78

Speed Step 12

O

Y

103

79

Speed Step 13

O

Y

113

80

Speed Step 14

O

Y

122

81

Speed Step 15

O

Y

132

82

Speed Step 16

O

Y

141

83

Speed Step 17

O

Y

151

84

Speed Step 18

O

Y

160

85

Speed Step 19

O

Y

170

86

Speed Step 20

O

Y

179

87

Speed Step 21

O

Y

188

88

Speed Step 22

O

Y

198

89

Speed Step 23

O

Y

207

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 38 of 468

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

1

Turn on/off programming verbal
acknowledgement.
Decoder speaks out value of any CV.

5-Aug-15

90

Speed Step 24

O

Y

217

91

Speed Step 25

O

Y

226

92

Speed Step 26

O

Y

236

93

Speed Step 27

O

Y

245

94

Speed Step 28

O

Y

255

95

Reverse Trim

O

Y

128

96

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

97

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

98

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

99

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

100

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

101

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

102

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

103

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

104

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

105

User Identifier #1

O

N

106

User Identifier #2

O

N

107

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

‫׃‬

‫׃‬

-

-

111

Reserved by NMRA for future use

-

-

112

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

113

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

114

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

115

Feature to Port MappingOY

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

116

Individual Sound BalanceOY

1-dimensional table[PI]117

Individual Sound SelectionOY

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

118

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

119

Reserved by QSI for future use

-

-

120

Ready to Move Scenario

OY

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 39 of 468

2-dimensional table[PI,SI]

5-Aug-15

2.4

Overview of CV Descriptions

The following sections provide detailed descriptions of each CV supported by the Quantum System. Each description
includes the default value, a pictorial of the CV data register and sometimes, operational hints or notes about special
use and limitations.
The data for each bit shown in the pictorial data registers are classified as:“A” for Address data
“D” for general data
“F” for Function Designation value“Sign” for plus or minus sign.
“N/A” for Not Applicable meaning the user is not to enter data in these bits.
“Output” for assigning different Output locations for Function Inputs.
“P” for QSI Primary Index values“S” for QSI Secondary Index values“V” for audio volume data
In addition, QSI or NMRA pre-assigned data for individual bits in CV registers are shown as their binary value, “1” or“0”.

Examples:CV 1: Primary Address Register
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0

Bits 0-6 are data bits, which specify the locomotive’s seven bit Primary Address. A zero means, “Do not attempt towrite a 1 to this bit”.
CV 49: Primary Index RegisterBit 7 (MSB)

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

P7

P6

P5

P4

P3

P2

P1

P0

Bits 0-7 are data bits, which specify any of the possible eight bit Primary Index values.

CV 40: F6 Output Location for F6 Register (with Factory Default Features)
Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes – Air
Brakes(Brake Set)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

The “Output 4” means that bit 0 specifies whether Output 4 is controlled by Function Key 6.
Gray background for an Output bit means that it is the default setting.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 40 of 468

5-Aug-15

3 CV’s 1-29: NMRA Standard CV’sThis section describes in detail NMRA standard CV’s supported by Quantum locomotives.

3.1

CV 1 Primary Address Control

Programs the Short or Primary Address from 1 to 127 decimal.
3

Default Value:

CV 1: Primary Address Register
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0



Any attempt to set this CV to any value outside the range of 1 to 127 will be ignored and the previous addressin this register will remain.



The Primary Address can be set either in Service Mode or Operations Mode. Remember to change bit 5 of
CV 29 to “0” to enable the Primary Address.

Note: Some Command Stations will not operate Quantum Systems in Service Mode due to insufficient power
output or timing problems. (Check the appendices for a listing of recommended command stations). If you
cannot operate in Service Mode, use Ops Mode programming.
If your command station will not allow setting ID numbers in Ops Mode, use QSI CV 56.129.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 41 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.2

CV 2 V-Start

V-Start defines the voltage drive level applied to the motor at the first throttle speed step. Use CV 2 to adjust the
responsiveness of your locomotive at low throttle settings.
32

Default Value:CV 2: V-Start Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7



D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 2 sets a start voltage for the motor to any value between 0 and 255. A value of 0 provides no offset whilea value of 255 provides maximum starting voltage with no throttle range left.
CV 2 specifies how much of the available track voltage will be applied to the motor at the start of the throttle
range as defined by the following equation:
Start Voltage = (Track Voltage) x (CV2/255)

The value of motor drive (as a percentage of total track voltage) is computed according to the formula below:% Applied Motor Voltage = (CV 2 + ((CV5-CV 2)*Speed Table Value for speed step/255))*(100/255)

If CV 5 is less than or equal to CV 2, or CV 5 is set to 0 or 1, then 255 is used for CV 5 in the above equation.

Applied Motor Drive

The graph below shows the original curve plus the effect of an offset of 20% (CV 2 = 51 and assuming CV 5,
V-High, is set at its maximum value of 255). Note how CV 2 preserves the shape of the original speed curve
but compresses it to fit between V-Start and V-High.

120%

Original Speed
Curve with 20%
offset from CV 2=51

100%
80%
60%

Original Speed
Curve, CV 2=0

40%
20%
0%
0

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

72

80

88

96 104 112 120

Speed Steps
 DCC V Start is not related to V Start for Analog Operation.
 V-Start is not used when Throttle Mode = Calibrated Speed Control .
 See CV 5 for more information.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 42 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 3 Acceleration Rate34

3.3

Sets the value of Inertia under Acceleration
0

Default Value:

CV 3: Acceleration Rate Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 3 can contain any value between 0 and 255. A value of “0” provides no inertia and gives the fastest
response to changes in throttle position.



The larger the value of CV 3, the more gradually the locomotive increases speed as the throttle is increased.
The inertia, in seconds/speed step, is calculated by the formula:
Acceleration Inertia (seconds/speed step)=(CV 3) * 0.896
Number of Speed Steps

This inertia is independent of which “Number of Speed Steps” is in use (14, 28, or 128). For the same value ofCV 3, it will take the same amount of time to go from a dead stop to full speed for a throttle change fromminimum to maximum regardless of the speed step choice. The time can vary from a quick response
measured in seconds for CV 3=0 to as long as 3.8 minutes (228 seconds) for CV 3 = 255.
The acceleration rate is the inverse of the inertia formula.
Acceleration Rate (speed steps/second)=

Number of speed steps(CV 3)* 0.896

The acceleration and deceleration rate values in CV 3 and CV 4 will apply if you change the direction on amoving locomotive. The locomotive will slow to a stop at a rate set by CV 4 and then accelerate in the
opposite direction at a rate set by CV 3.

34 This NMRA CV is more aptly entitled “Inertia under Acceleration” since higher values for this CV result in higher inertia values but lower acceleration rates. Using the term
“Momentum” to describe CV 3 is not correct since a non-moving train has no momentum even if CV 3 is set to the maximum value. Inertia is the property of an object that
resists any change to its state of rest or motion.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 43 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 4 Deceleration Rate35

3.4

Sets the Inertia under Deceleration.
0

Default Value:CV 4: Deceleration Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7

D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 4 can contain any value between 0 and 255. A value of “0” provides no inertia and gives the fastest
response to changes in throttle position.



The larger the value of CV 4, the more gradually the locomotive slows down as the throttle is decreased. The
inertia, in seconds/speed step, is calculated by the formula:.
Deceleration Inertia (seconds/speed step)=(CV 4) * 0.896
Number of Speed Steps

This inertia is independent of which “Number of Speed Steps” is in use (14, 28, or 128). For the same value ofCV 4, it will take the same amount of time to go from full speed to a dead stop for a throttle change frommaximum to minimum regardless of the speed step choice. The time can vary from a quick response
measured in seconds for CV 4=0 to as long as 3.8 minutes (228 seconds) for CV 4 = 255.
The deceleration rate is the inverse of the above formula.
Deceleration Rate (speed steps/second)=

Number of speed steps(CV 4)* 0.896

The acceleration and deceleration rate values in CV 3 and CV 4 will apply if you change the direction of amoving locomotive. The locomotive will slow to a stop at a rate set by CV 4 and then accelerate in the
opposite direction at a rate set by CV 3.

35 This NMRA name is more aptly entitled “Inertia under Deceleration” since higher values for this CV result in higher inertia values but lower deceleration rates. Using the term
“Momentum” to describe CV 3 is not correct since a non-moving train has no momentum even if CV 3 is set to the maximum value. Inertia is the property of an object that resists
any change to its state of rest or motion.
.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 44 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.5

CV 5 V-High

V-High defines the voltage drive level applied to the motor at maximum throttle. Use CV 5 to reduce the maximum
speed of locomotives that operate too fast at maximum throttle.
1

Default Value:

CV 5: V-High Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7



D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 5 sets a maximum voltage for the motor to any value between 2 and 255. A value of 0, 1, or 255 provides
maximum motor voltage at maximum throttle.
The value of CV 5 determines the maximum motor drive as a fraction of the applied voltage as defined by thefollowing equation:
Maximum Motor Voltage = (Track Voltage) x (CV5/255)
For instance, a value of “217” for CV 5 means that the maximum voltage will be 217/255 or 85% of theapplied track voltage.



The value of motor drive (as a percentage of total track voltage) is computed according to the formula below:% Applied Motor Voltage = (CV 2 + ((CV5-CV 2)*Speed Table Value for speed step/255))*(100/255)

If CV 5 is less than or equal to CV 2, or CV 5 is set to 0 or 1, then 255 is used for CV 5 in the above
equations.

Applied Motor Drive

The graph below shows the effect of only CV 5 (CV 2 =0) on the original curve. Here a value of CV 5 = 217
reduces the original speed curve by 15% over the entire speed step range. Note how CV 5 preserves theshape of the original speed curve but compresses it to fit between V-Start and V-High.

120%

Original
Speed Curve
CV 5=255

100%
80%
60%

Original Speed
Curve reduced by
15%, CV 5=217

40%
20%
0%
0

8

16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120

Speed Steps
V-High is not related to V Max for Analog Operation.
V-High is not used when Throttle Mode = Calibrated Speed Control.

Recommendations for specifying speed curves, V-Start and V-High.
Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 45 of 468

5-Aug-15

The following is a method we use at QSI to configure a locomotive to match the speed of other locomotives. We
use Ops mode programming since it lets us change the locomotive’s speed characteristics while the locomotive isoperating.
Place your locomotive to be configured (call it locomotive A) on a fairly large loop of track. Place yourstandard locomotive36 (call it locomotive B) that you use as your speed reference on the same loop of
track but on the opposite side. Each locomotive should have a different ID.

2.

For both locomotives set CV 56.4 to “0” (STC) or “1” (RTC).

3.

For both locomotives set CV 29 bit 4 to “1” to enable speed curves.

4.

Run both locomotives at speed step 1.

5.

Change locomotive A’s CV 2 value until it is moving at the same speed as locomotive B.

6.

Run both locomotives at full throttle. You may have to restrain one of the locomotives if they get too close toeach other.

7.

Change locomotive A’s CV 5 value until Locomotive A is moving at the same speed as Locomotive B.

8.

Set both locomotives to speed step 64. For locomotive A, choose speed curves from the list of QSI speed
curves from CV 25 until both locomotives are running at a similar speed. The speed curves arecompressed to fit between V-High and V-Start as shown in the graph below.

90%
80%
70%
60%
V-High

50%
40%
30%
20%

96
10
4
11
2
12
0

88

80

72

64

56

48

40

V-Start

32

0%

8
16
24

10%
0

Applied Motor Drive

1.

Speed Steps
Speed Curves with V-Start set to 30 (10% of applied voltage) and V-High set to 217 (85% of applied voltage).

9.

If none of the speed curves are acceptable, set CV 25 to 1 and make your own custom speed curveusing CV 67 through CV 94. Your custom speed curve will also be compressed to fit within the limits set
by V-Start and V-High. Set both locomotives at 28 speed-step selection so your custom changes are at
the speed step the locomotive is operating at. Start both locomotives at speed step 1; enter Ops mode
programming for Locomotive A and set CV 67 to match Locomotive B speed. Leave Ops mode
programming, and set both locomotives to operate at speed step 2, enter Ops mode programming for
Locomotive B and set CV 68 to match Locomotive B speed. Repeat this procedure until you haveentered speed curve values for all CV’s between CV 67 and CV 94.

36 You may have a number of standard locomotives for different speed classifications. For instance, you might have a standard locomotive for yard operations with a top speed of
35 smph, a standard freight locomotive with a top speed of 65 smph and a third standard locomotive for passenger service with a top speed of 100 smph.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 46 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.6

CV6 V-Mid

V-Mid defines the voltage drive level applied to the motor halfway between minimum and maximum throttle. Use CV6along with CV2 V-Start and CV5 V-High as a simple way to specify a speed table.
0

Default Value:CV 6: V-Mid Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7

D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV6 sets the middle voltage for the motor to any value between 2 and 255. A value of 0 or 1 specifies that CV6
not be used in the calculation of the speed table.

CV6 is not used in the calculation of the speed table if CV29 bit 4 is 1.



If CV29 bit 4 is 0, then CV2, CV5, and CV6 are used to calculate a speed curve. If CV6 is 0 or 1, then the speed
curve is a straight line segment between CV2 and CV5. If CV6 has a value between 2 and 255, then the speed
curve consists of two straight line segments, the first between the CV2 and CV6 values, the second between theCV6 and CV5 values.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 47 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 7 Manufacturer’s Version Number

3.7This is a read only CV that returns the major version number of the decoder’s firmware.
Default Value:

N/A

CV 7: Manufacturer’s Version Number Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Production release versions start with 1. If your locomotive has a 1 in this register, your locomotive contains
the first version of Quantum HO firmware. A “2” in this register corresponds to the second version of Quantum
HO firmware.

This DCC Reference Manual describes CV’s supported by version 7 firmware. If your Quantum locomotive
has a value of 1…6 in this CV, version 3.1 of the DCC Reference Manual more accurately describes yourlocomotive’s firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 48 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 8 Manufacturer’s ID

3.8

This read-only CV identifies QSI as the manufacturer or developer of the software used in the Quantum System.
Default Value:113

CV 8: Manufacturer’s ID Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5

0


1

1

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

1

0

0

0

1

The value of this read only register is 113, which is the official NMRA designation for QSI as a manufacturerof DCC decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 49 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.9

CV 11 Packet Time-Out Value

The value in CV 11 is the maximum time the decoder will maintain its current speed without receiving a valid DCC
packet.
Default Value:037

CV 11: Packet Time-Out Value Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
N/A

37
38

N/A

N/A

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



If CV 11 has a non-zero value, and the locomotive receives no DCC packets addressed to the locomotive forthat number of seconds then the locomotive will decelerate to a stop at a rate specified by CV 4 and CV 24
and will enter Neutral. The usual Neutral Sounds will then be heard.

When DCC packets addressed to the locomotive are again received, the locomotive will respond to the DCC
packet commands addressed to the locomotive. It will remain in Neutral until a new speed packet is received
at which time it will accelerate at the rate set in CV 3 and CV 23.



A value of zero will disable the time-out function and the locomotive will continue to run at its last speed
setting when it stops receiving packets addressed to the locomotive.

The factory default is “0”.



The maximum value for CV 11 is “255” 38, which is interpreted as 255 seconds.



If both Power Source Conversion (CV 29, bit 2) and Packet time-out Value are enabled, Power Source
Conversion takes precedence, since it will always have the shorter time-out period.

Firmware built prior to 1-Nov-06 has a default of “1”.
For firmware built prior to 1-Nov-06, the maximum value is “20”.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 50 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.10 CV 17, 18 Extended Address
CV 17 and CV 18 together provide a larger (14 bit) range for locomotive ID numbers from 0 to 10,239.
CV 17 Default Value:039

CV 18 Default Value0

CV 17: Extended Address Most Significant Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
1

1

A13

A12

CV 18: Extended Address Least Significant Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
A7

A6

A5

A4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

A11

A10

A9

A8

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

A3

A2

A1

A0



Use CV 17 and CV 18 to assign your locomotive one of 10,240 addresses from 0 to 10,239, although most
Command Stations will only allow entering ID’s up to 9,999. You can assign your locomotive an address that
is identical to the locomotive’s cab number, which rarely exceed four digits.

Your locomotive can have both a Primary Address (CV 1) and an Extended Address. There is overlap in thePrimary Address and Extended Address range 1…127 so that a locomotive can have the same number for its
Primary Address as it has for its Extended Address. For example, a locomotive can have Primary Address“53” and Extended Address “53”. Although the same number, these two addresses are not the same and aretreated differently by your locomotive and your Command Station. See your Command Station Instructions tolearn how to tell the difference between the two addresses.



The Extended Address can be set either in Service Mode or Operations Mode. Remember to change bit 5 ofConfiguration CV 29 to “1” to enable the Extended Address.

3.9.1 Entering Extended Address into CV 17 and CV 18 Directly:
Most modern Command Stations allow the operator to input an Extended Address from 0 to 9999 directly indecimal format without having to individually enter data into CV 17 and CV 18. However, if you have an older
Command Station and need to program these CV’s directly, the following information will be helpful.


CV 17 and CV 18 form a paired CV and it makes a difference how data is entered. CV 17, the mostsignificant byte, must be written first followed by CV 18, the least significant byte. If the order isreversed, the Quantum decoder will not accept the values entered.



Bits A15 and A14 must both be assigned “1” which adds 192 to the value of the byte in CV 17. The
remaining 6 bits of C17 and the 8 bits of C18 allow addresses to be assigned between 0 and 10,239
inclusive. Any attempt to program an extended ID above 10,239 will be ignored.

To enter CV 17 and CV 18 by direct programming, first divide the decimal address you intend to enter by 256,
convert the quotient to binary, add the two leading 1’s for bits A14 and A15, and write the result to CV 17. Convert
the remainder to binary and write this number to CV 18.

39 The default for CV 17 is actually “192” which is an artifact of how these ID numbers are specified by the NRMA where 192 is added to the MSB (Most Significant Byte) of theaddress you want to enter. If you have a modern Command Station that programs your ID numbers directly, you will enter your ID number equal to the Extended Address you
intend to use; however, if you program the extended address CV directly, a zero address must be entered as 192. See example in this section on directly programming CV 17
and CV 18.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 51 of 468

5-Aug-15

Example1 Decimal Entry: Program CV 17 and CV 18 to Extended Address 5343.
Divide 5343 by 256 to get 20 as quotient and 223 as remainder.
Note: If you use a calculator, you will get 20.8711. Note the integer value n = 20, which is the quotient.
Add 192 to this quotient to get 212 and store this value in CV 17:
CV 17 = n + 192
CV 17 = 20 + 192 = 212
Compute the remaining integer value by multiplying 20 by 256 and subtract from the locomotive value to get
remainder and store in CV 18:
CV 18 = Locomotive Number – (n X 256)
CV 18 = 5343 – (20 X 256) = 223
Remember to change CV 29, bit 5 to “1” to allow the Extended Address operation (see CV 29).

Example2 Binary or Hex Entry: Program CV 17 and CV 18 to Extended Address 5343.
Convert 212 from previous example to binary 11010100 or hex 0xD4. Enter this number in CV 17.
Convert 223 from previous example to binary 11011111 or hex 0xDF and enter in CV 18.
Remember to change CV 29, bit 5 to “1” to allow the Extended Address operation (see CV 29).

To check: Compute (CV 17 – 192)*(256) + CV 18 where 192 is the decimal equivalent of CV 17 with only theleading 1’s (11000000)
Decimal: (212 – 192)*(256) + 223 = 5343
Binary: (11010100 –11000000)*(100000000) + 11011111 = 1010011011111 = 5343 decimal.
Hex: (0xD4– 0xC0)*0x100 + 0xDF = 0x14DF = 5343 decimal, where 0xC0 is the hex equivalent of 192.
The following table shows examples for some common Steam locomotive cab numbers. See if your calculations
match the values in the table. After you have calculated your ID numbers, just follow the procedure below to enter
your extended ID number.
1. Find out if your command station accepts Decimal, Binary or Hex inputs for CV entries.
2. First enter CV 17 (Most Significant Byte) from the table below as a Decimal, Binary or Hex number shown.
3. Next enter CV 18 (Least Significant Byte) from the table below as a Decimal, Binary or Hex number shown.
4. Change CV 29, bit 5 to “1” to allow operation with your new Extended Address.
5. Read your ID number back from your program track or verbally in Opts Mode to see if you entered thecorrect number.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 52 of 468

5-Aug-15

Common Steam Locomotive Numbers
Loco Number
3985
611
8444
4449
3751
261
1218
1361
700

CV 17
(Dec)
207
194
224
209
206
193
196
197
194

CV 18
(Dec)
145
99
252
97
167
5
194
81
188

CV 17
(Hex)
CF
C2
E0
D1
CE
C1
C4
C5
C2

CV 18
(Hex)
91
63
FC
61
A7
5
C2
51
BC

CV 17
(Binary)
11001111
11000010
11100000
11010001
11001110
11000001
11000100
11000101
11000010

CV 18(Binary)
10010001
01100011
11111100
01100001
10100111
00000101
11000010
01010001
10111100

Note: Some command stations will not operate Quantum Systems in Service Mode due to insufficient power
output or timing problems. (Check the appendices for a listing of recommended command stations). If you
cannot operate in Service Mode, use Ops mode programming.
If your command station will not allow setting ID numbers in Ops Mode, use QSI CV 56.129 to enter your ID
numbers.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 53 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.11 CV 19 Consist Address
Sets a locomotive’s Consist40 address in addition to setting the locomotive’s direction within the Consist.
0Default Value:

CV 19: Consist Address Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

A6

A5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0



Bits A0-A6 set the Consist address to any value from 0 to 127.



Bit D7 sets the locomotive’s direction. “0” in D7 sets the locomotive to a normal Forward and “1” sets
locomotive to Reverse Direction within the Consist.



If the address in bits 0-6 is 0, the locomotive is not in a Consist.



If the seven bit address has a value 1…127, when decoder receives a command packet addressed to thisaddress, the packet will be processed as any other packet except,The direction bit in a speed/direction or advanced operation packet is inverted if D7=1.



Function Key commands are ignored unless enabled in CV’s 21 and 22.

Long Form CV Access instructions will be ignored.

Only Short Form CV Access instructions for CV’s 23 and 24 are allowed.

If a locomotive has the same Consist Address as its Primary Address, it will respond to commands as throughit were being addressed by its Primary Address without the restrictions set in CV 21 and CV 22.

40 Consists are also know as Multiple Heading, Lashups or Multiple Unit Trains (MU’s) .

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 54 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.12 CV 21 Consist Address Active for F1-F841
Specifies the Function Keys that are enabled when a locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.
0

Default Value:

CV 21: Consist Address Active for F1-F8 Register42
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
F8

F7

F6

F5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

F4

F3

F2

F1



If a “0” is placed in any bit, that function key is disabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.



If a “1” is placed in any bit, that function key is enabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.



See also CV56.36.0 Consist Address Active for F13-F20 and CV56.36.1 Consist Address Active for F21-F28.

This CV is useful for disabling certain features for helper locomotives within the Consist. For instance, only
the Lead locomotive should have its Horn/ Whistle and Bell enabled. If the F2 key controls the Horn and theF3 key controls the Bell, then all slave locomotives should have "0" in Bit 1 and Bit 2, while the Lead
locomotive should have “1” in these bits.



The following recommended values are for locomotives that have factory default features assigned toFunction Outputs (see CV 53). Features that are different in the Neutral State are shown with parentheses(i.e. Doppler (Start Up) means Doppler is only operable in Forward and Reverse and Start Up is operable only
in Neutral). Features shown that do not indicate a special Neutral Option, will operate in all states (Forward,
Neutral and Reverse).

Recommended value of CV 21 for a Lead Locomotive in a Consist.
(The QSI default features assignments are shown for Forward/Reverse operation in the top row and for Neutral inparenthesis).
Audio Mute

Brake Squealand Air Brakes(Arm Cylinder
Cocks or long
Air Let-Off)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

Recommended value of CV 21 for a Mid43 Helper Locomotive in a Consist.
(The QSI default features assignments are shown for Forward/Reverse operation in the top row and for Neutral inparenthesis).
Audio Mute

Brake Squealand Air Brakes(Arm Cylinder
Cocks or long
Air Let-Off)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

41

See also CV56.36.0 Consist Address Active for F13-F20 and CV56.36.1 Consist Address Active for F21-F28.
42 Write bit operation is supported for CV 21.
43 A Mid Helper is any locomotive between the Lead and the last or End helper in a Consist.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 55 of 468

5-Aug-15

Recommended value of CV 21 for an End44 Helper Locomotive in a Consist.
(The QSI default features assignments are shown for Forward/Reverse operation in the top row and for Neutral inparenthesis).
Audio Mute

Brake Squealand Air Brakes(Arm Cylinder
Cocks or long
Air Let-Off)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

44 An End Helper is the last helper in a consist.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 56 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.13 CV 22 Consist Address Active for FL and F9-F12
Sets whether the FL(r) or FL(f) keys and F9-F12 keys are enabled when a locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.
0

Default Value:CV 22: Consist Address Active for FL and F9-F12 Register45
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0

0

F12

F11

F10

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

F9

FL(r)

FL(f)



If a “0” is placed in bits 0 through 5, that function key is disabled when the locomotive is addressed by its
Consist ID.



If a “1” is placed in bits 0 through 5, that function key is enabled when the locomotive is addressed by its
Consist ID.

Any "1" placed in bits 6 or 7 will be ignored.



FL in the Forward Direction is controlled by bit 0, FL in the Reverse Direction is controlled by bit 1.

This CV and CV 21 are useful for disabling certain features for Helper locomotives within the Consist.

Only the Lead Locomotive should have operational Directional Lighting. Helpers should have their
Directional Lighting disabled.

F9, Heavy Load and Shut Down are recommended for all Helper types in a Consist since Heavy
Load should apply to all locomotives or none at all; otherwise there would be fighting between
locomotives that have Heavy Load enabled and those that do not. Similarly, the F9 Shut Down
key should apply to all locomotives in Consist or none at all.

F10, Status Report should be disabled for all Helper types in a Consist since it would be difficult
to hear the verbal announcement if more than one locomotive announced its status at the same
time.



Features for Function keys 11 and 12 are usually reserved for Number Board Lights and Cab
Lights. It is recommended that Cab Lights be disabled and Number Board Lights be enabled. At
times F11 and F12 are reserved for custom appliance sounds or operations for the different
locomotive types (Steam, Diesel or Electric) such as steam Blow Down, etc. It is recommended
that these functions be disabled for all Helper types except the Lead Locomotive to avoid
confusion. Check your individual models to determine which features are assigned to F11 and
F12.

The following recommended values are for locomotives that have factory default values assigned to FL
Outputs (see CV 53). Features that are different in the Neutral State are shown with parentheses; i.e. Heavy
Load (Shut Down) means Heavy Load is only operable in Forward and Reverse and Shut Down is operable
only in Neutral.

Recommended value of CV 22 for a Lead Locomotive in a Consist:
SMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Directional
Lighting

Directional
Lighting

N/A

N/A

Cab Lights

Number Board
Lights

N/A
Bit 7

N/A
Bit 6

F12
Bit 5

F11
Bit 4

F10
Bit 3

F9
Bit 2

FL(r)
Bit 1

FL(f)
Bit 0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

Recommended value of CV 22 for a Mid Helper Locomotive in a Consist:
45 Write bit operation is supported for CV 22.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 57 of 468

5-Aug-15

SMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Directional
Lighting

Directional
Lighting

N/A

N/A

Cab Lights

Number Board
Lights

N/A
Bit 7

N/A
Bit 6

F12
Bit 5

F11
Bit 4

F10
Bit 3

F9
Bit 2

FL(r)
Bit 1

FL(f)
Bit 0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

Recommended value of CV 22 for an End Helper Locomotive in a Consist:
N/A

N/A

Cab Lights

Number Board
LightsSMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Directional
Lighting

Directional
Lighting

N/A
Bit 7

N/A
Bit 6

F12
Bit 5

F11
Bit 4

F10
Bit 3

F9
Bit 2

FL(r)
Bit 1

FL(f)
Bit 0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

When making up a consist, remember to have the directional lighting turned off before you assign zeros for bits 0 and
1. Otherwise the directional lighting will be on with no way to turn them off with the FL(r) or FL(f) keys 46.
The above selections for directional lighting for locomotives in a consist are not ideal for the following reasons:
1. You may not want the Lead Locomotive to have an operating Directional Reverse Light since it would only
illuminate the locomotive behind it and not the track. The simplest way to have the reverse light off in all
motive states is to set CV55.73.1 to 0.
2. You may want the End Helper to have an operational reverse facing light (which may be either the End
Helper’s Reverse Light or Headlight depending on the locomotive’s direction within the consist). If the End
Helper is facing forward, set CV55.70.1 to 0, CV55.73.1 to 32, and set bit 0 and bit 1 in CV 22 to 1. If the End
Helper is facing Backwards, set CV55.70.1 to 86, CV55.73.1 to 0, and set bit 0 and bit 1 in CV 22 to 1.
With the above changes, the directional lighting in your consist will operate like a single locomotive. That is, the FL
key is on, the Lead Locomotive Directional Headlight will be on, all other Helper Headlights will be off, and all Reverse
Lights will be off. If the consist is moving in Reverse, only the End Helper Reverse Light will be on and the Lead
Locomotive Headlight will either be off or Dim (if the Dim feature is part of the Directional Headlight for your model).

46 Since the default for directional lighting is off, any helpers that did have their directional lighting on will be set to off if the power is turned off and back on, or if the locomotive isshut down and started using the F9 and F6 keys.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 58 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.14 CV 23 Acceleration Adjustment
Increases or decreases the Acceleration from the base Acceleration Rate in CV 3.
0

Default Value:CV 23: Acceleration Adjustment Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Sign

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 23 can have any value from –127 to +127 where positive values will increase the acceleration time andnegative values will decrease the acceleration time. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1”indicates a negative value.



A positive value of CV 23 adds directly to the value of CV 3 by the formula below:
Seconds/speed step=(CV 3 + CV 23) * 0.896
Number of Speed Steps

The purpose of CV 23 is to allow the operator to simulate differing train lengths/loads, most often when
operating in Consists. It can, however, apply to single locomotives as well.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 59 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.15 CV 24 Deceleration Adjustment
Increases or decreases the Deceleration from the base Deceleration Rate in CV 4.
0

Default Value:CV 24: Deceleration Adjustment Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Sign

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 24 can have any value from –127 to +127 where positive values will increase the deceleration time andnegative values will decrease the deceleration time. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1”indicates a negative value.



A positive value of CV 24 adds directly to the value of CV 4 by the formula below:
Seconds/speed step =(CV 4 + CV 24) * 0.896
Number of Speed Steps

The purpose of CV 24 is to allow the operator to simulate differing train lengths/loads, most often when
operating in Consists. It can, however, apply to single locomotives as well.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 60 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.16 CV 25 Quantum Speed Table Selection
Use this CV to select of one of 11 predefined speed curves.
2

Default Value:CV 25: Quantum Speed Table Selection Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0



D6

N/A

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

N/A

D2

D1

D0

N/A

You can select from 11 predefined speed curves that are shown in the graph below. The upper five convex
curves are “fast start” curves while the lower five concave curves are “slow start” curves. The “fast start”
curves will compensate for locomotives that are less responsive getting started while the “slow start” curves
compensate for locomotives that tend to “rocket out” when the throttle is barely turned on.

Speed Table Selections
6

4

5

2 Linear3

Percent Full Throttle

120%
7

100%

67

80%

68

60%

69
70

40%
71
1

20%

127

118

109

100

91

82

73

64

55

46

37

28

19

10

1

0%
Speed Steps

To select a predefined speed curve, set CV 25 to the value associated with the curve in the graph above. Set
CV 25 to “0” or “1” to select a User Defined Curve (see CV 67 – 94). Set CV 25 to any other number to selecta predefined Linear Curve.



Bit 4 of CV 29 must be set to “1” to enable any of the above speed curves. If CV 29 bit 4 is set to “0”, then alinear straight-line response is enabled.

Additional Information for the Curious Regarding QSI Speed Curves:

The assignment of bits to this register follows a logical sequence:
Bits 0-2: Determines how much curvature. For low values the curves are closer to linear while higher
values provide greater curvature. Bits 0-2 set to 000 or 001 indicates that speed table is not
used regardless of the setting in bit 6. Bits 0-2 set to 010 indicate a linear speed table.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 61 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 3-5:

Reserved for future QSI expansion of speed curves. Any non-zero value entered for these bits
will automatically result in a Linear Response regardless of what is entered in other bits.

Bit 6:

Determines if it is convex “Fast Start” or concave “Slow Start” curve.
0 = “Fast Start” Convex Curve
1 = “Slow Start” Concave Curve

Bit 7:

This bit specifies the mid-range Speed Step and is not supported by Quantum decoders. Set thevalue to 0. Either a “1” or a “0” is ignored.

The decimal value for each curve from the table below is shown on the above speed graph.


Curve Tables in order of value for CV 25
Value of CV
Value of CV 25 Bits 7-0
25(Binary)(Decimal)Convex “Fast Start” Curves0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
3
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
5
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
7
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Concave “Slow Start” Curves
64
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 065
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 166
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 067
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 168
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
69
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 170
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
71
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

Resulting Speed Table

Reverts to User Defined Speed Table (CV 67-94)
Reverts to User Defined Speed Table (CV 67-94)
Linear Curve
Fast Start 1 (close to linear)
Fast Start 2
Fast Start 3
Fast Start 4
Fast Start 5 (greatest curvature)
Reverts to Linear Curve
Reverts to Linear Curve
Linear Curve
Slow Start 1 (close to linear)
Slow Start 2
Slow Start 3
Slow Start 4
Slow Start 5 (greatest curvature)

If any of the “Reverts to User Defined Table” values are set in CV 25, then the user specified speed table
programmed into CV’s 67-94 will be enabled.

V-Start and V-High settings will apply to these and all curve tables as described in the sections for CV 2 andCV 5. When selecting a speed table, it is recommended that you first select your V-Start offset based on alinear curve and enter this value into CV 2, particularly for concave “slow start” curves where the V-Start point
may not be obvious. Setting V-Start for a linear curve will be much more discernible; then select the type of
curve you want.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 62 of 468

5-Aug-15

3.17 CV 29 Configuration Data47
Each bit in CV 29 controls some basic operational settings for DCC decoders.
Default Value:

00000110 = 6

CV 29: Configuration Data Register (with NMRA Assigned Features)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Accessory
Decoder

Reserved for
Future Use

Extended
Addressing

Speed Table
EnableAdvanced Decoder
Acknowledgement

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Power Source
Conversion

FL
Location

Locomotive
Direction

Bit 0 = Locomotive Direction:“0” = normal Forward Direction“1” = Reversed Direction.
This bit controls the locomotive’s Forward and Reverse direction. With Bit 0 set to 1, the locomotive will movein the Reverse Direction even though the Command Station indicates a Forward Direction. Directional
sensitive functions, such as FL(f) and FL(r) , will also be reversed to be consistent with the locomotive’s
Reversed Direction.

Bit 1 = Speed Steps and FL Location“0” = Bit 4 sets 14 Speed Step Mode.
“1” = Bit 4 sets 28 and 128 Speed Step Mode.
In 14 Speed Step Operation, the speed and direction instruction is in one byte of transmitted data that tells thelocomotive what direction to go, what speed to travel and whether FL should be “0” or “1”. For 28-speed step
operation, the bit used for FL is instead used to double the number of speed steps, so that the light state mustbe transmitted in a Function Group 1 instruction. Similarly, when using 128 speed step mode, bit 1 of CV 29
must be set to “1”.



Bit 2 = Power Source Conversion.
“0” = Power Source Conversion disabled“1” = Power Source Conversion enabled.
If CV 29 bit 2 is “1”, and a period of approximately 200mSec48 elapses in which no DCC packet is detected,
then the locomotive will convert to Analog power.
If the polarity of the track would result in the locomotive moving in the same direction that it was last moving in
DCC mode, then the locomotive will continue to move at the speed corresponding to the last received speed
step packet. The usual FWD/REV locomotive sound will be heard.
If the polarity of the track would result in the locomotive moving the opposite direction than it was last moving
in DCC mode, then the locomotive will decelerate to a stop at a rate determined by CV 4 and CV 2449, and willenter Neutral. The usual Neutral sounds will be heard.
When in Analog mode, switching the polarity of the track will either start the locomotive moving or bring it to astop.
If the locomotive is moving and the polarity is reversed, the locomotive will decelerate to a stop at a rate
determined by CV 4 and CV 24 and will enter Neutral.

47 Write bit operation is supported for CV 29.
48 NMRA Spec RP-9.2.4 specifies that Power Source Conversion should take place when DCC packets are absent for more than 30 mSec. However Quantum requires
approximately 200mSec to determine the Analog track polarity.
49
Q3 firmware supports CV58.10.0-1 Power Conversion Stopping Distance to specify the distance the locomotive travels before it stops.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 63 of 468

5-Aug-15

If the locomotive is stopped in Neutral and the polarity is reversed, the locomotive will accelerate at a rate
determined by CV 3 and CV 23 to a speed corresponding to the last received speed step packet.
The actual locomotive speed under Analog power may differ from its speed under DCC power depending on
the Analog track voltage and whether the locomotive is using Calibrated Speed Control, Regulated Throttle
Control, or Standard Throttle Control (e.g. the locomotive may jerk upon switching to analog power).
NOTE: This bit must be set to 1 in order for the locomotive to operate on an Analog track. See trouble
shooting section.
Bit 3 = Advanced Decoder Acknowledgement (not used)

Bit 4 = Speed Table set by configuration variables.
“0” Speed Table not used.
“1” Speed Table set by CV 25, Quantum Speed Table selection.
When bit 4 of CV 29 is set to “0” a linear Speed Table is used by default.



Bit 5 = Extended Address Mode enable“0” = The decoder responds to one byte Primary Address (see CV 1).
“1” = The decoder responds to a two byte Extended Address (see CV 17 and CV 18)



Bit 6 = Reserved for NMRA future use.



Bit 7 = Accessory Decoder“0” = Multifunction locomotive decoder.
“1” = Accessory Decoder. .
Quantum decoders are Multifunction Decoders; this bit cannot be changed.

Some command stations make it easy for you to change CV 29 one bit one at a time. Other command stations
require you to enter the value of CV 29 as a complete 8-bit byte. The table below shows all the possiblecombinations of the five programmable bits supported by Quantum locomotives. Where an “X” appears the featureis enabled and the corresponding CV 29 bit is a “1”. The Binary, Decimal, and Hex values are shown for eachcombination. Choose the features you want enabled and enter the corresponding number into CV 29 using theformat recommended by your command station. The default for Quantum decoders is shown in bold type.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 64 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 29 Common Settings
Extended
Addressing

Speed
TablesPower
Conversion

28/ 128
speed step

Reversed
Direction
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

X
X

X
X

X

Page 65 of 468

Decimal
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

BinaryValue
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
0000011000000111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
0010010000100101
0010011000100111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
0011010000110101
0011011000110111

Hex
Value
0x0
0x1
0x2
0x3
0x4
0x5
0x6
0x7
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37

5-Aug-15

4 CV’s 33-46: Output Locations50
4.1

Overview

The NMRA standard currently provides for fourteen Function Inputs, which are transmitted to the locomotive decoder
to control different Outputs. These fourteen Function Inputs are generally operated by thirteen51 Function Keys (FL,F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10, F11 and F12) on the command station or the hand held throttle. The FL52
Function Key can produce two different Function Inputs, called FL(r) and FL(f), depending on the direction of thelocomotive.
The NMRA standard provides for fourteen Outputs, numbered from 1 to 14. CV’s 33 through 46 specify which
Function Input is connected to which Output.
Note: Q2 firmware built after 1-June-08 does not support CV’s 33-46. The following fixed mapping is used:
FL(f) -> Output 1
FL(r) -> Output 2
F1 -> Output 3…
F12 -> Output 14
The table below shows Output numbers across the top and Function Inputs along the side. The CV number
associated with each Function Input is shown in the first column. Each of these CV’s consists of an eight bit registerwith a “1” or “0” in each bit location, specifying which Outputs are controlled by that Function Input. The default value
for each CV is shown.

0
1
0
0

Directional Lighting

0
0
1
0

Directional Lighting

0
0
0
1

0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

Bell

FL(f)
FL(r)
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Function 4
Function 5
Function 6
Function 7
Function 8
Function 9
Function 10
Function 11
Function 12

Coupler

11

Horn/Whistle

Heavy Load
(Shut Down)

12

Blower Hiss/Fans

Status Report

13

Dynamic Brakes

Alternate Horn Selection

14

Doppler Shift(Locomotive Start Up)

Cab Lights

Outputs

Squealing Brakes
Air Brakes(Cylinder Cocks )

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

Common Default
Quantum Feature
Assignments

Mute

Output Numbers and Pre-assigned Features

CV # Function Inputs

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
0
0

1
1
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

50

Q2 firmware built after 1-June-08 does not support CV’s 33-46.
51 Some earlier command stations only support the original NMRA specification of 10 functions using 9 Function Keys.
52 For Command Stations that do not have an FL key, the F0 Function key usually controls this function.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 66 of 468

5-Aug-15

A “1” with light gray background shows the Output default settings for Quantum decoders. For example, CV 36 has a“1” in the column for Output 4, indicating that Function 2 controls Output 4 which will operate the Whistle or Horn.
Each Input Function can control up to 8 Outputs. The white squares in the table show allowed possible assignmentsof Outputs for each Function. The dark gray areas indicate where Outputs cannot be assigned. For instance, the F4
key (Function Input 4) can control only Outputs 4-11. You can chose to have the F4 Key operate Output 10 or a
combination of Outputs 11, 9, 7, and 6 all at once, but you cannot have it operate Output 12.
For many non-sound decoders, the Outputs are literally wires that are connected to different features such as
Headlights and Reverse Lights, overhead blinking lights, smoke generators, and couplers. All the Outputs are“hardwired” to the features, meaning you cannot change which feature corresponds to an Output without rewiring thefeatures.
For Sound Decoders like the first Quantum System, only some of the Outputs were “hardwired” to a particular feature.
Many of the features require no external wires. Examples of these internal features are bells, whistles, air let-offs,
blower hiss, and flange sounds.
On modern decoders, even those features that do require external wires, such as lights and smoke generators, are
not necessarily “hardwired” to any particular Output. Outputs are now virtual and can be connected internally by
firmware in the Quantum microprocessor to any physical driver, such as a power output for a lamp or a controller for asmoke generator. The connection between a virtual output and a physical feature is called a control port or simply“port”. For consistency with NMRA definitions, virtual outputs are called simply “outputs”.
A virtual output can be connected to more than one port. For example, the Multiple Automatic Lights #1 virtual output
is by default connected to the Headlight, Reverse Light, and in some models a Mars Light.
Virtual outputs can be connected to different features depending on the directional state of the locomotive. For
example, Output 8 is assigned to Doppler Shift in Forward and Reverse but is assigned to “Locomotive Start Up” inNeutral.
Both of these techniques increase the number of features that can be operated with a limited number of function keys.
The above table shows Common Default Quantum Features Assignments in the second row. Features assignmentsthat operate only in Neutral are shown in parenthesis under the feature that operates in Forward and Reverse. If no
Neutral feature is shown, the assigned feature shown will operate in all directional states.
Features are assigned to outputs in CV 53.
Advanced Sound Decoders like the Quantum Decoders allow great flexibility in choosing which function keys operate
which features. However, this flexibility can get you into trouble if misused. For technical reasons too complicated to
discuss here53, we recommend you follow the two rules below to avoid having your decoder behave in a confusing
manner.
1. In CV’s 33-46, do not attempt to control the same Output with two or more function keys. This means, in thetable above, only one row in each column should have a “1”. Yes, we violated this rule for Output 1 andOutput 2, where we have both FL(f) and FL(r) operating the Directional Lighting System. This is an exception,
which does work for Directional Lighting using FL(f) and FL(r). In general, it is not a good idea.
2. In CV 53, do not assign the same feature to two or more Outputs.

53 See Appendix VI Interaction of Function Keys, Function Groups, Function Inputs and Outputs and Feature Assignments for additional technical explanation.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 67 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.2

CV 33 Output Location for FL(f) 54

This CV specifies whether outputs 1 through 8 are controlled by FL(f).
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by FL(f), while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by
FL(f).
00000011 = 3

Default Value:CV 33: Output Location for FL(f) (with Factory Default Features)
Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Directional
Lighting55

Directional
Lighting

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Output 3

Output 2

Output 1



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Outputs 1 and 2 is the Directional Lighting System. Therefore, by default FL(f)controls the Directional Lighting System in Forward or Neutral from Forward.

You can specify that FL(f) controls any of Outputs 2 through 8 in addition to or instead of Outputs 1 and 2.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 56, you can specify that FL(f) controls the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 1: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 2: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by FL(f).
The Directional Lighting System is affected by FL(f).

Output 3; Bell
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by FL(f).
The Directional Lighting System is affected by FL(f).

The Bell is unaffected by FL(f).
The Bell is affected by FL(f).

Output 4; Horn/Whistle“0”“1”

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by FL(f).
Horn/Whistle is affected by FL(f).

54 Write bit operation is supported for CV 33.
55 The lights used in Directional Lighting are selected in Multiple Lights #1, which is the actual feature assigned to Outputs 1 and 2 (see CV55.136). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #1.
56 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 68 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by FL(f).
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by FL(f).

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by FL(f).
The Coupler Sounds are affected by FL(f).

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by FL(f).
Dynamic Brakes are affected by FL(f).

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by FL(f).
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by FL(f).

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 69 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.3

CV 34 Output Location for FL(r) 57

This CV specifies whether outputs 1 through 8 are controlled by FL(r).
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by FL(r), while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled byFL(r).
00000011 = 3

Default Value:

CV 34: Output Location for FL(r) (with Factory Default Features)
Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Directional
Lighting58

Directional
Lighting

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Output 3

Output 2

Output 1



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Outputs 1 and 2 is the Directional Lighting System. Therefore, by default FL(r)controls the Directional Lighting System in Reverse or Neutral from Reverse.



You can specify that FL(r) control any of Outputs 3 through 8 in addition to or instead of Outputs 1 and 2.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 59, you can specify that FL(r) control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 1: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 2: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by FL(r).
The Directional Lighting System is affected by FL(r).

Output 3; Bell
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by FL(r).
The Directional Lighting System is affected by FL(r).

The Bell is unaffected by FL(r).
The Bell is affected by FL(r).

Output 4; Horn/Whistle“0”“1”

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by FL(r).
Horn/Whistle is affected by FL(r).

57 Write bit operation is supported for CV 34.
58 The lights used in Directional Lighting are selected in Multiple Lights #1, which is the actual feature assigned to Outputs 1 and 2 (see CV55.136). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #1.
59 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 70 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by FL(r).
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by FL(r).

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by FL(r).
The Coupler Sounds are affected by FL(r).

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by FL(r).
Dynamic Brakes are affected by FL(r).

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by FL(r).
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by FL(r).

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 71 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.4

CV 35 Output Location for F1 60

This CV specifies whether outputs 1 through 8 are controlled by F1.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F1, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F1.
00000100 = 4

Default Value:

CV 35: Output for F1 (with Factory Default Features)
Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Directional
Lighting61

Directional
Lighting

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Output 3

Output 2

Output 1



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 3 is the Bell. Therefore, by default F1 controls the Bell.

You can specify that F1 control any of Outputs 1-2 and 4-8 in addition to or instead of Output 3.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 62, you can specify that F1 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 1: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 2: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F1.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F1.

Output 3; Bell
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F1.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F1.

The Bell is unaffected by F1.
The Bell is affected by F1.

Output 4; Horn/Whistle“0”“1”

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F1.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F1.

60 Write bit operation is supported for CV 35.
61 The lights used in Directional Lighting are selected in Multiple Lights #1, which is the actual feature assigned to Outputs 1 and 2 (see CV55.136). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #1.
62 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 72 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F1.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F1.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F1.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F1.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F1.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F1.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F1.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 73 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.5

CV 36 Output Location for F2 63This CV specifies whether outputs 1 through 8 are controlled by F2.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F2, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F2.
00001000 = 8

Default Value:

CV 36: Output Location for F2 (with Factory Default Features)
Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Directional
Lighting64

Directional
Lighting

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Output 3

Output 2

Output 1



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 4 is the Whistle or Horn. Therefore, by default F2 controls the Whistle
or Horn while locomotive is moving or stopped.

You can specify that F1 control any of Outputs 1-3 and 5-8 in addition to or instead of Output 4.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 65, you can specify that F2 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 1: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 2: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F2.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F2.

Output 3; Bell
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F2.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F2.

The Bell is unaffected by F2.
The Bell is affected by F2.

Output 4; Horn/Whistle“0”“1”

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F2.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F2.

63 Write bit operation is supported for CV 36.
64 The lights used in Directional Lighting are selected in Multiple Lights #1, which is the actual feature assigned to Outputs 1 and 2 (see CV55.136). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #1.
65 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 74 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F2.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F2.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F2.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F2.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F2.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F2.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F2.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F2.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 75 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.6

CV 37 Output Location for F3 66

This CV specifies whether outputs 1 through 8 are controlled by F3.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F3, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F3.
00010000 = 16

Default Value:CV 37: Output Location for F3 (with Factory Default Features)
Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bell

Directional
Lighting67

Directional
Lighting

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Output 3

Output 2

Output 1



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 5 is the Coupler Crash, Coupler Fire and Coupler Arm. Therefore, by
default F3 controls the Coupler Sounds.

You can specify that F3 control any of Outputs 1-4 and 6-8 in addition to or instead of Output 5.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 68, you can specify that F3 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 1: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 2: Directional Lighting
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F3.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F3.

Output 3; Bell
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Directional Lighting System is unaffected by F3.
The Directional Lighting System is affected by F3.

The Bell is unaffected by F3.
The Bell is affected by F3.

Output 4; Horn/Whistle“0”“1”

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F3.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F3.

66 Write bit operation is supported for CV 37.
67 The lights used in Directional Lighting are selected in Multiple Lights #1, which is the actual feature assigned to Outputs 1 and 2 (see CV55.136). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #1.
68 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 76 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F3.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F3.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F3.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F3.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F3.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F3.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F3.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F3.

Example: Change F3 to Bell Operation (Output 3), and change F1 to Coupler Sounds (Output 5).
Output 3 is set to Bell by default. Output 5 is set to Coupler Sounds by default.
Set CV 37 (F3) to “4” (bit 2 = output 3 = Bell)
Set CV 35 (F1) to “16” (bit 4 = output 5 = Coupler Sounds)
After these changes, F3 will activate the bell, and F1 will activate Coupler Sounds .

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 77 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.7

CV 38 Output Location for F4 69

This CV specifies whether outputs 4 through 11 are controlled by F4.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F4, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F4.
00000100 = 4

Default Value:CV 38: Output Location for F4 Register (with Factory Default Features)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Shut
Down)



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 6 is Blower Hiss/Fans. Therefore, by default F4 controls the Blower
Hiss/Fans Sound.

You can specify that F4 control any of Outputs 4-5 and 7-11 in addition to or instead of Output 6.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 70, you can specify that F4 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 4; Horn/Whistle
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F4.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F4.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F4.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F4.

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F4.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F4.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F4.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F4.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F4.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F4.

69 Write bit operation is supported for CV 38.
70 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 78 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 5

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F4.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F4.

Audio Mute is unaffected by F4.
Audio Mute is affected by F4.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F4.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F4.
Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 79 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.8

CV 39 Output Location for F5 71

This CV specifies whether outputs 4 through 11 are controlled by F5.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F5, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F5.
00001000 = 8

Default Value:

CV 39: Output Location for F5 Register (with Factory Default Features)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 7 is Dynamic Brakes. Therefore, by default F5 controls the Dynamic
Brake Sounds.

You can specify that F5 control any of Outputs 4-6 and 8-11 in addition to or instead of Output 7.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 72, you can specify that F5 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 4; Horn/Whistle
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F5.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F5.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F5.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F5.

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F5.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F5.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F5.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F5.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F5.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F5.

71 Write bit operation is supported for CV 39.
72 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 80 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 5

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F5.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F5.

Audio Mute is unaffected by F5.
Audio Mute is affected by F5.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F5.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F5.
Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 81 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.9

CV 40 Output Location for F673

This CV specifies whether outputs 4 through 11 are controlled by F6.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F6, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F6.
00010000 = 16

Default Value:CV 40: F6 Output Location for F6 Register (with Factory Default Features)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default settings for Output 8 are Doppler Shift for a moving locomotive and Locomotive Start Up
in Neutral. Therefore, by default F6 controls Doppler Shift and Start Up.



You can specify that F6 control any of Outputs 4-7 and 9-11 in addition to or instead of Output 8.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 74, you can specify that F6 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 4; Horn/Whistle
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F6.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F6.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F6.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F6.

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F6.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F6.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F6.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F6.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F6.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F6.

73 Write bit operation is supported for CV 40.
74 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 82 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 5

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off.
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F6.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F6.

Audio Mute is unaffected by F6.
Audio Mute is affected by F6.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F6.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F6.
Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 83 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.10 CV 41 Output Location for F7 75
This CV specifies whether outputs 4 through 11 are controlled by F7.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F7, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F7.
00100000 = 32

Default Value:CV 41: Output Location for F7 Register (with Factory Default Features)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default settings for Output 9 are Squealing Brakes plus Air Brakes for a moving locomotive andCylinder Cocks Arm or a Long Air Let-off for a Brake Set in Neutral. Therefore, by default F7 controls
Squealing Brakes or Air Brakes for a moving locomotive and a Cylinder Cocks Arm or Brake Set Sound in
Neutral.



You can specify that F7 control any of Outputs 4-8 and 10-11 in addition to or instead of Output 9.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row)76, you can specify that F7 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 4; Horn/Whistle
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F7.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F7.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F7.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F7.

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F7.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F7.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F7.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F7.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F7.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F7.

75 Write bit operation is supported for CV 41.
76 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 84 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 5

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Output 10: Audio Mute or
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F7.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F7.

Audio Mute is unaffected by F7.
Audio Mute is affected by F7.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F7.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F7.
Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 85 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.11 CV 42 Output Location for F8 77
This CV specifies whether outputs 4 through 11 are controlled by F8.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F8, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F8.
01000000 = 64

Default Value:CV 42: Output Location for F8 Register (with Factory Default Features)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
BrakesBlowerHiss/Fans

Coupler Crash
Coupler Fire
(Coupler Arm)

Horn/Whistle

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

Output 6

Output 5

Output 4

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 10 is Audio Mute. Therefore, by default F8 controls Audio Mute.



You can specify that F8 control any of Outputs 4-9 and 11 in addition to or instead of Output 10.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 78, you can specify that F8 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 4; Horn/Whistle
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 5: Coupler Crash, Coupler Arm, Coupler Fire
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Blower-Hiss/Fans are unaffected by F8.
Blower-Hiss/Fans are affected by F8.

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

The Coupler Sounds are unaffected by F8.
The Coupler Sounds are affected by F8.

Output 6: Steam Locomotive Blower Hiss or Diesel or Electric Loco Vents and Fans
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

The Horn/Whistle is unaffected by F8.
Horn/Whistle is affected by F8.

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F8.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F8.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F8.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F8.

77 Write bit operation is supported for CV 42.
78 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 86 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 5

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F8.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F8.

Audio Mute is unaffected by F8.
Audio Mute is affected by F8.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F8.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F8.
Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 87 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.12 CV 43 Output Location for F9 79
This CV specifies whether outputs 7 through 14 are controlled by F9.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F9, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F9.
00010000 = 16

Default Value:CV 43: Output Location for F9 Register (with Factory Default Features)
Cab Lights80

Alternate Horn
Selection81/
Number Board
Lights82

Bit 7
Output 14

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
Brakes

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

SMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Bit 6

Bit 5

Output 13

Output 12

QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default settings for Output 11 are Heavy Load for a moving locomotive and DisconnectStandby-Shut Down for a locomotive in Neutral. Therefore, by default F9 controls Heavy Load andDisconnect-Standby-Shut Down.
Note:

Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

You can specify that F9 control any of Outputs 7-10 and 12-14 in addition to or instead of Output 11.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 83, you can specify that F9 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F9.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F9.

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F9.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F9.

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off“0”“1”

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F9.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F9.

79 Write bit operation is supported for CV 43.
80 Cab Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #3, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 14 (see CV 55.138). Depending on your model, different lights
may be selected for Multiple Lights #3.
81 Alternate Horn is available only on selected models. Consult your Model’s Operation Manual feature list.
82 Number Board Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #2, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 13 (see CV 55.137). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #2.
83 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 88 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 3

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Bit 5

Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F9.
Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F9.

Output 13: Number Board Lights
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F9.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F9.

Output 12: Speed Report, Status Report
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Audio Mute is unaffected by F9.
Audio Mute is affected by F9.

Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are unaffected by F9.
Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are affected by F9.

Output 14: Cab Lights“0”“1”

Cab Lights are unaffected by F9.
Cab Lights are affected by F9.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 89 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.13 CV 44 Output Location for F10 84
This CV specifies whether outputs 7 through 14 are controlled by F10.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F10, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F10.
00100000 = 32

Default Value:CV 44: Output Location for F10 Register (with Factory Default Features)
Cab Lights

Alternate Horn
Selection86/
Number Board
Lights87

Speed Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Output 14

Output 13

Output 12

85

Mute

Squealing
Brakes – Air
Brakes(Brake Set)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
Brakes

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 12 is a Scale Miles Per Hour (smph) or Scale Kilometers Per Hour(skph)88 Speed Report in Forward/Reverse or Status Report in Neutral. Therefore F10 controls SMPH and
Status Report.



You can specify that F10 control any of Outputs 7-11 and 13-14 in addition to or instead of Output 12.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row)89, you can specify that F10 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F10.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F10.

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up“0”“1”

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F10.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F10.

84 Write bit operation is supported for CV 44.
85 Cab Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #3, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 14 (see CV 55.138). Depending on your model, different lights
may be selected for Multiple Lights #3.
86 Alternate Horn is available only on selected models. Consult your Model’s Operation Manual feature list.
87 Number Board Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #2, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 13 (see CV 55.137). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #2.
88 Scale Miles Per Hour or Scale Kilometers Per Hour can be selected in CV 56.0.
89 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 90 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 2

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

“1”

Note:

Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F10.
Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F10.

Output 13: Number Board Lights
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F10.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F10.

Output 12: Speed Report, Status Report
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Audio Mute is unaffected by F10.
Audio Mute is affected by F10.

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”

Bit 5

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F10.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F10.

Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are unaffected by F10.
Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are affected by F10.

Output 14: Cab Lights“0”“1”

Cab Lights are unaffected by F10.
Cab Lights are affected by F10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 91 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.14 CV 45 Output Location for F11 90
This CV specifies whether outputs 7 through 14 are controlled by F11.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F11, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F11.
01000000 = 64

Default Value:CV 45: Output Location for F11 Register (with Factory Default Features)
Cab Lights91

Alternate Horn
Selection92/
Number Board
Lights93

Bit 7
Output 14

Mute

Squealing
Brakes/Flanges/Air Brakes(Cylinder
Cocks/ Long
Air Let-Off

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
Brakes

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7

SMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Bit 6

Bit 5

Output 13

Output 12



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 13 is Number Board Lights. Therefore F11 controls Number Board
Lights.



You can specify that F11 control any of Outputs 7-12 and 14 in addition to or instead of Output 13.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 94, you can specify that F11 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F11.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F11.

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F11.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F11.

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off“0”“1”

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F11.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F11.

90 Write bit operation is supported for CV 45.
91 Cab Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #3, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 14 (see CV 55.138). Depending on your model, different lights
may be selected for Multiple Lights #3.
92 Alternate Horn is available only on selected models. Consult your Model’s Operation Manual feature list.
93 Number Board Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #2, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 13 (see CV 55.137). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #2.
94 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 92 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 3

Output 10: Audio Mute.
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Bit 5

Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F11.
Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F11.

Output 13: Number Board Lights
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F11.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F11.

Output 12: Speed Report, Status Report
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Audio Mute is unaffected by F11.
Audio Mute is affected by F11.

Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are unaffected by F11.
Alternate Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are affected by F11.

Output 14: Cab Lights“0”“1”

Cab Lights are unaffected by F11.
Cab Lights are affected by F11.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 93 of 468

5-Aug-15

4.15 CV 46 Output Location for F12 95
This CV specifies whether outputs 7 through 14 are controlled by F12.
A ‘1’ in a bit location specifies the output is controlled by F12, while a ‘0’ specifies the output is not controlled by F12.
10000000 = 128

Default Value:CV 46: Output Location for F12 Register (with Factory Default Features)
Cab Lights96

Alternate Horn
Selection97/
Number Board
Lights98

SMPH Report(Status Report)

Heavy Load
(DisconnectStandby-Total
Shut Down)

Mute

Squealing
Brakes – Air
Brakes(Brake Set)

Doppler(Start Up)

Dynamic
Brakes

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Output 14

Output 13

Output 12

Output 11

Output 10

Output 9

Output 8

Output 7



QSI has pre-assigned default features to each output but any feature can be assigned to any output in CV 53.
In CV 53, the default setting for Output 14 is Cab Lights. Therefore F12 controls Cab Lights.

You can specify that F12 control any of Outputs 7-13 in addition to or instead of Output 14.

Assuming the default CV 53 settings (shown in the top row) 99, you can specify that F12 control the following
features.
Bit 0

Output 7: Dynamic Brakes
“0”
“1”

Bit 1

Output 8: Doppler, Start Up
“0”
“1”

Bit 2

Dynamic Brakes are unaffected by F12.
Dynamic Brakes are affected by F12.

Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are unaffected by F12.
Doppler shift in Forward/Reverse and Start up in Neutral are affected by F12.

Output 9: Squealing Brakes and Air Brakes, Cylinder Cocks Arm or Long Air Let-off“0”“1”

Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are unaffected by F12.
Squealing Brakes, Air Brakes in Forward/Reverse and Cylinder Cocks Arm, Long Air
Let-off are affected by F12.

95 Write bit operation is supported for CV 46.
96 Cab Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #3, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 14 (see CV 55.138). Depending on your model, different lights
may be selected for Multiple Lights #3.
97 Alternate Horn is available only on selected models. Consult your Model’s Operation Manual feature list.
98 Number Board Lights are usually selected by default in Multiple Lights #2, which is the actual feature assigned to Output 13 (see CV 55.137). Depending on your model,
different lights may be selected for Multiple Lights #2.
99 Features that are different in the Neutral state are shown in parentheses

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 94 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 3

Output 10: Audio Mute
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

Output 11: Heavy Load, Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down
“0”
“1”

Note:

Bit 5

Heavy Load has replaced the Cruise Control feature that was available on Lionel HO andearly BLI locomotives.

Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F12.
Speed Report in Forward/Reverse and Status Report in Neutral are unaffected by F12.

Output 13: Number Board Lights
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are unaffected by F12.
Heavy Load in Forward/Reverse and Disconnect-Standby-Total Shut Down in Neutral
are affected by F12.

Output 12: Speed Report, Status Report
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

Audio Mute is unaffected by F12.
Audio Mute is affected by F12.

Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are unaffected by F12.
Horn Selection or Number Board Lights are affected by F12.

Output 14: Cab Lights“0”“1”

Cab Lights are unaffected by F12.
Cab Lights are affected by F12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 95 of 468

5-Aug-15

5 CV’s 49-64: QSI Unique CV’s
5.1

Overview
Many of the available CV's have been reserved by the NMRA to provide standardized and compatible
operation by all manufacturers with each other's products.
These standard CV’s relate to operations that are common to all DCC products such as ID numbers, speed
steps, and acceleration and deceleration rates.
Many model railroad products today, and a much larger number in the future, require manufacturer uniqueCV's to configure their product’s special features. The command structure and protocols for changing andretrieving manufacturer unique CV values are standardized through the NMRA, but the individual
manufacturers specify the meaning of the CV values.
The NMRA has provided a number of CV's for manufacturers to use in configuring their own products: CV's
49 through 64, and CV's 112-128.
Instead of filling up the available manufacturer unique CV's in a linear or chronological order, QSI uses anindexing system that organizes these CV’s in a meaningful way.
Two of the available manufacturer unique CV’s are used as indices to expand some of the remaining CV’s
into 256 register one-dimensional tables, or into 256x256 register two-dimensional tables.
CV 49 is the Primary Index (PI), and is used for accessing up to 256 registers of a one-dimensional table.

Primary Index
CV 49
0
1
2
3
:
:
255

CV X Register 0
CV X Register 1
CV X Register 2
CV X Register 3
CV X Register n
CV X Register 255

CV 52 is an example of one of the CV’s implemented as a one-dimensional table.
CV 50 is the Secondary Index (SI), and is used together with the Primary Index for accessing up to 256x256
registers of a two-dimensional table.

Primary
Index
CV 49
0

1

2

3

Secondary Index CV 50

0
CV XRegister
0,0
CV X
Register
1,0
CV X
Register
2,0
CV X
Register
3,0Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

1
CV X
Register
0,1
CV X
Register
1,1
CV X
Register
2,1
CV X
Register
3,1

2
CV X
Register
0,2
CV X
Register
1,2
CV X
Register
2,2
CV X
Register
3,2Page 96 of 468

3
CV X
Register
0,3
CV X
Register
1,3
CV X
Register
2,3
CV X
Register
3,3

.. ..
CV X
Register0,m
CV X
Register
1,m
CV X
Register2,m
CV X
Register
3,m

255
CV X
Register
0,255
CV X
Register
1,255
CV X
Register
2,255
CV X
Register
3,255

5-Aug-15

:
:
255

CV X
Registern,0
CV X
Register
255,0

CV X
Registern,1
CV X
Register
255,1

CV X
Registern,2
CV X
Register
255,2

CV X
Registern,3
CV X
Register
255,3

CV X
Registern,m
CV X
Register
255,m

CV X
Registern,255
CV X
Register
255,255

CV 53 is an example of one of the CV’s implemented as a two-dimensional table.

5.1.1 Warehouse Analogy
Here is a way of looking at CV’s, which may make the concept of indexed CV's easier to understand.
Imagine CV1 through CV106 as 106 storage boxes arranged one behind the other.

Most of these boxes contain a single number, which is the value of the corresponding CV. If you look inside
the 1st box you will see the value of CV1, in the 2nd box the value of CV2, etc. If you walk back to the 29thbox, inside you will see the value of CV29. Some of the boxes may be empty. That is because the use of thatCV, such as CV47, has not yet been defined or because that CV is not supported.
In this analogy, the statement "Set CV 29 to 6" translates to "Walk back to box 29 and put the number '6' inthat box".
The statement "Read CV 65" translates to "Walk back to box 65 and read the number in that box".

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 97 of 468

5-Aug-15

If you walk back to the 52nd box, corresponding to QSI's CV52, instead of a single box with a single number,
you will see 256 boxes stacked in a column.

To keep track of these 256 boxes, each is assigned a row index. The 1st box has row index 0, the 2nd box
row index 1, and the last box row index 255. We use the shorthand notation CV52.0 to refer to the first box,
CV52.1 to refer to the 2nd box, and CV52.255 to refer to the last box. Each of these 256 boxes can contain asingle number. If you look in the 1st box, you will see the value of CV52.0. If you look in the 2nd box, you will
see the value of CV52.1. Some of these boxes may be empty. That is because the use of that CV has not yet
been defined or the CV is not supported.
The statement "Set CV 52.5 to 12" translates to "Walk back to the column of boxes at box 52, climb up to row
6, and put the number '12' in that box".
The statement "Read CV 52.11" translates to "Walk back to the column of boxes at box 52, climb up to row
12, and read the number in that box".

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 98 of 468

5-Aug-15

If you walk back to the 53rd box, corresponding to QSI's CV53, you will see a wall of boxes arranged incolumns and rows with 256 boxes in each row and 256 boxes in each column.

To keep track of these 256x256 boxes, each is assigned two indices, a row index and a column index. The
box in the 1st row 1st column has row index 0 column index 0, the box in the 1st row 2nd column has row
index 0 column index 1, etc. The box in the 6th row and 2nd column has row index 5 and column index 1. We
use the shorthand notation CV53.0.0 to refer to the box in row 0 column 0, CV53.0.1 to refer to the box in row
0 column 1, etc. CV56.5.1 refers to the box in row 5 column 1. Each of these 256x256 boxes can contain asingle number. If you look in the box in row 0 column 0, you will see the value of CV53.0.0. If you look in thebox in row 5 column 1 you will see the value of CV53.5.1. Some of these boxes may be empty. That is
because the use of that CV has not yet been defined or the CV is not supported.
The statement "Set CV 53.7.0 to 114" translates to "Walk back to the wall of boxes at box 53, climb up to the
8th row of boxes, and put the number ‘114’ in the 1st column box".
The statement "Read CV 53.3.1" translates to "Walk back to the wall of boxes at box 53, climb up to the 4th
row of boxes, move over to the 2nd column, and read the number in that box".
Now instead of us walking and climbing over the boxes, imagine we build a simple robot to carry out thesetasks.
When we want the robot to execute the instruction "Set CV 29 to 6", we enter "29" into the robot's CV register,"6" into its Data register, and press its "Write" button. The robot then trundles down the boxes until it reaches
the 29th box, and in that box deposits the number in its Data register.
When we want the robot to execute the instruction "Read CV 65", we enter "65" into the robot's CV register,and press its "Read" button. The robot moves down the boxes until it reaches the 65th box, and retrieves thenumber from that box into is Data register. The robot comes back to us, and we read the number showing in
its Data register.
To have the robot execute the instruction "Set CV 52.5 to 12", we enter "52" into the robot's CV register, "5"into its Primary Index register, "12" into its Data register, and press the "Write" button. The robot moves to thecolumn of boxes at CV52, rises to the 6th row, and there deposits the number in its Data register.
To have the robot execute the instruction "Read CV 53.3.1", we enter "53" into the robot's CV register, "3" into
its Primary Index register, "1" into its Secondary Index register, and press the "Read" button. The robot moves
to the wall of boxes at CV53, rises to the 4th row, moves over to the 2nd column, and retrieves the number
from that box into its Data register. The robot comes back to us, and we read the number displayed in its Dataregister.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 99 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.2

CV 49 QSI Primary Index

Use CV 49 to specify the Primary Index for a CV that is implemented as a one-dimensional or two-dimensional array.
0

Default Value:

CV 49: Primary Index Register (PI)Bit 7 (MSB)
Bit 6
Bit 5
P7



P6

P5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

P4

P3

P2

P1

P0

CV 49 is used as an index into a table of up to 256 related values.
Primary Index
0
1
2
3
…



Bit 4

Table of Values
Value[0]Value[1]Value[2]Value[3]…

For example, CV 49 is used as an index for CV 52, which contains the volume, levels for up to 256 IndividualSounds.
Primary Index
0
1
2
3
…

Table of Volume Levels
Volume Level for Sound[0]Volume Level for Sound[1]Volume Level for Sound[2]Volume Level for Sound[3]…



In this document the terms CV 49 and Primary Index mean the same thing. PI is the abbreviation for Primary
Index.



We use a shorthand notation to simplify description of a CV that is composed of a one-dimensional table ofvalues. The elements of the table are referred to as CV NN.PI, where NN is the CV number, and PI is thePrimary Index. For example, Individual Sound Volume 5 is written CV 52.5. During verbal acknowledgement
or during CV Numeric Verbal Readout (CV 64) from the locomotive, it is spoken out as “CV five two pointfive”.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 100 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.3

CV 50 QSI Secondary Index

Use CV 50 to specify the Secondary Index for a CV that is implemented as a two-dimensional array.
0

Default Value:

CV 50: Secondary Index Register (SI)Bit 7 (MSB)
Bit 6
Bit 5
S7



S6

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

S4

S3

S2

S1

S0

CV 50 is used along with CV 49 as an index into a two-dimensional table of up to 256x256 related values. CV
49 is the row index and CV 50 is the column index.
Primary Index
0
1
2
3
…



S5

Bit 4

0
Value[0,0]Value[1,0]Value[2,0]Value[3,0]…

1Value[0,1]Value[1,1]Value[2,1]
Value[3,1]…

Secondary Index
2
Value[0,2]Value[1,2]Value[2,2]Value[3,2]…

3
Value[0,3]Value[1,3]
Value[2,3]Value[3,3]
…

…
…
…
…
…
…

For example, CV 53 uses CV 49 as a row index (1…14) and CV 50 as a column index (0...1) to assign
different QSI Features to each of fourteen outputs for two states: Forward/Reverse, and NFF/NFR.
Secondary Index
Primary
Index
1
2
3
…
14

0

1

Feature Assigned to Output 1
in FWD/REV
Feature Assigned to Output 2
in FWD/REV
Feature Assigned to Output 3
in FWD/REV…
Feature Assigned to Output
14 in FWD/REV

Feature Assigned to Output 1 in
NFF/NFR
Feature Assigned to Output 2 in
NFF/NFR
Feature Assigned to Output 3 in
NFF/NFR…
Feature Assigned to Output 14
in NFF/NFRIn this document the terms CV 50 and Secondary Index mean the same thing. SI is the abbreviation for
Secondary Index.



We use a shorthand notation to simplify description of a CV that is composed of a two-dimensional table ofvalues. The elements of the table are referred to as CV NN.PI.SI, where NN is the CV number, PI is thePrimary Index, and SI is the Secondary Index. For example, the CV for output 4 in neutral is written CV
53.4.1. During verbal acknowledgement or during CV Numeric Verbal Readout (CV 64) from the locomotive, itis spoken out as “CV five three point four point one”.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 101 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4

CV 51.PI QSI System Sound Control

Use CV 51 to control your Quantum locomotive’s System Volume, Mute Volume and Special Sound Effects
CV51 is implemented as a one-dimensional array, with CV 49 used as an index to these CV 51 registers.

5.4.1 CV 51.0 Operations Mode System Volume (PI = 0)
Use CV 51.0 to change the System Volume.
127

Default Value:CV 51.0: Ops Mode System Volume Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0

V6

V5

V4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

V3

V2

V1

V0



Set CV 49 to “0” to specify the Primary Index for Operations Mode System Volume.

The System Volume can be set to any value between 0 (no sound) and 127 (100%). The upper bit isreserved and should be 0. The default Operations Mode Volume is 127 (100%). A “0” in this CV will reduce allsound effects to zero volume.



The Operations Mode System Volume is the overall sound volume when the locomotive is in normal operationon the main (Operations Mode). When you change the Operations Mode System Volume on the main, youwill immediately hear the change in volume.

All sound is turned off in Service Mode because of the limited power usually available for the programming
track. You can program the System Volume in Service Mode, but you won’t hear the change in volume until
you enter Operations Mode.

In addition to explicitly writing a value to CV51.0, the system volume can be adjusted manually using amagnetic wand or potentiometer (see Appendix IV), or by pressing a function key assigned to System Volume
Increase or System Volume Decrease (see CV53).

Note: The system volume in this CV is the same system volume used during conventional Analog operation.
Changing this CV changes the system volume in Analog DC, and changing the system volume in Analog DCchanges the value of this CV.
Example: Set the Operations Mode System volume to 64 (50% of max).
1. Set CV 49 to 0.
2. Set CV 51 to 64.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 102 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.2 CV 51.1 Operations Mode Mute Volume (PI = 1)
Use CV 51.0 to change the Mute Volume. Mute is one of the Quantum features that can be turned on and off by aFunction Key. When Mute is “On”, the overall volume reduces to the volume set by CV 51.1.
0

Default Value:CV 51.1: Ops Mode Mute Volume Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
0

0

V5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

V4

V3

V2

V1

V0



Set CV 49 to “1” to specify the Primary Index for Operations Mode Mute Volume.

The Mute Volume can be set to any value between 0 (no sound) and 63 (50%). If the Mute Volume is set
over 50% of the System Volume set in CV 51.0, the applied Mute Volume will be 50% of the System Volume
setting. The upper bit is reserved and should be 0. A “0” in this CV will mute all sound effects to zero volume.

The default Mute Volume is 0 (0%).

The Mute Volume applies when the locomotive is in normal operation on the main (Operations Mode). When
you change the Mute Volume on the main and “Mute” has been turned “On” by its assigned Function Key, youwill immediately hear the change in volume.



If you program the Mute Volume in Service Mode, you won’t hear the change in Mute volume until you enter
Operations Mode and activate the Mute feature.
Example: Set the Operations Mode Mute Volume to 32 (25% of max).
1) Set CV 49 to 1.
2) Set CV 51 to 32.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 103 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.3 CV 51.2 Special Sound Effects Enable100 (PI = 2)
Use CV 51.2 to enable/disable special sound effects.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 51.2: Special Sound Effects Enable Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved for
future use

Bell Actuator
Sound

CylinderCocks Armedafter 25
seconds in
NFF/NFR

CylinderCocks Armedon Startup

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Heavy Load
On/OffFeedback

Alternate
Horn
Selection
Feedback

Coded Hornfor GasTurbine Start
Up

Horn
Triggered
Doppler +Horn Fancy
Ending

Write 2 to CV 49 to specify the Primary Index for Special Sound Effects Enable.

Set data in Bit 0 as follows:“0” = Horn triggered Doppler and Horn Fancy Ending effects are disabled 101.
“1” = Horn triggered Doppler and Horn Fancy Ending effects are enabled. (Default)
If Horn Triggered Doppler is enabled, you can obtain a Doppler effect by first blowing the Horn for a least
one second. Any time thereafter, briefly interrupt the horn signal by releasing the horn button andreapplying to produce the Doppler Effect.
Some models have an alternate fancy horn ending. You can play the fancy ending by tapping the horn
button at the end of the horn blast.



Set data in Bit 1 as follows:“0” = Coded Horn triggered Gas Turbine Start Up is disabled.
“1” = Coded Horn triggered Gas Turbine Start Up is enabled. (Default)
If Coded Horn triggered Gas Turbine Start Up is enabled, then 4 short horn blasts in neutral will cause theGas Turbine decoder to transition from Diesel to Turbine operation or from Turbine to Diesel operation.

Set data in Bit 2 as follows:“0” = Alternate Horn Selection Feedback is disabled.
“1” = Alternate Horn Selection Feedback is enabled. (Default)
If Alternate Horn Selection Feedback is enabled, then the newly selected Horn sounds a short hoot when
it is selected. Only certain models have an Alternate Horn.



Set data in Bit 3 as follows:“0” = Heavy Load On/Off Feedback is disabled.
“1” = Heavy Load On/Off Feedback is enabled. (Default)
If Heavy Load On/Off Feedback is enabled, a single horn hoot is played when Heavy Load is turned on.
When Heavy Load is turned off, two horn hoots are played.



Set data in Bit 4 as follows:“0” = Cylinder Cocks are not automatically armed as a result of a Startup (F6) operation.
“1” = Cylinder Cocks are automatically armed as a result of a Startup (F6) operation. (Default)
If this bit is “1” and a Startup (F6) operation occurs, Cylinder Cocks sounds play when the locomotive
starts moving in FWD/REV. The Cylinder Cocks sounds automatically terminate after 16 repetitions orwhen the locomotive reaches a speed greater than 12 smph.

100 Write bit operation is supported for Special Sound Effects Enable.
101
Setting bit 0 to “0” does not disable fancy endings specified in CV55.154.SI for the Grade Crossing Horn Signal.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 104 of 468

5-Aug-15



Set data in Bit 5 as follows:“0” = Cylinder Cocks are not automatically armed after 25 seconds in NFF/NFR.
“1” = Cylinder Cocks are automatically armed after 25 seconds in NFF/NFR. (Default)
If this bit is “1” and the locomotive remains in neutral for at least 25 seconds, Cylinder Cocks sounds playwhen the locomotive starts moving in FWD/REV. The Cylinder Cocks sounds automatically terminate
after 16 repetitions or when the locomotive reaches a speed greater than 12 smph.

Set data in Bit 6 as follows:“0” = The bell actuator sound does not play.
“1” = The bell actuator sound plays when the bell is turned on and the diesel locomotive is in NFF/NFR.
(Default)All other bits are reserved. Any data entered in these bits is ignored.
Example: Set Special Sound Effects according to Feature Table below.
Set CV 49 to 2.
Set CV 51 to value indicated for the combination of features you want.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 105 of 468

5-Aug-15

Cylinder
Cocks
Armed after
25 seconds
in NFF/NFR

CylinderCocks
Armed onStartupHeavy Load
On/OffFeedback

Std/Alt Horn
SelectFeedback

Coded
Horn forGas
TurbineStart Up

Horn
Triggered
Doppler

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

Page 106 of 468

X
X

X
X

X

DecimalValue

Binary Value

Hex
Value

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
0000011000000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
0000111000001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
0010010000100101
0010011000100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
0010110000101101
0010111000101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
0011010000110101
0011011000110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
0011111000111111

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

5-Aug-15

5.4.4 CV 51.3 Special Sound Effects Enable102 (PI = 3)
Use CV 51.3 to enable/disable special sound effects.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 51.3: Special Sound Effects Enable Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
ReservedReserved

Reserved

Long Air
Letoff on
Start Up

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

ReverserType

ReverserType

Fuel Type

Fuel TypeSet data in Bits 1 and 0 as follows:“00” = Coal shovel“01” = Coal auger (Default)“10” = Oil“11” = Wood
This affects the steam automatic neutral fuel sounds, the steam Fuel Sounds feature (ID = 15), and thesteam Fuel Loading Scenario feature (ID = 146).
When the steam automatic neutral fuel sounds play or the Fuel Sounds feature is triggered, the following
sounds are played:“00” = Coal shovel sounds“01” = Coal auger sounds“10” = no sound (oil sounds not available at this time)“11” = no sound (wood sounds not available at this time)
When the steam Fuel Loading Scenario feature is triggered, the following sounds are played:“00” = Coal loading sounds“01” = Coal loading sounds“10” = Oil loading sounds“11” = no sound (wood loading sounds not available at this time)

Set data in Bits 2 and 3 as follows:“00” = Lever Reverser“01” = Power Reverser“10” = Screw Reverser“11” = Reserved

Set data in Bit 4 as follows:“0” = A long air let-off sound does not play on start up.
“1” = A long air let-off sound plays on start up
If this bit is “1” and the locomotive first enters Ops Mode after power up or a Start up (F6) operation
occurs, then a long air let-off sound plays. This is the standard behavior for Q1 and Q2 decoders.



All other bits are reserved. Any data entered in these bits is ignored.

102 Write bit operation is supported for Special Sound Effects Enable.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 107 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.5 CV 51.5 Automatic Mute Timeout Value (PI = 5)
Use this CV to specify the number of seconds of "idle time" after which the locomotive automatically mutes its
sounds.
0

Default Value:CV 51.5: Automatic Mute Timeout Value Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Each unit represents 10 seconds. The maximum value is 255, which represents 2550 seconds or 42 minutes
and 30 seconds.



If the number of specified seconds of idle time is exceeded, the locomotive's sounds are automaticallyreduced to the Mute Volume specified in CV51.1. If the locomotive's sounds are already muted via the Mutefunction, the locomotive's sounds will not change in volume.



If the value of this CV is “0”, this timeout is disabled. Sounds are not automatically muted.

Idle time is defined as the period of time during which the locomotive is in neutral and receives only Speed
packets with speed step "0".



If the locomotive receives a Speed packet with speed step > 0, or any non-speed packet such as a Function
packet or Configuration Variable Access packet, then the idle time is immediately reset and the sounds returnto their previous volume.



Idle time also includes the case where the locomotive receives no valid packets addressed specifically to its
Primary, Extended, or Consist address. This overlaps with the condition, which triggers the CV11 Packet
Timeout, but CV51.5 is independent of CV11 and vice versa. Either or both timeouts may be enabled and do
not interfere with each other.
Example 1: Suppose CV11 = "10" and CV51.5 = "6". Suppose the locomotive enters neutral (speed step 0) and the locomotive
receives no packets other than Speed "0" packets. After 60 seconds of this, the locomotive's sounds are reduced to the CV51.1
Mute Volume.
Example 2: Suppose CV11 = "10" and CV51.5 = "6". The locomotive's speed corresponds to the last received Speed packet
specifying speed step "30". The locomotive does not receive any valid packets addressed to one of its addresses. After 10 secondsof this the CV11 Packet Timeout Value is exceeded and the locomotive automatically slows to a stop and enters neutral, but thelocomotive's sounds do not change in volume. After the locomotive comes to a stop and after 60 additional seconds of receiving novalid packets addressed to one of its addresses, the locomotive's sounds are reduced to the CV51.1 Mute Volume.

Example: Set the Automatic Mute Timeout Value to 10 (100 seconds).
1) Set CV 49 to 5.
2) Set CV 51 to 10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 108 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.6 CV 51.10 Chuff Cutoff Minimum Inertia103 (PI = 10)
Use this CV to specify the value of CV3+CV23 above which the steam locomotive switches from Throttle Mode to
Cutoff Mode.
50

Default Value:CV 51.10: Chuff Cutoff Minimum Inertia Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



Use this CV to control the amount of chuff “bark” you hear when the locomotive accelerates.



If CV3+CV23 is less than or equal to CV51.10, the locomotive operates in Throttle Mode using minimum
cutoff (about 15%). The chuff sounds have a softer and wetter sound, the released steam being reduced inpressure and temperature, since the steam is injected for only a small percentage of the piston stroke.



If CV3+CV23 is greater than CV51.10, the locomotive operates in Cutoff Mode. The amount of cutoff is
proportional to the difference CV3+CV23 - CV51.10. The greater the difference, the greater the amount of
cutoff. When cutoff is at maximum (about 85%), steam is being injected into the cylinders during most of thepiston stroke and is exhausted at full pressure and temperature. This provides the characteristic "bark" of anaccelerating steam locomotive.



See the document "Throttle Mode and Cutoff Mode" for further description of these two modes.
Example: Set the Chuff Cutoff Minimum Inertia to 96.
1) Set CV 49 to 10.
2) Set CV 51 to 96.

103

This CV is supported only by Q2 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 109 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.7 CV 51.12 Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor 104 (PI = 12)
Use this CV to control the low end of Sound of Power volume.
40

Default Value:CV 51.12: Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to control the chuff volume when the locomotive is not accelerating under load. If the chuff
sounds are too quiet at low loads and low acceleration, increase the value of this CV.



See the document "Throttle Mode and Cutoff Mode" for further description of steam Sound of Power.
Example: Set the Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor to 80.
3) Set CV 49 to 12.
4) Set CV 51 to 80.

104

This CV is supported only by Q2 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 110 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.8 CV 51.13 Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor 105 (PI = 13)
Use this CV to control the high end of Sound of Power volume.
65

Default Value:CV 51.13: Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to control the chuff volume when the locomotive is accelerating under load. If the chuff sounds
are too loud at high loads and high acceleration, decrease the value of this CV.



See the document "Throttle Mode and Cutoff Mode" for further description of steam Sound of Power.
Example: Set the Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor to 50.
5) Set CV 49 to 13.
6) Set CV 51 to 50.

105This CV is supported only by Q2 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 111 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.9 CV 51.14 System Volume Balance (PI = 14)106
For Quantum systems with two stereo speaker outputs, CV51.14 functions as the system volume balance control. .
0Default Value:CV 51.14: System Volume Balance Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 51.14 can have any value from –127 to +127. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1” indicatesa negative value.

To specify a negative balance, add 128 to the unsigned balance value. For example, to specify a balance of -60,
add 128 to 60 to obtain 188.



Negative values decrease the volume of speaker 1 and positive values decrease the volume of speaker 2. For
example, a value of 63 decreases the volume of speaker 2 to ((127 – 63) * 100) / 127 = 50%, while leaving the
speaker 1 volume at 100%.

The default value of 0 results in both speaker 1 and speaker 2 having 100% of the system volume specified in
CV51.0 System Volume.

Example: Set the system balance control so that speaker 1 has 100% of the system volume andspeaker 2 has 75% of the system volume.
1. Set CV 49 to 14 to select the system volume balance register.
2. Set CV 51 to 31 to specify the balance.

Example: Set the system balance control so that speaker 2 has 100% of the system volume andspeaker 1 has 75% of the system volume.
1. Set CV 49 to 14 to select the system volume balance register.
2. Set CV 51 to 159 to specify the balance.

106

This CV is supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 112 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.10 CV 51.15 System Pitch Shift (PI = 15)107
This CV shifts the system sound sample rate from the normal samples per second108.
0Default Value:CV 51.15: System Pitch Shift Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Sign

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 51.15 can have any value from –127 to +127 where positive values will increase the pitch and negative values
will decrease the pitch. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1” indicates a negative value.

To specify a negative pitch shift, add 128 to the unsigned pitch shift value. For example, to specify a pitch shiftdown of 60 samples per second, add 128 to 60 to obtain 188.



Each unit represents a shift of 4 samples per second. For example, a value of 10 increases the pitch by 40
samples per second.



Use CV 51.15 to change the pitch of similar locomotives in a consist so that each locomotive produces a distinct
sound.

Example: Pitch shift the system sample rate down 60 samples per second.
1. Set CV 49 to 15 to select the system pitch shift register.
2. Set CV 51 to 188 to specify the pitch shift.

107
108

This CV is supported only by Q3 firmware.
The normal sample rate for version 8 firmware is 7633 samples per second. For version 9 firmware it is 15625 samples per second.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 113 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.11 CV 51.16 Atmospherics Level (PI = 16)109
Use this CV to select the audio system atmospherics level.
2

Default Value:CV 51.16: Atmospherics Level Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
0

0

0

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

0

D2

D1

D0

Valid values for CV 51.16 are:
0 – None
1 – Low
2 - Medium (default)
3 – High
4 - Extreme
When CV51.16 is not 0, the Quantum decoder’s overall sound is artificially enhanced to simulate natural variations insound caused by weather conditions, by temperature and wind gradients, and by topographical features such as
ground cover, hills, buildings, and other obstacles.

Example: Set the atmospherics level to Low.
1. Set CV 49 to 16 to select the atmospherics level register.
2. Set CV 51 to 1 to select the “Low” atmospherics level.

109

This CV is supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 114 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.4.12

CV 51.20 Motive State Change Warning Signals (PI = 20)

Use CV 51.20 to enable/disable motive state change horn warning signals. .

0Default Value:CV 51.20: Motive State Change Warning Signals
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved for
future useReserved for
future use

WarningSignals
Entering
NeutralWarningSignals
Entering
Neutral

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved for
future use

Reserved for
future use

WarningSignals
Leaving
NeutralWarningSignals
Leaving
Neutral

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Warning Signal behavior when leaving neutral.
Bit 0…Bit 1
Value
0
1
2
3

Warning Signals Leaving Neutral
None (default)
Automatic Horn Warning Signals
Bell Triggered Ready to Move Scenario
Reserved

If the bit 0…bit 1 value = 1, then when the locomotive leaves neutral and the horn is not already playing,
two horn blasts are played if the direction is FWD. Three horn blasts are played if the direction is REV.
If the bit 0…bit 1 value = 2, then when the locomotive is in neutral and the bell is turned on in neutral andthe horn is not already playing, the “Ready to Move” scenario plays.
Note that the bell turning on in neutral triggers the Ready to Move scenario. If the bell is on when thelocomotive enters neutral, the Ready to Move scenario will not play unless the bell is turned off and thenturned on again.
The default Ready to Move scenario for NFF->FWD is as follows:
After four seconds, the Front Headlight switches to its FWD state as specified in CV55.70.1.
Two seconds later, the Front Mars Light, Front Ditch Lights, and other warning lights switch totheir FWD states.
Two seconds later, two horn blasts are played.
Three seconds after the horn blasts complete, a brake release sound is played. The brake releasesound continues until the throttle is increased and the locomotive enters FWD.
The default scenario for NFR->REV is as follows:
After four seconds, the Rear Headlight switches to its REV state as specified in CV55.73.1.
Two seconds later, the Rear Mars Light, Rear Ditch Lights, and other warning lights switch to their
REV states.
Two seconds later, three horn blasts are played.
Three seconds after the horn blasts complete, a brake release sound is played. The brake releasesound continues until the throttle is increased and the locomotive enters REV.
Use CV120 to change the timing, duration and number of horn blasts in the Ready to Move scenario.
If the bell is turned off or the horn is turned on manually before the throttle is increased, the scenario isaborted and the lights return to their NFF/NFR states.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 115 of 468

5-Aug-15

After the locomotive enters FWD/REV, the bell does not turn off automatically. If you want the bell to beoff, you must turn it off manually. Firmware built after 17-July-2014 supports CV120.10.0 Bell Hold Time
which allows the bell to be turned off automatically a specified number of seconds after leaving neutral.


Bits 4 and 5 specify the Warning Signal behavior when entering neutral.
Bit 4…Bit 5
Value
0
1
2
3

Warning Signal Entering Neutral
None (default)
Automatic Horn Signal
Bell Armed Upon Stopping Scenario
Reserved

Normally, a long air letoff is played when the locomotive leaves FWD/REV and enters neutral.
If the bit 4…bit 5 value = 1, then when the locomotive leaves FWD/REV and enters neutral and the horn
is not already playing, a single horn blast is played instead of the long air letoff.
If the bit 4…bit 5 value = 2, then if the bell is on when the locomotive leaves FWD/REV and enters neutral
and the horn is not already playing, a scenario consisting of a single horn blast is played. 110 The default
Upon Stopping scenario is as follows:
Two seconds after entering neutral, a single horn blast is played.
Two seconds later, the Front Mars Light, Front Ditch Lights, and other warning lights switch totheir NFF/NFR states.
One second later, the Headlight switches to its NFF/NFR state.
Two seconds after that, a long air letoff is played.
Use CV135 to change the duration of the horn blast and the timing of events in the Upon Stopping
scenario. Use CV135.6.0 to specify whether the bell turns off automatically after the long air letoff.

110 For firmware built before 1-Aug-2014, if the bit 4…bit 5 value = 2, then if the bell is on when the locomotive leaves FWD/REV and enters neutral and the horn is not alreadyplaying, a single horn blast is played instead of the long air letoff. After the locomotive enters neutral, the bell does not turn off automatically. If you want the bell to be off, you mustturn it off manually.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 116 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.5

CV 52.PI QSI Individual Sound Volume Control

Use CV 52 to specify volume levels for individual Quantum sounds.
CV 52.PI: Individual Sound Volume Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0



0

0

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

V3

V2

V1

V0

CV 52 is implemented as a one-dimensional table of up to 256 Individual Sound Volume registers, with CV 49
used as an index to these registers.
Primary Index
0
1
2
3
…



0

Table of Volume Levels
Volume Level for Sound[0]Volume Level for Sound[1]Volume Level for Sound[2]Volume Level for Sound[3]…

To change the volume level of an individual sound, do the following:
1) Set CV 49 to the identifier for the individual sound (see table next page).
2) Set data in Bits 0-3 of CV 52 as follows:“0”“1 – 15”= No sound= Sets the volume level from the lowest level at “1” to the highest level at “15”

 4 bits of volume level are used, providing 16 volume levels. The volume levels correspond to 2db increments.
 All other bits are reserved. Data in bits 4-7 are not used. Any data entered in these bits will be ignored.
 For most CV52.PI CV’s the default value is 11.
Example: Set the bell volume to the 6th volume level and then set the Horn/Whistle volume to 10th
level (i.e. set CV 52.8 to 6 followed by setting CV 52.0 to 11)
3.
Set CV 49 to 8 to select the Bell sound.
4.
Set CV 52 to 6 to select the 6th volume level for the Bell.
5.
Set CV 49 to 0 to select the Horn/Whistle sound.
6.
Set CV 52 to 10 to select the 10th volume level for the Horn/Whistle.
Example: For dual Air Pump Steam Locomotives, turn the volume off on one pump to create single
pump action.
1.
Set CV 49 to 17 to select the second pump sound.
2.
CV 52 to zero to select no volume.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 117 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.5.1 Individual Sound IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Sound

Used
CV52

0
8
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
37
40
41
46
47
50
52
53
54
55
56

Horn/Whistle111
Bell
Prime Mover1/Diesel Motor Idle/Traction Motor112/ Chuff
Prime Mover2113/Diesel Motor2 Idle/Chuff 2114
Valve Rod Clank/Gas Turbine Whoosh
Turbo Idle Volume115
Cylinder Cocks/Gas Turbine Whine
Air Pump 1
Air Pump 2 (Steam Locomotives Only)
Steam Blower Hiss/Cooling Fans116
Snifter ValveLong Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Squealing Brakes
Steam Generator/Diesel Generator Idle117
Dynamic Brakes Fans
Boiler Pop-off/Spitter Valve119
Blow down/Air Dryer120
Injector
Fuel Sounds (Coal Shovel, Coal Auger))
Coupler Sounds
Air Brakes
Alternate Horn
Reverser
User Sound Effect
User Sound Effect2
Verbal Feedback121
Crew Talk
Water Loading Scenario
Water Scoop
Fuel Loading Scenario
Maintenance Scenario

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Used
Used
CV116 CV117
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X

X118
X

X

111

Whistle in steam locomotives; Horn in diesel and electric locomotives.
Chuff in steam Locomotives; Traction Motor in electric locomotives; Diesel Motor Idle in diesel locomotives; Prime Mover1 in diesel locomotives with version 9 firmware.
113 In version 9 diesel firmware built after 1-Jan-15, if CV52.11 = 0 at power-on, the prime mover2 sounds are disabled. If you then set CV52.11 to a non-zero value, the prime
mover2 sounds remain disabled until the next power cycle. If CV52.11 != 0 at power-on the prime mover2 sounds are enabled. If you then set CV52.11 = 0, the prime mover2
sounds remain enabled until the next power cycle.
114
Chuff2 in articulated steam locomotives; Diesel Motor2 Idle in dual motor diesel locomotives
115
Replaced by CV127.10.SI in version 9 firmware.
116
Steam Blower in steam locomotives; Cooling Fans in diesel and electric Locomotives.
117
Replaced by CV127.10.SI in version 9 diesel firmware.
118
Steam Generator only.
119
Popoff in steam locomotives; Spitter Valve in diesel locomotives.
120
Blow down in steam locomotives; Air Dryer in diesel locomotives.
121
Affects CV Readout, Programming Acknowledgement, Status Report, and Odometer Readout.
112

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 118 of 468

5-Aug-15

Used
CV118
X
X

5.6

CV 53.PI.SI Output Feature Assignment

Use CV 53 to assign QSI features to the 30 decoder outputs.
CV 53.PI.SI: Output Feature Assignment Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7



D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 53 is implemented as a two-dimensional table of 30x2 registers, with CV 49 used as a row index to theseregisters, and CV 50 used as a column index.
Secondary Index (CV 50)
PrimaryIndex(CV 49)
1
2
3
.
.
.
14
15
.
.
.
30



0

1

Feature Assigned to Output 1 in
FWD/REV
Feature Assigned to Output 2 in
FWD/REV
Feature Assigned to Output 3 in
FWD/REV‘’‘’‘’
Feature Assigned to Output 14 in
FWD/REV
Feature Assigned to Output 15 in
FWD/REV‘’‘’‘’
Feature Assigned to Output 30 in
FWD/REV

Feature Assigned to Output 1 in
NFF/NFR
Feature Assigned to Output 2 in
NFF/NFR
Feature Assigned to Output 3 in
NFF/NFR‘’‘’‘’
Feature Assigned to Output 14 in
NFF/NFR
Feature Assigned to Output 15 in
NFF/NFR122‘’‘’‘’
Feature Assigned to Output 30 in
NFF/NFR123

To change an output assignment, do the following:
1) Set CV 49 to the decoder Output Number (1…30).
2) Set CV 50 to the Locomotive State (0 for Forward/Reverse, 1 for Neutral (NFF/NFR).
3) Set CV 53 to the QSI Feature Identification Number (see table next page)

122
123



For outputs 1-14, some features can only be assigned to the FWD/REV state and some only to the NFF/NFR
state.



Never assign the same feature to two or more outputs; it is unclear what the effect will be since both outputs
may have different states. For instance, if you assign the Blower Hiss to Output 5 and to Output 7, and Output
5 is off but Output 7 is on, would Blower Hiss be on or off?

Older firmware, which does not support F13-F28, only supports outputs 1-14. When using this firmware,
restrict PI to 1-14.



Firmware that supports F13-F28 also supports outputs 15-30. Because of memory size issues, for Q1 and Q2
decoders SI is restricted to 0 for PI = 15-30 (i.e., for PI = 15-30, CV55.PI.0 is supported but CV55.PI.1 is notsupported). This means the same feature assigned to an output for FWD/REV is also assigned to that output
for NFF/NFR.

CV53.PI.1 is not supported on Q1 and Q2 decoders. Instead CV53.PI.0 specifies the feature for both FWD/REV and NFF/NFR.
CV53.PI.1 is not supported on Q1 and Q2 decoders. Instead CV53.PI.0 specifies the feature for both FWD/REV and NFF/NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 119 of 468

5-Aug-15

Example: Set Long Air Let-Off to Output 5 to operate in Forward and Reverse and set Short Air Let-Off to Output 5 tooperate in Neutral (i.e. set CV 53.5.0 to 9 and set CV 53.5.1 to 10).
1)
Set Primary Index CV 49 to “5” to select output 5.
2)

Set Secondary Index CV 50 to “0” to select Forward/Reverse.

3)

Set CV 53 to “9” (00000101) which is Long Air Let-Off Feature Identification Number.

4)

Set Secondary Index CV 50 to “1” to select Neutral. (CV 49 is already set to output 5.)

5)

Set CV 53 to “10” (00001010) for Short Air Let-Off.

Now the Function key mapped to output 5 will produce a Short Air-Let-Off when the locomotive is in Neutral, and aLong Air Let-Off when the locomotive is moving in Forward and Reverse.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 120 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.6.1 QSI Feature Identification Numbers used with CV 53
The following table lists the QSI Features that may be assigned to function key outputs.
The third column shows the directional states (All, Forward/Reverse, Neutral) for which the feature may be
assigned to an output. Some features, like Blower Hiss or Mute, apply to all states; some features, like Doppler
and Squealing Brakes, only apply to a moving locomotive; some features, like Pop-off or Blow-Down, only apply
to Neutral. The Quantum System allows you to assign, say, Squealing Brakes to Output 7 in Neutral but when the
F5 Key is pressed to activate this feature in Neutral, it will produce no effect.
FeatureFeatureID

Air Brakes

176

AllowedDirectional
States
FWD/REV

Alternate Horn
Selection

2

All

Arm Cylinder
Cocks

6

NFF/NFR

Automatic Ditch
Lights84

All

Automatic Front
Cab Lights

116

All

Automatic Front
Marker Lights

104

All

Automatic Front
Number Board
Lights100

All

Automatic
Headlight

70

All

Automatic Mars
Light

76

All

Automatic
Overhead
Beacon Light
Automatic Rear

92

All

118

All

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Comments

See section “1.13 Air Brakes (F7 in Forward or
Reverse)”.
This selects between the primary warning device
be it either Horn or Whistle and an alternate Horn.
Each time you make a selection, you hear a shorthoot that identifies the Horn or Whistle selected.
To disable feedback, see CV 51.2.
Explicitly arms Cylinder Cocks. If Cylinder Cocks
are armed, Cylinder Cocks sounds play when thelocomotive begins moving in FWD/REV. The
Cylinder Cocks sounds automatically terminate
after 16 repetitions or when the locomotive
reaches a speed greater than 12 smph. See CV
51.2.
When Automatic Ditch Lights is activated, theDitch Lights intensity changes automatically inresponse to changes to the locomotive’s
directional state. See CV 55.84.x.
When Automatic Front Cab Lights is activated, theFront Cab Lights intensity changes automaticallyin response to changes to the locomotive’s
directional state. See CV 55.116.x.
When Automatic Front Marker Lights areactivated, the Front Marker Light intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to thelocomotive’s directional state. See CV 55.104.x.
When Automatic Front Number Board Lights is
activated, Front Number Board Light intensitychanges automatically in response to changes tothe locomotive’s directional state. See CV
55.100.x.
If Automatic Headlight is activated, the Headlightintensity changes automatically in response tochanges to the locomotive’s directional state. See
CV 55.70.x.
If Automatic Mars Light is activated, the Mars Light
intensity changes automatically in response tochanges to the locomotive’s directional state. See
CV 55.76.x.
If Automatic OHBL is activated, the OHBL intensitychanges automatically in response to changes tothe locomotive’s directional state. See CV 55.92.x.
When Automatic Rear Cab Lights is activated,

Page 121 of 468

5-Aug-15

Cab Lights

Automatic Rear
Ditch Lights

88

All

Automatic Rear
Marker Lights

106

All

Automatic Rear
Mars Light

80

All

Automatic Rear
Number Board
Lights102

All

Automatic Rear
Overhead
Beacon Light

97

All

Automatic
Reverse Light

73

All

Bell

3

All

Blow down

13

NFF/NFR

Blower Hiss

8

All

Calibrate BEMF
to SMPH
Cooling Vents
and Fans
Coupler

200

All

8

All

211

All

Gas Turbine<->Diesel Transition
Dim Ditch Lights

24

NFF/NFR86All

Dim Headlight

72

All

Dim Mars Light

78

All

Dim Rear Ditch
LightsDim Rear Mars

90

All

82

All

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Rear Cab Lights turn off in Forward/Reverse after
15 seconds and turn on in Neutral after 10
seconds. See CV 55.118.x.
When Automatic Rear Ditch Lights is activated, theRear Ditch Lights intensity changes automaticallyin response to changes to the locomotive’s
directional state. See CV 55.88.x.
When Automatic Rear Marker Lights is activated,
the Rear Marker Light intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to thelocomotive’s directional state. See CV 55.108.x.
If Automatic Rear Mars Light is activated, the Rear
Mars Light intensity changes automatically inresponse to changes to the locomotive’s
directional state. See CV 55.80.x.
When Automatic Rear Number Board Lights is
activated, the Rear Number Board Light intensitychanges automatically in response to changes tolocomotive’s directional state. See CV 55.102.x.
When Automatic Rear OHBL is activated, the Rear
OHBL intensity changes automatically in responseto changes in the locomotive’s directional state.
See CV 55.96.x.
When Automatic Reverse Light is activated, theReverse Light intensity changes automatically inresponse to changes in the locomotive’s
directional state. See CV 55.73.x.
When on, the bell rings continuously. Some bells
have both start up and shut down sounds. See
section “1.7 Horn and Bell Buttons (F2 Key and F1Key)”. See also CV 55.3.x.
Blow Down produces a sound sequence of venting
water, steam and residue that collects at thebottom of the boiler. The length of the Blow Down
sequence is random. Blow Down sounds areproduced automatically in Neutral at random
intervals so there is no need to assign this feature
to a function key output unless you really want to.
See section “1.9 Steam Blower Hiss and Cooling
Fans (F4 Key)”.
Used to calibrate CV56.7.0-1 SMPH/BEMF Ratio
using the trip odometer.
See section “1.9 Steam Blower Hiss and Cooling
Fans (F4 Key)”.
See section “1.8 Coupler and Coupler Crash
Sounds (F3 Key)”.
Selects between Diesel mode and Turbine mode
for the UP Gas Turbine Locomotive.
Explicitly switches the Ditch Lights from Bright to
be Dim. See CV 55.84.x.
Explicitly switches the Headlight from Bright toDim. See CV 55.70.x.
Explicitly switches the Mars Light from Bright toDim. See CV 55.76.x.
Explicitly switches the Rear Ditch Lights from
Bright to be Dim. See CV 55.88.x.
Explicitly switches the Rear Mars Light from Bright

Page 122 of 468

5-Aug-15

LightDim Reverse
Light
Disconnect/Stand
by/Total Shut
Down
Ditch Lights

75

All

145

NFF/NFR

85

All

Doppler Shift65

FWD/REV

Dynamic Brakes

5

Engine RoomLightsEngine Room2
LightsFireboxFlanges/
Squealing Brakes
Flanges/
Squealing Brakes+ Air Brakes

120

FDW/REV
andDisconnect
All

121

All

122
215

All
FWD/REV

216

FWD/REV

Front Cab Lights

117

All

Front Marker
LightsFront Number
Board Lights
Fuel Loading
Scenario
Fuel Sounds(Coal Shovel,
Coal Auger)
Grade Crossing

105

All

101

All

146

NFF/NFR

Explicitly turns the Engine Room Lights On or Off.
See CV 55.120.x.
Explicitly turns the Engine Room2 Lights On or
Off. See CV 55.120.x.
Turns the Firebox On or Off. See CV 55.122.x.
See section “1.12 Squealing Brakes and Flanges(F7 in Forward or Reverse)”.
This feature is a combination of Flanges/Squealing
Brakes, 215, and Air Brakes, 176. If assigned to afunction key and pressed when Air Brakes would
not normally be functional (i.e. throttle at some
non-zero setting), squealing brakes would still beheard.
Explicitly turns Front Cab Lights On or Off. See CV
55.116.x.
Explicitly turns Front Marker Lights On or Off. See
CV 55.104.x.
Explicitly turns Front Number Board Lights On or
Off. See CV 55.100.x.
Play fuel loading scenario.

15

NFF/NFRPlay fuel sounds.

154

FWD/REV

Headlight

71

All

Heavy Load

179

All

Head End Power
Horn

208
1

NFF/NFRAll

Injector

14

NFF/NFR

Plays a grade crossing scenario consisting of fourhorn blasts: two long blasts, one short blast, andone long blast. See CV55.154.x.
Explicitly turns the Headlight On or Off. See CV
55.70.x.
See section “1.15 Heavy Load (F9 in Forward or
Reverse”.
Turn Head End Power On/Off.
See section “1.7 Horn and Bell Buttons (F2 Key
and F1 Key)”.
When triggered, Injector produces a soundsequence of water being injected into the boiler.
This can happen in any directional state but it ismore obvious in Neutral. The length of the Injector
sequence is random. Injector sounds are produced
automatically in Neutral at random intervals so
there is no need to assign this feature to a function
key output unless you really want to.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

to Dim. See CV 55.80.x.
Explicitly switches the Reverse light from Bright toDim. See CV 55.73.x.
See section “1.18 Three Stages of Shut Down:
Disconnect, Standby and Total Shut Down (F9 in
Neutral)”.
Explicitly turns the Ditch Lights On or Off. See CV
55.84.x.
See section “1.11 Doppler Shift (F6 in Forward
and Reverse)”.
See section “1.10 Dynamic Brakes (F5 Key)”.

Page 123 of 468

5-Aug-15

Long Air Let-off

9All

Maintenance
ScenarioMars Light

148

NFF/NFR

77

All

Multiple
Automatic Lights
#1

136

All

Multiple
Automatic Lights
#2

137

All

Multiple
Automatic Lights
#3

138

All

Mute
None

64
0

All
All

Overhead
Beacon Light
Pop-off

93

All

12

NFF/NFR

Rear Cab Lights

119

All

Rear Ditch Lights

89

All

Rear Marker
LightsRear Mars Light

107

All

81

All

Rear Number
Board Lights
Rear Overhead
Beacon Light
Reverse Light

103

All

97

All

74

All

Short Air Let-off

10

All

Shut Down

143

NFF/NFR

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

When triggered, Long Air Let-off produces an air
release sound of about 1.5 seconds. Use a Long
Air Let-off to simulate operating some steam
appliances like power reverse or applying thebrakes in Neutral on any locomotive.
Play maintenance scenario.
Explicitly turn the Mars Light On or Off. See CV
55.76.x.
The Multiple Automatic Lights #1 feature allows
you to activate more than one automatic lightfeature with a single function key. See CV
55.136.x.
The Multiple Automatic Lights #2 feature allows
you to activate more than one automatic lightfeature with a single function key. See CV
55.137.x
The Multiple Automatic Lights #3 feature allows
you to activate more than one automatic lightfeature with a single function key. See CV
55.138.x.
See section “1.14 Audio Mute (F8 Key)”.
If this feature is assigned to a function key output,
pressing the function key does nothing.
Explicitly turns the Overhead Beacon Light On or
Off. See CV 55.92.x.
When triggered, Pop Off produces a soundsequence of steam being ejected from the boiler.
This can happen in any directional state but it ismore obvious in Neutral. The length of the Pop Off
sequence is random. Pop Off sounds areproduced automatically in Neutral at random
intervals so there is no need to assign this feature
to a function key output unless you really want to.
Explicitly turns Rear Cab Lights On or Off. See CV
55.118.x.
Explicitly turns Rear Ditch Lights On or Off. See
CV 55.88.x.
Explicitly turns Rear Marker Lights On or Off. See
CV 55.106.x.
Explicitly turn the Rear Mars Light On or Off. See
CV 55.80.x.
Explicitly turns the Rear Number Board Lights On
or Off. See CV 55.102.x.
Explicitly turns the Rear Overhead Beacon Light
On or Off. See CV 55.96.x.
Explicitly turns the Reverse light On or Off. See
CV 55.73.x.
When triggered, Short Air Let-off produces an air
release sound of about 1 second. Use a Short Air
Let-off to simulate operating some locomotive
appliances or as a place holder feature for unused
function keys.
Similar to feature 145 Disconnect/Standby/Total
Shut Down except goes direction to Total
Shutdown bypassing Disconnect/Standby.

Page 124 of 468

5-Aug-15

Start Up
Status Report
Steam Generator

144
178
218

NFF/NFRAll
All

Step Lights
Strobe Ditch
LightsStrobe Mars Light

113
87

All
All

79

All

Strobe Rear
Ditch Lights
Strobe Rear MarsLight
System Volume
Increase
System Volume
Decrease
Truck Lights
User Looped
Sound Effect
User Looped
Sound Effect2

91

All

83

All

62

All

63

All

109
26

All
All

28

All

User Sound
Effect25

All

User Sound
Effect2

27

All

Water Scoop
Scenario
Water Loading
Scenario
Whistle150

FWD/REVSee section “1.19 Start Up (F6 in Neutral)”.
See section “1.16 Status Report (F10)”.
Turns the Steam Generator On or Off. Lights areon only if the Steam Generator is On. Lights
brighten gradually when the Steam Generator isturned on and darken gradually when the SteamGenerator is turned off.
Explicitly turns the Step Lights On or Off.
Explicitly turns on or off Ditch Lights strobe. See
CV 55.84.x.
Explicitly turns on or off Mars Light strobe. See CV
55.76.x.
Explicitly turns on or off Rear Ditch Lights strobe.
See CV 55.88.x.
Explicitly turns on or off Rear Mars Light strobe.
See CV 55.80.x.
Increase the system volume by 2db. See also
CV51.0 Operations Mode System Volume.
Decrease the system volume by 2db. See also
CV51.0 Operations Mode System Volume.
Explicitly turns the Truck Lights On or Off.
Turn on/off a User Recorded Sound Effect. See
Q2Upgrade User Manual for further information.
Turn on/off a 2nd User Recorded Sound Effect.
See Q2Upgrade User Manual for further
information.
Trigger the single playing of a User Recorded
Sound Effect. See Q2Upgrade User Manual forfurther information.
Trigger the single playing of a 2nd User Recorded
Sound Effect. See Q2Upgrade User Manual forfurther information.
Play water scoop scenario.

147

NFF/NFRPlay water loading scenario.

1

All

See section “1.7 Horn and Bell Buttons (F2 Key
and F1 Key)”.

Note: Do not confuse the above table with the Individual Sound Identifiers Table shown in CV 52. The abovetable lists ID’s of Features while CV 52 table lists ID’s of Individual Sounds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 125 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.6.2 CV 53 Factory Default Settings
Secondary Index (SI) (CV 50 Value)0
1
Forward/Reverse only
Neutral only

Primary
Index (PI)(CV 49
Value)
1

Output 1

2

Output 2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 91011

Output 10
Output 1112
13

Output 12
Output 13

14

Output 14

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Output 15
Output 16
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19
Output 20
Output 21
Output 22
Output 23
Output 24
Output 25
Output 26
Output 27
Output 28
Output 29
Output 30

Multiple Automatic Lights #1(136)
Multiple Automatic Lights #1(136)
Bell (3)Horn/Whistle (1)Coupler (211)
Blower Hiss/Fans (8)Dynamic Brakes (5)Doppler Shift (65)
Squealing Brakes + Air Brakes(216)
Mute (64)
Heavy Load (179)
Status Report (178)
Alternate Horn Selection (2)Multiple Automatic Lights #2(137)
Multiple Automatic Lights #3(138)
System Volume Decrease (63)System Volume Increase (62)Grade Crossing (154)
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Water Scoop Scenario (150)

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 126 of 468

Multiple Automatic Lights #1(136)
Multiple Automatic Lights #1(136)
Bell (3)Horn/Whistle (1)Coupler (211)
Blower Hiss/Fans (8)Dynamic Brakes (5)Start Up (144)Long Air Let-off (9) or
Arm Cylinder Cocks (6)Mute (64)Disconnect/Standby/
Shut Down (145)
Status Report (178)
Alternate Horn Selection (2)Multiple Automatic Lights #2(137)
Multiple Automatic Lights #3(138)
System Volume Decrease (63System Volume Increase (62)
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Short Air Let-off
Fuel Loading Scenario (146)
Maintenance Scenario (148)
Water Loading Scenario (147)5-Aug-15

5.7

CV 55.PI.SI QSI Feature Configuration

Use CV 55 to configure the behavior of Quantum features.
CV 55 is implemented as a two-dimensional array of registers with both CV 49 and CV 50 used to access theseregisters. The CV 49 Primary Index corresponds to QSI feature identification numbers.

5.7.1 CV 55.1.SI Horn
5.7.1.1

CV 55.1.1 Horn Type124

Your Quantum Decoder may support more than one type of horn. Use CV 55.1.1 to choose from the available hornsounds.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:CV 55.1.1: Horn Type
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7

D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

The following choices are available:
CV55.1.1 Value
1
2
10
11
12
13
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

Type of Horn
Native Horn
User-defined Horn
Buell Single
Buell Single x2
Buell 3-Chime
Buell 5-Chime
Leslie S-2A
Leslie S-2B
Leslie S-2G
Leslie S-2H
Leslie S-2M
Leslie S-3B
Leslie S-3C
Leslie S-3E
Leslie S-3J
Leslie S-3K
Leslie S-3L
Leslie S-3P
Leslie S-4T
Leslie S-5A
Leslie S-5D
Leslie S-5T
Leslie A-125-200-3G
Leslie A-125-200-3H
Leslie A-125-200-5B
Leslie A-125-200-5C
Leslie A-125-3E
Leslie A-125-3F
Leslie A-125-4A
Leslie A-125-5A
Leslie A-75-262
Leslie A-75-262 x2
Leslie A-75-330
Leslie A-75-330 x2
Leslie A-75-440
Leslie A-125-200 Combo
Leslie A-125-206
Leslie A-125-206 x2

124 CV55.1.1 is currently supported only by version 9 Diesel firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 127 of 468

5-Aug-15

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
110
111
112
113
114
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133

Leslie A-125-247
Leslie A-125-247 x2
Leslie A-125-277
Leslie A-125-277 x2
Leslie A-125-311
Leslie A-125-311 x2
Leslie A-125-349
Leslie A-125-349 x2
Leslie A-125-440
Leslie A-125-440 x2
Leslie A-200-156
Leslie A-200-156 x2
Leslie A-200-233
Leslie A-200-233 x2
Nathan/AirChime H5-1
Nathan/AirChime H5-2
Nathan/AirChime H5-3
Nathan/AirChime H6Nathan/AirChime K3
Nathan/AirChime K3HNathan/AirChime K3Ha
Nathan/AirChime K3L
Nathan/AirChime K3La
Nathan/AirChime K3LL
Nathan/AirChime K5
Nathan/AirChime K5HNathan/AirChime K5L
Nathan/AirChime K5La
Nathan/AirChime K5La Amtrak HP
Nathan/AirChime K5La Amtrak LP
Nathan/AirChime K5Lam
Nathan/AirChime K5LL
Nathan/AirChime K5LLa
Nathan/AirChime K5LLLa
Nathan/AirChime K6La
Nathan/AirChime M3
Nathan/AirChime M3-1
Nathan/AirChime M3-1 x2Nathan/AirChime M3-12
Nathan/AirChime M3HNathan/AirChime M5
Nathan/AirChime M5 (Burnett)
Nathan/AirChime M5-124
Nathan/AirChime M5HNathan/AirChime MS1
Nathan/AirChime MS2
Nathan/AirChime MS3
Nathan/AirChime P3
Nathan/AirChime P5
Nathan/AirChime P5aNathan/AirChime P5s
Prime PM920 1st Gen
Prime PM920 2nd Gen
Prime PM920 3rd Gen
Prime PM990 1st Gen
Prime PM990 2nd Gen
Wabco A-1
Wabco A-1 x2
Wabco A-1 #2
Wabco A-1 #2 x2
Wabco A-2
Wabco A-2 x2
Wabco AA-1
Wabco AA-2
Wabco B-7-21
Wabco B-7-21 x2
Wabco B-7-25
Wabco B-7-25 x2
Wabco D-5 long
Wabco D-5 long x2

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 128 of 468

5-Aug-15

134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143

Wabco D-5 short
Wabco D-5 short x2
Wabco DD-5
Wabco E-2
Wabco E-2 x2
Wabco E-2B4
Wabco E-2B4 x2
Wabco E-2B-1
Wabco E-44"
Wabco E-44" x2

Selection “1: Native Horn” refers to the horn the model manufacturer considers to be prototypical for the locomotive. 125
If you select “2 User-defined Horn”, use the following CV’s to define pitch, volume, and stereo balance for up to 6
chimes:CV130.1-6.0
User-defined Horn Component Pitch
CV127.0.1-6
User-defined Horn Component Volume Levels
CV128.0.1-6
User-defined Horn Component Balance
Selections 10 thru 143 have pre-defined component pitch, component volume, and component balance settings. If
you select one of the pre-defined horns, CV130, CV127, and CV128 have no effect.
Use CV52.0 Horn Volume and CV116.0 Horn Balance to adjust the overall volume and stereo balance of all the listed
horns.
If you set CV 55.1.1 to a value other than the listed choices, the decoder will revert to “1: Native Horn”.

125 The native horn can be replaced using Q2Upgrade’s Cut&Paste feature.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 129 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.1.2

CV 55.1.2 Alternate Horn Type126

Your Quantum Decoder may support more than one type of alternate horn. Use CV 55.1.2 to choose from theavailable alternate horn sounds.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:CV 55.1.2: Alternate Horn Type
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

The following choices are available:
CV55.1.2 Value
1
2
10
…
143

Type of Horn
Native Alternate Horn
User-defined Alternate Horn
Buell Single…
Wabco E-44" x2

Choices 10 thru 143 are the same as those for CV55.1.1 Horn Type.
Selection “1: Native Alternate Horn” refers to the horn the model manufacturer considers to be prototypical for the
locomotive.127
If you select “2 User-defined Alternate Horn”, use the following CV’s to define pitch, volume, and stereo balance for up
to 6 chimes:
CV131.1-6.0
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Pitch
CV127.40.1-6
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Volume Levels
CV128.40.1-6
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Balance
Selections 10 thru 143 have pre-defined component pitch, component volume, and component balance settings. If
you select one of the pre-defined horns, CV131, CV127, and CV128 have no effect.
Use CV52.40 Alternate Horn Volume and CV116.40 Alternate Horn Balance to adjust the overall volume and stereobalance of all the listed horns.
If you set CV 55.1.2 to a value other than the listed choices, the decoder will revert to “1: Native Alternate Horn”.

126 CV55.1.2 is currently supported only by version 9 Diesel firmware.
127 The native alternate horn can be replaced using Q2Upgrade’s Cut&Paste feature.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 130 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.1.3

CV 55.1.10 Horn Reverb Amount

Use CV 55.1.10 to adjust the reverb amount for certain horns.
96

Default Value:CV 55.1.10: Horn Reverb Amount Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV specifies the amount of reverb for all types of horns except “1: Native Horn” and for all types of alternatehorns except “1: Native Alternate Horn”.
Valid values are 0…255.
A value of 0 specifies no reverb.
A value of 255 specifies the maximum amount of reverb.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 131 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.1.4

CV 55.1.11 Horn Reverb Distance

Use CV 55.1.11 to adjust the reverb distance for certain horns.
2

Default Value:CV 55.1.11: Horn Reverb Distance Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV specifies the reverb distance for all types of horns except “1: Native Horn” and for all types of alternate horns
except “1: Native Alternate Horn”.
Valid values are 0…6.
A value of 0 specifies “near” reverb.
A value of 255 specifies “far” reverb.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 132 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.2 CV 55.3.SI Bell5.7.2.1

CV 55.3.0 Maximum Bell Index

This read-only CV contains the number of bell sounds available in your Quantum Decoder.
Depends on Locomotive

Value:CV 55.3.0: Maximum Bell Index
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

In Service Mode, to determine the number of bells available:
1) Set CV 49 to 3.
2) Set CV 50 to 0.
3) Then read back CV 55.
In Ops Mode, to determine the number of bells available:
1) Set CV 49 to 3.
2) Set CV 50 to 0.
3) Then set CV 64 to 55 to hear a verbal response.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 133 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.2.2

CV 55.3.1 Bell TypeYour Quantum Decoder may have more than one type of bell sound. Use CV 55.3.1 to choose from the available bellsounds.
1128

Default Value:CV 55.3.1: Bell Type
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7

D6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Q1a version 7, Q2 version 7, and Q2x version 8 firmware
Use CV 55.3.0 to determine “N”, the number of bell sounds available.
Set CV 55.3.1 to a number from “0” to “N”. Selection “1” is the native bell for this model; selection “0” is“Feedback Bell”129.
If you set CV 55.3.1 to a value larger than “N”, the decoder will revert to “0”, the “Feedback Bell”.
If you set CV 55.3.1 to 1…N in Ops Mode, and the locomotive’s bell is ringing, the newly selected bell will begin
ringing immediately.
Q3 version 9 firmware
The following choices are available:
CV55.3.1
Value
0
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Type of BellFeedback Bell
Native BellUser-defined Pneumatic Bell
Bronze Bell, High Tone, Slow
Bronze Bell, High Tone, Medium
Bronze Bell, High Tone, Fast
Bronze Bell, Mid Tone, Slow
Bronze Bell, Mid Tone, Medium
Bronze Bell, Mid Tone, Fast
Bronze Bell, Low Tone, Slow
Bronze Bell, Low Tone, Medium
Bronze Bell, Low Tone, Fast
Mixed Metal Bell, High Tone, Slow
Mixed Metal Bell, High Tone, Medium
Mixed Metal Bell, High Tone, Fast
Mixed Metal Bell, Mid Tone, Slow
Mixed Metal Bell, Mid Tone, Medium
Mixed Metal Bell, Mid Tone, Fast
Mixed Metal Bell, Low Tone, Slow
Mixed Metal Bell, Low Tone, Medium
Mixed Metal Bell, Low Tone, Fast
Steel Bell, High Tone, Slow
Steel Bell, High Tone, Medium
Steel Bell, High Tone, Fast
Steel Bell, Mid Tone, Slow
Steel Bell, Mid Tone, Medium
Steel Bell, Mid Tone, Fast
Steel Bell, Low Tone, Slow
Steel Bell, Low Tone, Medium
Steel Bell, Low Tone, Fast

Type “1: Native Bell” has a fixed ring rate, metallurgy, and pitch.
128 The default for some European models is 0, because their prototype did not have a bell.
129 Feedback Bells produce a single light “ding” when turning the bell on and a double “ding” when shutting the bell off. This bell type is suitable for locomotives that are notintended to have bells but need a bell sound to indicated that the bell state is on or off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 134 of 468

5-Aug-15

Type “2: User-defined Pneumatic Bell” has a ring rate that can be changed using CV55.3.6, metallurgy that canbe changed using CV55.3.7, and pitch that can be changed using CV118.8.0-1.
The pre-defined types 10 thru 36 have fixed ring rates, metallurgy, and pitch.
If you set CV 55.3.1 to a value other than those listed, the decoder will revert to “1: Native Bell”.
If you change CV55.3.1 in Ops Mode, and the locomotive’s bell is ringing, the bell sound will not change to the
new type until the bell is stopped and restarted. If the locomotive’s bell is not ringing, the locomotive will play ashort demo of the newly selected bell.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 135 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.2.3

CV 55.3.5 Automatic Bell

Use CV 55.3.5 if you want the bell to turn on automatically when you blow the horn.
Default Value:5

CV 55.3.5: Automatic Bell
Bit 7
Bit 6
EnableAutomatic
Bell

Hold Time

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If bit 7 = “1”, the bell will turn on automatically when you blow the horn. The bell will also turn on automaticallywhen you trigger the Grade Crossing feature (feature 154).



Bits 0…6 specify the automatic bell hold time, or the number of seconds the bell will remain on after the horn
blast ends. For example, if the hold time is “5”, then the bell will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the horn
blast ends.

Prototypically, in locomotives where the bell turns on automatically when the horn is blown, the bell remains
on indefinitely and must be turned off manually. To obtain this behavior, set the hold time to “0” (i.e., set
CV55.3.5 to 128). Then the bell does not automatically turn off when the horn blast ends. You must manuallyturn the bell off by pressing the Bell button (F3) twice. The first Bell button press sets F3 to “1”, or bell on. The
second Bell button press sets F3 to “0”, or bell off.



If the hold time is not “0”, the maximum hold time is 127 seconds.



If the bell is already on (F3 = “1”) when you blow the horn, the bell remains on indefinitely after the horn blast
ends.



The automatic bell and CV55.3.5 are not supported by steam and articulated steam firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 136 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.2.4

CV 55.3.6 User-defined Bell Ring Period

Use CV 55.3.6 to adjust the bell ring period for user-defined bells.
100

Default Value:CV 55.3.6: User-defined Bell Ring Period Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV specifies the time between the start of each bell record for the when CV55.3.1 = “2: User-defined Pneumatic
Bell”.
Each unit represents 0.01 second130. A value of 100 gives a ring period of 1.0 second. The maximum period is 2.55
seconds.
Ring rate is the inverse of ring period. The longer the ring period, the slower the ring rate. The shorter the ring period,
the faster the ring rate.
Valid values are 10…255. If the value is less than 10, a ring period of 10 is used.

130

For 1123-0v9-2-0 and 1127-0v9-2-0 firmware, each unit represents 0.1 second. A value of 10 gives a ring period of 1.0 second. Valid values are 1…255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 137 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.2.5

CV 55.3.7 User-defined Bell Metallurgy

Use CV 55.3.6 to adjust the bell ring period for certain bells.
128

Default Value:CV 55.3.7: User-defined Bell Metallurgy Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV specifies the relative amounts of bronze vs steel when CV55.3.1 = “2: User-defined Pneumatic Bell”.
Valid values are 0…255.
A value of 255 represents 100% bronze and 0% steel.
A value of 0 represents 0% bronze and 100% steel.
A value of 128 represents 50% bronze and 50% steel.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 138 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.3 CV 55.5.SI Dynamic Brakes Fans
5.7.3.1

CV 55.5.12 Dynamic Brakes Fans Max Power131

This CV specifies the power applied to the dynamic brakes fans port (see CV115.5.0) when the dynamic brakes areturned on.
255

Default Value:CV 55.5.12: Dynamic Brakes Fans Max Power
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

131

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 giving the least power (off) and 255 giving most power.



In Ops mode, with the Dynamic Brakes “On”, you can observe the fans speed change as you change thevalue of CV 55.5.12.

This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 139 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.3.2

CV 55.5.17 Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Up Time132

This CV specifies the time for the dynamic brakes fans to go from “Off” to “Max Power”.

Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.5.17: Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the power applied to the fans to change from 0 to its maximum.

Each unit represents 0.1 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 2.5 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the least and 255 being the most amount of time.



If the Ramp Up Time is 60, it takes 6.0 seconds for the light to go from off to bright.



The default value corresponds to the length of the fan start record.

132

This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 140 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.3.3

CV 55.5.18 Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Down Time133

This CV specifies the time for the dynamic brakes fans to go from “Max Power” to “Off”.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.5.18: Dynamic Brakes Fans Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the power applied to the fans to change from its maximum to 0.

Each unit represents 0.1 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 2.5 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the least and 255 being the most amount of time.



If the Ramp Down Time is 80, it takes 8.0 seconds for the light to go from bright to off.

The default value corresponds to the length of the fan stop record.

133

This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 141 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.4 CV 55.8.SI Cooling Fans
5.7.4.1

CV 55.8.12 Cooling Fans Max Power134

This CV specifies the power applied to the cooling fans port (see CV115.8.0) when the cooling fan is turned on.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.8.12: Cooling Fan Max Power
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

134

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 giving the least power (off) and 255 giving most power.



In Ops mode, with the cooling fans “On”, you can observe the fans speed change as you change the value of
CV 55.8.12.

This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 142 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.4.2

CV 55.8.17 Cooling Fans Ramp Up Time135

This CV specifies the time for the cooling fans to go from “Off” to “Max Power”.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.8.17: Cooling Fans Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the power applied to the fans to change from 0 to its maximum.

Each unit represents 0.1 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 2.5 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the least and 255 being the most amount of time.



If the Ramp Up Time is 60, it takes 6.0 seconds for the light to go from off to bright.



The default value corresponds to the length of the fan start record.

135This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 143 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.4.3

CV 55.8.18 Cooling Fans Ramp Down Time136

This CV specifies the time for the cooling fans to go from “Max Power” to “Off”.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.8.18: Cooling Fans Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the power applied to the fans to change from its maximum to 0.

Each unit represents 0.1 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 2.5 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the least and 255 being the most amount of time.



If the Ramp Down Time is 80, it takes 8.0 seconds for the light to go from bright to off.

The default value corresponds to the length of the fan stop record.

136

This CV is supported only by version 9 Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 144 of 468

5-Aug-15

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 145 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.5 CV 55.12.SI Spitter Valve
5.7.5.1

CV 55.12.1 Spitter Valve Minimum Interval

Use this CV to specify the minimum time interval for the diesel spitter valve sound to play.
5

Default Value:CV 55.12.1: Spitter Valve Minimum Interval
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the minimum time interval in seconds between spitter valve sounds.

The spitter valve sound plays at intervals randomly chosen between the CV55.12.1 and CV55.12.2 values. For
example, if CV55.12.1 = 5 and CV55.12.2 = 10, the spitter valve sound will play at 5 to 10 second intervals.



If CV55.12.2 is less than or equal to CV55.12.1, CV55.12.2 is not used and the spitter valve sound plays at a
fixed interval specified by CV55.12.1.



If CV55.12.1 = 0, the spitter valve sound will not play.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 146 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.5.2

CV 55.12.2 Spitter Valve Maximum Interval

Use this CV to specify the maximum time interval for the diesel spitter valve sound to play.
10

Default Value:CV 55.12.1: Spitter Valve Maximum Interval
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the maximum time interval in seconds between spitter valve sounds.

The spitter valve sound plays at intervals randomly chosen between the CV55.12.1 and CV55.12.2 values. For
example, if CV55.12.1 = 5 and CV55.12.2 = 10, the spitter valve sound will play at 5 to 10 second intervals.



If CV55.12.2 is less than or equal to CV55.12.1, CV55.12.2 is not used and the spitter valve sound plays at a
fixed interval specified by CV55.12.1.



If CV55.12.1 = 0, the spitter valve sound will not play.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 147 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.6 CV 55.13.SI Air Dryer
5.7.6.1

CV 55.13.1 Air Dryer Minimum Interval

Use this CV to specify the minimum time interval for the air dryer valve sound to play.
20

Default Value:CV 55.12.1: Air Dryer Minimum Interval
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the minimum time interval in seconds between air dryer sounds.



The air dryer sound plays at intervals randomly chosen between the CV55.13.1 and CV55.13.2 values. For
example, if CV55.13.1 = 20 and CV55.13.2 = 25, the air dryer sound will play at 20 to 25 second intervals.



If CV55.13.2 is less than or equal to CV55.13.1, CV55.13.2 is not used and the air dryer sound plays at a fixedinterval specified by CV55.13.1.



If CV55.13.1 = 0, the air dryer sound will not play.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 148 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.6.2

CV 55.13.2 Air Dryer Maximum Interval

Use this CV to specify the maximum time interval for the air dryer sound to play.
25

Default Value:CV 55.13.1: Air Dryer Maximum Interval
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the maximum time interval in seconds between air dryer sounds.



The air dryer sound plays at intervals randomly chosen between the CV55.13.1 and CV55.13.2 values. For
example, if CV55.13.1 = 20 and CV55.13.2 = 25, the air dryer sound will play at 20 to 25 second intervals.



If CV55.13.2 is less than or equal to CV55.13.1, CV55.13.2 is not used and the air dryer sound plays at a fixedinterval specified by CV55.13.1.



If CV55.13.1 = 0, the air dryer sound will not play.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 149 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.7 CV 55.21.SI Diesel Motor Parameters
5.7.7.1

CV 55.21.0 Speed Steps Per Notch137

Use this CV to specify the number of speed steps between notches for your diesel locomotive.
10

Default Value:CV 55.21.0: Speed Steps Per Notch Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies how DCC speed steps in 128 speed step mode map to notch levels for automatic diesel
motor notching. In 14 or 28 speed step mode, the speed step is converted to 128 speed step format before
this CV is applied.

Valid values are 1…255. A value of 0 effectively disables automatic notching.

The formula used to map the speed steps to notches is:if ( CV55.21.0 != 0 ) {if ( Speed_Step == 0 ) {Notch_Level = 0;
} else {Notch_Level = ((Speed_Step – 1) / CV55.21.0) + 1;}}

The default value of 10 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…10
11…20
21…30
31…40
41…50
51…60
61…70
71…126



A value of 8 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…8
9…16
17…24
25…32
33…40
41…48
49…56
57…126

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A value of 15 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…15
16-30
31-45
44…60

137

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4

CV55.21.0 is replaced by CV129.1.0 in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 150 of 468

5-Aug-15

61…7576…90
91-105106-1265
6
7
8

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 151 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 55.21.1 Low Idle Timeout138

5.7.7.2

Use this CV to specify the time after entering neutral when a diesel motor automatically drops to low idle.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:CV 55.21.1: Low Idle Timeout Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies the time that a diesel motor automatically drops to low idle after entering neutral (speed step 0
and locomotive stopped).

Each unit represents 1 second. For example, if the CV has value 8, then the motor will drop to low idle 8 seconds
after entering neutral.



If the value of this CV is 0, the motor does not automatically drop to low idle.

All function keys and the throttle remain enabled after the motor drops to low idle. By contrast, in the Standby
stage of shutdown, where the diesel motor is also in low idle, most function keys and the throttle are disabled.

The motor remains in low idle until one of the following events occurs:-

The throttle is increased to speed step > 0.

-F6 is double pressed, assuming the Startup (144) feature is assigned to F6.



If you double press F6 after the locomotive enters neutral and before the countdown reaches 0, the motor will not
drop to low idle.



If the locomotive is in Disconnect (F9 double press) when the countdown reaches 0, the motor will drop to low
idle. If the locomotive is then put into Standby, the motor remains in low idle.

This CV is supported only by Q3 firmware running on FX decoders.

138

CV55.21.1 is replaced by CV129.2.0 in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 152 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8 CV 55.70.SI HeadlightThree features can be assigned to function keys to control headlight operation:
Feature ID
70
71
72

Feature Name
Automatic Headlight Activate
Headlight On
Headlight Dim

Use
Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Headlight
Explicitly turn the Headlight On/Off
Explicitly specify the Headlight be Dim/Bright

The headlight intensity (Off, Dim*, Bright) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 70 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The headlight intensity changes automaticallyin response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
Forward
BrightNeutral from
Forward
Dim*

ReverseDim*

Neutral from
ReverseDim*

The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.70.1.
Feature 70 has precedence over Features 71 and 72. When the Feature 70 function state is 1, the Feature 71 and 72
function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 70 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The headlight intensity reverts to the
Feature 71 and 72 function states.
Feature 72
Function
State
X
0
1

Feature 71
Function
State
0
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim*

Feature 70 has precedence over Features 71 and 72. If the Feature 70 function state changes to 1, because of a
Feature 70 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 71 has precedence over Feature 72. If the Feature 71 function state is 0, the Feature 72 function state isignored.
* If the headlight cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 153 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.1

CV 55.70.0 Headlight Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Headlight features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.70.0: Headlight Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Gas
TurbineTransition
Light
Behavior

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

Feature 72
Function
State

Feature 71
Function
State

Feature 70
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Headlight Activate (Feature 70) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Headlight On (Feature 71) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Headlight Dim (Feature 72) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 70, 71 and 72 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 70, 71 and 72 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Bit 7 is used only with Gas Turbine firmware. If the value of bit 7 is 0, then the Headlight is turned off at the
beginning of the Diesel to Turbine and Turbine to Diesel transition scenarios and turned back on when the
scenarios end. If the value of bit 7 is 1, the Headlight remains in its current state during these scenarios. Thisbit also controls whether the Reverse Light, Mars Light, Rear Mars Light, Ditch Lights, and Rear Ditch Lights
are turned off and back on during these scenarios.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 154 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.2

CV 55.70.1 Automatic Headlight Configuration

Use this CV to configure the Automatic Headlight behavior 139.
Default Value:86

CV 55.70.1: Automatic Headlight Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

NFR
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

NFR
Intensity

REV
Intensity

REV
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

FWD

Default value = 01010110 binary = 56 hex = 86 decimal.



Bits 0,1 specify the headlight intensity in FWD, bits 2,3 the intensity in NFF, bits 4,5 the intensity in REV, andbits 6,7 the intensity in NFR.



Bit 1
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 7

Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 6

Intensity

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Off
Dim*
BrightReserved

The default settings specify the following behavior:
FWD
Bright

NFF
Dim*

REV
Dim*

NFR
Dim*

* If the headlight cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

139

CV55.70.1 does not affect headlight behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 155 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.3

CV 55.70.10 Headlight Dim Intensity

For models with a dimmable Headlight, this CV controls its dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.70.10: Headlight Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Headlight dimmed, you can observe the Headlight intensity change as you change thevalue of CV 55.70.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 156 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.4

CV 55.70.12 Headlight Max Intensity

For models with a 256 intensity level Headlight, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.70.12: Headlight Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Headlight state “bright”, you can observe the Headlight intensity change as you change
the value of CV 55.70.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 157 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.5

CV 55.70.15 Headlight Ramp Up Rate140

For models with a 256 intensity level Headlight, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its statechanges from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
25

Default Value:CV 55.70.15: Headlight Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

140

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 being the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Headlight to go from off tobright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second for
the Headlight to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 158 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.6

CV 55.70.16 Headlight Ramp Down Rate141

For models with a 256 intensity level Headlight, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when its
state changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
25

Default Value:CV 55.70.16: Headlight Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

141

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Headlight to go frombright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Headlight to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 159 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.7

CV 55.70.17 Headlight Ramp Up Time142

For models with a 256 intensity level Headlight, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its statechanges from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
10

Default Value:CV 55.70.17: Headlight Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

142

This CV replaces CV55.70.15 Headlight Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 160 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.8

CV 55.70.18 Headlight Ramp Down Time143

For models with a 256 intensity level Headlight, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when it’sstate changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
10

Default Value:CV 55.70.18: Headlight Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

143

This CV replaces CV55.70.16 Headlight Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 161 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.8.9

CV 55.70.SI Headlight Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic headlight to be bright in all four motive states, NFF, REV and NFR as well as
FWD.
Solution: Set CV 55.70.1 to 10101010 binary = AA hex = 170 decimal.

Example 2: How will the headlight behave if I set CV 55.70.0 to 00000111 binary = 07 hex = 7 decimal?
Answer: The automatic headlight is initially activated and the headlight intensity is controlled by the CV 55.70.1
settings. If the automatic headlight is deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the FL function state is 0,
then the Feature 71 function state turns the headlight on, and the Feature 72 function state makes the headlightdim.

Example 3: I want explicit headlight on/off control at all times. At startup I want the headlight off until I turn it onwith a function key. When the headlight is on, it should be bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.70.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic headlight feature from multiple automatic lights #1
by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign feature 71 to a function output.

Example 4: Same as example 3, but I want to explicitly dim the headlight as well. When I first turn the headlighton, it should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.70.0 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Next remove the automatic headlightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign feature 71 to afunction output and feature 72 to a second function output.

Example 5: I want explicit control over whether the headlight is bright or dim, but the headlight will always be on.
On startup the headlight should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.70.0 to 00000110 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal. Next remove the Automatic Headlightfeature from Multiple Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign feature 72 to afunction output. You do not need to assign feature 71 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 162 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9 CV 55.73.SI Reverse Light
Three features can be assigned to function keys to control reverse light operation:
Feature
ID
73
74
75

Feature Name
Automatic Reverse Light Activate
Reverse Light On
Reverse Light Dim

Use
Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Reverse Light
Explicitly turn the Reverse Light On/Off
Explicitly specify the Reverse Light be Dim/Bright

The reverse light intensity (Off, Dim*, Bright) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 73 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The reverse light intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
ForwardDim*

Neutral from
Forward
Dim*

ReverseBrightNeutral from
ReverseDim*

The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.73.1.
Feature 73 has precedence over Features 74 and 75. When the Feature 73 function state is 1, the Feature 74 and 75
function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 73 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The reverse light intensity changes in
response to Feature 74 and 75 function key presses.
Feature 75
Function
State
X
0
1

Feature 74
Function
State
0
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim*

If the Feature 73 function state changes to 1, because of a Feature 73 function key press or a start up operation,
automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 74 has precedence over Feature 75. If the Feature 74 function state is 0, the Feature 75 function state isignored.
* If the reverse light cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 163 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.1

CV 55.73.0 Reverse Light Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Reverse Light features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.73.0: Reverse Light Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Feature 75
Function
State

Feature 74
Function
State

Feature 73
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Reverse Light Activate (Feature 73) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Reverse Light On (Feature 74) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Reverse Light Dim (Feature 75) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 73, 74 and 75 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 73, 74 and 75 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 164 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.2

CV 55.73.1 Automatic Reverse Light Configuration

Use this CV to configure the Automatic Reverse Light behavior 144.
101

Default Value:CV 55.73.1: Automatic Reverse Light Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

NFR
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

NFR
Intensity

REV
Intensity

REV
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

FWD

NFF
Intensity

Default value = 01100101 binary = 65 hex = 101 decimal.



Bits 0,1 specify the reverse light intensity in FWD, bits 2,3 the intensity in NFF, bits 4,5 the intensity in REV,and bits 6,7 the intensity in NFR.
Bit 1
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 7
0
0
1
1



Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 6
0
1
0
1

Intensity

Off
Dim*
BrightReserved

The default settings specify the behavior:
FWD
Dim*

NFF
Dim*

REV
Bright

NFR
Dim** If the reverse light cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

144

CV55.73.1 does not affect reverse light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 165 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.3

CV 55.73.10 Reverse Light Dim Intensity

For models with a dimmable Reverse Light, this CV controls its dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.73.10: Reverse Light Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Reverse Light dimmed, you can observe the Reverse Light intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.73.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 166 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.4

CV 55.73.12 Reverse Light Max Intensity145

For models with a 256 intensity level Reverse Light, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.73.12: Reverse Light Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

145

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Reverse Light state “bright”, you can observe the Reverse Light intensity change as
you change the value of CV 55.73.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 167 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.5

CV 55.73.15 Reverse Light Ramp Up Rate146

For models with a 256 intensity level Reverse Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its
state changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
25

Default Value:CV 55.73.15: Reverse Light Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

146

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Reverse Light to go from
off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second for
the Reverse Light to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 168 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.6

CV 55.73.16 Reverse Light Ramp Down Rate147

For models with a 256 intensity level Reverse Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when its
state changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
25

Default Value:CV 55.73.16: Reverse Light Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

147

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Reverse Light to gofrom bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Reverse Light to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 169 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.7

CV 55.73.17 Reverse Light Ramp Up Time148

For models with a 256 intensity level reverse light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its
state changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
10

Default Value:CV 55.73.17: Reverse Light Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

148

This CV replaces CV55.73.15 Reverse Light Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 170 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.8

CV 55.73.18 Reverse Light Ramp Down Time149

For models with a 256 intensity level reverse light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when its
state changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
10

Default Value:CV 55.73.18: Reverse Light Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

149

This CV replaces CV55.73.16 Reverse Light Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 171 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.9.9

CV 55.73.SI Reverse Light Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic reverse light to be bright in all four motive states, NFF, REV and NFR as well as
FWD.
Solution: Set CV 55.73.1 to 10101010 binary = AA hex = 170 decimal.

Example 2: How will the reverse light behave if I set CV 55.73.0 to 00000111 binary = 07 hex = 7 decimal?
Answer: The automatic reverse light is initially activated and the reverse light intensity is controlled by the CV
55.73.1 settings. If the automatic reverse light is deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the FL function
state is 0, then the Feature 74 function state turns the reverse light on, and the Feature 75 function state makes
the reverse light dim.

Example 3: I want explicit reverse light on/off control at all times. At startup I want the reverse light off until I turnit on with a function key. When the reverse light is on, it should be bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.73.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic reverse light feature from multiple automatic lights#1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 1 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 74 to a function output.

Example 4: Same as example 3, but I want to explicitly dim the reverse light as well. When I first turn the reverse
light on, it should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.73.0 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Next remove the automatic reverse lightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 1 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 74 to afunction output and Feature 75 to a second function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 172 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10

CV 55.76.SI Mars Light

Four features can be assigned to function keys to control mars light operation:
Feature
ID
76
77
78
79

Feature Name
Automatic Mars Light Activate
Mars Light On
Mars Light Dim
Mars Light Strobe

Use
Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Mars Light
Explicitly turn the Mars Light On/Off
Explicitly specify the Mars Light be Dim/Bright
Explicitly turn on/off Mars Light strobe

The mars light intensity (Off, Dim, Bright, Strobe) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 76 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The mars light intensity changes automaticallyin response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
ForwardStrobeNeutral from
Forward
Dim

ReverseDim

Neutral from
ReverseDim

The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.76.1, CV 55.76.2, CV 55.76.3, and CV 55.76.4.
Feature 76 has precedence over Features 77, 78 and 79. When the Feature 76 function state is 1, the Feature 77, 78
and 79 function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 76 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The Mars Light intensity changes in
response to Feature 77, 78 and 79 function key presses.
Feature 79
Function
State
x
0
0
1

Feature 78
Function
State
X
0
1
X

Feature 77
Function
State
0
1
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim
StrobeFeature 76 has precedence over Features 77, 78 and 79. If the Feature 76 function state changes to 1, because of a
Feature 76 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 77 has precedence over Features 78 and 79. If the Feature 77 function state is 0, the Feature 78 and 79
function states are ignored.
Feature 79 has precedence over Feature 78. If the Feature 79 function state is 1, the Feature 78 function state isignored.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 173 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.1 CV 55.76.0 Mars Light Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Mars Light features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.76.0: Mars Light Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Feature 79
Function
State

Feature 78
Function
State

Feature 77
Function
State

Feature 76
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Mars Light Activate (Feature 76) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Mars Light On (Feature 77) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Mars Light Dim (Feature 78) function.

Bit 3 is the initial state of the Mars Light Strobe (Feature 79) function.

If bit 4 = 1, under explicit control the mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the mars light isalready strobing, no change in mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows. Bit 4 is applied even
if the Feature 77 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 76 function state is 1.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 76, 77, 78 and 79 function states to be immediately
set to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 76, 77, 78 and 79 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 174 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.2 CV 55.76.1 Automatic Mars Light FWD Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in forward 150.
Default Value:3

CV 55.76.1: Automatic Mars Light FWD Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3 decimal (strobe).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the mars light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



150

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in mars
light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.76.1 does not affect mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 175 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.3 CV 55.76.2 Automatic Mars Light NFF Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in neutral from forward 151.
Default Value:1

CV 55.76.2: Automatic Mars Light NFF Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the mars light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



151

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in mars
light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.76.2 does not affect mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 176 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.4 CV 55.76.3 Automatic Mars Light REV Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in reverse 152.
Default Value:1

CV 55.76.3: Automatic Mars Light REV Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the mars light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



152

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in mars
light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.76.3 does not affect mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 177 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.5 CV 55.76.4 Automatic Mars Light NFR Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in neutral from reverse 153.
Default Value:1

CV 55.76.4: Automatic Mars Light NFR Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the mars light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



153

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in mars
light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.76.4 does not affect mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 178 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.6 CV 55.76.5 Mars Light Strobe Hold TimeUse this CV to specify the number of seconds the mars light continues to strobe after a horn blast ends.
Default Value:5

CV 55.76.5: Mars Light Strobe Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Hold Time

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If Strobe with Horn is specified, this CV is applied at the end of a horn blast.



Default value = 00000101 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal.

Valid values are 0…31 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 179 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.7 CV 55.76.6 Mars Light Strobe Period
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls its strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.76.6: Mars Light Strobe Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete strobe cycle to complete.



In Ops mode, with the Mars Light strobing, you can observe the Mars Light strobe rate change as you change
the value of CV 55.76.6.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 180 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.8 CV 55.76.10 Mars Light Dim Intensity
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls its dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.76.10: Mars Light Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Mars Light dimmed, you can observe the Mars Light intensity change as you change
the value of CV 55.76.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 181 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.9 CV 55.76.11 Mars Light Min Intensity
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls its minimum brightness when its state is “strobing”.
4

Default Value:CV 55.76.11: Mars Light Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.76.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.76.13.



In Ops mode, with the Mars Light strobing, you can observe the intensity change as you change the value of
CV 55.76.11.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 182 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.10 CV 55.76.12 Mars Light Max Intensity
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright” or “strobing”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.76.12: Mars Light Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.76.12 to a value greater than the value of CV55.76.13.



In Ops mode, with the Mars Light bright or strobing, you can observe the Mars Light intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.76.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 183 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.11 CV 55.76.13 Mars Light Mid Intensity
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls the brightness of the secondary strobe pulse.
32

Default Value:CV 55.76.13: Mars Light Mid Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.76.13 to a value greater than the value of CV55.76.11 and less than the value of CV55.76.12.



In Ops mode, with the Mars Light strobing, you can observe the intensity of the secondary strobe pulsechange as you change the value of CV 55.76.13.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 184 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.12 CV 55.76.15 Mars Light Ramp Up Rate154
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its state changes from off
to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
25

Default Value:CV 55.76.15: Mars Light Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

154

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Mars Light to go from off
to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second for
the Mars Light to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 185 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.13 CV 55.76.16 Mars Light Ramp Down Rate155
For models with a Mars Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when its state changes frombright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
25

Default Value:CV 55.76.16: Mars Light Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

155

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Mars Light to go frombright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Mars Light to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 186 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.14 CV 55.76.17 Mars Light Ramp Up Time156
This CV controls the rate at which the Mars Light intensity increases when its state changes from off to bright, off todim, or dim to bright.
10

Default Value:CV 55.76.17: Mars Light Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

156

This CV replaces CV55.76.15 Mars Light Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 187 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.15 CV 55.76.18 Mars Light Ramp Down Time157
This CV controls the rate at which the Mars Light intensity decreases when its state changes from bright to off, brightto dim, or dim to off.
10

Default Value:CV 55.76.18: Mars Light Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

157

This CV replaces CV55.76.16 Mars Light Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 188 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.10.16 CV 55.76.SI Mars Light Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic mars light to be bright (not strobing) in all four motive states, NFF, REV and NFR
as well as FWD.
Solution: Set CV 55.76.1…4 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal.

Example 2: How will the mars light behave if I set CV 55.76.0 to 00001111 binary = 0F hex = 15 decimal?
Answer: The automatic mars light is initially activated and the mars light intensity is controlled by the CV 55.76.1…4
settings. If the automatic mars light is deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the FL function state is 0,
then the Feature 77 function state turns the mars light on, and the Feature 79 function state makes the mars lightstrobe.

Example 3: I want explicit mars light on/off control at all times. At startup I want the mars light off until I turn it onwith a function key. When the mars light is on, it should strobe.
Solution: First set CV 55.76.0 to 00001000 binary = 08 hex = 8 decimal. Next remove the automatic mars lightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 2 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 77 to afunction output.

Example 4: Same as example 3, but I want to explicitly dim and strobe the mars light as well. When I first turn themars light on, it should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.76.0 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Next remove the automatic mars lightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 2 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 77 to afunction output, Feature 78 to a second function output, and Feature 79 to a third function output.

Example 5: I want to explicitly dim and strobe the mars light, but the mars light should be always on. On startup,
the mars light should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.76.0 to 00000110 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal. Next remove the Automatic Mars Lightfeature from Multiple Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 2 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 78 to afunction output and Feature 79 to a second function output. You do not need to assign Feature 77 to a function
output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 189 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11

CV 55.80.SI Rear Mars Light

Four features can be assigned to function keys to control Rear Mars Light operation:
Feature
ID
80
81
82
83

Feature Name
Automatic Rear Mars Light
Activate
Rear Mars Light On
Rear Mars Light Dim
Rear Mars Light Strobe

Use
Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear MarsLight
Explicitly turn the Rear Mars Light On/Off
Explicitly specify the Rear Mars Light be Dim/Bright
Explicitly turn on/off Rear Mars Light strobe

The rear mars light intensity (Off, Dim, Bright, and Strobe) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 80 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The rear mars light intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
ForwardStrobeNeutral from
Forward
Dim

ReverseDim

Neutral from
ReverseDim

The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.80.1, CV 55.80.2, CV 55.80.3, and CV 55.80.4.
Feature 80 has precedence over Features 81, 82 and 83. When the Feature 80 function state is 1, the Feature 81, 82
and 83 function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 80 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The Rear Mars Light intensity changes in
response to Feature 81, 82 and 83 function key presses.
Feature 83
Function
State
x
0
0
1

Feature 82
Function
State
X
0
1
X

Feature 81
Function
State
0
1
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim
StrobeFeature 80 has precedence over Features 81, 82 and 83. If the Feature 80 function state changes to 1, because of a
Feature 80 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 81 has precedence over Features 82 and 83. If the Feature 81 function state is 0, the Feature 82 and 83
function states are ignored.
Feature 83 has precedence over Feature 82. If the Feature 83 function state is 1, the Feature 82 function state isignored.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 190 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.1 CV 55.80.0 Rear Mars Light Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear Mars Light features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.80.0: Rear Mars Light Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Horn

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Feature 83
Function
State

Feature 82
Function
State

Feature 81
Function
State

Feature 80
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear Mars Light Activate (Feature 80) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Rear Mars Light On (Feature 81) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Rear Mars Light Dim (Feature 82) function.

Bit 3 is the initial state of the Rear Mars Light Strobe (Feature 83) function.

If bit 4 = 1, under explicit control the rear mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the rear mars
light is already strobing, no change in rear mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows. Bit 4 isapplied even if the Feature 81 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 80 function state is 1.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 80, 81, 82 and 83 function states to be immediately
set to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 80, 81, 82 and 83 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 191 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.2 CV 55.80.1 Automatic Rear Mars Light FWD Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in forward158.
Default Value:1

CV 55.80.1: Automatic Rear Mars Light FWD Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Intensity

Intensity

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Horn

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Mars Light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



158

Reserved

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the rear mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inrear mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.80.1 does not affect rear mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 192 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.3 CV 55.80.2 Automatic Rear Mars Light NFF Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in neutral fromforward159.
Default Value:1

CV 55.80.2: Automatic Rear Mars Light NFF Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Mars Light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



159

Reserved

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the rear mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inrear mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.80.2 does not affect rear mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 193 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.4 CV 55.80.3 Automatic Rear Mars Light REV Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in reverse 160
Default Value:3

CV 55.80.3: Automatic Rear Mars Light REV Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3 decimal (strobe).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Mars Light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



160

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the rear mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inrear mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.80.3 does not affect rear mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 194 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.5 CV 55.80.4 Automatic Rear Mars Light NFR Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Mars Light behaves when the locomotive is in neutral fromreverse161.
Default Value:1

CV 55.80.4: Automatic Rear Mars Light NFR Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (dim).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Mars Light intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1



161

Reserved

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim
BrightStrobeIf bit 2 = 1, the rear mars light strobes when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inrear mars light behavior will be observed when the horn blows.

CV55.80.4 does not affect rear mars light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 195 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.6 CV 55.80.5 Rear Mars Light Strobe Hold TimeUse this CV to specify the number of seconds the rear mars light continues to strobe after a horn blast ends.
Default Value:5

CV 55.80.5: Rear Mars Light Strobe Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Hold Time

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If Strobe with Horn is specified, this CV is applied at the end of a horn blast.



Default value = 00000101 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal.

Valid values are 0…31 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 196 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.7 CV 55.80.6 Rear Mars Light Strobe Period162
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls its strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.80.6: Rear Mars Light Strobe Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

162

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete strobe cycle to complete.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Mars Light strobing, you can observe the Rear Mars Light strobe rate change as
you change the value of CV 55.80.6.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 197 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.8 CV 55.80.10 Rear Mars Light Dim Intensity
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls its dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.80.10: Rear Mars Light Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Rear Mars Light dimmed, you can observe the Rear Mars Light intensity change as
you change the value of CV 55.80.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 198 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.9 CV 55.80.11 Rear Mars Light Min Intensity163
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls its minimum brightness when its state is “strobing”.
4

Default Value:CV 55.80.11: Rear Mars Light Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

163

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.80.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.80.13.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Mars Light strobing, you can observe the intensity change as you change thevalue of CV 55.80.11.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 199 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.10 CV 55.80.12 Rear Mars Light Max Intensity164
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright” or “strobing”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.80.12: Rear Mars Light Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

164

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.80.12 to a value greater than the value of CV55.80.13.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Mars Light bright or strobing, you can observe the Rear Mars Light intensitychange as you change the value of CV 55.80.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 200 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.11 CV 55.80.13 Rear Mars Light Mid Intensity165
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls the brightness of the secondary strobe pulse.
32

Default Value:CV 55.80.13: Rear Mars Light Mid Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

165

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.80.13 to a value greater than the value of CV55.80.11 and less than the value of CV55.80.12.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Mars Light strobing, you can observe the intensity of the secondary strobe pulsechange as you change the value of CV 55.80.13.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 201 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.12 CV 55.80.15 Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Rate166
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity increases when its state changes
from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright.
25

Default Value:CV 55.80.15: Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

166

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Mars Light to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second for
the Rear Mars Light to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 202 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.13 CV 55.80.16 Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Rate167
For models with a Rear Mars Light, this CV controls the rate at which its intensity decreases when its state changes
from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off.
25

Default Value:CV 55.80.16: Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

167

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Mars Light to gofrom bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Rear Mars Light to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 203 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.14 CV 55.80.17 Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Time168
This CV controls the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity increases when its state changes from off to bright, off
to dim, or dim to bright.
10

Default Value:CV 55.80.17: Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

168

This CV replaces CV55.80.15 Rear Mars Light Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 204 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.15 CV 55.80.18 Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Time169
This CV controls the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity decreases when its state changes from bright to off,bright to dim, or dim to off.
25

Default Value:CV 55.80.18: Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does not affect the rate at which the Rear Mars Light intensity changes while it is strobing.

169

This CV replaces CV55.80.16 Rear Mars Light Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 205 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.11.16 CV 55.80.SI Rear Mars Light Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic rear mars light to be bright (not strobing) in all four motive states, NFF, REV andNFR as well as FWD.
Solution: Set CV 55.80.1…4 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal.

Example 2: How will the rear mars light behave if I set CV 55.80.0 to 00001111 binary = 0F hex = 15 decimal?
Answer: The automatic rear mars light is initially activated and the rear mars light intensity is controlled by the CV
55.80.1…4 settings. If the automatic rear mars light is deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the FL
function state is 0, then the Feature 81 function state turns the rear mars light on, and the Feature 83 function state
makes the rear mars light strobe.

Example 3: I want explicit rear mars light on/off control at all times. At startup I want the rear mars light off until I
turn it on with a function key. When the rear mars light is on, it should strobe.
Solution: First set CV 55.80.0 to 00001000 binary = 08 hex = 8 decimal. Next remove the automatic rear mars lightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 3 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 81 to afunction output.

Example 4: Same as example 3, but I want to explicitly dim and strobe the rear mars light as well. When I first turnthe rear mars light on, it should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.80.0 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Next remove the automatic rear mars lightfeature from multiple automatic lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 3 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 81 to afunction output, Feature 82 to a second function output, and Feature 83 to a third function output.

Example 5: I want to explicitly dim and strobe the rear mars light, but the rear mars light should be always on. On
startup, the rear mars light should be dim.
Solution: First set CV 55.80.0 to 00000110 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal. Next remove the Automatic Rear Mars
Light feature from Multiple Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 3 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 82
to a function output and Feature 83 to a second function output. You do not need to assign Feature 81 to a function
output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 206 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12

CV 55.84.SI Ditch Lights

Four features can be assigned to function keys to control ditch lights operation:
Feature
ID
84
85
86
87

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Ditch Lights Activate
Ditch Lights On
Ditch Lights Dim
Ditch Lights Strobe

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Ditch Lights
Explicitly turn the Ditch Lights On/Off
Explicitly specify the Ditch Lights be Dim/Bright
Explicitly turn on/off Ditch Lights strobe

The ditch lights intensity (Off, Dim, Bright, Strobe) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 84 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The ditch lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
Forward
BrightNeutral from
Forward
Off

ReverseOff

Neutral from
ReverseOffThe automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.84.1, CV 55.84.2, CV 55.84.3, and CV 55.84.4.
Feature 84 has precedence over Features 85, 86 and 87. When the Feature 84 function state is 1, the Feature 85, 86
and 87 function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 84 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The ditch lights intensity changes in
response to Feature 85, 86 and 87 function key presses.
Feature 87
Function
State
X
0
0
1

Feature 86
Function
State
X
0
1
X

Feature 85
Function
State
0
1
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim*
StrobeFeature 84 has precedence over Features 85, 86 and 87. If the Feature 84 function state changes to 1, because of a
Feature 84 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 85 has precedence over Features 86 and 87. If the Feature 85 function state is 0, the Feature 86 and 87
function states are ignored.
Feature 87 has precedence over Feature 86. If the Feature 87 function state is 1, the Feature 86 function state isignored.
* If the ditch lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 207 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.1 CV 55.84.0 Ditch Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Ditch Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.84.0: Ditch Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Off if Front
Headlight
Dim/Off

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Feature 87
Function
State

Feature 86
Function
State

Feature 85
Function
State

Feature 84
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Ditch Lights Activate (Feature 84) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Ditch Lights On (Feature 85) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Ditch Lights Dim (Feature 86) function.

Bit 3 is the initial state of the Ditch Lights Strobe (Feature 87) function.

If bit 4 = 1, under explicit control the ditch lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the ditch lights are
already strobing, no change in Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows. Bit 4 is appliedeven if the Feature 85 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 84 function state is 1.

If bit 5 = 1, under explicit control the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the ditch lights are
already strobing, no change in Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on. Bit 5 is appliedeven if the Feature 85 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 84 function state is 1.

If bit 7 = 1, the Ditch Lights automatically turn off if the Front Headlight turns dim or off. This applies to bothautomatic and explicit ditch lights control.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 84, 85, 86 and 87 function states to be immediately
set to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 84, 85, 86 and 87 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 208 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.2 CV 55.84.1 Automatic Ditch Lights FWD Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in forward 170.
Default Value:6

CV 55.84.1: Automatic Ditch Lights FWD Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000110 binary = 06 hex = 6 decimal (bright, strobe with horn).



Bits 0 and 1 specify the ditch lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the ditch lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

170

CV55.84.1 does not affect ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 209 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.3 CV 55.84.2 Automatic Ditch Lights NFF Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in neutral from forward 171.
Default Value:0

CV 55.84.2: Automatic Ditch Lights NFF Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the ditch lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the ditch lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

171

CV55.84.2 does not affect ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 210 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.4 CV 55.84.3 Automatic Ditch Lights REV Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in reverse 172
Default Value:0

CV 55.84.3: Automatic Ditch Lights REV Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the ditch lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the ditch lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

172

CV55.84.3 does not affect ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 211 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.5 CV 55.84.4 Automatic Ditch Lights NFR Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in neutral from reverse 173.
Default Value:0

CV 55.84.4: Automatic Ditch Lights NFR Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Strobewith Horn

Intensity

Intensity

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the ditch lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the ditch lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

173

CV55.84.4 does not affect ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 212 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.6 CV 55.84.5 Ditch Lights Strobe Hold TimeUse this CV to specify the number of seconds the ditch lights continue to strobe after a horn blast ends or the bell
stops.
Default Value:5

CV 55.84.5: Ditch Lights Strobe Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Hold Time

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If Strobe with Horn or Strobe with Bell is specified, this CV is applied at the end of a horn blast or when thebell stops.

Default value = 00000101 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal.

Valid values are 0…31 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 213 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.7 CV 55.84.6 Ditch Lights Strobe Period174
For models with Ditch Lights, this CV controls their strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.84.6: Ditch Lights Strobe Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

174

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete strobe cycle of both ditch lights to complete.



In Ops mode, with the Ditch Lights strobing, you can observe the strobe rate change as you change the valueof CV 55.84.6.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 214 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.8 CV 55.84.10 Ditch Lights Dim Intensity
For models with dimmable Ditch Lights, this CV controls the dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.84.10: Ditch Lights Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Ditch Lights dimmed, you can observe the Ditch Lights intensity change as you change
the value of CV 55.84.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 215 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.9 CV 55.84.11 Ditch Lights Min Intensity175
For models with Ditch Lights, this CV controls its minimum brightness when its state is “strobing”.
0Default Value:CV 55.84.11: Ditch Lights Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

175

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.84.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.84.12.



In Ops mode, with the Ditch Lights strobing, you can observe the minimum intensity change as you change
the value of CV 55.84.11.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 216 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.10 CV 55.84.12 Ditch Lights Max Intensity176
For models with 256 intensity level Ditch Lights, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright” or “strobing”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.84.12: Ditch Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

176

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Ditch Lights state “bright” or “strobing”, you can observe the Ditch Lights intensitychange as you change the value of CV 55.84.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 217 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.11 CV 55.84.15 Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate177
For models with 256 intensity level Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity increases when thestate changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright, or when strobing.
25

Default Value:CV 55.84.15: Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

177

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Ditch Lights to go from off
to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second forthe Ditch Lights to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 218 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.12 CV 55.84.16 Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate178
For models with a 256 intensity level Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when thestate changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off, or when strobing.
25

Default Value:CV 55.84.16: Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

178

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Ditch Lights to go frombright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Ditch Lights to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 219 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.13 CV 55.84.17 Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time179
For models with 256 intensity level Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity increases when thestate changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright, or when strobing.
10

Default Value:CV 55.84.17: Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

179

This CV replaces CV55.84.15 Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 220 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.14 CV 55.84.18 Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time180
For models with 256 intensity level Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when thestate changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off, or when strobing.
10

Default Value:CV 55.84.18: Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

180

This CV replaces CV55.84.16 Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 221 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.12.15 CV 55.84.SI Ditch Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic ditch lights to be bright (not strobing) in all four motive states, NFF, REV andNFR as well as FWD. I want the ditch lights to strobe when the horn blows in both FWD and REV.
Solution: Set CV 55.84.1 and CV 55.84.3 to 00000110 binary = 06 hex = 6 decimal. Set CV 55.84.2 and CV
55.84.4 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal.
Example2: I want the automatic ditch lights to be off in all four motive states. But I want the ditch lights to strobe
when the horn blows in both FWD and REV.
Solution: Set CV 55.84.1 and CV 55.84.3 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Set CV 55.84.2 and CV
55.84.4 to 0.
Example 3: How will the ditch lights behave if I set CV 55.84.0 to 00011111 binary = 1F hex = 31 decimal?
Answer: The automatic ditch lights are initially activated and the ditch lights intensity is controlled by the CV
55.84.1…4 settings. If the automatic ditch lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the FL
function state is 0, then the Feature 85 function state turns the ditch lights on, and the Feature 87 function state
makes the ditch lights strobe.

Example 4: I want explicit ditch lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the ditch lights off until I turnthem on with a function key. When the ditch lights are on, they should be bright (not strobing).
Solution: First set CV 55.84.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic ditch lights feature from multiple automatic lights#1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 4 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 85 to a function output.

Example 5: Same as example 4, but I want to explicitly dim and strobe the ditch lights as well. When I first turnthe ditch lights on, they should be bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.84.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic ditch lights feature from multiple automatic lights#1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 4 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 85 to a function output, Feature 86 to asecond function output, and Feature 87 to a third function output.

Example 6: I want to explicitly strobe the ditch lights, but when not strobing the ditch lights should be always
bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.84.0 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal. Next remove the Automatic Ditch Lightsfeature from Multiple Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 4 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 87 toa function output. You do not need to assign Feature 85 to a function output.

Example7: Similar to example 2, I want the automatic ditch lights to be off in all four motive states. But I want theditch lights to strobe when the horn blows in FWD only. Further, I want this behavior even if FL is 0.
Solution: First set CV 55.84.0 to 1. Then set CV 55.84.1 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Set CV
55.84.2, CV 55.84.3 and CV 55.84.4 to 0. Finally remove the Automatic Ditch Lights feature from Multiple
Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 4 to 0.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 222 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13

CV 55.88.SI Rear Ditch Lights

Four features can be assigned to function keys to control Rear Ditch Lights operation:
Feature
ID
88
89
90
91

Feature Name
Automatic Rear Ditch Lights
Activate
Rear Ditch Lights On
Rear Ditch Lights Dim
Rear Ditch Lights Strobe

Use
Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear Ditch
LightsExplicitly turn the Rear Ditch Lights On/Off
Explicitly specify the Rear Ditch Lights be Dim/Bright
Explicitly turn on/off Rear Ditch Lights strobe

The Rear Ditch Lights intensity (Off, Dim, Bright, Strobe) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 88 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The Rear Ditch Lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
Forward
BrightNeutral from
Forward
Off

ReverseOff

Neutral from
ReverseOffThe automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.88.1, CV 55.88.2, CV 55.88.3, and CV 55.88.4.
Feature 88 has precedence over Features 89, 90 and 91. When the Feature 88 function state is 1, the Feature 89, 90
and 91 function states are ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 88 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The Rear Ditch Lights intensity changes in
response to Feature 89, 90 and 91 function key presses.
Feature 91
Function
State
X
0
0
1

Feature 90
Function
State
X
0
1
X

Feature 89
Function
State
0
1
1
1

Intensity

Off
BrightDim*
StrobeFeature 88 has precedence over Features 89, 90 and 91. If the Feature 88 function state changes to 1, because of a
Feature 88 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.
Feature 89 has precedence over Features 90 and 91. If the Feature 89 function state is 0, the Feature 90 and 91
function states are ignored.
Feature 91 has precedence over Feature 90. If the Feature 91 function state is 1, the Feature 90 function state isignored.
* If the Rear Ditch Lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 223 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.1 CV 55.88.0 Rear Ditch Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear Ditch Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.88.0: Rear Ditch Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Off if Rear
Headlight
Dim/Off

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Feature 91
Function
State

Feature 90
Function
State

Feature 89
Function
State

Feature 88
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights Activate (Feature 88) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Rear Ditch Lights On (Feature 89) function.

Bit 2 is the initial state of the Rear Ditch Lights Dim (Feature 90) function.

Bit 3 is the initial state of the Rear Ditch Lights Strobe (Feature 91) function.

If bit 4 = 1, under explicit control the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Rear Ditch
Lights are already strobing, no change in Rear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.
Bit 4 is applied even if the Feature 89 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 88 function state is 1.

If bit 5 = 1, under explicit control the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Rear Ditch
Lights are already strobing, no change in Rear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.
Bit 5 is applied even if the Feature 89 function state is 0, but is ignored if the Feature 88 function state is 1.

If bit 7 = 1, the Rear Ditch Lights automatically turn off if the Rear Headlight turns dim or off. This applies toboth automatic and explicit rear ditch lights control.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 88, 89, 90 and 91 function states to be immediately
set to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 88, 89, 90 and 91 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 224 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.2 CV 55.88.1 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights FWD Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in forward181.
Default Value:0

CV 55.88.1: Automatic Rear Ditch Lights FWD Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Intensity

Intensity

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Ditch Lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inRear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the Rear Ditch Lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

181

CV55.88.1 does not affect rear ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 225 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.3 CV 55.88.2 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFF Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in neutral fromforward182.
Default Value:0

CV 55.88.2: Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFF Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Intensity

Intensity

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Ditch Lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inRear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the Rear Ditch Lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

182

CV55.88.2 does not affect rear ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 226 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.4 CV 55.88.3 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights REV Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in reverse 183.
Default Value:6

CV 55.88.3: Automatic Rear Ditch Lights REV Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Intensity

Intensity

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Default value = 00000110 binary = 06 hex = 6 decimal (bright, strobe with horn).



Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Ditch Lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inRear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the Rear Ditch Lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

183

CV55.88.3 does not affect rear ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 227 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.5 CV 55.88.4 Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFR Configuration
Use this CV to configure how the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights behave when the locomotive is in neutral fromreverse184.
Default Value:0

CV 55.88.4: Automatic Rear Ditch Lights NFR Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Intensity

Intensity

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Strobewith Bell

Strobewith Horn

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal (off).

Bits 0 and 1 specify the Rear Ditch Lights intensity.
Bit 1
0
0
1
1

Bit 0
0
1
0
1

Intensity
Off
Dim*
BrightStrobe

If bit 2 = 1, the Rear Ditch Lights strobe when the horn blows. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change inRear Ditch Lights behavior will be observed when the horn blows.



If bit 3 = 1, the ditch lights strobe when the bell is on. Note that if the Intensity = Strobe, no change in ditch
lights behavior will be observed when the bell turns on.

* If the Rear Ditch Lights cannot be dimmed, then Dim = Off.

184

CV55.88.4 does not affect rear ditch light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 228 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.6 CV 55.88.5 Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Hold TimeUse this CV to specify the number of seconds the Rear Ditch Lights continue to strobe after a horn blast ends or thebell stops.
Default Value:5

CV 55.88.5: Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Hold Time

Hold Time

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If Strobe with Horn or Strobe with Bell is specified, this CV is applied at the end of a horn blast or when thebell stops.

Default value = 00000101 binary = 05 hex = 5 decimal.

Valid values are 0…31 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 229 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.7 CV 55.88.6 Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Period185
For models with Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls their strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.88.6: Rear Ditch Lights Strobe Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

185

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete strobe cycle of both rear ditch lights to complete.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Ditch Lights strobing, you can observe the strobe rate change as you change thevalue of CV 55.88.6.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 230 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.8 CV 55.88.10 Rear Ditch Lights Dim Intensity
For models with dimmable Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls the dim intensity.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.88.10: Rear Ditch Lights Dim Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



The default value is dependent on the model.

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Rear Ditch Lights dimmed, you can observe the Rear Ditch Lights intensity change as
you change the value of CV 55.88.10.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 231 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.9 CV 55.88.11 Rear Ditch Lights Min Intensity186
For models with Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls its minimum brightness when its state is “strobing”.
0Default Value:CV 55.88.11: Rear Ditch Lights Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

186

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.88.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.88.12.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Ditch Lights strobing, you can observe the minimum intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.88.11.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 232 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.10 CV 55.88.12 Rear Ditch Lights Max Intensity187
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls its intensity when its state is “bright” or“strobing”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.88.12: Rear Ditch Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

187

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, with the Rear Ditch Lights state “bright” or “strobing”, you can observe the Rear Ditch Lights
intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.88.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 233 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.11 CV 55.88.15 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate188
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity increases when
the state changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright, or when strobing.
25

Default Value:CV 55.88.15: Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

188

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Ditch Lights to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 25, it takes 0.013 second for
the Rear Ditch Lights to go from off to dim, and 0.089 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does affect the rate the Rear Ditch Lights intensity changes while they are strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 234 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.12 CV 55.88.16 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate189
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases
when the state changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off, or when strobing.
25

Default Value:CV 55.88.16: Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

189

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Ditch Lights to gofrom bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 32 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 25, it takes 0.089 second
for the Rear Ditch Lights to go from bright to dim, and 0.013 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Rear Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 235 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.13 CV 55.88.17 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time190
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the Rear Ditch Lights intensity
increases when the state changes from off to bright, off to dim, or dim to bright, or when strobing.
10

Default Value:CV 55.88.17: Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 0.3 second for thelight to go from off to dim, and 0.9 second to go from dim to bright.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Rear Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

190

This CV replaces CV55.88.15 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 236 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.14 CV 55.88.18 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time191
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Ditch Lights, this CV controls the rate at which the Rear Ditch Lights intensity
decreases when the state changes from bright to off, bright to dim, or dim to off, or when strobing.
10

Default Value:CV 55.88.18: Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.



If the Dim Intensity is 64 and the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 0.9 second forthe light to go from bright to dim, and 0.3 second to go from dim to off.

This CV does affect the rate at which the Ditch Lights intensity changes when they are strobing.

191

This CV replaces CV55.88.16 Rear Ditch Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 237 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.13.15 CV 55.88.SI Rear Ditch Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic rear ditch lights to be bright (not strobing) in all four motive states, NFF, REV
and NFR as well as FWD. I want the ditch lights to strobe when the horn blows in both FWD and REV.
Solution: Set CV 55.88.1 and CV 55.88.3 to 00000110 binary = 06 hex = 6 decimal. Set CV 55.88.2 and CV
55.88.4 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal.
Example2: I want the automatic rear ditch lights to be off in all four motive states. But I want the rear ditch lights
to strobe when the horn blows in both FWD and REV.
Solution: Set CV 55.88.1 and CV 55.88.3 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Set CV 55.88.2 and CV
55.88.4 to 0.
Example 3: How will the rear ditch lights behave if I set CV 55.88.0 to 00011111 binary = 1F hex = 31 decimal?
Answer: The automatic rear ditch lights are initially activated and the rear ditch lights intensity is controlled by the
CV 55.88.1…4 settings. If the automatic rear ditch lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing FL so that the
FL function state is 0, then the Feature 89 function state turns the rear ditch lights on, and the Feature 91 function
state makes the rear ditch lights strobe.

Example 4: I want explicit rear ditch lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the rear ditch lights off until
I turn them on with a function key. When the rear ditch lights are on, they should be bright (not strobing).
Solution: First set CV 55.88.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic rear ditch lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 5 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 89 to a function output.

Example 5: Same as example 4, but I want to explicitly dim and strobe the rear ditch lights as well. When I firstturn the rear ditch lights on, they should be bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.88.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic rear ditch lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 5 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 89 to a function output, Feature 90 toa second function output, and Feature 91 to a third function output.

Example 6: I want to explicitly strobe the rear ditch lights, but when not strobing the rear ditch lights should bealways bright.
Solution: First set CV 55.88.0 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal. Next remove the Automatic Rear Ditch
Lights feature from Multiple Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 5 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature
91 to a function output. You do not need to assign Feature 89 to a function output.

Example7: Similar to example 2, I want the automatic rear ditch lights to be off in all four motive states. But I
want the rear ditch lights to strobe when the horn blows in FWD only. Further, I want this behavior even if FL is 0.
Solution: First set CV 55.88.0 to 1. Then set CV 55.88.1 to 00000100 binary = 04 hex = 4 decimal. Set CV
55.88.2, CV 55.88.3 and CV 55.88.4 to 0. Finally remove the Automatic Rear Ditch Lights feature from Multiple
Automatic Lights #1 by setting CV 55.136.0 bit 5 to 0.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 238 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14 CV 55.92.SI Overhead Beacon Light
Two features can be assigned to function keys to control overhead beacon light operation:
FeatureID
92
93

Feature Name

Use

Automatic OHBL Activate
OHBL On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the OHBL
Explicitly turn the OHBL On/Off

Automatic Control
When the Feature 92 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The OHBL intensity changes automatically inresponse to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.92.1.
Feature 92 has precedence over Feature 93. When the Feature 92 function state is 1, the Feature 93 function state isignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 92 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The OHBL intensity changes in response to
Feature 93 function key presses.

Feature 93
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Effects
Six different OHBL lighting effects can be selected using CV55.92.1192.
Blinking Light: the intensity increases to max intensity (CV55.92.12) and decreases to min intensity (CV55.92.11)
using CV55.92.16 Ramp Up Time (or CV55.92.15), and CV55.92.18 Ramp Down Time (or CV55.92.16).
Rotary Light: the intensity uses CV55.92.12, CV55.92.11, and a pre-defined ramp profile to simulate a rotating light.
Strobe Light (Single Pulse): the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.92.12) instantly, stays at max intensity
for a specified time (CV55.92.11), and then instantly decreases to 0.
Prime Beacon: the intensity uses CV55.92.12, CV55.92.11, and a pre-defined ramp profile to simulate a beacon
consisting of 4 lights spaced 90 degrees apart which turn on sequentially.
Prime Beacon X4: four lights are turned off and on sequentially using CV55.92.12, CV55.92.11, CV55.92.16, andCV55.92.18.193
Strobe Light (Double Pulse): for the 1st pulse, the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.92.12) instantly,
stays at max intensity for a specified time (CV55.92.11), instantly decreases to 0, and stays at 0 for a
specified time (CV55.92.17). For the 2nd pulse, the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.92.19)
instantly, stays at max intensity for a specified time (CV55.92.18), instantly decreases to 0, and stays at 0
for the remainder of the cycle.194

192

For Q1 decoders running Q1a firmware only the Strobe Light (Single Pulse) effect is available. You can obtain a Blinking Light effect by increasing the valueof CV55.92.11.
193
The Prime Beacon X4 effect requires 4 light outputs connected to 4 light bulbs and is available with Q3 decoders only.
194
The Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is available with Q3 decoders only.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 239 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.1 CV 55.92.0 OHBL Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the OHBL features.
31

Default Value:CV 55.92.0: OHBL Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

EffectReserved

On withBell

Feature 93
Function
State

Feature 92
FunctionState

EffectEffect

Default value = 00100001 binary = 21 hex = 31 decimal (Strobe Light Effect and Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic OHBL Activate (Feature 92) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the OHBL On (Feature 93) function.

If bit 2 is “1”, under explicit control the OHBL turns on when the bell turns on and turns off when the bell turns
off. If the Feature 93 state is “1”, the OHBL is already on and this bit is ignored.

Bits 4, 5, and 6 specify the OBHL effect. Six effects are supported 195:
Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Effect000Blinking Light

0

0

1

Rotary Light

0

1

0

Strobe Light (Single Pulse)

0

1

1

Prime Beacon

1

0

0

Prime Beacon X4196

1

0

1

Strobe Light (Double Pulse)197



A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 92 and 93 function states to be immediately set to
the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 92 and 93 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

195

For Q1 decoders running Q1a firmware Bits 4, 5, and 6 are reserved and should be “0”. The firmware only provides the Strobe Light effect. You can obtain a
Blinking Light effect by increasing the value of CV55.92.11.
196
The Prime Beacon X4 effect is available only with Q3 decoders.
197
The Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is available only with Q3 decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 240 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.2 CV 55.92.1 Automatic OHBL Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic OHBL behavior 198.
Default Value:85

CV 55.92.1: Automatic OHBL Configuration
NFR
REV
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

NFR
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

NFR
Intensity

REV
Intensity

REV
Intensity

FWD

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal.



Bits 0,1 specify the OHBL intensity in FWD, bits 2,3 the intensity in NFF, bits 4,5 the intensity in REV, and bits
6,7 the intensity in NFR.



Bit 1
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 7

Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 6

Intensity

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Off
On
On with Bell
Reserved

The default settings specify the following behavior:
FWD
On



198

NFF

NFF
On

REV
On

NFR
On

“On with Bell” means the OHBL turns on automatically when the bell turns on and turns off automaticallywhen the bell turns off.

CV55.92.1 does not affect OHBL behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 241 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.3 CV 55.92.6 OHBL Period
For models with an OHBL, this CV controls its blink, revolve, or strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.92.6: OHBL Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete blink, revolve, or strobe cycle of the OHBL to complete.



In Ops mode, you can observe the blink, revolve, or strobe rate change as you change the value of CV
55.92.6.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 242 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.4 CV 55.92.11 OHBL Min Intensity199
For models with an OHBL, this CV controls the minimum brightness of the Blinking Light and Rotary Light effects, thebright time of the Strobe Light and Prime Beacon X4 effects, or the Mid Intensity of the Prime Beacon effect.
4

Default Value:CV 55.92.11: OHBL Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

199

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.92.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.92.12.



In Ops mode you can observe the intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.92.11.

For firmware built prior to 24-Aug-09, when the Blinking Light effect is selected, this CV is not used.

When the Strobe Light (Single Pulse) or Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected, this CV represents the time thelight is in its brightest state. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 4 represents 0.04 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a bright time of 0.02 second is used. If the value of this CV is greater than the valueof CV56.92.6, a bright time ½ the value of CV56.92.6 is used.

When the Prime Beacon effect is selected, this CV represents the Mid Intensity, the brightness of the twosecondary pulses.

When the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is selected, this CV represents the time of brightness of the 1 stpulse. Each unit represents 0.01 second.

In Q1a firmware, this CV controls only the bright time of the Strobe Light effect. You can obtain a blinking light effect by increasing the value of this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 243 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.5 CV 55.92.12 OHBL Max Intensity200
For models with a 256 intensity level OHBL, this CV controls its brightest intensity.
255

Default Value:CV 55.92.12: OHBL Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

200

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.92.12 to a value greater than the value of CV55.92.11.



In Ops mode, you can observe the OHBL intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.92.12.

For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect, this CV specifies the brightness of the 1 st pulse.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 244 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.6 CV 55.92.15 OHBL Ramp Up Rate201
For models with a 256 intensity level Overhead Beacon Light, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity
increases when the Blinking Light effect is selected.
25

Default Value:CV 55.92.15: OHBL Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

201

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Min Intensity is 0, the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the
OHBL to go from min to max intensity. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it
takes 0.102 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, or Prime
Beacon effects are selected.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 245 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.7 CV 55.92.16 OHBL Ramp Down Rate202
For models with a 256 intensity level OHBL, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when the
Blinking Light effect is selected.
25

Default Value:CV 55.92.16: OHBL Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

202

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Min Intensity is 0, the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the
OHBL to go from max to min intensity. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it
takes 0.102 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, or Prime
Beacon effects are selected.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 246 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.8 CV 55.92.17 OHBL Ramp Up Time203
For models with a 256 intensity level Overhead Beacon Light, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity
increases when the Blinking Light effect or the Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected. For the Strobe Light (Double
Pulse) effect it specifies the time between the two pulses.

10

Default Value:CV 55.92.17: OHBL Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light (Single
Pulse), or Prime Beacon effects are selected.



For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect, this CV specifies the time the light is off between the end of the 1 stpulse and the start of the 2nd pulse.

203

This CV replaces CV55.92.15 OHBL Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 247 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.9 CV 55.92.18 OHBL Ramp Down Time204
For models with a 256 intensity level OHBL, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when the
Blinking Light effect or the Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected. For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect it specifies
the time of brightness of the 2nd pulse.
10

Default Value:CV 55.92.18: OHBL Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, or Prime
Beacon effects are selected.

When the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is selected, this CV represents the time of brightness for the 2nd
pulse.

204

This CV replaces CV55.92.16 OHBL Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 248 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.14.10 CV 55.92.19 OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity205
For models with a 256 intensity level OHBL, this CV controls its brightest intensity of the 2 nd pulse of the Strobe Light(Double Pulse) effect.
255

Default Value:CV 55.92.19: OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

205

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, you can observe the OHBL intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.92.19.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 249 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15 CV 55.96.SI Rear Overhead Beacon Light
Two features can be assigned to function keys to control rear overhead beacon light operation:
FeatureID
96
97

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Rear OHBL Activate
Rear OHBL On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear OHBL
Explicitly turn the Rear OHBL On/Off

Automatic Control
When the Feature 96 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The Rear OHBL intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The automatic behavior can be configured in CV 55.96.1.
Feature 96 has precedence over Feature 97. When the Feature 96 function state is 1, the Feature 97 function state isignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 96 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The Rear OHBL intensity changes in
response to Feature 97 function key presses.

Feature 97
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Effects
Six different rear OHBL lighting effects can be selected using CV55.96.1 206.
Blinking Light: the intensity increases to max intensity (CV55.96.12) and decreases to min intensity (CV55.96.11)
using CV55.96.16 Ramp Up Time (or CV55.96.15), and CV55.96.18 Ramp Down Time (or CV55.96.16).
Rotary Light: the intensity uses CV55.96.12, CV55.96.11, and a pre-defined ramp profile to simulate a rotating light.
Strobe Light (Single Pulse): the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.96.12) instantly, stays at max intensity
for a specified time (CV55.96.11), and then instantly decreases to 0.
Prime Beacon: the intensity uses CV55.96.12, CV55.96.11, and a pre-defined ramp profile to simulate a beacon
consisting of 4 lights spaced 90 degrees apart which turn on sequentially.
Prime Beacon X4: four lights are turned off and on sequentially using CV55.96.12, CV55.96.11, CV55.96.16, andCV55.96.18.207
Strobe Light (Double Pulse): for the 1st pulse, the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.96.12) instantly,
stays at max intensity for a specified time (CV55.96.11), instantly decreases to 0, and stays at 0 for a
specified time (CV55.96.17). For the 2nd pulse, the intensity goes from 0 to max intensity (CV55.96.19)
instantly, stays at max intensity for a specified time (CV55.96.18), instantly decreases to 0, and stays at 0
for the remainder of the cycle208.

206

For Q1 decoders running Q1a firmware only the Strobe Light (Single Pulse) effect is available. You can obtain a Blinking Light effect by increasing the valueof CV55.96.11.
207
The Prime Beacon X4 effect requires 4 light outputs connected to 4 light bulbs and is available with Q3 decoders only.
208
The Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is available with Q3 decoders only.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 250 of 468

5-Aug-15

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 251 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.1 CV 55.96.0 Rear OHBL Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear OHBL features.
31

Default Value:CV 55.96.0: Rear OHBL Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

EffectEffectEffect

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

On withBell

Feature 97
Function
State

Feature 96
Function
State

Default value = 00100001 binary = 21 hex = 31 decimal (Strobe Light Effect and Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear OHBL Activate (Feature 96) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Rear OHBL On (Feature 97) function.

If bit 2 is “1”, under explicit control the Rear OHBL turns on when the bell turns on and turns off when the bellturns off. If the Feature 97 state is “1”, the OHBL is already on and this bit is ignored.

Bits 4, 5, and 6 specify the Rear OBHL effect. Six effects are supported 209:
Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Effect000Blinking Light

0

0

1

Rotary Light

0

1

0

Strobe Light (Single Pulse)

0

1

1

Prime Beacon

1

0

0

Prime Beacon X4210

1

0

1

Strobe Light (Double Pulse)211



A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 96 and 97 function states to be immediately set to
the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 96 and 97 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

209

In Q1a firmware Bits 4 and 5 are reserved and should be “0”. The firmware only provides the Strobe Light effect. You can obtain a Blinking Light effect byincreasing *the value of CV55.96.11.
210
The Prime Beacon X4 effect is available only with Q3 decoders.
211
The Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is available only with Q3 decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 252 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.2 CV 55.96.1 Automatic Rear OHBL Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear OHBL behavior 212.
Default Value:85

CV 55.96.1: Automatic Rear OHBL Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

NFR
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

FWD
Intensity

NFR
Intensity

REV
Intensity

REV
Intensity

NFF
Intensity

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal.



Bits 0,1 specify the Rear OHBL intensity in FWD, bits 2,3 the intensity in NFF, bits 4,5 the intensity in REV,and bits 6,7 the intensity in NFR.



Bit 1
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 7

Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 6

Intensity

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

Off
On
On with Bell
Reserved

The default settings specify the following behavior:
FWD
On



212

NFF
Intensity

FWD

NFF
On

REV
On

NFR
On

“On with Bell” means the Rear OHBL turns on automatically when the bell turns on and turns off automaticallywhen the bell turns off.

CV55.96.1 does not affect rear OHBL behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 253 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.3 CV 55.96.6 Rear OHBL Period
For models with a Rear OHBL, this CV controls its blink, revolve, or strobe rate.
100

Default Value:CV 55.96.6: Rear OHBL Period
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 2…255. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 100 represents 1.00 second. If thevalue of this CV is 0 or 1, a period of 0.02 second is used.



The CV value is the time for one complete blink, revolve, or strobe cycle of the Rear OHBL to complete.



In Ops mode, you can observe the blink, revolve, or strobe rate change as you change the value of CV
55.96.6.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 254 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.4 CV 55.96.11 Rear OHBL Min Intensity213
For models with a Rear OHBL, this CV controls the minimum brightness of the Blinking Light and Rotary Light effects,
the bright time of the Strobe Light or Prime Beacon X4 effects, or the Mid Intensity of the Prime Beacon effect.
4

Default Value:CV 55.96.11: Rear OHBL Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

213

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.96.11 to a value less than the value of CV55.96.12.



In Ops mode you can observe the intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.96.11.

For firmware built prior to 24-Aug-09, when the Blinking Light effect is selected, this CV is not used.

When the Strobe Light or Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected, this CV represents the time the light is in its
brightest state. Each unit represents 0.01 second. A value of 4 represents 0.04 second. If the value of this CV
is 0 or 1, a bright time of 0.02 second is used. If the value of this CV is greater than the value of CV56.96.6, abright time ½ the value of CV56.96.6 is used.

When the Prime Beacon effect is selected, this CV represents the Mid Intensity, the brightness of the twosecondary pulses.

When the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is selected, this CV represents the time of brightness of the 1stpulse. Each unit represents 0.01 second.

In Q1a firmware, this CV controls only the bright time of the Strobe Light effect. You can obtain a Blinking Light effect by increasing the value of this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 255 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.5 CV 55.96.12 Rear OHBL Max Intensity214
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear OHBL, this CV controls its brightest intensity.
255

Default Value:CV 55.96.12: Rear OHBL Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

214

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright). For best results, set
CV55.96.12 to a value greater than the value of CV55.96.11.



In Ops mode, you can observe the Rear OHBL intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.96.12.

For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect, this CV specifies the brightness of the 1 st pulse.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 256 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.6 CV 55.96.15 Rear OHBL Ramp Up Rate215
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear Overhead Beacon Light, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity
increases when the Blinking Light effect is selected.
25

Default Value:CV 55.96.15: Rear OHBL Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

215

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Min Intensity is 0, the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for theRear OHBL to go from min to max intensity. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25,
it takes 0.102 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the Rear OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, orPrime Beacon effects are selected.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 257 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.7 CV 55.96.16 Rear OHBL Ramp Down Rate216
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear OHBL, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when the
Blinking Light effect is selected.
25

Default Value:CV 55.96.16: Rear OHBL Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

216

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Min Intensity is 0, the Max Intensity is 255, and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for theRear OHBL to go from max to min intensity. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25,
it takes 0.102 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the Rear OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, orPrime Beacon effects are selected.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 258 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.8 CV 55.96.17 Rear OHBL Ramp Up Time217
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear Overhead Beacon Light, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity
increases when the Blinking Light effect or the Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected. For the Strobe Light (Double
Pulse) effect it specifies the time between the two pulses.

10

Default Value:CV 55.96.17: Rear OHBL Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, or Prime
Beacon effects are selected.



For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect, this CV specifies the time the light is off between the end of the 1stpulse and the start of the 2nd pulse.

217

This CV replaces CV55.96.15 Rear OHBL Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 259 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.9 CV 55.96.18 Rear OHBL Ramp Down Time218
For models with a 256 intensity level Rear OHBL, this CV controls the rate at which the intensity decreases when the
Blinking Light effect or the Prime Beacon X4 effect is selected. For the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect it specifies
the time of brightness of the 2nd pulse.
10

Default Value:CV 55.96.18: Rear OHBL Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

This CV does not affect the rate the OHBL intensity changes when the Revolving Light, Strobe Light, or Prime
Beacon effects are selected.

When the Strobe Light (Double Pulse) effect is selected, this CV represents the time of brightness for the 2nd
pulse.

218

This CV replaces CV55.96.16 Rear OHBL Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 260 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.15.10 CV 55.96.19 Rear OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity219
For models with a 256 intensity level OHBL, this CV controls its brightest intensity of the 2 nd pulse of the Strobe Light(Double Pulse) effect.
255

Default Value:CV 55.96.19: Rear OHBL Pulse 2 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

219

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense (bright).



In Ops mode, you can observe the OHBL intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.96.19.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 261 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16

CV 55.100.SI Front Number Board Lights

Two features can be assigned to function keys to control front number board lights operation:
FeatureID
100
101

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Front Number Board
Lights Activate
Front Number Board Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Front
Number Board Lights
Explicitly turn the Front Number Board Lights On/Off

The front number board lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 100 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The front number board lights intensitychanges automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The default rules for automatic control are simple: the front number board lights are on regardless of the locomotive’s
motive state.
The automatic control can be configured in CV 55.100.1.
Feature 100 has precedence over Feature 101. When the Feature 100 function state is 1, the Feature 101 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 100 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The front number board lights intensitychanges in response to Feature 101 function key presses.
Feature 101
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Feature 100 has precedence over Feature 101. If the Feature 100 function state changes to 1, because of a Feature
100 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 262 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.1 CV 55.100.0 Front Number Board Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Front Number Board Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.100.0: Front Number Board Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Feature101
Function
State

Feature100
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Front Number Board Lights Activate (Feature 100) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Front Number Board Lights On (Feature 101) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 100 and 101 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 100 and 101 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 263 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.2 CV 55.100.1 Automatic Front Number Board Lights Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Front Number Board Lights behavior 220.
Default Value:85

CV 55.100.1: Automatic Front Number Board Lights Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

220

NFR
Intensity

Reserved

REV
Intensity

Reserved

NFF
Intensity

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal.



If bit 0 = 1, the front number board lights are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the front number board lights are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the front number board lights are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the front number board lights are on in NFR.

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

FWD
Intensity

CV55.100.1 does not affect front number board light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 264 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.3 CV 55.100.12 Front Number Board Lights Max Intensity221
For models with 256 intensity level Front Number Board Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is
“On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.100.12: Front Number Board Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

221

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Front Number Board Lights state “On”, you can observe the Front Number Board
Lights intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.100.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 265 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.4 CV 55.100.15 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate222
For models with 256 intensity level Front Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
increases when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.100.15: Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

222

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Number Board
Lights to go from off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102
second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 266 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.5 CV 55.100.16 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate223
For models with 256 intensity level Front Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
decreases when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.100.16: Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
D7

223

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 1

Bit 0

D1

D0

D2



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Number Board
Lights to go from bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102
second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 267 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.6 CV 55.100.17 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time224
For models with 256 intensity level Front Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
increases when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.100.17: Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

224

This CV replaces CV55.100.15 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 268 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.7 CV 55.100.18 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time225
For models with 256 intensity level Front Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
decreases when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.100.18: Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

225

This CV replaces CV55.100.16 Front Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 269 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.16.6 CV 55.100.SI Front Number Board Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic front number board lights to be on in FWD and REV, but off in NFF and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.100.1 to 00010001 binary = 11 hex = 17 decimal.

Example 2: How will the front number board lights behave if I set CV 55.100.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3
decimal?
Answer: The automatic front number board lights are initially activated and the front number board lights intensity iscontrolled by the CV 55.100.1 settings. If the automatic front number board lights are deactivated, for example, bypressing F11 so that the F11 function state is 0, then the Feature 101 function state turns the front number board
lights on.
Example 3: I want explicit front number board lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the front number
board lights off until I turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.100.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic front number board lights feature from multiple
automatic lights #2 by setting CV 55.137.0 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 101 to a function output.

Example 4: I want the front number board lights to be on at all times. But I don’t want them to be affected byfunction key presses.
Solution: First set CV 55.100.0 to 00000010 binary = 02 hex = 2 decimal. Then remove the automatic front number
board lights feature from multiple automatic lights #2 by setting CV 55.137.0 bit 0 to 0.

Example 5: I want the front number board lights to be on automatically in FWD and NFF and off automatically in
REV and NFR. But I don’t want them to be affected by function key presses.
Solution: First set CV 55.100.0 to 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal. Then set CV55.100.1 to 00000101 binary= 05 hex = 5 decimal. Finally remove the automatic front number board lights feature from multiple automatic lights#2 by setting CV 55.137.0 bit 0 to 0.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 270 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17

CV 55.102.SI Rear Number Board Lights

Two features can be assigned to function keys to control rear number board lights operation:
FeatureID
102
103

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Rear Number Board
Lights Activate
Rear Number Board Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear
Number Board Lights
Explicitly turn the Rear Number Board Lights On/Off

The rear number board lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 102 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The rear number board lights intensitychanges automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The default rules for automatic control are simple: the rear number board lights are on regardless of the locomotive’s
motive state.
The automatic control can be configured in CV55.102.1.
Feature 102 has precedence over Feature 103. When the Feature 102 function state is 1, the Feature 103 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 102 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The rear number board lights intensitychanges in response to Feature 103 function key presses.
Feature 103
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Feature 102 has precedence over Feature 103. If the Feature 102 function state changes to 1, because of a Feature
103 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 271 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.1 CV 55.102.0 Rear Number Board Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear Number Board Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.102.0: Rear Number Board Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Feature103
Function
State

Feature102
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear Number Board Lights Activate (Feature 102) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Rear Number Board Lights On (Feature 103) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 102 and 103 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 102 and 103 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 272 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.2 CV 55.102.1 Automatic Rear Number Board Lights Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear Number Board Lights behavior 226.
Default Value:85

CV 55.102.1: Automatic Rear Number Board Lights Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

226

NFR
Intensity

Reserved

REV
Intensity

Reserved

NFF
Intensity

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

FWD
Intensity

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal (On in all motive states).



If bit 0 = 1, the rear number board lights are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the rear number board lights are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the rear number board lights are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the rear number board lights are on in NFR.

CV55.102.1 does not affect rear number board light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 273 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.3 CV 55.102.12 Rear Number Board Lights Max Intensity227
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Number Board Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.102.12: Rear Number Board Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

227

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Number Board Lights state “On”, you can observe the Rear Number Board Lights
intensity change as you change the value of CV 55.102.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 274 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.4 CV 55.102.15 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate228
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
increases when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.102.15: Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

228

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Number Board
Lights to go from off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102
second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 275 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.5 CV 55.102.16 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate229
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
decreases when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.102.16: Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
D7

229

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 1

Bit 0

D1

D0

D2



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Number Board
Lights to go from bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102
second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 276 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.6 CV 55.100.17 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time230
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
increases when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.102.17: Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

230

This CV replaces CV55.102.15 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 277 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.7 CV 55.102.18 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time231
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Number Board Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity
decreases when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.102.18: Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

231

This CV replaces CV55.102.16 Rear Number Board Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 278 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.17.6 CV 55.102.SI Rear Number Board Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic rear number board lights to be on in FWD and REV, but off in NFF and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.102.1 to 00010001 binary = 11 hex = 17 decimal.

Example 2: How will the rear number board lights behave if I set CV 55.102.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3
decimal?
Answer: The automatic rear number board lights are initially activated and the rear number board lights
intensity is controlled by the CV 55.102.1 settings. If the automatic rear number board lights are deactivated, forexample, by pressing F11 so that the F11 function state is 0, then the Feature 103 function state turns the front
number board lights on.

Example 3: I want explicit rear number board lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the rear number
board lights off until I turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.102.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic rear number board lights feature from multiple
automatic lights #2 by setting CV 55.137.1 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 103 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 279 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18

CV 55.104.SI Front Marker Lights

Two features can be assigned to function keys to control front marker lights operation:
FeatureID
104
105

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Front Marker Lights Activate
Front Marker Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Front Marker Lights
Explicitly turn the Front Marker Lights On/Off

The front marker lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.
Up to 3 front marker lights ports are supported.

Automatic Control
When the feature 104 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The front marker lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The automatic control can be configured in CV 55.104.1, CV 55.104.2, and CV 55.104.3.
Feature 104 takes precedence over feature 105. When the feature 104 function state is 1, the feature 105 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the feature 104 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated, the front marker lights intensity changes in
response to feature 105 function key presses.
If a single Front Marker Light Port is in use, each function key press toggles the marker lights on/off.
State
0
1

MarkerLights1
OffOn

If two Front Marker Light Ports are in use, each function key press cycles the marker lights to the next of 3 states.
State
0
1
2

MarkerLights1
Off
On
Off

MarkerLights2
Off
OffOn

If three Front Marker Light Ports are in use, each function key press cycles the marker lights to the next of 4 states.
State
0
1
2
3

MarkerLights1
Off
On
Off
Off

MarkerLights2
Off
Off
On
Off

MarkerLights3
Off
Off
Off
On

Feature 104 takes precedence over features 105. If the feature 104 function state changes to 1, because of a feature
104 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 280 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.1 CV 55.104.0 Front Marker Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Front Marker Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.104.0: Front Marker Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Lights3
Initial State

Lights2
Initial State

Lights1
Initial State

Feature104
Function
State

Default value = 1 (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Front Marker Lights Activate (Feature 104) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of Front Marker Lights1 for feature 105.



Bit 2 is the initial state of Front Marker Lights2 for feature 105.



Bit 3 is the initial state of Front Marker Lights3 for feature 105.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the feature 104 and 105 function states to be immediately set to
the new values.



A start up operation causes the feature 104 and 105 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 281 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.2 CV 55.104.1 Automatic Front Marker Lights1 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Front Marker Lights1 behavior.
Default Value:85

CV 55.104.1: Automatic Front Marker Lights1 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

NFR
Intensity

Reserved

REV
Intensity

Reserved

NFF
Intensity

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

FWD
Intensity

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal (On in all motive states).



If bit 0 = 1, the front marker lights1 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the front marker lights1 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the front marker lights1 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the front marker lights1 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 282 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.3 CV 55.104.2 Automatic Front Marker Lights2 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Front Marker Lights2 behavior.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.104.2: Automatic Front Marker Lights2 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

NFR
Intensity

Reserved

REV
Intensity

ReservedIf bit 0 = 1, the front marker lights2 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the front marker lights2 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the front marker lights2 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the front marker lights2 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

NFF
Intensity

Page 283 of 468

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

FWD
Intensity

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.4 CV 55.104.3 Automatic Front Marker Lights3 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Front Marker Lights3 behavior.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 55.104.3: Automatic Front Marker Lights3 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

NFR
Intensity

Reserved

REV
Intensity

ReservedIf bit 0 = 1, the front marker lights3 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the front marker lights3 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the front marker lights3 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the front marker lights3 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

NFF
Intensity

Page 284 of 468

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

FWD
Intensity

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.5 CV 55.104.12 Front Marker Lights1 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Front Marker Lights1 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.104.12: Front Marker Lights1 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Front Marker Lights1 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change when you
change the value of CV 55.104.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 285 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.6 CV 55.104.13 Front Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Front Marker Lights2 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.104.13: Front Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Front Marker Lights2 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change when you
change the value of CV 55.104.13.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 286 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.7 CV 55.104.14 Front Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Front Marker Lights3 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.104.14: Front Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Front Marker Lights3 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change as you change
the value of CV 55.104.14.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 287 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.8 CV 55.104.15 Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate232
For models with 256 intensity level Front Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases
when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.104.15: Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

232

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Marker Lights to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 288 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.9 CV 55.104.16 Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate233
For models with 256 intensity level Front Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases
when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.104.16: Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

233

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Marker Lights togo from bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 289 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.10 CV 55.104.17 Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Time234
For models with 256 intensity level Front Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases
when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.104.17: Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

234

This CV replaces CV55.104.15 Front Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 290 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.11 CV 55.104.18 Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Time235
For models with 256 intensity level Front Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases
when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.104.18: Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

235

This CV replaces CV55.104.16 Front Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 291 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.18.12 CV 55.104.SI Front Marker Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic front marker lights to be on in FWD and REV, but off in NFF and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.104.1 to 00010001 binary = 11 hex = 17 decimal.
Example 2: How will the front marker lights behave if I set CV 55.104.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3
decimal?
Answer: The automatic front marker lights are initially activated and the front marker lights intensity is controlled
by the CV 55.104.1 settings. If the automatic front marker lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing F11 sothat the F11 function state is 0, then the Feature 105 function state turns the front marker lights on.

Example 3: I want explicit front marker lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the front marker lights off
until I turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.104.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic front marker lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #2 by setting CV 55.137.2 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 105 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 292 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19 CV 55.106.SI Rear Marker Lights
Four features can be assigned to function keys to control rear marker lights operation:
FeatureID
106
107

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Rear Marker Lights Activate
Rear Marker Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear Marker Lights
Explicitly turn the Rear Marker Lights On/Off

The rear marker lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.
Up to 3 sets of rear marker lights are supported.

Automatic Control
When the feature 106 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The rear marker lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The automatic control can be configured in CV 55.106.1, CV 55.106.2, and CV 55.106.3.
Feature 106 takes precedence over feature 107. When the feature 106 function state is 1, the feature 107 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the feature 106 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The front number board lights intensitychanges in response to feature 107 function key presses.
If a single Rear Marker Light Port is in use, each function key press toggles the marker lights on/off.
State
0
1

Intensity
OffOn

If two Rear Marker Light Ports are in use, each function key press cycles the marker lights to the next of 3 states.
State
0
1
2

MarkerLights1
Off
On
Off

MarkerLights2
Off
OffOn

If three Rear Marker Light Ports are in use, each function key press cycles the marker lights to the next of 4 states.
State
0
1
2
3

MarkerLights1
Off
On
Off
Off

MarkerLights2
Off
Off
On
Off

MarkerLights3
Off
Off
Off
On

Feature 106 has precedence over feature 107. If the feature 106 function state changes to 1, because of a feature
106 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 293 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.1 CV 55.106.0 Rear Marker Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear Marker Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.106.0: Rear Marker Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Lights3
Initial State

Lights2
Initial State

Lights1
Initial State

Feature106
Function
State

Default value = 1 (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear Marker Lights Activate (Feature 106) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of Rear Marker Lights1 for feature 107.



Bit 2 is the initial state of Rear Marker Lights2 for feature 107.



Bit 3 is the initial state of Rear Marker Lights3 for feature 107.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 106, 107, 128, and 129 function states to be
immediately set to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 106 and 107 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 294 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.2 CV 55.106.1 Automatic Rear Marker Lights1 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear Marker Lights1 behavior.
Default Value:85

CV 55.106.1: Automatic Rear Marker Lights1 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = On

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

1 = On

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal (“On” in all motive states).



If bit 0 = 1, the rear marker lights1 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the rear marker lights1 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the rear marker lights1 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the rear marker lights1 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 295 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.3 CV 55.106.2 Automatic Rear Marker Lights2 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear Marker Lights2 behavior.
Default Value:85

CV 55.106.2: Automatic Rear Marker Lights2 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = On

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

1 = On

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal (“On” in all motive states).



If bit 0 = 1, the rear marker lights2 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the rear marker lights2 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the rear marker lights2 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the rear marker lights2 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 296 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.4 CV 55.106.3 Automatic Rear Marker Lights3 Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear Marker Lights3 behavior.
Default Value:85

CV 55.106.3: Automatic Rear Marker Lights3 Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = On

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

1 = On

Default value = 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal (“On” in all motive states).



If bit 0 = 1, the rear marker lights3 are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the rear marker lights3 are on in NFF.



If bit 4 = 1, the rear marker lights3 are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the rear marker lights3 are on in NFR.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 297 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.5 CV 55.106.12 Rear Marker Lights1 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Rear Marker Lights1 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.106.12: Rear Marker Lights1 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Marker Lights1 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change when you
change the value of CV 55.106.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 298 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.6 CV 55.106.13 Rear Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Rear Marker Lights2 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.106.13: Rear Marker Lights2 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Marker Lights2 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change when you
change the value of CV 55.106.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 299 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.7 CV 55.106.14 Rear Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Use this CV to specify the Rear Marker Lights3 intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.106.14: Rear Marker Lights3 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Marker Lights3 state “On”, you can observe the intensity change when you
change the value of CV 55.106.14.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 300 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.8 CV 55.106.15 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate236
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases
when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.106.15: Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

236

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Marker Lights to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 301 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.9 CV 55.106.16 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate237
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases
when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.106.16: Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

237

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Marker Lights togo from bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 302 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.10 CV 55.106.17 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Time238
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases
when their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.106.17: Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

238

This CV replaces CV55.106.15 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 303 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.11 CV 55.106.18 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Time239
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Marker Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases
when their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.106.18: Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

239

This CV replaces CV55.106.16 Rear Marker Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 304 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.19.12 CV 55.106.SI Rear Marker Lights Examples
Example 1: I want the automatic rear marker lights to be on in FWD and REV, but off in NFF and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.106.1 to 00010001 binary = 11 hex = 17 decimal.

Example 2: How will the rear marker lights behave if I set CV 55.106.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3
decimal?
Answer: The automatic rear marker lights are initially activated and the rear marker lights intensity is controlled by
the CV 55.106.1 settings. If the automatic rear marker lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing F11 sothat the F11 function state is 0, then the Feature 107 function state turns the rear marker lights on.

Example 3: I want explicit rear marker lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the rear marker lights off
until I turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.106.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic rear marker lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #2 by setting CV 55.137.2 bit 1 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 107 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 305 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.20 CV 55.109.SI Truck Lights
One feature can be assigned to function keys to control truck lights operation:
FeatureID
109

Feature Name

Use

Truck Lights On

Explicitly turn the Truck Lights On/Off

The truck lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled explicitly.
The truck lights intensity changes in response to Feature 109 function key presses.
Feature 109
FunctionState01

Intensity

OffOn

The feature 109 initial state can be specified using CV55.134.0 Exterior Lights Initial State.
Truck lights can also be assigned to one of the Multiple Lights features allowing many lights to be turned on/off with asingle function key.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 306 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.20.1 CV 55.109.12 Truck Lights Max Intensity240
For models with 256 intensity level Truck Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.109.12: Truck Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

240

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Truck Lights state “On”, you can observe the Truck Lights intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.109.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 307 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.20.2 CV 55.109.17 Truck Lights Ramp Time241
For models with 256 intensity level Truck Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases anddecreases going from “Off” to “On” and going from “On” to “Off”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.109.17: Truck Lights Ramp Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity and the time for thelight to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright or bright to off. With the default
time of 10, it takes 0.1 second.

241

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 308 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.21 CV 55.113.SI Step Lights
One feature can be assigned to function keys to control step lights operation:
FeatureID
113

Feature Name

Use

Step Lights On

Explicitly turn the Step Lights On/Off

The step lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled explicitly.
The step lights intensity changes in response to Feature 113 function key presses.
Feature 113
FunctionState01

Intensity

OffOn

The feature 113 initial state can be specified using CV55.134.0 Exterior Lights Initial State.
Step lights can also be assigned to one of the Multiple Lights features allowing many lights to be turned on/off with asingle function key.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 309 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.21.1 CV 55.113.12 Step Lights Max Intensity242
For models with 256 intensity level Step Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.113.12: Step Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

242

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Step Lights state “On”, you can observe the Step Lights intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.113.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 310 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.21.2 CV 55.109.17 Step Lights Ramp Time243
For models with 256 intensity level Step Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases anddecreases going from “Off” to “On” and going from “On” to “Off”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.113.17: Step Lights Ramp Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity and the time for thelight to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright or bright to off. With the default
time of 10, it takes 0.1 second.

243

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 311 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22 CV 55.116.SI Front Cab Lights
Two features can be assigned to function keys to control front cab lights operation:
FeatureID
116
117

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Front Cab Lights Activate
Front Cab Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Front Cab Lights
Explicitly turn the Front Cab Lights On/Off

The front cab lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 116 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The front cab lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The default rules for front cab light automatic control are:
Forward
Off after 15 seconds

Neutral from Forward
On after 10 seconds

ReverseOff after 15 seconds

Neutral from Reverse
On after 10 seconds

The automatic control can be configured in CV 55.116.1.
Feature 116 has precedence over Feature 117. When the Feature 116 function state is 1, the Feature 117 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 116 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The front cab lights intensity changes in
response to Feature 117 function key presses.
Feature 117
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Feature 116 has precedence over Feature 117. If the Feature 116 function state changes to 1, because of a Feature
116 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 312 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.1 CV 55.116.0 Front Cab Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Front Cab Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.116.0: Front Cab Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

Feature117
Function
State

Feature116
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Front Cab Lights Activate (Feature 116) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Front Cab Lights On (Feature 117) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 116 and 117 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 116 and 117 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 313 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.2 CV 55.116.1 Automatic Front Cab Lights Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Front Cab Lights behavior 244.
Default Value:68

CV 55.116.1: Automatic Front Cab Lights Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved244

1 = OnReserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = On

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

1 = On

Default value = 01000100 binary = 44 hex = 68 decimal. (On in NFF and NFR.)

If bit 0 = 1, the front cab lights are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the front cab lights are on in NFF. If the front cab lights were already on in FWD, they remain on in
NFF. If they were off in FWD, they come on after 10 seconds.



If bit 4 = 1, the front cab lights are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the front cab lights are on in NFR. If the front cab lights were already on in REV, they remain on in
NFR. If they were off in REV, they come on after 10 seconds.

CV55.116.1 does not affect front cab light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 314 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.3 CV 55.116.12 Front Cab Lights Max Intensity245
For models with 256 intensity level Front Cab Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.116.12: Front Cab Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

245

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Front Cab Lights state “On”, you can observe the Front Cab Lights intensity change as
you change the value of CV 55.116.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 315 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.4 CV 55.116.15 Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate246
For models with 256 intensity level Front Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases when
their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.116.15: Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

246

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Cab Lights to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 316 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.5 CV 55.116.16 Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate247
For models with 256 intensity level Front Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases when
their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.116.16: Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

247

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Front Cab Lights to gofrom bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 317 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.6 CV 55.116.17 Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Time248
For models with 256 intensity level Front Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases when
their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.116.17: Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

248

This CV replaces CV55.116.15 Front Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 318 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.7 CV 55.116.18 Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Time249
For models with 256 intensity level Front Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases when
their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.116.18: Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

249

This CV replaces CV55.116.16 Front Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 319 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.22.8 CV 55.116.SI Front Cab Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic front cab lights to be on in all motive states FWD, NFF, REV and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.116.1 to 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal.

Example 2: How will the front cab lights behave if I set CV 55.116.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3 decimal?
Answer: The automatic front cab lights are initially activated and the front cab lights intensity is controlled by the
CV 55.116.1 settings. If the automatic front cab lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing F12 so that theF12 function state is 0, then the Feature 117 function state turns the front cab lights on.

Example 3: I want explicit front cab lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the front cab lights off until I
turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.116.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic front cab lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #3 by setting CV 55.138.3 bit 0 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 117 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 320 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23 CV 55.118.SI Rear Cab Lights
Two features can be assigned to function keys to control rear cab lights operation:
FeatureID
118
119

Feature Name

Use

Automatic Rear Cab Lights Activate
Rear Cab Lights On

Activate/Deactivate Automatic Control of the Rear Cab Lights
Explicitly turn the Rear Cab Lights On/Off

The rear cab lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled automatically or explicitly.

Automatic Control
When the Feature 118 function state is 1, automatic control is activated. The rear cab lights intensity changes
automatically in response to changes to the locomotive’s motive state.
The default rules for rear cab light automatic control are:
Forward
Off after 15 seconds

Neutral from
ForwardOn after 10 seconds

ReverseNeutral from Reverse

Off after 15 seconds

On after 10 seconds

The automatic control can be configured in CV 55.118.1.
Feature 118 has precedence over Feature 119. When the Feature 118 function state is 1, the Feature 119 function
state is ignored.

Explicit Control
When the Feature 118 function state is 0, automatic control is deactivated. The rear cab lights intensity changes in
response to Feature 119 function key presses.
Feature 119
FunctionState01

Intensity

Off
On

Feature 118 has precedence over Feature 119. If the Feature 118 function state changes to 1, because of a Feature
118 function key press or a start up operation, automatic control is re-activated.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 321 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.1 CV 55.118.0 Rear Cab Lights Initial StateUse this CV to specify the startup state function states for the Rear Cab Lights features.
Default Value:1

CV 55.118.0: Rear Cab Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

Feature119
Function
State

Feature118
Function
State

Default value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal (Automatic Control Activated).



Bit 0 is the initial state of the Automatic Rear Cab Lights Activate (Feature 118) function.

Bit 1 is the initial state of the Rear Cab Lights On (Feature 119) function.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 118 and 119 function states to be immediately set
to the new values.



A start up operation causes the Feature 118 and 119 function states to be set to the values in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 322 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.2 CV 55.118.1 Automatic Rear Cab Lights Configuration
Use this CV to configure the Automatic Rear Cab Lights behavior 250.
Default Value:68

CV 55.118.1: Automatic Rear Cab Lights Configuration
NFR
REV
NFF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

250

1 = OnReserved

1 = OnReserved

1 = On

FWD
Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

1 = On

Default value = 01000100 binary = 44 hex = 68 decimal. (On in NFF and NFR.)

If bit 0 = 1, the rear cab lights are on in FWD.



If bit 2 = 1, the rear cab lights are on in NFF. If the rear cab lights were already on in FWD, they remain on in
NFF. If they were off in FWD, they come on after 10 seconds.



If bit 4 = 1, the rear cab lights are on in REV.



If bit 6 = 1, the rear cab lights are on in NFR. If the rear cab lights were already on in REV, they remain on in
NFR. If they were off in REV, they come on after 10 seconds.

CV55.118.1 does not affect rear cab light behavior in Analog DC.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 323 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.3 CV 55.118.12 Rear Cab Lights Max Intensity251
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Cab Lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.118.12: Rear Cab Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

251

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Rear Cab Lights state “On”, you can observe the Rear Cab Lights intensity change as
you change the value of CV 55.118.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 324 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.4 CV 55.118.15 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate252
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases when
their state changes from “Off” to “On”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.118.15: Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

252

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Cab Lights to gofrom off to bright. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 325 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.5 CV 55.118.16 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate253
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases when
their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
25

Default Value:CV 55.118.16: Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

253

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Max Intensity is 255 and the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Rear Cab Lights to gofrom bright to off. If the rate is 255, it takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 25, it takes 0.102 second.

This CV is currently supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 326 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.6 CV 55.118.17 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Time254
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases when
their state changes from “Off” to “On”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.118.17: Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

254

This CV replaces CV55.118.15 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 327 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.7 CV 55.118.18 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Time255
For models with 256 intensity level Rear Cab Lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity decreases when
their state changes from “On” to “Off”.
10

Default Value:CV 55.118.18: Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

255

This CV replaces CV55.118.16 Rear Cab Lights Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 328 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.23.8 CV 55.118.SI Rear Cab Lights Examples

Example 1: I want the automatic rear cab lights to be on in all motive states FWD, NFF, REV and NFR.
Solution: Set CV 55.118.1 to 01010101 binary = 55 hex = 85 decimal.

Example 2: How will the rear cab lights behave if I set CV 55.118.0 to 00000011 binary = 03 hex = 3 decimal?
Answer: The automatic rear cab lights are initially activated and the rear cab lights intensity is controlled by the
CV 55.118.1 settings. If the automatic rear cab lights are deactivated, for example, by pressing F12 so that theF12 function state is 0, then the Feature 119 function state turns the rear cab lights on.

Example 3: I want explicit rear cab lights on/off control at all times. At startup I want the rear cab lights off until
I turn them on with a function key.
Solution: First set CV 55.118.0 to 0. Next remove the automatic rear cab lights feature from multiple automatic
lights #3 by setting CV 55.138.3 bit 1 to 0. Finally in CV 53 assign Feature 119 to a function output.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 329 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.24 CV 55.120.SI Engine Room Lights
Two features can be assigned to function keys to control engine room lights operation:
FeatureID
120
121

Feature Name

Use

Engine Room Lights On
Engine Room2 Lights On

Explicitly turn the Engine Room Lights On/Off
Explicitly turn the Engine Room2 Lights On/Off

The engine room lights intensity (Off, On) can be controlled explicitly.
The engine room lights intensity changes in response to Feature 120/121 function key presses.
Feature120/121FunctionState01

Intensity

OffOn

The feature 120/121 initial state can be specified using CV55.135.0 Interior Lights Initial State.
Engine room lights can also be assigned to one of the Multiple Lights features allowing many lights to be turned on/off
with a single function key.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 330 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.24.1 CV 55.120.12 Engine Room Lights Max Intensity256
For models with 256 intensity level engine room lights, this CV controls their intensity when their state is “On”.
255

Default Value:CV 55.120.12: Engine Room Lights Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

256

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Engine Room Lights state “On”, you can observe the Engine Room Lights intensitychange as you change the value of CV 55.120.12.

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 331 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.24.2 CV 55.120.17 Engine Room Lights Ramp Time257
For models with 256 intensity level engine room lights, this CV controls the rate at which their intensity increases anddecreases going from “Off” to “On” and going from “On” to “Off”.

10

Default Value:CV 55.120.17: Engine Room Lights Ramp Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity and the time for thelight to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright or bright to off. With the default
time of 10, it takes 0.1 second.

257

This CV is currently supported only by Q3 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 332 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25 CV 55.122.SI Firebox
One feature can be assigned to a function key to control firebox operation:
FeatureID
122

Feature Name

Use

Firebox On

Turn the Firebox On/Off

When the Feature 122 function state is 1, the Firebox is “On”. The Firebox intensity changes automatically inresponse to changes to the locomotive’s state.
When the locomotive is not moving, the firebox flickers. When the locomotive is moving, and a chuff occurs, thefirebox flares briefly and then returns to flickering. At high speeds the firebox flares continuously.
If CV55.135.0 Interior Lights Initial State bit 4 = “1”, which is the default, the Firebox is “On” at power up and after aStart Up operation. This means the Firebox will automatically be “On” during normal operation. You need not assign
feature 122 to a function key unless you want to turn the Firebox “Off”.
Firebox flicker can use one port, but two ports give a better effect. When two ports are in use, CV55.122.21-28 control
the intensity, ramp up time, and ramp down time of the second firebox.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 333 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.1 CV 55.122.11 Firebox Min Intensity
This CV controls the firebox min intensity when the firebox flickers.
4

Default Value:CV 55.122.11: Firebox Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.

When the Firebox is flickering, the intensity randomly changes between the CV55.122.11 value and theCV55.122.13 value.



In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox flicker intensity change as you change thevalue of CV 55.122.11.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 334 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.2 CV 55.122.12 Firebox Max Intensity
This CV controls the firebox intensity when the firebox flares during a chuff.
255

Default Value:CV 55.122.12: Firebox Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.



In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox flare intensity change as you change thevalue of CV 55.122.12.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 335 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.3 CV 55.122.13 Firebox Mid Intensity
This CV controls the maximum firebox intensity when the firebox flickers.
64

Default Value:CV 55.122.13: Firebox Mid Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.

When the Firebox is flickering, the intensity randomly changes between the CV55.122.11 value and theCV55.122.13 value.



In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox flicker intensity change as you change thevalue of CV 55.122.13.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 336 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.4 CV 55.122.15 Firebox Ramp Up Rate258
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox intensity increases.
4

Default Value:CV 55.122.15: Firebox Ramp Up Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

258

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Ramp Up Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Firebox to go from 0 to 255. If the rate is 255, it takes
0.01 second. With the default rate of 4, it takes 0.64 second.

This CV is supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 337 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.5 CV 55.122.16 Firebox Ramp Down Rate259
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox intensity decreases.
4

Default Value:CV 55.122.16: Firebox Ramp Down Rate
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

259

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the number of intensity levels the intensity changes every 10ms.

Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the slowest rate and 255 the fastest.



If the Ramp Down Rate is 1, it takes 2.55 seconds for the Firebox to go from 0 to 255. If the rate is 255, it
takes 0.01 second. With the default rate of 4, it takes 0.64 second.

This CV is supported only by Q2 firmware for the Quantum Revolution.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 338 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.6 CV 55.122.17 Firebox Ramp Up Time260
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox intensity increases.

10

Default Value:CV 55.122.17: Firebox Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

260

This CV replaces CV55.122.15 Firebox Ramp Up Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 339 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.7 CV 55.122.18 Firebox Ramp Down Time261
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox intensity decreases.
10

Default Value:CV 55.122.18: Firebox Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

261

This CV replaces CV55.122.16 Firebox Ramp Down Rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 340 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.8 CV 55.122.21 Firebox2 Min Intensity
This CV controls the firebox min intensity of the firebox2 when the firebox flickers.
4

Default Value:CV 55.122.21: Firebox2 Min Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7



D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.

When the Firebox2 is flickering, the intensity randomly changes between the CV55.122.21 value
and the CV55.122.23 value.



In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox2 flicker intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.122.21.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 341 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.9 CV 55.122.22 Firebox2 Max Intensity
This CV controls the firebox intensity of the firebox2 when the firebox flares during a chuff.
255

Default Value:CV 55.122.22: Firebox2 Max Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7




D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.
In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox2 flare intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.122.22.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 342 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.10 CV 55.122.23 Firebox2 Mid Intensity
This CV controls the maximum firebox2 intensity when the firebox flickers.
64

Default Value:CV 55.122.23: Firebox2 Mid Intensity
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7



D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Valid values are 0…255, 0 being least intense (off) and 255 being most intense.

When the Firebox2 is flickering, the intensity randomly changes between the CV55.122.21 value
and the CV55.122.13 value.



In Ops mode, with the Firebox “On”, you can observe the Firebox2 flicker intensity change as youchange the value of CV 55.122.23.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 343 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.11 CV 55.122.27 Firebox2 Ramp Up Time
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox2 intensity increases.

10

Default Value:CV 55.122.27: Firebox2 Ramp Up Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from 0 to its maximum intensity.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 being the slowest.



If the Ramp Up Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from off to bright. With the default time of 10, it
takes 0.1 second.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 344 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.25.12 CV 55.122.28 Firebox2 Ramp Down Time
This CV controls the rate at which the Firebox2 intensity decreases.
10

Default Value:CV 55.122.28: Firebox2 Ramp Down Time
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The value of this CV specifies the time for the light to change from its maximum intensity to 0.

Each unit represents 0.01 second. For example, a value of 25 represents 0.25 second.



Valid values are 1…255, 1 being the fastest time and 255 the slowest.



If the Ramp Down Time is 120, it takes 1.2 seconds for the light to go from bright to off. With the default time of
10, it takes 0.1 second.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 345 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.26 CV 55.134.0 Exterior Lights Initial State
This CV specifies the initial state of miscellaneous exterior lights.
CV 55.134.0 Exterior Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
ReservedReserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Step
Lights(113)

Reserved

Truck
Lights(109)

Default value = 11111111 binary = FF hex = 255 decimal.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 346 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.27 CV 55.135.0 Interior Lights Initial State
This CV specifies the initial state of miscellaneous interior lights.
CV 55.135.0 Interior Lights Initial State
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Firebox
(122)

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

EngineRoom2
Lights(120)

EngineRoom
Lights(121)Default value = 11111111 binary = FF hex = 255 decimal.



If bit 4 of this CV is “1”, the Firebox feature state is “On” upon power up and start up operations.

A write to this CV in operations mode causes the Feature 122 function state to be immediately set to the newvalue.

A start up operation causes the Feature 122 function states to be set to the value in this CV.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 347 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.28 CV 55.136.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #1
The Multiple Automatic Lights #1 feature allows you to activate more than one automatic light feature with a single
function key. Select which lights you want to activate in CV 55.136.0 … CV 55.136.2, and assign Feature 136 to afunction output in CV 53.
By default, Feature 136 is assigned to outputs 1 and 2 (FL(f) and FL(r)) in CV 53.
By default, Multiple Automatic Lights #1 controls the automatic Headlight, Reverse Light, Front and Rear Mars Lights,
Front and Rear Ditch Lights, and Front and Rear Overhead Blinking Lights.
CV 55.136.0 Multiple Automatic Lights #1 Configuration Byte 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Rear
OHBL
(96)



OHBL
(92)

Rear Ditch
Lights(88)

Ditch
Lights(84)

Rear Mars
Light
(80)

Mars Light(76)

Reserved

Step
Lights(113)

Reserved

Truck
Lights(109)

Rear
MarkerLights(106)

Front
MarkerLights
(104)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear
NumberBoard
Lights(102)

Front
NumberBoard
Lights(100)

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

CV 55.136.2 Multiple Automatic Lights #1 Configuration Byte 2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

Bit 0Headlight(70)

Default value = 11111111 binary = FF hex = 255 decimal.

CV 55.136.1 Multiple Automatic Lights #1 Configuration Byte 1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2



Bit 1
ReverseLight(73)

EngineRoom2
LightEngineRoomLight

Firebox(122)

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear Cab
Lights(118)

Front Cab
Lights(116)

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

Example: My DCC controller has limited number of function keys and I want to be able to turn all the lights on
and off with a single function key, F0. What can I do to accomplish this?
Solution: Set CV 55.136.1 to 255 and set CV 55.136.2 to 255. Since the Multiple Automatic Lights #1 feature is
assigned to F0 by default, F0 will now activate or deactivate all the automatic lights. You can also set CV
55.137.1 to 0 and CV 55.138.2 to 0 if you wish, but unless you have F9…F12 on your controller, this should not
be necessary.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 348 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.29 CV 55.137.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #2
The Multiple Automatic Lights #2 feature allows you to activate more than one automatic light feature with a single
function key. Select which lights you want to activate in CV 55.137.0 … CV 55.137.2, and assign Feature 137 to afunction output in CV 53.
By default, Feature 137 is assigned to output 13 (F11) in CV 53.
By default, the Multiple Automatic Lights #2 feature controls the automatic Front and Rear Number Board Lights,
Front and Rear Marker Lights, Truck Lights, and Step Lights.
CV 55.137.0 Multiple Automatic Lights #2 Configuration Byte 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Rear
OHBL
(96)



OHBL
(92)

Rear Ditch
Lights(88)

Ditch
Lights(84)

Rear Mars
Light
(80)

Mars Light(76)

Reserved

Step
Lights(113)

Reserved

Truck
Lights(109)

Rear
MarkerLights(106)

Front
MarkerLights
(104)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear
NumberBoard
Lights(102)

Front
NumberBoard
Lights
(100)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear Cab
Lights(118)

Front Cab
Lights(116)

Default value = 11111111 binary = FF hex = 255 decimal.

CV 55.137.2 Multiple Automatic Lights #2 Configuration Byte 2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

Bit 0Headlight(70)

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

CV 55.137.1 Multiple Automatic Lights #2 Configuration Byte 1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2



Bit 1
ReverseLight(73)

EngineRoom2
LightEngineRoomLight

Firebox(122)

Reserved

Reserved

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 349 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.30 CV 55.138.SI Multiple Automatic Lights #3
The Multiple Automatic Lights #3 feature allows you to activate more than one automatic light feature with a single
function key. Select which lights you want to activate in CV 55.138.0 … CV 55.138.2, and assign Feature 138 to afunction output in CV 53.
By default, Feature 138 is assigned to output 14 (F12) in CV 53.
By default, Multiple Automatic Lights #3 controls the automatic Front and Rear Cab Lights.
CV 55.138.0 Multiple Automatic Lights #3 Configuration Byte 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Rear
OHBL
(96)



OHBL
(92)

Rear Ditch
Lights(88)

Ditch
Lights(84)

Rear Mars
Light
(80)

Mars Light(76)

Reserved

Step
Lights(113)

Reserved

Truck
Lights(109)

Rear
MarkerLights(106)

Front
MarkerLights
(104)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear
NumberBoard
Lights(102)

Front
NumberBoard
Lights
(100)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Rear Cab
Lights(118)

Front Cab
Lights(116)

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

CV 55.138.2 Multiple Automatic Lights #3 Configuration Byte 2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Reserved

Bit 0Headlight(70)

Default value = 00000000 binary = 00 hex = 0 decimal.

CV 55.138.1 Multiple Automatic Lights #3 Configuration Byte 1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2



Bit 1
ReverseLight(73)

EngineRoom2
LightEngineRoomLight

Firebox(122)

Reserved

Reserved

Default value = 11111111 binary = FF hex = 255 decimal.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 350 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.31 CV 55.154.SI Grade Crossing Horn Signal
The Grade Crossing Horn Signal consists of up to 4 horn blasts interspersed with 3 silent periods.
You can specify the duration of each horn blast and the duration of each silent period to the nearest 0.1 second.
For each horn blast you can also specify whether a normal horn blast is played, or whether a hoot is played instead ofa short horn blast or a fancy ending is played at the end of a long horn blast.
The default values for CV55.154.0-6 gives a grade crossing signal consisting of:
An initial horn blast of 3.0 seconds.
A silent period of 1.5 seconds.
A horn blast of 3.0 seconds.
A silent period of 1.5 seconds.
A horn blast of 1.0 second.
A silent period of 1.5 seconds.
A final horn blast of 3.0 seconds.
To play the grade crossing horn signal use CV53 to assign feature 154 to a function key. Then press the function key
whenever you want the grade crossing horn signal to play.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 351 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 55.154.0 Horn Blast 1 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the first horn blast.
Default Value:

30

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will
not be played.

The default value of “30” represents 3.0 seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hootrecord is played262.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at
the end of the long horn blast263.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.

The duration specified is the time from the start of the horn blast to the start of the next silent period. Because
the length of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if a hoot isplayed) than this time.

CV 55.154.1 Silent Period 1 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the first silent period.

262
263

Default Value:

15

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D7 specify the duration. Valid values are 0 to 255.

The default value of “15” represents 1.5 seconds.

Firmware built prior to 9-Sept-10 does not support the use of D7 to specify a hoot or fancy ending.
A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 352 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 55.154.2 Horn Blast 2 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the second horn blast.
Default Value:

30

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will
not be played.

The default value of “30” represents 3.0 seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hootrecord is played264.

If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at
the end of the long horn blast265.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.

The duration specified is the time from the start of the horn blast to the start of the next silent period. Because
the length of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if a hoot isplayed) than this time.

CV 55.154.3 Silent Period 2 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the second silent period.

264
265

Default Value:

15

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D7 specify the duration. Valid values are 0 to 255.

The default value of “15” represents 1.5 seconds.

Firmware built prior to 9-Sept-10 does not support the use of D7 to specify a hoot or fancy ending.
A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 353 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 55.154.4 Horn Blast 3 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the third horn blast.
Default Value:

10

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will
not be played.

The default value of “10” represents 1.0 seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hootrecord is played266.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at
the end of the long horn blast267.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.

The duration specified is the time from the start of the horn blast to the start of the next silent period. Because
the length of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if a hoot isplayed) than this time.

CV 55.154.5 Silent Period 3 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the third silent period.

266
267

Default Value:

15

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D7 specify the duration. Valid values are 0 to 255.

The default value of “15” represents 1.5 seconds.

Firmware built prior to 9-Sept-10 does not support the use of D7 to specify a hoot or fancy ending.
A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 354 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 55.154.6 Horn Blast 4 Duration
Use this CV to specify the duration of the fourth horn blast.
Default Value:

30

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will
not be played.

The default value of “30” represents 3.0 seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hootrecord is played268.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at
the end of the long horn blast269.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.



Because the length of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if ahoot is played) than the duration specified.

Example 1: To specify a grade crossing signal consisting of two 3.5 second long horn blasts with a 2.0 second
silent period in between, set
CV55.154.0 to “35”CV55.154.1 to “20”CV55.154.2 to “35”CV55.154.3 to “0”CV55.154.4 to “0”CV55.154.5 to “0”CV55.154.6 to “0”.

Example 2: To specify a grade crossing signal consisting of
3.0 second long horn blast
1.5 second silent period
3.0 second long horn blast
1.5 second silent period
0.5 second hoot
1.5 second silent period
3.0 second long horn blast with fancy ending
set
CV55.154.0 to “30”CV55.154.1 to “15”CV55.154.2 to “30”CV55.154.3 to “15”CV55.154.4 to “133”CV55.154.5 to “15”CV55.154.6 to “158”.

268
269

Firmware built prior to 9-Sept-10 does not support the use of D7 to specify a hoot or fancy ending.
A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 355 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.7.32 CV 55.178.SI Status Report
By default, Feature 178 is assigned to output 12 (F10) in CV 53.
By default, the Status Report announces the speed in scale MPH or scale KPH in forward and reverse.

5.7.32.1 CV 55.178.0 Status Report Configuration
Use this CV to select the type of information announced in the status report.
Default Value:1

CV 55.178.0: Status Report Configuration
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Trip
Odometer
Scale Feet

Analog DC
Voltage

Odometer
Scale Miles

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Internal
Temp

PWM

BEMF

Scale MPHDefault value = 00000001 binary = 01 hex = 1 decimal.



If bit 0 = 1, the Scale MPH or Scale KPH is announced in FWD/REV. You can select between SMPH and
SKPH in CV56.0.

If bit 1 = 1, the BEMF is announced in FWD/REV. The spoken BEMF value is preceded by a spoken“BEMF”270.



If bit 2 = 1, the PWM is announced in FWD/REV. The spoken PWM value is preceded by a spoken “PWM” 271.

If bit 3 = 1, the Internal Temperature272 is announced in degrees Celsius. The spoken temperature value isfollowed by the spoken phrase “degrees C”. See CV56.32.0 for temperature calibration information.

If bit 4 = 1, the Odometer273 distance traveled is announced in scale miles followed by the word “miles”. If you
want the distance reported in kilometers, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”. See CV58.PI.SI for more information on theodometer feature.



If bit 5 = 1, the Analog DC Voltage is announced followed by the word “volts”. The voltage is announced only
during Analog DC operation, not during DCC operation.

If bit 6 = 1, the Trip Odometer274 distance traveled is announced in scale feet followed by the word “feet”. If
you want the distance reported in meters, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”. See CV58.PI.SI for more information on thetrip odometer feature.

270

Q1, Q2, and Q3 firmware built before Jan 2013 will precede the BEMF value with a spoken a ‘B’.
Q1, Q2, and Q3 firmware built before Jan 2013 will precede the PWM value with a spoken a ‘D’.
272
The Internal Temperature feature is currently only available with Q2 O-Scale and G-Scale firmware and with Q2 Quantum Revolution firmware.
273
The Odometer feature is available with Q3 firmware, Q2 firmware, and with Q1a firmware built after 23-Jul-09.
274
The Odometer feature is available with Q3 firmware, Q2 firmware, and with Q1a firmware built after 23-Jul-09.
271

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 356 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8 CV 56.PI.SI QSI Configuration
Use CV 56 to access Quantum Configuration settings.
CV 56 is implemented as a two-dimensional table of registers. Some rows of this table have only one register andrequire the use of CV 49 only. Other rows require both CV 49 and CV 50 to select the configuration registers.

5.8.1 CV 56.0: QSI System Configuration 0 (PI = 0)
Use this CV to configure the Quantum system.
0275

Default
Value:CV 56.0: QSI System Configuration 0 Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reed Switch
DisableBit 0

Auxiliary
Capacitor
Enable

“1”

“1”

276

BEMF
Synchronized
Chuff
Calibration

Antialiased
BEMF
Measurements

Metric UnitsSounds On
Power UpOn power up, the locomotive’s sound system will turn on only when a valid DCC Ops
Mode packet addressed to the locomotive is received.
On power up, the locomotive’s sound system will turn on when any valid DCC Ops Mode
packet is received.

Selects “Imperial Units”. The locomotive’s speed is reported in scale miles per hour(smph). Under Calibrated Speed Control (see CV 56.4), each speed step increment isequal to 1 smph. “Imperial Units” is the default for models of US prototypes.
Selects “Metric Units”. The locomotive’s speed is reported in scale kilometers per hour(skph). Under Calibrated Speed Control, each speed step increment is equal to 1 skph.
“Metric Units” is the default for models of non-US prototypes.

Antialiased BEMF Measurements are disabled.
Antialiased BEMF Measurements are enabled.

Selects BEMF synchronized chuff calibration mode 276.
“0”
“1”

275

Bit 0

Enables Antialiased BEMF Measurements.
“0”
“1”

Bit 3

Bit 1

Selects between Imperial and Metric Units.
“0”

Bit 2

CAM
Synchronized
ChuffsBit 2Sounds on Power Up
“0”

Bit 1

CAM
Odometer

Bit 3

BEMF synchronized chuffs calibration mode “Off” (default).
BEMF synchronized chuffs calibration mode “On”. In this mode the locomotive maintains
a constant speed at each speed step and, in place of normal chuffing sounds, produces asingle short beep or single short air release sound once per wheel revolution. Cylinder
Cocks sounds are turned off to make it easier to hear the beep/air release sound. It is
now easy to adjust CV56.7.SI SMPH/BEMF Ratio (Q3) or CV56.13 Chuff Interval Trim
(Q1 and Q2) to obtain exactly one air release per wheel revolution.

The default for models of non-US prototypes is 2, selecting for Metric Units.
The BEMF synchronized chuff calibration is available in Q3 firmware, Q2 firmware, and Q1a firmware built after 23-Jul-09.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 357 of 468

5-Aug-15

Bit 4

Selects between BEMF synchronized and CAM277 synchronized chuffs on Steam locomotives.
“0”
“1”

Bit 5

Odometer278 Mode
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

BEMF mode (default).
CAM mode.

Auxiliary Capacitor Enable279
“0”
“1”

Bit 7

Synchronize chuffs using BEMF (default).
Synchronize chuffs using a Chuff CAM.

Auxiliary capacitor disabled (default).
Auxiliary capacitor enabled.

Reed Switch Disable“0”“1”

Normal Reed Switch operation is in effect (default).
The Reed Switch is ignored for all operations except the power up reset to factory
defaults.

Bit 2 is ignored.

277

Chuff CAMs are currently supported only in Q3 firmware and Q2 firmware.
The Odometer feature is available with Q3 firmware, Q2 firmware, and Q1a firmware built after 23-Jul-09.
279
The auxiliary capacitor is available on Q3 FX-U models only.
278

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 358 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.2 CV 56.1: QSI System Configuration 1 (PI = 1)
Use this CV to configure the Quantum system280.
0Default
Value:CV 56.1: QSI System Configuration 1 Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Reserved

Bit 0

Reversed
Motor Polarity

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Enable AirWire

AirWire operation is disabled.
AirWire operation is enabled.

Selects CAM synchronized chuffs for chuff2 on Articulated Steam locomotives.
“0”
“1”

Bit 6

CAM
Synchronized
Chuff2

Enable AirWire
“0”
“1”

Bit 4

Reserved

Synchronize chuff2 without using a 2nd CAM (default).
Synchronize chuff2 using a 2nd Chuff CAM.

Reversed Motor Polarity“0”“1”

Normal Motor Polarity.
Reversed Motor Polarity.

Bits 1,2,3,5 and 7 are ignored.

280

This CV is currently supported only by firmware for Q3 Titan-G decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 359 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.3 CV 56.4: QSI Throttle Mode (PI = 4)
Use this CV to specify how your Quantum Locomotive interprets throttle position 281.
1

Default
Value:CV 56.4: QSI Throttle Mode Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
0

0

0

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

0

0

D1

D0



Set data in bits 0 and 1 as follows:“0” = Standard Throttle Control (STC).
“1” = Regulated Throttle Control (RTC)282“2” = Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control (BEMFSC) 283.
”3” = Calibrated Speed Control (CSC)

All other bits are reserved and should be set to 0.

Default is “1”, Regulated Throttle Control.

Standard Throttle Control (STC) is the common way to control the power delivered to a locomotive’s motor.
Under STC, the throttle setting (speed step) explicitly determines the percentage of full power applied to the motoras specified in a speed table. Because the power applied to the motor is constant for a given throttle setting, thespeed of the locomotive will change under load, such as climbing grades, pulling a heavy train, binding wheels orgears, and poor track conditions. In addition, the speed of the locomotive will vary as a result of changes in track
voltage caused by power pack resistance, track resistance, inconsistent or intermittent pickups, and changes inmotor load current.
Calibrated Speed Control (CSC) uses internal motor control electronics to vary the power applied to the motor in
an attempt to maintain the same speed regardless of varying load or track voltage conditions. In 128 speed step
mode, the locomotive’s speed in scale miles per hour (smph) is equal to the throttle setting 284. Default resolution isin 1-smph increments. If your throttle is set at 35, the locomotive will go 35 smph. In 14 or 28 speed step mode,
you need to multiply your throttle settings by 9 and 4.5 respectively to determine the locomotive’s speed.
If CV 56.0 bit 1 is set to 1, the locomotive’s speed in scale kilometers per hour (skph) is equal to the throttle
setting.
Although some prototype locomotives can achieve 128 miles per hour, most were not designed for these speeds.
Increasing the speed step above the fastest speed obtainable by your model locomotive will not produce
additional speed increase. Your model’s top speed is also limited by the track voltage. If your command station
cannot supply sufficient voltage, at high speed steps the locomotive will run slower than the throttle indicates.
CSC is a big improvement over STC, but may not work well when locomotives are in Consists or are used as mid
train helps or pushers and the locomotives are slightly mismatched in speed calibration. A locomotive that tends
to go slightly faster than 35 smph tries to pull the locomotive that tends to go slightly slower than 35 smph up to
speed and applies more power to do so. The locomotive that tends to go slightly slower than 35 smph tries toslow the locomotive that tends to go slightly faster than 35 smph and reduces power to do so. The result is thatthe slightly faster locomotive does all the pulling work while the slightly slower locomotive is dragged along.
Under CSC, the following CV’s have no meaning and are not used: CV 2 (V-Start), CV 5 (V-High), CV 25 (Speed
Table Selection), CV 66 (Forward Trim), CV 95 (Reverse Trim), and CV 67 – CV 94 (User Defined Speed
Tables).

281

CV56.4 does not affect Analog DC operation. Analog DC throttle mode is set using Programming Option #10.
On early Quantum 1 factory equipped locomotives, CV56.4 = 1 was the setting for Speed Control, and CV 56.4 = 2 was the setting for RTC.
283
Both CSC and BEMFSC are not available in Q3, Q2, or Q1a firmware due to threatened litigation from Mike’s Train House (MTH) ®.
284
Because of the way the NMRA has set up speed steps, the actual scale speed is 1 smph less than the speed step (i.e. Speed Step 2 = 1 smph, Speed Step 3 = 2 smph, etc.).
Most Command Stations display the throttle setting as 1 less than the speed step (i.e. Speed Step 2 = Throttle Setting 1, Speed Step 3 = Throttle Setting 2, etc.) For thosecommand stations, the throttle setting is equal to scale miles per hour.
282

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 360 of 468

5-Aug-15

Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control (BEMFSC): This is a non-calibrated speed control technique where
each speed step corresponds to a specific BEMF target value. The speed control circuitry adjusts the power
applied to the motor in order to minimize the difference between the measured BEMF and the target BEMF.
BEMFSC has the same problem with locomotives in a consist as does CSC.
The following CV’s are used to determine the BEMF target value: CV2 (V-Start), CV5 (V-High), CV6 (V-Mid),
CV25 (Speed Table Selection), CV66 (Forward Trim), CV95 (Reverse Trim), and CV67 – CV94 (User Defined
Speed Tables).
Regulated Throttle Control (RTC) combines the best of both Standard Throttle Control and Speed Control. The
locomotive still uses speed control circuitry to maintain the locomotive’s speed but the speed is allowed toincrease or decrease slowly in response to loading. When the locomotive encounters an uphill grade, it decreases
speed slowly in response to the extra loading. If a locomotive encounters a tight curve or if it has to climb a bad
track joint at low speed, it passes through or over these obstacles with little change in speed, just like theprototype. In RTC as in STC, the speed step is a requested power setting, but in RTC the locomotive acts like itweighs thousands of pounds in response to changing loads or layout conditions.
This “intrinsic mass” is not the same as the inertia settings specified in CV 3, CV 4, CV 23, and CV 24, where thelocomotive responds to throttle increases and decreases slowly over time. Even with these CV’s set to large
values, in STC the locomotive would still stop suddenly if it encountered a minor obstacle at slow speeds since
there is no Inertial Control circuitry to maintain its motion.
RTC provides an advantage when operating Consists. If the locomotives in a consist are slightly mismatched in
speed and experience unequal loading, the RTC firmware in each locomotive responds to automatically equalize
the loading.
RTC applies a little more power to the locomotive that tends to run slightly slower, and applies a little less power
to the locomotive that tends to run slightly faster. As a result, all the locomotives in the consist tend to work
together rather than fight each other.
RTC uses all the standard CV’s pertaining to the throttle, including CV 2 (V-Start), CV 5 (V-High), CV 25 (Speed
Table Selection), CV 66 (Forward Trim), CV 95 (Reverse Trim), and CV 67 – CV 94 (User Defined Speed
Tables).

Example: Select Regulated Throttle Control
1. Set CV 49 to 4.
2. Set CV 56 to 1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 361 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.4 CV 56.5: Regulated Throttle Control (RTC) Minimum Back EMF (PI = 5)
Use this CV to specify the minimum speed under Regulated Throttle Control.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 56.5: Regulated Throttle Control Minimum BEMF Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0

0

0

D4

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

D3



For models 100…999, the data range is from 0 to 7. Bits 3…7 are ignored. For models 1000…9999, the data
range is 0 to 31. Bits 5…7 are ignored.

The locomotive will operate at a speed corresponding to this minimum Back EMF until the speed table value
corresponding to the throttle position exceeds V-Start at which time the locomotive will gain speed.



If the value of this CV is 0, the locomotive does not maintain a minimum speed. The locomotive may not moveat very low speed steps.



If your locomotive runs very smoothly under RTC at speed step one, you may consider lowering the RTC
Minimum BEMF value. If your locomotive exhibits non-smooth, jerky behavior at speed step one, you may
want to increase the RTC Minimum BEMF value until operation is smooth.



Before setting the minimum Back EMF, make sure that V-Start, CV2, is not affecting the minimum speed at
speed step 1. At QSI, we set V-Start to provide minimum speed between speed step 1 and speed step 8 285 in
the following way.

Setting CV 2 for Best RTC Minimum Speed Performance at Lower Speed Steps
1. Place locomotive on a level section of track at least a few feet in length.
2. Set V-Start, CV 2, to 0.
3. Set locomotive Throttle Mode to STC in CV 56.4.
4. Set throttle to speed step 8. Unless your track voltage is very high, your locomotive should be
stopped.
5. Increase CV2 in increments until the locomotive starts to move.
6. Decrease CV2 until the locomotive stops. Use this value for your CV2 setting.
7. Return to RTC in CV 56.4.
With this CV 2 setting, notice that your locomotive’s minimum speed is maintained between speed
step 0 and speed step 8. If the locomotive does not increase at speed step 9, you may want toincrease CV 2 slightly. See Appendix VI for additional information on operating your locomotive at
minimum speed under RTC.

285 Speed step 8 is an arbitrary choice. It maintains a reasonable speed step range that ensures that variations in track voltage settings, locomotive wear-in and others factors do
not prevent the locomotive from obtaining a minimum speed at lower speed steps.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 362 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.5 CV 56.6: Speed Step 1 Delay (PI = 6)
Use this CV to specify the amount of time the locomotive waits at speed step 1 before moving.
0

Default Value:

CV 56.6: Speed Step 1 Delay Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The CV56.6 value is the time the locomotive waits at speed step 1 before moving. Each unit represents 0.1
second. For example, a value of 30 represents 3.0 seconds.

This delay allows diesel motor sounds to rev up to notch 1 sounds before the locomotive moves.



If the CV56.6 value is 0, there is no delay. The locomotive begins moving immediately when the throttle isincreased from speed step 0 to speed step 1.



If the CV56.6 value is > 0, the locomotive waits the CV56.6 value / 10 seconds of time before moving when
the throttle is increased from speed step 0 to speed step 1. For example, if CV56.6 = 43, the locomotive waits
4.3 seconds before moving.

If the throttle is increased to a speed step greater than 1, the locomotive begins moving immediately.

This CV does not affect the locomotive’s operation when the throttle is decreased from a speed step greaterthan 1 to speed step 1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 363 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.6 CV 56.7.SI: SMPH/BEMF Ratio (PI = 7, SI = 0,1)286
Use this CV to specify the relationship between scale MPH and BEMF.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

The SMPH/BEMF Ratio requires 2 bytes. CV56.7.0 is the least significant byte, and CV56.7.1 is the most significant byte.
CV 56.7.0: SMPH/BEMF Ratio Low Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 56.7.1: SMPH/BEMF Ratio High Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D7

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

The CV56.7.0-1 two byte value specifies the amount the SMPH changes for a change of 1.0 BEMF unit.
A value of 10000 represents 1.0, meaning that a change of 1.0 BEMF unit corresponds to a change of 1.0 SMPH. A
value of 1000 represents 0.1, meaning that a change of 1.0 BEMF unit corresponds to a change of 0.1 SMPH.
The two byte CV value = (high byte * 256) + low byte. For example for a value of 1000, you would set CV56.7.0 to 232
and CV56.7.1 to 3 according to the calculations
Low byte = 1000 modulo 256 = 232
High byte = 1000 / 256 = 3

You can hear the locomotive announce the BEMF value in Forward or Reverse in a verbal status report. You trigger
the status report by pressing F10. To have the BEMF announced in the status report set CV55.178.0 to 2.
The SMPH can be determined using a commercial speedometer, or using a stopwatch to measure the time it takes
the locomotive to travel a fixed distance.
If Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is enabled (see CV62), program CV56.7.1 first, then CV56.7.0. The
locomotive reads out the two byte value when the low byte is programmed.

Example: Set CV56.7.0-1 to 0.0913.
Multiply 0.0913 by 10000 to get 913.
Divide 913 / 256 to get 3. This is the value of the high byte CV56.7.1.
Multiply 256 * 3 to get 768. Subtract this from 913 to get 913 – 768 = 145. This is the value of the low byte
CV56.7.0.
Set CV49 to 7.
Set CV50 to 1.
Set CV56 to 3. (This sets CV56.7.1 to 3.)
Set CV50 to 0.
Set CV56 to 145. (This sets CV56.7.0 to 145.)

286

CV56.7.SI is supported only by Q3 decoders.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 364 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.6.1

Calibrating BEMF to SMPH (Q3)This section describes several calibration methods for Q3 decoders. For Q1 and Q2 decoders, see the methods
described under CV56.9 BEMF to Scale MPH Trim.

(1) Calibrate BEMF Synchronized Chuff Rate
If you are calibrating a steam locomotive, you can calibrate BEMF to SMPH and BEMF Synchronized Chuff Rate at
the same time. If you enter the correct scale wheel diameter for your locomotive, obtaining a synchronized chuff
guarantees a correct BEMF to SMPH calibration. See the next section on calibrating chuff rate for further information.

(2) Use the Trip Odometer Calibration Procedure(a) Assign feature 200 “Calibrate BEMF to SMPH” to a function key using CV53.PI.1. For example, if you want
to use FKey 12 for this purpose, set CV53.14.1 = 200.
(b) Measure a distance on your track equivalent to the value of CV58.20.0-1 BEMF to SMPH Calibration
Distance. For example, if the value of CV58.20.0-1 = 696, either measure 696 feet using a scale tapemeasure or convert 696 to actual feet and inches and measure the distance using a standard tapemeasure.
(c) Mark a start point and a stop point at the two ends of this distance.
(d) [Optional] Have the locomotive read out the value of CV56.7.0-1. Write this number on paper for futurereference.
(e) Move your locomotive to the start point.
(f) Press the function key you assigned to feature 200. The locomotive will announce “Calibration Started” andthe bell will start ringing.
(g) Using the DCC controller throttle, move the locomotive to the stop point. Use any speed that allows you to
comfortably control the locomotive and bring it to a stop as closely as possible to the stop point.
(h) When the locomotive has completely stopped and entered neutral, press the function key you assigned tofeature 200. The bell will automatically stop ringing, and the locomotive will announce “Calibration
Finished” followed by the number of scale feet traveled as measured by the trip odometer.
(i) [Optional] Have the locomotive read out the value of CV56.7.0-1.
(j) If you make a mistake such as prematurely pressing the function key the second time, you can recover bymanually entering the previous value of CV56.7.0-1 from step (d) and going back to step (e). You can also
recover by resetting all CV’s to their factory default values, but then you need to go back to step (a).
(k) Repeat steps (e) thru (i) to make sure you get fairly consistent results.
(l) When done calibrating, reassign the function key to a feature other than feature 200 using CV53.PI.1.

(3) Use a Commercial Speedometer
Measure your locomotive’s SMPH using a device similar to one available fromhttp://www.tonystrains.com/products/tdp-assoc_speed.htm
Run your locomotive at a medium speed. Press F10 to have the locomotive announce its SMPH. If the locomotive’s
announced SMPH is less than the measured SMPH, increase the value of CV56.7.0-1. If the locomotive’s announced
SMPH is greater than the measured SMPH, decrease the value of CV56.7.0-1.
(Optional) Then run your locomotive at one mile per hour. Press F10 to have the locomotive announce its SMPH. If
the announced SMPH is less than the measured SMPH, increase the value of CV56.8 BEMF Offset. If the announced
SMPH is greater than the measured SMPH, decrease the value of CV56.8 BEMF Offset.

(4) Use a Stopwatch and Tape Measure
Use a tape measure to measure a distance on your layout. Mark a start point and a stop point.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 365 of 468

5-Aug-15

For best results get your locomotive up to a medium speed and put the locomotive into “Heavy Load” by pressing F9.
Under Heavy Load the locomotive acts as if it has enormous inertia and will speed up or slow down very little undervarying track conditions.
Have the locomotive announce its speed from time to time. You may want to write these numbers down and computean average.
When the locomotive passes the start point, start the stopwatch. When the locomotive passes the stop point, stop the
stopwatch. Calculate the locomotive’s speed as:Distance_Traveled / Time

Remember to convert your “Distance_Traveled” to miles and the “Time” to hours and multiply by the appropriate scale
factor for your model (e.g., “87” for HO Scale).
For example, if the Distance_Traveled is 40 feet 6 inches and the Time is 1 minute 30 seconds, then the SMPH for
1:87 Scale is:Distance_Traveled / Time
(40.5 feet * 87 * (1 mile / 5280 feet)) / (90 seconds * (1 minute / 60 seconds) * (1 hour / 60 minutes))(40.5 * 87) / 5280) / (90 / 3600)(40.5 * 87 * 3600) / (90 * 5280)
26.693 SMPH

The longer your calibration course, the more accurate your calculated speed will be. If you have a small layout,
measure the distance for one trip around the layout and run your locomotive 10 times around the layout, starting the
stopwatch at the start of the first trip and stopping the stopwatch at the end of the tenth trip.
If the locomotive’s announced SMPH is less than the measured SMPH, increase the value of CV56.7.0-1. If thelocomotive’s announced SMPH is greater than the measured SMPH, decrease the value of CV56.7.0-1.
(Optional) Then repeat by running the locomotive at 1 SMPH over a short distance.
For example, if the Distance_Traveled is 12 inches and the Time is 53 seconds, then the SMPH for 1:87 Scale is:Distance_Traveled / Time
(1.0 feet * 87 * (1 mile / 5280 feet)) / (53 seconds * (1 minute / 60 seconds) * (1 hour / 60 minutes))(1.0 * 87) / 5280) / (53 / 3600)(1.0 * 87 * 3600) / (53 * 5280)
1,119 SMPH

If the announced SMPH is less than the measured SMPH, increase the value of CV56.8 BEMF Offset. If theannounced SMPH is greater than the measured SMPH, decrease the value of CV56.8 BEMF Offset.

(5) Graph SMPH vs BEMF
Use either a commercial speedometer or stopwatch and tape measure to determine the locomotive’s SMPH. Run thelocomotive at several different speeds. Have the locomotive announce its BEMF at each speed. Graph SMPH on the yaxis and BEMF on the x axis. Draw a straight line through the graphed points.
The slope of the line is the SMPH/BEMF ratio (CV56.7.0-1).
The x intercept of the line is the negative of the BEMF Offset (CV56.8).

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 366 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.6.2

Calibrating BEMF Synchronized Chuff Rate (Q3)

Follow these steps to calibrate your Q3 decoder’s BEMF synchronized chuff rate. If you enter the correct Scale Wheel
Diameter in step 1, this procedure also results in a correct BEMF to SMPH mapping.
1) Set CV56.26.0-1 Scale Wheel Diameter to your locomotive’s wheel diameter.
2) Set CV56.0 bit 3 to “1” to turn on BEMF synchronized chuff calibration mode so that the locomotive will produce asingle short beep or single short air release 287 every wheel revolution. Setting this bit also causes the locomotive
to maintain a constant speed at each speed step. The speed may be slower than under normal operation for agiven speed step.
3) Run your locomotive at a moderate speed, for example speed step 100, which is approximately 20 SMPH when
CV56.0 bit 3 = 1.
If the beep/air release does not occur at the same point on the wheel every revolution, giving exactly one air letoff per revolution, adjust the CV56.7.0-1 SMPH/BEMF Ratio.
If the beep/air release occurs earlier and earlier every revolution, the chuff rate is too fast. Decrease the value ofCV56.7.0-1 to slow the chuff rate. (Note: increasing the value of CV56.26.0-1 also slows the chuff rate.)
If the beep/air release occurs later and later every revolution, the chuff rate is too slow. Increase the value ofCV56.7.0-1 to speed up the chuff rate. (Note: decreasing the value of CV56.26.0-1 also speeds up the chuff rate.)
4) Then run your locomotive at a slow speed, for example speed step 5, which is approximately 1 SMPH when
CV56.0 bit 3 = 1.
If the beep/air release does not occur at the same point on the wheel every revolution, giving exactly one air letoff per revolution, adjust the CV56.8 BEMF Offset.
If the beep/air release occurs earlier and earlier every revolution, the chuff rate is too fast. Decrease the value ofCV56.8 to slow the chuff rate.
If the beep/air release occurs later and later every revolution, the chuff rate is too slow. Increase the value ofCV56.8 to speed up the chuff rate.
5) Repeat step (3) at a different moderate speed and adjust CV56.7.0-1 if necessary.
6) Repeat step (4) and adjust CV56.8 if necessary.
7) Set CV56.0 bit 3 to “0” to turn off BEMF synchronized chuff calibration mode.

287

Firmware built after 29-May-13 plays a single short beep.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 367 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.7 CV 56.8: BEMF Offset (PI = 8)
Use this CV to add an offset to each BEMF reading.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 56.8: BEMF Offset Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Sign

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 56.8 can have any value from –127 to +127. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1” indicates anegative value.

To specify a negative offset, add 128 to the unsigned offset value. For example, to specify an offset of -60, add
128 to 60 to obtain 188.



Each unit represents an offset of 1/16 BEMF unit. For example, a value of 10 adds 10/16 = 0.625 to each BEMF
reading.



Use CV 56.8 as a final adjustment to the BEMF to SMPH mapping in all locomotives and chuff rate in steam
locomotives.

Example: Add 1.2 (1.2 * 16 = 19) to each BEMF reading.
1. Set CV 49 to 8 to select the BEMF offset register.
2. Set CV 56 to 19 to specify the offset.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 368 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.8 CV 56.9: BEMF to SMPH Trim288 (PI = 9)
Use this CV to change the mapping of BEMF to scale MPH.
Default Value:128

CV 56.9: BEMF to SMPH Trim Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV determines the relationship between the measured BEMF of the motor and the speed of the locomotive insmph. The content of this CV is interpreted as “X / 128”, which means a CV value of 128 is equivalent to a Trim Factorof 1.0.
The locomotive announces the speed of the locomotive in Forward or Reverse in a verbal status report. You cantrigger the status report by pressing F10. The locomotive’s speed can be announced in either scale miles per hour orscale kilometers per hour. To have scale kilometers per hour announced, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”.
The factory default value for CV56.9 is “128” which represents “1.0”. If your locomotive is reporting speeds that are
too slow or too fast, you can correct this by increasing or decreasing the value of this CV.
For example, suppose that your locomotive reports that it is moving 30 smph, but that you measure its speed by someother means to be 35 smph. To correct this, set CV56.9 to “149”. The “149” is arrived at by the following calculation:(Measured_Speed / Reported_Speed) * Current_CV56.9(35 / 30) * 128
1.167 * 128
149

Suppose that now the locomotive reports that it is going 36 smph when it is actually going 35 smph. You can further
adjust the mapping by setting CV56.9 to “145” according to the calculation:(Measured_Speed / Reported_Speed) * Current_CV56.9(35 / 36) * 149
0.972 * 149
145

5.8.8.1

Calibrating BEMF to SMPH (Q1 and Q2)This section describes calibration methods for Q1 and Q2 decoders. For Q3 decoders, see the methods describedunder CV56.7.SI SMPH/BEMF Ratio.
Here are three ways you can calibrate your locomotive’s BEMF to SMPH mapping. Two methods involve measuring
your locomotive’s actual speed and comparing with the locomotive’s reported speed. One method involves comparing
the actual distance the locomotive travels with the distance it reports it travels.

(1) Using a Commercial Speedometer
Measure your locomotive’s speed using a device similar to one available fromhttp://www.tonystrains.com/products/tdp-assoc_speed.htm
For best results get your locomotive up to the desired speed and put the locomotive into “Heavy Load” by pressing F9.
Under Heavy Load the locomotive acts as if it has enormous inertia and will speed up or slow down very little undervarying track conditions.

288

This CV is not available in Q1a firmware released prior to 23-Jul-09. This CV is not supported by Q3 decoders; instead use CV56.7.SI SMPH/BEMF Ratio.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 369 of 468

5-Aug-15

Have the locomotive report its speed from time to time. You may want to write these numbers down and compute an
average.
Adjust CV56.9 as discussed above until the measured speed matches the locomotive’s reported speed.

(2) Using a Stopwatch and Tape Measure
Use a tape measure to measure a distance on your layout. Mark a start point and a stop point.
For best results get your locomotive up to the desired speed and put the locomotive into “Heavy Load” by pressing F9.
Under Heavy Load the locomotive acts as if it has enormous inertia and will speed up or slow down very little undervarying track conditions.
Have the locomotive report its speed from time to time. You may want to write these numbers down and compute an
average.
When the locomotive passes the start point, start the stopwatch. When the locomotive passes the stop point, stop the
stopwatch. Calculate the locomotive’s speed as:Distance_Traveled / Time

Remember to convert your “Distance_Traveled” to miles and the “Time” to hours and multiply by the appropriate scale
factor for your model (e.g., “29” for Aristocraft G-Scale).
For example, if the Distance_Traveled is 40 feet 6 inches and the Time is 1 minute 30 seconds, then the SMPH for
1:29 Scale is:Distance_Traveled / Time
(40.5 feet * 29 * (1 mile / 5280 feet)) / (90 seconds * (1 minute / 60 seconds) * (1 hour / 60 minutes))(40.5 * 29) / 5280) / (90 / 3600)(40.5 * 29 * 3600) / (90 * 5280)
8.897 SMPH

The longer your calibration course, the more accurate your calculated speed will be. If you have a small layout,
measure the distance for one trip around the layout and run your locomotive 10 times around the layout, starting the
stopwatch at the start of the first trip and stopping the stopwatch at the end of the tenth trip.
Adjust CV56.9 as discussed above until your measured speed matches the locomotive’s reported speed.

(3) Using the Locomotive’s Odometer
Using this method you compare the measured distance traveled against the locomotive’s reported distance traveled.
When using this method, the Odometer mode must be “BEMF” (CV56.0 bit 5 = ‘0’).
(1) Mark a start point and a stop point on your layout.
(2) Use a tape measure to measure the distance to be traveled through the calibration course. The longer thecalibration course, the more accurate the calibration will be. If you have a small layout, measure the distance for one
trip around the layout and run your locomotive 10 times around the layout.
(3) Convert the measured length to scale miles and save as “Measured_Scale_Distance”. For example, for a G-Scale
locomotive (scale 1:29), suppose the measured length around your layout is 60 feet 3¼ inches and the calibration
course is 10 times around the layout. Then
Measured_Scale_Distance = (60.27 feet * 10) * (1 mile / 5280 feet) * 29.0
Measured_Scale_Distance = 3.31 scale miles(4) Move the locomotive to the start point.
(5) Reset the odometer to “0” by writing “0” to CV58.1.0 (see note 3).

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 370 of 468

5-Aug-15

(6) Start the locomotive and run it through the calibration course. Stop the locomotive at the stop point.
(7) Have the locomotive report the distance traveled (see notes 1, 2 and 3). Save this value as “Reported_Distance”.
(8) Read out the current trim factor in CV56.9. Save this as “Old_Trim”.
(9) Calculate the new trim factor as shown:
New_Trim = (Measured_Scale_Distance / Reported_Distance) * Old_Trim(10) Set CV56.9 to the value of “New_Trim”.
(11) Repeat steps 4 through 10 if desired.
Note 1: To have the locomotive speak out the odometer value in scale miles or scale kilometers, set CV55.178.0 bit 4
to “1”. Then press the F10 key. If you want the odometer value in scale kilometers, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”.
Note 2: You can also have the locomotive speak out the odometer value by writing 58 to CV64.1.0. (CV64 is the CV
Numeric Verbal Readout).
Set CV49 to “1”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV64 to “58”Note 3: Version 1.1.0.1 and later versions of QuantumCVManager make this easy to do. Just select the Decoder
menu item “Odometer…” to display the Odometer dialog box. There is one button for odometer read out and a second
button for resetting the odometer.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 371 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.9 CV 56.10: Speed Step to SMPH Scale Factor (PI = 10)
Use this CV to change the mapping of speed step to scale MPH under Calibrated Speed Control (CSC).
Default Value:64

CV 56.10: Speed Step to SMPH Scale Factor Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7



D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV determines the relationship between speed steps and smph for CSC. The content of this CV isinterpreted as “X / 64”, which means a CV value of 64 is equivalent to a Scale Factor of 1.0. Some examples
are:CV 56.10

Scale Factor

32 (0x20)
64 (0x40)
128 (0x80)

0.5
1.0
2.0

Slowest possible
speed at Speed Step 2
0.5 smph
1 smph2 smphFastest possible speed
at Speed Step 127.
63 smph126 smph
252 smph

Change the Scale Factor if you want a more active throttle range for a locomotive under CSC.



A Scale Factor less than 1.0 makes sense when the top speed of the locomotive is much less than 126 smph.
For example, suppose a locomotive has a top speed of 60 smph. With a Scale Factor of 1.0, all speed steps
from 61 through 127 will result in a speed of 60 smph. If the Scale Factor is set to 0.5, then the top speed of
60 smph will correspond to speed steps 121 and above.

A Scale Factor greater than 1.0 make sense when the top speed of the locomotive is much greater than 126
smph. For example, suppose a locomotive has a top speed of 200 smph. With a Scale Factor of 1.0 the
locomotive would only go up to 126 smph. If the Scale Factor were set to 2.0, then the top speed of 200 smph
would be obtained at speed steps 101 and above.

The advantage of a Scale Factor of “1.0” is that you easily know the locomotive’s speed if you have acommand station that displays the current speed step.

The Scale Factor can also be used to increase the accuracy of locomotive’s speed. For example, if yourlocomotive runs at 34 smph when it should run at 35 smph, you could increase the scale factor slightly to(35/34) * 64 = 66.

Adjusting the Scale Factor when trying to match locomotives in Consists when all are operating under CSC is
another possibility.

This CV has no effect under Standard Throttle Control, Regulated Throttle Control, or Load CompensatedBEMF Speed Control.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 372 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.10 CV 56.12: Chuff Interval Scale Factor289 (PI = 12)
Use this CV to adjust the time between BEMF synchronized chuffs.
32

Default Value:

CV 56.12: Chuff Interval Scale Factor Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



This byte specifies a scale factor used to determine the amount of time between BEMF synchronized chuffs.
This is inversely related to the chuff rate or the number of chuffs per wheel revolution; the larger the scale
factor (more time between chuffs), the slower the chuff rate (fewer chuffs per wheel revolution). The content
of this CV is interpreted as “X / 32”, which means a CV value of 32 is equivalent to a scale factor of 1.0.

Some examples of different scale factors are:
CV 56.12
32 (0x20)
43 (0x2B)
64 (0x40)

Scale Factor
1.0
1.3
2.0

Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution43
2

128 (0x80)

4.0

1



To calculate the scale factor for a desired number of chuffs per wheel revolution, use the formula Scale Factor= (4 / N) * 32, where N is the number of chuffs per revolution.

Use this scale factor to fine-tune the chuff rate. For example, if your locomotive chuffs a little slower than four
per revolution, you can decrease the scale factor to 31 (0.97) to slightly increase the number of chuffs per
revolution. Or if your locomotive chuffs a little faster than four per revolution, you can increase the scale factor
to 33 (1.03) to slightly decrease the number of chuffs per revolution. If your locomotive supports CV56.13, use
CV56.13 instead of this CV for fine-tuning the chuff rate.

Note: We recommend that you set the chuff rate at some speed value greater than 2 smph.

289 All QSI equipped steam locomotives since 1-July-04 support CV 56.12 Chuff Interval Scale Factor and it is available on all version 6 software which includes all Life Like andthe BLI PRR K4, C&O Texas and all following models.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 373 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.11 CV 56.13: Chuff Interval Trim290 (PI = 13)
Use this CV to adjust the time between BEMF synchronized chuffs.
Default Value:128

CV 56.13: Chuff Interval Trim Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This byte specifies a scale factor used to determine the amount of time between BEMF synchronized chuffs.
This is inversely related to the chuff rate or the number of chuffs per wheel revolution; the larger the scale
factor (more time between chuffs), the slower the chuff rate (fewer chuffs per wheel revolution). The content
of this CV is interpreted as “X / 128”, which means a CV value of 128 is equivalent to a scale factor of 1.0.



Use this scale factor to fine-tune the chuff rate. For example, if your locomotive chuffs a little slower than four
per revolution, you can decrease the scale factor to 127 (0.992) to slightly increase the number of chuffs per
revolution. Or if your locomotive chuffs a little faster than four per revolution, you can increase the scale factor
to 129 (1.008) to slightly decrease the number of chuffs per revolution.



Set CV56.0 bit 3 to “1” to turn on BEMF synchronized chuff calibration mode to make it easier to adjust the
chuff rate.



If you find that one value of CV56.13 gives good synchronized chuff at one speed, but at another speed adifferent value of CV56.13 is required, see the Q2Upgrade User Manual for a procedure for calibrating thechuff rate for multiple values of CV56.13.

This CV is similar to CV56.12 Chuff Interval Scale Factor. The resolution is greater in CV56.13 but the range
is less. CV56.12 is a coarse adjustment while CV56.13 is a fine adjustment. In locomotives that support both
CV56.12 and CV56.13, both CV’s are applied. For example, if CV56.12 is “40” and CV56.13 is “144”, then the
resulting scale factor applied to the chuff interval is:
40/32 * 144/128
1.25 * 1.125
1.40625

Note: We recommend that you trim the chuff rate at some speed value greater than 2 smph.

290 CV56.13 is not available in Q1a firmware built prior to 23-Jul-09.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 374 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.12 CV 56.14: Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution (PI = 14)
Use this CV to specify the number of chuffs per wheel revolution.
4

Default Value:

CV 56.14: Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



This byte specifies the number of chuffs per wheel revolution for BEMF synchronized chuffs.

Valid values for this CV are 1…255.



If the value of this CV = 0, then a value of 1 is used.

This CV is not used if CV56.0 bit 3 is “1” enabling BEMF Synchronized Chuff Calibration mode.

This CV together with CV56.7.SI SMPH/BEMF ratio and CV56.8 BEMF Offset replace CV56.12 Chuff Interval
Scale Factor and CV56.13 Chuff Interval Trim for Q3 decoders.



Do not use this CV to calibrate your locomotive’s chuff rate. Use the procedure described in the CV56.7.SI
SMPH/BEMF Ratio section to calibrate the chuff rate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 375 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13 CV 56.18-21.SI: Quantum PID Parameters“PID” is an acronym standing for “Proportional, Integral, Differential”.
PID parameters are used to control the amount of power applied to the motor of QSI locomotives when operating
under Regulated Throttle Control, Calibrated Speed Control, or Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control.
The PID control loop strives to match the locomotive’s measured BEMF to a target BEMF value. Basically, if themeasured BEMF is less than the target BEMF, the PID control loop increases the power supplied to the motor to
make the locomotive go faster. If the measured BEMF is greater than the target BEMF, the PID control loop
decreases the power supplied to the motor to make the locomotive go slower.
A relatively easy-to-read on-line summary of PID control can be found at the following site:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PID_controller
For Q1 decoders running Q1a firmware and Q2 decoders running firmware built before 1-Oct-08, there are two PID
parameters that you can set for each BEMF range. Q1a firmware and early Q2 firmware do not allow changing theIntegral Gain. For Q2 decoders running firmware built after 1-Oct-08 and for Q3 decoders, you can also set the
Integral Gain.
Because model locomotives behave differently at different speeds, we use four different sets of PID parameters withinfour different speed ranges. Since BEMF is directly proportional to speed, we classify these speed ranges in terms of
BEMF ranges. The actual BEMF values for each range depend on the type of decoder and the type of firmware. Use
the following table to determine the BEMF value for each range for a particular decoder and firmware.
Decoder/Firmware TypeQ1 decoder/Q1a firmware
Q1 decoder/Q2 firmware
Q2 decoder
Q3 FX-U decoder
Q3 FX-SD decoder
Q3 FX-AO decoder
Q3 FX-DO decoder

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

VLS_MAX7
CV56.5 + 5
CV56.5 + 5
CV56.5 + 5
CV56.5 + 5
CV56.5 + 5
CV56.5 + 5Page 376 of 468

LS_MAX
54
54
54
293
293
479
479

MS_MAX
108
108
108
586
586
958
958

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.1

CV 56.18.SI PID Parameters for Very Slow Speed (PI=18, SI = 0,1,2)
Depends on Locomotive

Default Values:

CV 56.18.0: Proportional Gain for BEMF ≤ VLS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Proportional Gain for very slow speeds: 0 < BEMF ≤ 7. For Q2 and Q3 firmware,
this range is 0 < BEMF <= CV56.5 + 5.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

CV 56.18.1: Integral Gain for BEMF ≤ VLS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Integral Gain for very slow speeds: 0 < BEMF ≤ 7. For Q2 and Q3 firmware, thisrange is 0 < BEMF <= CV56.5 + 5.

Valid values are 0 to 2. The decoder firmware may allow you to set any value 0 to 255, but during operation, if
the value is greater than 2, a value of 2 is used.

CV 56.18.2: Differential Gain for BEMF ≤ VLS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV byte to specify the Differential Gain for very slow speeds for: 0 < BEMF ≤ 7. For Q2 and Q3
firmware, this range is 0 < BEMF <= CV56.5 + 5.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 377 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.2 CV 56.19.SI PID Parameters for Slow Speed (PI=19, SI = 0,1,2)
Depends on Locomotive

Default Values:

CV 56.19.0: Proportional Gain for: VLS_MAX < BEMF ≤ LS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Proportional Gain for slow speeds: 7 < BEMF ≤ 54. For Q2 firmware, this range isCV56.5 + 5 < BEMF <= 54. For Q3 firmware, refer to the table above to determine the appropriate VLS_MAX
and LS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

CV 56.19.1: Integral Gain for VLS_MAX < BEMF ≤ LS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Integral Gain for slow speeds: 7 < BEMF ≤ 54. For Q2 firmware, this range isCV56.5 + 5 < BEMF <= 54. For Q3 firmware, refer to the table above to determine the appropriate VLS_MAX
and LS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 2. The decoder firmware may allow you to set any value 0 to 255, but during operation, if
the value is greater than 2, a value of 2 is used.

CV 56.19.2: Differential Gain for: VLS_MAX < BEMF ≤ LS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Differential Gain for slow speeds for: 7 < BEMF ≤ 54. For Q2 firmware, this range
is CV56.5 + 5 < BEMF <= 54. For Q3 firmware, refer to the table above to determine the appropriate
VLS_MAX and LS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 378 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.3 CV 56.20.SI PID Parameters for Medium Speed (PI=20, SI = 0,1,2)
Depends on Locomotive

Default Values:

CV 56.20.0: Proportional Gain for: LS_MAX < BEMF ≤ MS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Proportional Gain for medium speeds: 54 < BEMF ≤ 108. For Q3 firmware, refer tothe table above to determine the appropriate LS_MAX and MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

CV 56.20.1: Integral Gain for LS_MAX < BEMF ≤ MS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Integral Gain for medium speeds: 54 < BEMF ≤ 108. For Q3 firmware, refer to thetable above to determine the appropriate LS_MAX and MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 2. The decoder firmware may allow you to set any value 0 to 255, but during operation, if
the value is greater than 2, a value of 2 is used.

CV 56.20.2: Differential Gain for: LS_MAX < BEMF ≤ MS_MAX
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Differential Gain for medium speeds for: 54 < BEMF ≤ 108. For Q3 firmware, referto the table above to determine the appropriate LS_MAX and MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 379 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.4 CV 56.21.SI PID Parameters for High Speed (PI=21, SI = 0,1,2)
Depends on Locomotive

Default Values:

CV 56.21.0: Proportional Gain for: MS_MAX < BEMF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Proportional Gain for high speeds: 108 < BEMF. For Q3 firmware, refer to thetable above to determine the appropriate MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

CV 56.21.1: Integral Gain for MS_MAX < BEMF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Integral Gain for high speeds: BEMF < 108. For Q3 firmware, refer to the table
above to determine the appropriate MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 2. The decoder firmware may allow you to set any value 0 to 255, but during operation, if
the value is greater than 2, a value of 2 is used.

CV 56.21.2: Differential Gain for: MS_MAX < BEMF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this CV to specify the Differential Gain for high speeds: 108 < BEMF. For Q3 firmware, refer to the table
above to determine the appropriate MS_MAX.

Valid values are 0 to 255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 380 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.5 Setting PID Parameters for Quantum Equipped Model Locomotives:

Make sure your locomotive is in the best possible mechanical condition. RTC can improve the operation of awell-tuned locomotive but it cannot compensate for locomotives that have serious mechanical problems. Set
CV 56.4 to “0” to select Standard Throttle Control and operate your model at slow speed over a level piece ofstraight track at the minimum sustainable speed. Note any gear bind or “catching”. If the locomotive always
slows down at the same wheel position, you may need to make mechanical adjustments. With a steam
locomotive, look for any mechanical problems with the valve gear. Lubricate all moving joints with appropriate
non-corrosive oil and lube the gearbox. Check your electrical pickups and clean the wheels to ensure
consistent power to the motor.



Make sure your test conditions are consistent.



If you are using a test track or a different layout to set PID parameters, set the DCC track voltage to match thelayout you intend to use for normal operation. When we calibrate motor control and throttle CV’s at QSI, we
set our track at 16 volts with only the test locomotive on the track and in Neutral.



Use a flat oval of track that is consistently powered in all sections (i.e. Track voltage should be the same at all
locations). Make sure track does not have misaligned track joints or turnouts that can slow the locomotive.



Reset All CV’s.



Set Status Report (F10) to both smph and BEMF (set CV 55.178.0 to 3). Speed will be announced first
followed by the BEMF value. The BEMF report will be preceded by “B” to distinguish it from the speed report.



Set minimum BEMF to 3 (set CV 56.5 to 3). This CV specifies the slowest speed the locomotive will travel in
RTC.

Set CV 56.4 to “0” to select STC.



While in STC, with the throttle set to speed step = 8 (126 speed step range), increase CV 2 until locomotive
moves, and then decrease CV 2 until locomotive stops. This will ensure that the low-end speed on your model
is not being affected by CV 2 during the PID setting procedure. This will likely be the value of CV 2 you willretain in your model after you have set all your PID parameters.



Set CV 56.4 to 1 to select RTC and adjust PID parameters:
1) Very Slow Speed PID’s: Set your locomotive to Speed Step 1. Change CV 56.18.0 and CV 56.18.2
to achieve optimal performance.
2) Slow Speed PID’s: Increase your throttle until the Status Report (F10 key) announces a BEMF value
between 20 and 56. Change CV 56.19.0 and CV 56.19.2 to achieve optimal performance.
3) Medium Speed PID’s: Increase your throttle until the Status Report (F10 key) announces a BEMF
between 56 and 125. Change CV 56.20.0 and CV 56.20.2 to achieve optimal performance.
4) High Speed PID’s: Increase your throttle until the Status Report (F10 key) announces a BEMF
greater than 125. Change CV 56.21.0 and CV 56.21.2 to achieve optimal performance

If your locomotive surges at medium and high speeds and this behavior remains after changing the
Proportional and Differential Gain parameters, then setting the Integral Gain parameters CV56.20.1 andCV56.21.1 to “1” or “0” may correct the problem.

Transient Response Test: Does the locomotive stop smoothly in DCC when the throttle is changed from full
throttle to zero throttle quickly? If it overshoots (i.e. slows, speeds up, and then slows again when you lower
the throttle quickly and the locomotive slows to its new speed), then PID parameters need to be re-adjusted(see Hints below).



It is also a good idea to test your PID settings under Analog operation to see if there is any overshoot orsurging when the throttle is changed from full to just below V-Start quickly. RTC problems under DC operation
almost always appear in DCC, although they can have different characteristics.



Set New Minimum BEMF: Adjust CV 56.5 for the best possible low speed performance in RTC. If yourlocomotive runs very smoothly and has good Very Slow Speed PID parameters, the minimum BEMF can be
reduced to 1 to achieve the ultimate low-end speed.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 381 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.13.6 General Hints for Setting PID Parameters:
Choosing the correct PID parameters is more an art form than a science. Here are some general rules based on our
experience that will get you close to the best performance.
1. We usually set the Proportional Gain (P) between 4 and 16. High values can cause overshooting, or surging
when the throttle is changed quickly and low terms can result in poor response time. Higher values of P are
generally used at the “Very Slow Speed” and “Slow Speed” BEMF ranges. We have seldom set P above 20
for the “High Speed” range.
2. The Integral Gain (I) is normally left as the default value, which for most locomotives is “2”. If yourlocomotive surges at medium and high speeds, this may be corrected by lowering I to “1” or “0”. Be wary ofsetting CV 56.18.1 Integral Gain for BEMF ≤ 7 to “0”. If you do this, the locomotive may not come to acomplete stop and enter neutral when you lower the throttle.
3. The Differential Gain (D) is usually set between 1 and 100 with some notable exceptions as high as 150.
The very high values for D are best at the “Very Slow Speed” range, while moderate D values are better at
the higher BEMF ranges (10 to 60). High values of D help at slow speeds since this term compensates for
rapid changes in speed that can occur from gear binding or minor obstacles such as misaligned track joints.
At higher speed, high values of D are less significant since the flywheel momentum will often keep the
locomotive moving despite minor gear issues. Too high a value of D will result in surging. This effect issometimes very subtle. Carefully watch your train for any slight changes in steady-state speed as it moves
around that track oval. Too high a Proportional term can also cause steady-state surging.
4. If your locomotive fails the “Transient Response” test, try lowering the Proportional terms and increase theDifferential terms for the Slow Speed, Medium Speed and High Speed ranges. Adjustments of the
Differential term for Very Low Speed will probably have no effect on transient performance. Try to bring thedifferential terms closer to the same value for the three top ranges. Do the same for the Proportional term.
You will probably have the best luck with the Differential term in adjusting transient performance. The larger
the Differential term, the less overshoot or surging the locomotive will do as it slows to it lower speed or
stops. However, a large Differential term can result in steady state surging at some speeds. Always go backand check your steady state speed performance after optimizing your transient behavior.
In some cases it is best to ignore all the above. We have seen locomotives that do not fit neatly into the above set ofrules. You may want to experiment using your own intuition, knowledge, and methodology. If you do obtain a good setof PID parameters, please let us know or publish for the rest of the railroad community.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 382 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.14 CV 56.24.SI: Wheel Diameter291 (PI = 24, SI = 0,1)
Use this CV to specify the locomotive’s wheel diameter to 0.001 of an inch.
Default Value:NA

The wheel diameter requires 2 bytes. CV56.24.0 is the least significant byte, and CV56.24.1 is the most significant byte.
CV 56.24.0: Wheel Diameter Low Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 56.24.1: Wheel Diameter High Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D7

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

The wheel diameter = low byte + (high byte * 256). This 16 bit number represents the wheel diameter in units of 0.001
inch.
For example, a value of 930 represents a diameter of 0.930 inches. You would set CV56.24.0 to “162” and CV56.24.1
to “3”, according to the calculations
Low byte = 930 modulo 256 = 162
High byte = 930 / 256 = 3This CV is the actual (non-scaled) diameter of the locomotive’s wheel as measured using a caliper or ruler.
This CV is used with CV56.25 Locomotive Scale when calculating the distance the locomotive has traveled when theodometer mode = “CAM”.
This CV is not supported by Q3 decoders. Use CV56.26.SI Scale Wheel Diameter instead.
If Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is enabled (see CV62), program CV56.24.1 first, then CV56.24.0. The
locomotive reads out the two byte value when the low byte is programmed.

291

The CAM Odometer feature and this CV is currently only available with Q2 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 383 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.15 CV 56.25.SI: Locomotive Scale292 (PI = 25, SI = 0,1)
Use this CV to specify the locomotive’s scale.
Default Value:NA

The locomotive scale requires 2 bytes. CV56.25.0 is the least significant byte, and CV56.25.1 is the most significant byte.
CV 56.25.0: Locomotive Scale Low Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 56.25.1: Locomotive Scale High Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D7

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

The locomotive scale = low byte + (high byte * 256). This 16 bit number represents the locomotive scale in units of
0.01.
For example, a value of 2900 represents a scale of 29.00. You would set CV56.25.0 to “84” and CV56.25.1 to “11”,according to the calculation
Low byte = 2900 modulo 256 = 84
High byte = 2900 / 256 = 11This CV is used with CV56.24 Wheel Diameter when calculating the distance the locomotive has traveled when theodometer mode = “CAM”.
This CV is not supported by Q3 decoders. Use CV56.26.SI Scale Wheel Diameter instead.
If Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is enabled (see CV62), program CV56.25.1 first, then CV56.25.0. The
locomotive reads out the two byte value when the low byte is programmed.

292

The CAM Odometer feature and this CV is currently only available with Q2 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 384 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.16 CV 56.26.SI: Scale Wheel Diameter (PI = 26, SI = 0,1)
Use this CV to specify the locomotive’s wheel diameter to 0.01 of a scale inch.
Default Value:NA

The scale wheel diameter requires 2 bytes. CV56.26.0 is the least significant byte, and CV56.26.1 is the most significant byte.
CV 56.26.0: Scale Wheel Diameter Low Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

CV 56.26.1: Scale Wheel Diameter High Byte Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

The scale wheel diameter = low byte + (high byte * 256). This 16 bit number represents the scale wheel diameter inunits of 0.01 inch.
For example, a value of 6300 represents a diameter of 63.00 scale inches. You would set CV56.26.0 to “156” andCV56.26.1 to “24”, according to the calculations
Low byte = 6300 modulo 256 = 156
High byte = 6300 / 256 = 24

This CV is the scale diameter of the locomotive’s wheel. If you measure your model locomotive’s wheel diameterusing a caliper or ruler, multiply your measured inches by the scale of the locomotive.
For Q3 decoders, this CV replaces CV56.24 Wheel Diameter and CV56.25 Locomotive Scale.
If Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is enabled (see CV62), program CV56.26.1 first, then CV56.26.0. The
locomotive reads out the two byte value when the low byte is programmed.

Example: Set CV56.26.0-1 to 32.00 scale inches.
Multiply 32.00 by 100 to get 3200.
Divide 3200 / 256 to get 12. This is the value of the high byte CV56.26.1.
Multiply 256 * 12 to get 3072. Subtract this from 3200 to get 3200 – 3072 = 128. This is the value of the low
byte CV56.26.0.
Set CV49 to 26.
Set CV50 to 1.
Set CV56 to 12. (This sets CV56.26.1 to 12.)
Set CV50 to 0.
Set CV56 to 128. (This sets CV56.26.0 to 128.)

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 385 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.17 CV 56.32.0: Room Temperature293 (PI = 32, SI = 0)
Use this CV to specify the room temperature in degrees Celsius.
Default Value:26

CV 56.32.0: Room Temperature Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

When this CV is written a flag is set to read the Internal Temperature at the next power-on and store the value read inlong term memory. The stored value is then used to calibrate future Internal Temperature readings.
Note: after setting this CV power off your locomotive and let it set for several minutes to cool down. Then power the
locomotive up at which time the Internal Temperature will be calibrated for the room temperature value in CV56.32.0.
The internal temperature can be read out as part of the F10 status report by setting CV55.178.0 bit 3 to “1”.
The locomotive’s firmware continuously monitors the internal temperature. If the internal temperature exceeds 90
degrees Celsius, the horn hoots, and a high temperature motor shut down is executed. The locomotive stops and theinternal temperature is announced every 10 seconds. After a high temperature shut down occurs, the locomotive must
be powered off before normal operation can resume.

293

The internal temperature feature is currently only available in G-Scale and O-Scale locomotives.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 386 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.18 CV 56.36.0: Consist Address Active for F13-F20 (PI = 36, SI = 0)
Specifies the Function Keys that are enabled when a locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.
0

Default Value:

CV 56.36.0: Consist Address Active for F13-F20 Register294
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
F20

F19

F18

F17

F16

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

F15

F14

F13



If a “0” is placed in any bit, that function key is disabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.



If a “1” is placed in any bit, that function key is enabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.

294 Write bit operation is supported for CV56.36.0.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 387 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.19 CV 56.36.1: Consist Address Active for F21-F28 (PI = 36, SI = 1)
Specifies the Function Keys that are enabled when a locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.
0

Default Value:

CV 56.36.1: Consist Address Active for F21-F28 Register295
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
F28

F27

F26

F25

F24

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

F23

F22

F21



If a “0” is placed in any bit, that function key is disabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.



If a “1” is placed in any bit, that function key is enabled when the locomotive is addressed by its Consist ID.

295 Write bit operation is supported for CV56.36.1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 388 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.20 CV 56.128: Reset to Factory Default (PI = 128)
Use this CV to reset CV’s to factory default values.
NA

Default Value:

CV 56.128: Reset to Factory Default Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7



D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Use the Secondary Index to select a range of CV’s 296. Only those CV’s in the selected range will be reset;
those CV’s outside the range are left unchanged.
SI
51
52
53
55
56
58
253
254
255

Reset Operations:
Reset CV 51, System Sound Control
Reset CV 52, Individual Sounds
Reset CV 53, Function Output Mappings
Reset CV 55, QSI Feature Configuration
Reset CV 56, QSI Configuration
Reset CV 58, Odometer
Reset all standard NMRA CV’s
Reset all QSI CV’s
Reset all CV’s

Write the QSI Manufacturer Number, 113, to CV 56, to execute the reset operation.



In Operations Mode you will hear “Reset” spoken when the reset operation completes.

Note: “Reset all CV’s” may not work correctly in Service Mode on some command stations, because thecommand station may turn off the track power before the operation is complete. In this case, reset CV’s inseparate groups or use Ops Mode Programming.
Note: Q2 firmware built after 1-Jun-08 supports only SI = 255, Reset All CV’s.
Example: Reset Quantum decoder to original factory defaults (i.e. reset all CV’s)
1. Set CV 49 to 128.
2. Set CV 50 to 255.
3. Set CV 56 to 113. In Ops Mode, you will hear “Reset” when reset is competed.

Example: Reset the Individual Sound Volumes to factory defaults
1. Set CV 49 to 128.
2. Set CV 50 to 52.
3. Set CV 56 to 113.

296

Q2 firmware built after 1-June-08 only supports SI = 255.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 389 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.21

CV 56.129: Locomotive ID Access (PI = 129)

Default Value:

N/A

CV 56.129: Locomotive ID Access Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use this index with CV 56 if your controller will not allow you to program your locomotive’s ID on the main,and programming on the programming track is impossible due to insufficient power from your command
station.

This feature is only supported during Operations Mode programming. It will not work during Service Mode
programming.



Use CV 50 to select between Short Address (CV 50 = 1), High Byte Extended Address (CV 50 = 17) and Low
Byte Extended Address (CV 50 = 18).

When CV 56.129.1 is written, the data byte is written to CV 1. If programming acknowledgement is enabled,
you will hear “CV 1 equals <short address>”. The data byte must be in the range 1 to 127.

When CV 56.129.17 is written, the data byte is merely stored in temporary memory. There is no verbal
program announcement. The data byte must be in the range of 0xC0 to 0xE7.

When CV 56.129.18 is written, the two data bytes are written to CV 17 and CV 18, making the locomotive’s ID
the 2 byte address consisting of the byte written to CV 56.129.17 and the byte written to CV 56.129.18. If you
want to verify the full address in Ops Mode, set CV 64 to 17 (or 18) and hear “CV 17 (or 18) equals <longaddress>”.

Note: When programming the Extended Address, you must set CV 56.129.17 before you set CV 56.129.18.
See the CV 17 and CV 18 documentation for description of how to compute and enter the MSB (most significant byte)
and the LSB (least significant byte) of your Extended Addresses.

Step-by-step procedure for entering your short (Primary) address in CV 56.129 in Ops
Mode.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Find out if your command station accepts Decimal, Binary or Hex 297 inputs for CV entries.
Set CV 49 to 129.
Set CV 50 to 1.
Set CV 56 to your short address. Hear the address spoken back.
Change CV 29, bit 5 to “0” to allow operation with your new primary address (see CV 29).

Example: Set your locomotive’s ID to the short address “23”.
1. Set CV 49 to 129 decimal (10000001, 0x81).
2. Set CV 50 to 1.
3. Set CV 56 to 23 decimal (00010111, 0x17). Hear “CV One equals two, three”. At this point, the locomotive
must be selected as 23 to proceed to step 4.
If you were using the extended addressing to do steps 1-3, then set CV 29 to 34 decimal (00000010, 0x02) for
Primary Address Enable and 28/128 Speed Step.
Your locomotive’s short ID is now 23 and ready to operate.

297 Hex and Binary numbers are not shown in the following examples. If you require Hex or Binary, use the conversion table in Appendix IX.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 390 of 468

5-Aug-15

Step-by-step procedure for entering your long (Extended) Address in CV 56.129 in Ops
Mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Find out if your command station accepts Decimal, Binary or Hex inputs for CV entries.
Determine the MSB and LSB for your Extended Address (See CV 17/18 instructions and example).
Set CV 49 to 129.
Set CV 50 to 17.
Enter CV 17 (Most Significant Byte) as a Decimal, Binary or Hex number required by your command station.
You will hear no verbal response.
6. Next enter CV 18 (Least Significant Byte) as a Decimal, Binary or Hex number. Hear the new full address
spoken back.
7. Change CV 29, bit 5 to “1” to allow operation with your new Extended Address (see CV 29).
The following table shows examples for some common train numbers. Just follow the procedure above when entering
CV 17 and CV 18.
ID Number
3985
3989
3708

CV 17 (MSB)
(Dec)
207
207
206

CV 18 (LSB)
(Dec)
145
149
124

CV 17 (MSB)
(Hex)
CF
CF
CE

CV 18 (LSB)
(Hex)
91
95
7C

CV 17 (MSB)(Binary)
11001111
11001111
11001110

CV 18 (LSB)(Binary)
10010001
10010101
01111100

Example 1: Set your locomotive’s long address to “3985” (Also see example under CV 17 and 18.)
1. Set CV 49 to 129 decimal (10000001, 0x81).
2. Set CV 50 to 17 decimal (00010001, 0x11).
3. Set CV 56 to 207 decimal (11001111, 0xCF), which is the MSB for your address (you will hear no verbal
feedback).
4. Set CV 50 to 18 decimal (00010010, 0x12).
5. Set CV 56 to 145 decimal (10010001, 0x91), which is the LSB for your address. Hear “CV one, seven equals
three, nine, eight, five”.
6. Set CV 29 to 34 decimal (00100010, 0x22) for Extended Address Enable and 28/128 Speed Step.
Your locomotive’s Long ID is now 3985 and ready to operate.

Example 2: Set your locomotive’s long address to “5344” (See example under CV 17 and 18.)
1. Set CV 49 to 129 decimal (10000001, 0x81).
2. Set CV 50 to 17 decimal (00010001, 0x11).
3. Set CV 56 to 212 decimal (11010100, 0xD4), which is the MSB for your address (you will hear no verbal
feedback).
4. Set CV 50 to 18 decimal (00010010, 0x12).
5. Set CV 56 to 224 decimal (11100000, 0xE0), which is the LSB for your address. Hear “CV one, seven equals
five, three, four, four”.
6. Set CV 29 to 34 decimal (00100010, 0x22) for Extended Address Enable and 28/128 Speed Step.
Your locomotive’s Long ID is now 5344 and ready to operate.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 391 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.22

CV 56.254: About Quantum Decoder (PI = 254)

Use this CV in Service Mode to read back information about your Quantum locomotive. Use CV 50 to select among
the data bytes to retrieve.
Default Value:

NA

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Information from this CV is retrieved in Service Mode as a response to VERIFY_BYTE or VERIFY_BIT
operations.

To select which byte of information to retrieve, write data to CV 50 as follows:“2” = Retrieve Hardware Profile High Byte.
“3” = Retrieve Hardware Profile Low Byte.
“4” = Retrieve Product Model High Byte.
“5” = Retrieve Product Model Low Byte.
“6” = Retrieve Firmware Minor Version Number.
“8” = Retrieve Firmware Build Number.
“10” = Retrieve Firmware Build Date.Month (1...12).
“11” = Retrieve Firmware Build Date.Day (1...31).
“12” = Retrieve Firmware Build Date.Year (02 = 2002).
“14” = Retrieve Firmware Sound Set Number Low Byte.
“15” = Retrieve Firmware Sound Set Number High Byte.
“16” = Retrieve Firmware Last Modified Date.Month (1...12).
“17” = Retrieve Firmware Last Modified Date.Day (1...31).
“18” = Retrieve Firmware Last Modified Date.Year (02 = 2002).



The Firmware Major Version Number can be retrieved from CV 7, Manufacturer’s Version Number .

Example: Retrieve the Product Model
1. Write 254 to CV 49.
2. Write 4 to CV 50.
3. Read back CV 56. Save the returned value as H.
4. Write 5 to CV 50.
5. Read back CV 56. Save the returned value as L.
6. The Product Model = (H * 256) + L.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 392 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.8.23 CV 56.255: Play Build Information (PI = 255)
Use this CV in Ops Mode to hear the locomotive speak out information about its firmware.
Default Value:NA

CV 56.255: Play Build Information Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7



D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Write data to CV 56 as follows:“0” = Play Product Model. You will hear the Product Model number (e.g. “300” or “400”). This identifies thelocomotive model and the sounds programmed into the software.
“1” = Play Firmware Version. You will hear three sets of numbers separated by the word “point”. The firstnumber is the major version number, the second is the minor version number, and the third is the build
number (e.g. “seven point one point five” means Major Version 7, Minor Version 1, Build Number 5).
“2” = Play Firmware Build Date. This is the date the software was created. You will hear three sets ofnumbers, each separated by a pause. The first number set is the month, followed by the day of themonth, followed by the year (e.g. “six” pause “one five” pause “zero two” means June 15, 2002).
“3” = Play Hardware Profile number.
“4” = Play Sound Set number. This number identifies variations on the sounds programmed into the software
for a model. The original firmware for a model has Sound Set number “0”.
“5” = Play Firmware Last Modified Date. This is the date the software was modified by a program such as
Q2Upgrade. You will hear three sets of numbers, each separated by a pause. The first number set is themonth, followed by the day of the month, followed by the year (e.g. “six” pause “one five” pause “zerotwo” means June 15, 2002).



Any value other than 0…5 will be ignored and there will be no verbal output.

Note: While the Build Information is playing, all incoming DCC packets are ignored, so wait until the locomotive
stops speaking before writing another CV.

Example: Play Firmware Version
7. Write 255 to CV 49.
8. Write 1 to CV 56.
9. Hear Version spoken out: for Major Version 7, Minor Version 1, Build Number 6, you would hear “seven point
one point six”.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 393 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV 58.PI.SI Odometer (Q2 and Q1) 298

5.9

5.9.1 CV 58.1.SI Odometer (Q2 and Q1)
This CV is used to read back or read out the odometer value. It is also used to reset the odometer to 0.
0

Default Value:

CV 58.1.0: Odometer Byte 0 (Least Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 58.1.2: Odometer Byte 2 (Most Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

D7

D6

D5

CV 58.1.1: Odometer Byte 1 Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

D3

All Q2 firmware (and Q1 firmware built after 23-Jul-09) have a BEMF driven on-board odometer. The average BEMF
reading each second is converted to Scale Miles per Hour (SMPH) and added to a total stored in long term memory.
Q2 steam locomotives may be equipped with a Chuff CAM. This CAM signals the decoder processor at each of 4
positions of a wheel revolution, thus providing 4 chuffs per revolution. This CAM can also be used as an on-board
odometer, given that the diameter of the wheel (CV56.24.0-1) and the locomotive scale (CV56.25.0-1) are known.
BEMF odometer mode is the default. If your locomotive has a Chuff CAM, you can select the CAM odometer mode,by setting CV56.0 bit 5 to “1”.

5.9.1.1

Odometer Reset

Reset the odometer to “0” by writing “0” to CV58.1.0.
Set CV49 to “1”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV58 to “0”Actually, a write of any value to CV58.1.0, CV58.1.1, or CV58.1.2 will reset the odometer to “0”.
In Ops Mode, the locomotive will respond by saying “Reset”.
The odometer is also reset to “0” when all CV’s are reset to factory default values.

5.9.1.2

Ops Mode Odometer Read Out

In Ops mode you can have the locomotive verbally read out the odometer value. There are two ways to do this.
(1) Make the odometer reading part of the F10 status report by setting CV55.128.0 bit 4 to “1”. Then whenever youpress F10, the locomotive will speak out the odometer value.
(2) Write “58” to CV64.1.0. (CV64 is the CV Numeric Verbal Readout).

298

The Odometer feature is not available in Q1a firmware built prior to 23-Jul-09.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 394 of 468

5-Aug-15

Set CV49 to “1”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV64 to “58”By either way, the locomotive speaks out either the scale miles or the scale kilometers traveled, to the nearest 0.01 ofa scale mile or scale kilometer. The default is “miles”. If you want the locomotive to speak out the scale kilometers
traveled, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”.

5.9.1.3

Service Mode Odometer Read Back

The raw odometer value can be read back in DCC Service Mode. These three CV’s contain the raw odometer value:CV58.1.0
CV58.1.1
CV58.1.2

byte_0 (low order byte)
byte_1
byte_2 (high order byte)

The raw odometer value is thus
Raw Odometer Value = byte_0 + (byte_1 * 256) + (byte_2 * 256 * 256)

The number of scale miles this represents depends on the Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5).

5.9.1.3.1

BEMF Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “0”)For BEMF odometer mode, the number of scale miles is
Miles = Raw Odometer Value / 3600

From this we can calculate the maximum number of scale miles before the odometer rolls over.
Max_Miles = 16777215 / 3600 = 4660.33

To convert to kilometers, multiply the miles by 1.609.
Kilometers = Miles * 1.609

5.9.1.3.2

CAM Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “1”)For CAM odometer mode, the number of scale miles is
Miles = (Raw Odometer Value * Diameter * Scale * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

The “4” is needed because there are 4 CAM ticks per wheel revolution. The “12” is needed because there are 12
inches per foot. The “5280” is needed because there are 5280 feet per mile. “PI” is 3. 1415926.
Diameter is the Wheel Diameter read back from CV56.24.0 (low byte) and CV56.24.1 (high byte). The diameter isDiameter = low byte + (high byte * 256)

This number represents the wheel diameter in units of 0.001 inch. For example a value of “1000” represents a
diameter of 1.0 inches.
Scale is the Locomotive Scale read back from CV56.25.0 (low byte) and CV56.25.1 (high byte). The scale is
Scale = low byte + (high byte * 256)

This number represents the locomotive scale in units of 0.01. For example, a value of 2900 represents a scale of
29.0.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 395 of 468

5-Aug-15

Thus, we have
Diameter = (CV56.24.0 value + (CV56.24.1 value * 256)) / 1000
Scale = (CV56.25.0 value + (CV56.25.1 value * 256)) / 100
Miles = (Raw Odometer Value * Diameter * Scale * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

The maximum number of scale miles before the odometer rolls over depends on the wheel diameter and thelocomotive scale.
Max_Miles = (16777215 * Diameter * Scale * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

To convert to kilometers, multiply the miles by 1.609.
Kilometers = Miles * 1.609

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 396 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.10 CV 58.PI.SI Odometer (Q3)
5.10.1 CV 58.1.SI Odometer
This CV is used to read back or read out the odometer value. It is also used to write the odometer value.
0

Default Value:

CV 58.1.0: Odometer Byte 0 (Least Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

CV 58.1.2: Odometer Byte 2 (Most Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

CV 58.1.1: Odometer Byte 1 Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

D3

All Q3 decoders have a BEMF driven on-board odometer. Following each BEMF reading, CV56.17.SI MPH/BEMF
Ratio is used to accumulate the distance traveled. Every second the distance traveled to the nearest 0.01 scale mileis stored in Long Term Memory.
Q2 steam locomotives may be equipped with a Chuff CAM. This CAM signals the decoder processor at each of 4
positions of a wheel revolution, thus providing 4 chuffs per revolution. This CAM can also be used as an on-board
odometer, given that the scale diameter of the wheel (CV56.26.0-1) is known.
BEMF odometer mode is the default. If your locomotive has a Chuff CAM, you can select the CAM odometer mode,by setting CV56.0 bit 5 to “1”.

5.10.1.1

Odometer Reset

Reset the odometer to “0” by writing “0” to each of CV58.1.0, CV58.1.1, and CV58.1.2.
Set CV49 to “1”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV58 to “0”Set CV50 to “1”Set CV58 to “0”Set CV50 to “2”Set CV58 to “0”The odometer is automatically reset to “0” when all CV’s are reset to factory default values.

5.10.1.2

Ops Mode Odometer Read Out

In Ops mode you can have the locomotive verbally read out the odometer value. There are two ways to do this.
(1) Make the odometer reading part of the F10 status report by setting CV55.128.0 bit 4 to “1”. Then whenever youpress F10, the locomotive will speak out the odometer value.
(2) Write “58” to CV64.1.0. (CV64 is the CV Numeric Verbal Readout).

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 397 of 468

5-Aug-15

Set CV49 to “1”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV64 to “58”By either way, the locomotive speaks out either the scale miles or the scale kilometers traveled, to the nearest 0.01 ofa scale mile or scale kilometer. The default is “miles”. If you want the locomotive to speak out the scale kilometers
traveled, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”.

5.10.1.3

Service Mode Odometer Read Back

The raw odometer value can be read back in DCC Service Mode. These three CV’s contain the raw odometer value:CV58.1.0
CV58.1.1
CV58.1.2

byte_0 (low order byte)
byte_1
byte_2 (high order byte)

The raw odometer value is thus
Raw Odometer Value = byte_0 + (byte_1 * 256) + (byte_2 * 256 * 256)

The number of scale miles this represents depends on the Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5).

5.10.1.3.1

BEMF Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “0”)For BEMF odometer mode, the number of scale miles is
Miles = Raw Odometer Value / 100

From this we can calculate the maximum number of scale miles before the odometer rolls over.
Max_Miles = 16777215 / 100 = 167772.15

To convert to kilometers, multiply the miles by 1.609.
Kilometers = Miles * 1.609

5.10.1.3.2

CAM Odometer Mode (CV56.0 bit 5 = “1”)For CAM odometer mode, the number of scale miles is
Miles = (Raw Odometer Value * Diameter * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

The “4” is needed because there are 4 CAM ticks per wheel revolution. The “12” is needed because there are 12
inches per foot. The “5280” is needed because there are 5280 feet per mile. “PI” is 3. 1415926.
Diameter is the Scale Wheel Diameter read back from CV56.26.0 (low byte) and CV56.26.1 (high byte). The diameter
isDiameter = low byte + (high byte * 256)

This number represents the scale wheel diameter in units of 0.01 inch. For example a value of “100” represents a
diameter of 1.0 inches.
Thus, we have
Diameter = (CV56.26.0 value + (CV56.26.1 value * 256)) / 100
Miles = (Raw Odometer Value * Diameter * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 398 of 468

5-Aug-15

The maximum number of scale miles before the odometer rolls over depends on the scale wheel diameter.
Max_Miles = (16777215 * Diameter * PI) / (4 * 12 * 5280)

To convert to kilometers, multiply the miles by 1.609.
Kilometers = Miles * 1.609

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 399 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.10.2 CV 58.5.SI Trip Odometer
This CV is used to read back or read out the trip odometer value. It is also used to write the odometer value.
0

Default Value:

CV 58.5.0: Trip Odometer Byte 0 (Least Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

CV 58.5.1: Trip Odometer Byte 1 (Most Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

All Q3 decoders have a BEMF driven on-board odometer. Following each BEMF reading, CV56.17.SI SMPH/BEMF
Ratio is used to accumulate the distance traveled. Every second the distance traveled to the nearest scale foot isstored in Long Term Memory.
The maximum number of feet before the trip odometer rolls over to 0 is 65535 feet.

5.10.2.1

Trip Odometer Reset

Reset the trip odometer to “0” by writing “0” to each of CV58.5.0 and CV58.5.1.
Set CV49 to “5”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV58 to “0”Set CV50 to “1”Set CV58 to “0”The trip odometer is automatically reset to “0” when all CV’s are reset to factory default values.
The trip odometer is automatically reset to “0” at the start of the speed calibration procedure.

5.10.2.2

Ops Mode Trip Odometer Read Out

In Ops mode you can have the locomotive verbally read out the trip odometer value. There are two ways to do this.
(1) Make the trip odometer reading part of the F10 status report by setting CV55.128.0 bit 6 to “1”. Then whenever
you press F10, the locomotive will speak out the trip odometer value.
(2) Write “58” to CV64.5.0. (CV64 is the CV Numeric Verbal Readout).
Set CV49 to “5”Set CV50 to “0”Set CV64 to “58”By either way, the locomotive speaks out either the scale feet or the scale meters traveled. The default is “feet”. If you
want the locomotive to speak out the scale meters traveled, set CV56.0 bit 1 to “1”.

5.10.2.3

Service Mode Trip Odometer Read Back

The trip odometer value can be read back in DCC Service Mode. These two CV’s contain the trip odometer value infeet:

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 400 of 468

5-Aug-15

CV58.5.0
CV58.5.1

byte_0 (low order byte)
byte_1 (high order byte)

The trip odometer value in feet is thus
Trip Odometer feet = byte_0 + (byte_1 * 256)

The trip odometer value in meters is
Trip Odometer meters = (byte_0 + (byte_1 * 256)) * 0.3048

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 401 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.10.3 CV 58.10.SI Power Conversion Stopping DistanceThis CV specifies the stopping distance when DCC signal is lost.
0

Default Value:

CV 58.10.0: Power Conversion Stopping Distance Byte 0 (Least Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
D7

D1

D0

CV 58.10.1: Power Conversion Stopping Distance Byte 1 (Most Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

D4

D3

D3

D2

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

If CV29 bit 2 Power Source Conversion is “1” and the locomotive enters a section of track where no DCC signal isdetected, then the locomotive comes to a stop if the track polarity is opposite to the locomotive’s direction of travel.
If the value of CV58.10.0-1 = “0”, the locomotive stops in an indeterminate distance at a rate determined by CV4 andCV24.
Otherwise, the locomotive stops after traveling the distance in scale feet specified in CV58.10.0-1.
Valid values for this CV are 0…65535.
See Appendix VI Using DC Power Conversion for Block Signal Control for further information.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 402 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.10.4 CV 58.20.SI BEMF to SMPH Calibration DistanceThis CV specifies the distance used when the trip odometer BEMF to SMPH calibration procedure is performed.
Default Value:696

CV 58.20.0: BEMF to SMPH Calibration Distance Byte 0 (Least Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
D7

D1

D0

CV 58.20.1: BEMF to SMPH Calibration Distance Byte 1 (Most Significant Byte) Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D6

D5

D5

D4

D4

D3

D3

D2

Bit 0

D2

D1

D0

The trip odometer BEMF to SMPH calibration procedure” is described under “CV56.7.SI: SMPH/BEMF Ratio”.
The procedure involves moving the locomotive a pre-determined distance, the same distance as specified by
CV58.20.0-1.
At the end of the procedure, the locomotive automatically adjusts CV56.7.0-1 by multiplying by the CV58.20.0-1 value
divided by the distance traveled as measured by the locomotive’s trip odometer:
new CV56.7.0-1 value = current CV56.7.0-1 value * (CV58.20.1-0 value / distance_traveled)

Valid values for CV58.20.0-1 are 0…65535, although very small values will result in very inaccurate calibration
results.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 403 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.11 CV 62 QSI Control299
Use this CV to control Programming Verbal Acknowledgement and CV Numeric Readout.
1

Default Value:CV 62: QSI Control Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
D7



0

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

0

0

D2

0

D0

Bit 0 = Programming Verbal Acknowledgement Enable“0” = disable Programming Verbal Acknowledgement.
“1” = enable Programming Verbal Acknowledgement.
If Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is enabled, and you write a value to a CV, the locomotive
announces the CV number and its new value. For example, if you set CV 2 to 18, the locomotive will respondwith the spoken message “C V two equals one eight”.
If you write a value to a QSI unique CV that uses a Primary Index, the locomotive announces the CV number
followed by the Primary Index followed by the new value. For example, if you set CV 52.8 to 9, the locomotive
will respond with the spoken message “C V five two point eight equals nine”.
If you write a value to a QSI unique CV that uses a Primary Index and a Secondary index, the locomotive
announces the CV number followed by the Primary Index followed by the Secondary Index followed by the
new value. For example, if you set CV 53.12.0 to 104, the locomotive will respond with the spoken message“C V five three point one two point zero equals one zero four”.
If you hear a verbal response like “C V three one” but not followed by “equals” and a value, that means that
the CV, in this case CV 31, is not implemented.
Note: During the time a Programming Verbal Acknowledgement is playing, all incoming DCC packets are
ignored. If your DCC controller attempts to program several CV’s at a time, the second, third, etc. CV’s may
not be programmed. You should disable Programming Verbal Acknowledgement when using this kind ofcontroller.



Bit 2 = CV Numeric Readout Control:“0” = announce both the CV number and the CV value (default).
“1” = announce only the CV value.
This bit is used to specify whether or not the decoder announces the CV number as well as the CV value for a
CV64 operation.
For example, suppose the value of CV2 is “32”. If this bit were “0”, and you wrote “2” to CV64, you would hear
“C V two equals three two”. If this bit were “1”, you would hear “three two”.



Bit 7 = Bootloader Mode:“0” = The application firmware runs (default).
“1” = The bootloader firmware runs.
This bit is set to 1 by Q2Upgrade to switch Q3 decoders to bootloader mode for upgrading firmware. After the
firmware upgrade is complete, Q2Upgrade clears the bit to 0. For normal operation, including DCC Service
Mode and DCC Operations Mode, this bit should be 0.

299 Write bit operation is supported for CV 62.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 404 of 468

5-Aug-15

Programming Verbal Acknowledgement and CV Numeric Readout are available only during Ops Mode. In Service
Mode, there is not sufficient track power to run the Quantum Sound System.
The overall System Volume determines the volume for these verbal responses. If you cannot hear the Ops Modeverbal responses, you will need to turn up the System Volume (see CV 51.0).
If you cannot hear verbal responses during Ops Mode programming, check to see if you have activated the Mutefeature.

Example: To Disable Programming Verbal Acknowledgement
1. Set CV 62 to 0.

Example: To Disable Programming Verbal Acknowledgement and specify CV Numeric Readout of the CV Value
only.
1. Set CV 62 to 4.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 405 of 468

5-Aug-15

5.12 CV 64 CV Numeric Verbal Readout (Verbal CV Inquiry)
Use this CV to hear the locomotive speak the value of any CV as a decimal number. This works only in Operations
Mode.
Default Value:NA

CV 64: Numeric Verbal Readout Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7



D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

To hear the locomotive speak the value of a Standard NMRA CV:
1) Write the number of the CV to CV 64.
2) The decoder will respond something like “C V three five equals four”.
3) If the decoder responds something like “C V three one” but not followed by “equals” and a value, thatmeans that the CV, in this case CV 31, is not implemented.

To hear the locomotive speak the value of a QSI Unique CV:1) Determine the Primary Index for the value you want to know. If a Primary Index is required, write thePrimary Index number to CV 49.
2) Determine the Secondary Index for the value you want to know. If a Secondary Index is required,write the Secondary Index number to CV 50.
3) Write the number of the QSI CV to CV 64.
4) The decoder will respond something like “C V five two point eight equals five”.
5) If the decoder responds something like “C V five two point 1” but does not follow this with “equals anda value, this means that the CV, in this case CV 52.1, is not implemented.”Writing either 17 or 18 to CV 64 will produce a verbal response indicating the full value of the Extended
Address.



The overall System Volume determines the volume for these verbal responses. If you cannot hear the Ops
Mode verbal responses, you will need to turn up the System Volume (see CV 51.0).



If you cannot hear verbal responses during Ops Mode programming, check to see if you have activated theMute feature.

CV62 bit 2 controls whether decoder speaks out the CV number as well as the CV value.

Note: While the Verbal Readout is playing, all incoming DCC packets are ignored, so wait until the locomotive
stops speaking before writing another CV.
Example: Hear the current setting for CV 2 V-Start.
1. Write 2 to CV 64.
2. Hear the value spoken out: if the value of CV 2 were “32”, you would hear “C V two equals three two”.
Example: Hear the current setting of the bell volume.
1. Set CV 49 to 8. (The Individual Sound Identifier for Bell is “8”; see table in CV 52)
2. Set CV 64 to 52.
3. Hear the Bell volume spoken out: if the bell volume were 13, you would hear “C V five two point eightequals one three”.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 406 of 468

5-Aug-15

6 CV’s 66-95: NMRA Standard CV’sThis section describes in detail additional NMRA standard CV’s supported by Quantum locomotives.

6.1 CV 66 Forward Trim
Forward Trim specifies a scale factor by which a voltage drive level should be multiplied when the controller is driving
the unit in the Forward Direction.
Default Value:128

CV 66: Forward Trim RegisterBit 7 (MSB)
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The Forward Trim factor preserves the same curve shape as specified in the speed table but allows a simple
multiplying factor to scale it larger or smaller for “trimming” its speed behavior in Forward. This allows making
fine adjustments to match the speed of other locomotives, and to match the locomotive’s Reverse speed
characteristics.



The multiplying scale factor is n/128 where “n”, the Forward Trim Factor, can be any number entered into CV
66 from 0 to 255. If n = 128, then multiplying scale factor is 1 resulting in no change to the speed curve.



If Forward Trim Factor is “0”, then Forward Trim is not implemented.



If Forward Trim Factor is between 1 and 128 than the voltage applied to the motor is decreased by amultiplying factor that varies from .00775 to .99225.



If Forward Trim Factor is between 130 and 255 than the voltage applied to the motor is increased by amultiplying factor that varies from 1.0078 to 1.977.

CV 66 only applies if the speed tables are activated in CV 29 by setting bit 4 = 1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 407 of 468

5-Aug-15

6.2

CV 67-94 User Defined Speed Table

Use CV’s 67–94 to specify a custom speed table that is suitable for your locomotive.
CV 67-94: User Defined Speed Registers
Bit 7 (MSB)
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The speed table consists of 28 data points for each of 28 speed steps. A value of 255 means full voltage
applied to the motor while a value of 0 means no additional voltage applied to the motor over the V-Start
voltage (CV 2).



If you select 14 speed steps, every other data value is used. If you select 128 speed steps, extra points will beinterpolated between each of the 28 data points to provide a smooth curve consisting of 255 points.



The User Defined Speed Table must be enabled by setting CV 29 bit 5 to 1 and CV 25 bit 1 to 0 or 1.



Default Values:
CV #Speed Step

Default Value

CV 67
CV 68
CV 69
CV 70
CV 71
CV 72
CV 73
CV 74
CV 75
CV 76
CV 77
CV 78
CV 79
CV 80
CV 81
CV 82
CV 83
CV 84
CV 85
CV 86
CV 87
CV 88
CV 89
CV 90
CV 91
CV 92
CV 93
CV 94

Speed Step 1
Speed Step 2
Speed Step 3
Speed Step 4
Speed Step 5
Speed Step 6
Speed Step 7
Speed Step 8
Speed Step 9
Speed Step 10
Speed Step 11
Speed Step 12
Speed Step 13
Speed Step 14
Speed Step 15
Speed Step 16
Speed Step 17
Speed Step 18
Speed Step 19
Speed Step 20
Speed Step 21
Speed Step 22
Speed Step 23
Speed Step 24
Speed Step 25
Speed Step 26
Speed Step 27
Speed Step 28

0
9
18
28
37
47
56
66
75
85
94
103
113
122
132
141
151
160
170
179
188
198
207
217
226
236
245
255

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 408 of 468

5-Aug-15

6.3

CV 95 Reverse Trim

Reverse Trim specifies a scale factor by which a voltage drive level should be multiplied when the controller is driving
the unit in the Reverse direction.
Default Value:128

CV 95: Reverse Trim Registers
Bit 7 (MSB)
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0 (LSB)

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



The Reverse Trim factor preserves the same curve shape as specified in the speed table but allows a simple
multiplying factor to scale it larger or smaller for “trimming” its speed behavior in Reverse. This allows making
fine adjustments to match the speed of other locomotives, and to match the locomotive’s Forward speed
characteristics.



The multiplying scale factor is n/128 where “n”, the Reverse Trim Factor, can be any number entered into CV
66 from 0 to 255.

If the Reverse Trim Factor is “0”, then Reverse Trim is not implemented.



If the Reverse Trim Factor is between 1 and 128 than the voltage applied to the motor is decreased by amultiplying factor that varies from .00775 to .99225.



If the Reverse Trim Factor is between 130 and 255 than the voltage applied to the motor is increased by amultiplying factor that varies from 1.0078 to 1.977.

CV 95 only applies if the speed tables are activated in CV 29 by setting bit 4 = 1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 409 of 468

5-Aug-15

7 CV’s 112-256: QSI Unique CV’sThis section describes in detail additional QSI Unique CV’s supported by Quantum locomotives.

7.1 CV 115.PI.SI Feature to Port Mapping
Use CV 115 to map features, such as lights, to port numbers corresponding to pins on the decoder board. .
CV 115 is implemented as a two-dimensional array of registers with both CV 49 and CV 50 used to access theseregisters. The CV 49 Primary Index corresponds to QSI feature identification numbers.
Default Value:

Depends on Feature and Model

CV 115.PI.SI: Feature to Port Mapping
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Valid values are 0…N, where N is the maximum port number for that model. Values 1…N specify ports whichcorrespond to pins on the decoder board. See the document “Quantum FX Lighting” for a list of pins for each typeof decoder board, the corresponding port numbers, and a photograph showing where the pins are located on theboard.

A value of 0 does not correspond to a pin on the board and means the feature is disabled.

The default values are dependent on the feature and the model.

Two or more features should not be mapped to the same port. If this condition is not met, the visual results are
undefined. One feature’s effects might override the other’s effects or the two effects might be combined into a
confusing hybrid effect.



Changing the feature to port mapping in Ops mode does not have a visible effect until the decoder’s next power
cycle. However, an Ops mode Reset to Factory Defaults operation, which restores the default Feature to Port
mappings, does have an immediate visual effect.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 410 of 468

5-Aug-15

The following table lists the PI and SI values for all applicable features:
CV115.PI.SI

FeatureCV115.5.0
CV115.8.0
CV115.70.0
CV115.70.1
CV115.73.0
CV115.73.1
CV115.76.0
CV115.80.0
CV115.84.0
CV115.84.1
CV115.88.0
CV115.88.1
CV115.92.0
CV115.92.1
CV115.92.2
CV115.92.3
CV115.96.0
CV115.96.1
CV115.96.2
CV115.96.3
CV115.100.0
CV115.102.0
CV115.104.0
CV115.104.1
CV115.104.2
CV115.106.0
CV115.106.1
CV115.106.2
CV115.109.0
CV115.113.0
CV115.116.0
CV115.118.0
CV115.120.0
CV115.121.0
CV115.122.0
CV115.122.1
CV115.255.0

Dynamic Brakes Fans
Cooling Fans
Front Headlight
Front Headlight #2300
Rear Headlight (Reverse Light)
Rear Headlight #2301
Front Mars Light
Rear Mars Light
Front Left Ditch Light
Front Right Ditch Light302
Rear Left Ditch Light
Rear Right Ditch Light303
Front OHBL
Front OHBL2304
Front OHBL3
Front OHBL4
Rear OHBL
Rear OHBL2305
Rear OHBL3
Rear OHBL4
Front Number Board Lights
Rear Number Board Lights
Front Marker Lights
Front Marker Lights2
Front Marker Lights3
Rear Marker Lights
Rear Marker Lights2
Rear Marker Lights3
Truck Lights
Step Lights
Front Cab Light
Rear Cab Light
Engine Room Lights
Engine Room2 Lights
Firebox
Firebox2306
Decoder Cooling Fan

300

The second light of a dual front headlight pair.
The second light of a dual rear headlight pair.
302
Two ports are required for a pair of front ditch lights.
303
Two ports are required for a pair of rear ditch lights.
304
Four ports are required for a front OHBL in Prime Beacon X4 mode.
305
Four ports are required for a rear OHBL in Prime Beacon X4 mode.
306
Firebox flicker can use one port, but two ports give a better effect.
301

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 411 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.2 CV 116.PI Individual Sound Balance Control
For Quantum systems with two stereo speaker outputs, CV116.PI functions as volume balance controls forindividual sounds.
CV 116.PI: Individual Sound Balance Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



Each CV 116.PI can have any value from –127 to +127. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1”indicates a negative value.

To specify a negative balance, add 128 to the unsigned balance value. For example, to specify a balance of -60,
add 128 to 60 to obtain 188.



Negative values decrease the volume of the individual sound coming out of speaker 1 and positive values
decrease the volume of the sound coming out of speaker 2. For example, a value of 31 decreases the volume
coming out of speaker 2 to ((127 – 31) * 100) / 127 = 75%, while leaving the volume coming out of speaker 1 at
100%.



The default value of 0 results in both speaker 1 and speaker 2 having 100% of the individual volume specified in
the CV52.PI Individual Sound Volume Control.

The numbers used for PI in CV119 are the same Individual Sound Identifiers used in CV52 Individual Sound
Volume Control.
Example: Set the bell balance control so that 100% of the bell sound comes from speaker 1 and 0%
comes from speaker 2.
1. Set CV 49 to 8 to select the bell sound.
2. Set CV 116 to 255 to specify the bell balance.
Example: For dual Air Pump Steam Locomotives, have the first pump sound come entirely fromspeaker 1 and the second pump sound come entirely from speaker 2.
3. Set CV 49 to 16 to select the first pump sound.
4. Set CV 116 to 127 to specify the first pump balance.
5. Set CV 49 to 17 to select the second pump sound.
6. Set CV 116 to 255 to specify the second pump balance.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 412 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.3

CV 117.PI.SI QSI Individual Sound Selection

For Quantum systems having onboard sound libraries, use CV117.PI.SI is to select sounds from theselibraries.
CV 117.PI.SI: Individual Sound Selection
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



Use CV117.PI.0 to read back (Service Mode) or have the decoder speak out (Ops Mode) the maximum index fora sound. The value of this CV is the number of selections available for the sound.



Use CV117.PI.1 to select a sound from an onboard library. Valid values are 0…Max_Index, where Max_Index isthe value of CV117.PI.0.

The numbers used for PI in CV119 are the same Individual Sound Identifiers used in CV52 Individual Sound
Volume Control.

For diesel locomotives, the following onboard libraries are available:
Horn (PI=0) and Alternate Horn (PI = 40)
Bell (PI=8)
Motor (PI=10)
Air Pump (PI=16)
Cooling Fan (PI=19)
Dynamic Brake (PI=28)



For steam locomotives, the following onboard libraries are available:
Whistle (PI=0) and Alternate Whistle (PI = 40)
Bell (PI=8)
Chuff (PI=10)
Air Pump (PI=16)
Steam Generator (PI=26)



If you select index 1 (CV117.PI.1=1), you select the native sound for the firmware running in the decoder. If you
select index 2…Max_Index, you select a sound from the onboard library.



For most sounds, selecting sound 0 (CV117.PI.1=0) is equivalent to selecting sound 1, the native sound. The one
exception is the bell; selecting sound 0 for the bell (CV117.8.1=0) selects a non-prototypical bell used for
feedback purposes in certain operations.



Setting CV117.PI.1 to a value greater than CV117.PI.0 has the same effect as setting CV117.PI.1 to 0.

If you select a sound in Ops Mode, and the sound is playing, the sound will change immediately to the new
selection. If you select a different motor (PI=10) in a diesel locomotive, the motor sounds may not work correctly
until you power cycle the decoder.
Example: Command the decoder to speak out the number of chuffs available.
3. Set CV 49 to 10 to select the chuff library
4. Set CV 50 to 0.
5. Set CV 64 to 117 to cause the decoder to speak out the max chuff index.
Example: Select bell 2.
7. Set CV 49 to 8 to select the bell library.
8. Set CV 50 to 1.
9. Set CV 117 to 2 to select a bell from the bell library.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 413 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.4 CV 118.PI.SI Individual Sound Pitch Shift
Use this CV to pitch shift an individual sound from its nominal pitch
CV 118.PI.0: Individual Sound Pitch Shift Low Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

CV 118.PI.1: Individual Sound Pitch Shift High Byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

0

0

0

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

0

D2

D1

D0

Valid values for this CV range from -1200 to +1200. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 of the high byte while a“1” indicates a negative value.
To specify a negative pitch shift, add 32768 to the unsigned pitch shift value. For example, to specify a pitch shift ofminus 60, add 32768 to 60 to obtain 32828.
Each unit of this CV represents 0.01 (1 cent) of an equally tempered semitone. A value of 100 shifts the pitch up 1
semitone. A value of 1200 shifts the pitch up 1 octave.
The numbers used for PI in CV118 are the same Individual Sound Identifiers used in CV52 Individual Sound Volume
Control.

Primary
Index

Sound

8

Bell30710
11

Chuff308
Chuff2

Comment
Applicable to generic pneumatic and generic pull bells only.
See CV55.3.1 Bell Type.

Example #1: Shift the bell pitch up 3 semitones (300 cents).
1. Set CV49 to 8 to select the bell sound.
2. Set CV50 to 0 to select the low byte.
3. Set CV118 to 44 to specify the low byte value (300 modulo 256 = 44).
4. Set CV50 to 1 to select the high byte.
5. Set CV118 to 1 to specify the high byte value (300/256 = 1).
Example #2: Shift the chuff2 pitch down 1/2 semitone (-50 cents).
1. Set CV49 to 11 to select the chuff2 sound.
2. Set CV50 to 0 to select the low byte.
3. Set CV118 to 50 to specify the low byte value (50 modulo 256 = 50).
4. Set CV50 to 1 to select the high byte.
5. Set CV118 to 128 to specify the high byte value (50/256 = 0, set bit 7 to 1 for minus).

307 Version 9.2.0 firmware for models 1123 and 1127 built 20-Jan-2013 used CV118.8.0-1 in a slightly different manner. For this firmware:
Valid values for this CV range from –2047 to +2047. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 of the high byte while a “1” indicates a negative value.
To specify a negative pitch shift, add 32768 to the unsigned pitch shift value. For example, to specify a pitch shift of minus 60, add 32768 to 60 to obtain 32828.
The units have no relationship to cents, semitones, and octaves.
308 Firmware for steam locomotives built before 20-Jan-2013 (version 8.9.2 and earlier, and version 9.1.1 and earlier) supported an 8 bit version of CV118.10 and CV118.11. For
this firmware:
The secondary index (SI) is not used.
Valid values for this CV range from –127 to +127. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1” indicates a negative value.
To specify a negative pitch shift, add 128 to the unsigned pitch shift value. For example, to specify a pitch shift of minus 60, add 128 to 60 to obtain 188.
The units have no relationship to cents, semitones, and octaves.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 414 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.5 CV 120.PI.SI Ready to Move Scenario
The Ready to Move Scenario is triggered by turning the bell on in NFF/NFR. Use CV51.20 Motive State Change
Warning Signals to enable this scenario.
As the scenario progresses and before you increase the throttle to enter FWD/REV, the headlight and hazard lights
change to their FWD/REV states, two (NFF) or three (NFR) horn blasts are played, and an air brake release soundplays.
The scenario terminates when one of these events occur:1)
You press a function key to turn the bell off.
2)
You press a function key to blow the horn.
3)
You increase the throttle to leave NFF/NFR.
The factory default values for CV120 gives a scenario for NFF consisting of:
A 4.0 second silent period after which the front headlight turns on bright 309.
A 2.0 second silent period after which the front hazard lights turn on.
A 2.0 second silent period.
A 1.0 second horn blast.
A 2.5 second silent period.
A 1.0 second horn blast.
A 3.0 second silent period after which a brake release sound is played.
The factory default values for CV120 gives a scenario for NFR consisting of:
A 4.0 second silent period after which the rear headlight (reverse light) turns on bright 310.
A 2.0 second silent period after which the rear hazard lights turn on.
A 2.0 second silent period.
A horn hoot (0.9 second).
A 1.0 second silent period.
A second horn hoot (0.9 second).
A 1.0 second silent period.
A third horn hoot (0.9 second).
A 3.0 second silent period after which a brake release sound is played.
You can use CV120 to specify the duration of each horn blast and the duration of each silent period to the nearest 0.1
second.
For each horn blast you can also specify whether a normal horn blast is played, or whether a hoot is played instead ofa short horn blast or a fancy ending is played at the end of a long horn blast.
You can also specify that the bell turn off automatically after the locomotive leaves neutral.

309
310

This is the default behavior. The actual behavior of the front headlight depends on the value of CV55.70.1.
This is the default behavior. The actual behavior of the rear headlight depends on the value of CV55.73.1.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 415 of 468

5-Aug-15

This table summarizes which CV’s affect which portion of the scenario:
NFF

NFR
CV120.1.0 Silent Period 1 Duration

Front Headlight turns on

Rear Headlight turns on

CV120.2.0 Silent Period 2 Duration
Front Hazard Lights turn on

Rear Hazard Lights turn on

CV120.3.0 Silent Period 3 Duration
CV120.4.0 First Horn Blast Duration

CV120.4.1 First Horn Blast Duration

CV120.5.0 Silent Period 4 Duration

CV120.5.1 Silent Period 4 Duration

CV120.6.0 Second Horn Blast Duration

CV120.6.1 Second Horn Blast Duration

Reserved

CV120.7.1 Silent Period 5 Duration

Reserved

CV120.8.1 Third Horn Blast Duration
CV120.9.0 Silent Period 6 Duration
CV120.10.0 Bell Hold TimeThe following CV’s are common to the NFF and NFR scenarios:
CV120.1.0 Silent Period 1 Duration
CV120.2.0 Silent Period 2 Duration
CV120.3.0 Silent Period 3 Duration
CV120.9.0 Silent Period 6 Duration
CV120.10.0 Bell Hold Time
These CV’s are unique to the NFF (two horn blast) scenario:
CV120.4.0 First Horn Blast Duration
CV120.5.0 Silent Period 4 Duration
CV120.6.0 Second Horn Blast Duration
These CV’s are unique to the NFR (three horn blast) scenario:
CV120.4.1 First Horn Blast Duration
CV120.5.1 Silent Period 4 Duration
CV120.6.1 Second Horn Blast Duration
CV120.7.1 Silent Period 5 Duration
CV120.8.1 Third Horn Blast Duration

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 416 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.5.1 CV 120.PI.SI Silent Period Duration
Use these CV’s to specify the duration of the silent periods.
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D7 specify the duration. Valid values are 0 to 255.

Each value represents time to the nearest 0.1 second. For example, a value of “15” represents 1.5 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 417 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.5.2 CV 120.PI.SI Horn Blast Duration
Use these CV’s to specify the duration of the horn blasts.
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will not
be played.

The duration value represents time to the nearest 0.1 second. For example, a value of “30” represents 3.0
seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hoot record isplayed.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at theend of the long horn blast311.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.

The duration specified is the time from the start of the horn blast to the start of the next silent period. Because thelength of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if a hoot is played) than
this time.

311

A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 418 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.5.3 CV 120.10.0 Bell Hold Time312
Use this CV to specify the time the bell continues to play after leaving neutral.
0

Default Value:

CV 120.10.0: Bell Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Hold Time

312

Hold Time

Hold Time

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If the value of this CV is not 0, then the bell will turn off automatically after the locomotive leaves neutral. Each
unit represents 0.1 second. For example, if the CV value = 53, the bell will turn off automatically 5.3
seconds after the locomotive leaves neutral.



If the value of this CV = 0, then the bell will continue to play until turned off manually using a function key.



Default value = 0.

Valid values are 0…255 representing 0.0…25.5 seconds.

CV120.10.0 is not available in firmware built before 17-July-2014.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 419 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.6

CV 127.PI.SI QSI Component Sound Volume Control

Use CV 127 to specify volume levels for component sounds.
CV 127.PI.SI: Component Sound Volume Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0

0

0

0

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

V3

V2

V1

V0



CV 127 is implemented as a two-dimensional table of component sound volume registers, with both CV 49
and CV50 used as indices to these registers. The CV 49 Primary Index corresponds to the overall individual
sound. The CV50 Secondary Index corresponds to the component sound.



For a given PI, CV52.PI is a master volume control for the entire individual sound, and CV127.PI.SI controls
the volume of the component sound within the individual sound. For example, CV52.10 controls the overall
prime mover1 volume, while CV127.10.0 controls the motor idle volume within the prime mover1 sound.

To change the volume level of an component sound, do the following:
1) Set CV 49 to the identifier for the individual sound (see table next page).
2) Set CV 50 to the identifier for the component sound (see table next page).
3) Set data in Bits 0-3 of CV 127 as follows:“0”“1 – 15”= No sound= Sets the volume level from the lowest level at “1” to the highest level at “15”

 4 bits of volume level are used, providing 16 volume levels. The volume levels correspond to 2db increments.
 All other bits are reserved. Data in bits 4-7 are not used. Any data entered in these bits will be ignored.
 For most CV127.PI.SI CV’s the default value is 11.
Example: Set the Prime Mover1 Exhaust Max RPM volume to 6.
1.
Set CV 49 to 10 to select Prime Mover1.
2.
Set CV 50 to 12 to select Exhaust Max RPM.
3.
Set CV 127 to 6 to set the exhaust max RPM volume.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 420 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.6.1 User-defined Horn Component Volume IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

0
0
0
0
0
0

1
2
3
4
5
6

Sound
Chime1 Volume
Chime2 Volume
Chime3 Volume
Chime4 Volume
Chime5 Volume
Chime6 Volume

7.6.2 Prime Mover1 Component Volume IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

0
1
2
10
11
12
20
21
22
30
31
32
60
62
70
72

Sound
Motor1 Idle Volume
Motor1 Mid RPM Volume
Motor1 Max RPM Volume
Exhaust1 Idle Volume
Exhaust1 Mid RPM Volume
Exhaust1 Max RPM Volume
Labored Exhaust1 Idle Volume
Labored Exhaust1 Mid RPM Volume
Labored Exhaust1 Max RPM Volume
Rod Knock1 Min RPM Volume
Rod Knock1 Mid RPM Volume
Rod Knock1 Max RPM Volume
Generator1 Idle Volume
Generator1 Max RPM Volume
Turbo1 Idle Volume
Turbo1 Max RPM Volume

7.6.3 Prime Mover2 Component Volume IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11

0
1
2
10
11
12
20
21
22
30
31
32
60
62
70
72

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Sound
Motor2 Idle Volume
Motor2 Mid RPM Volume
Motor2 Max RPM Volume
Exhaust2 Idle Volume
Exhaust2 Mid RPM Volume
Exhaust2 Max RPM Volume
Labored Exhaust2 Idle Volume
Labored Exhaust2 Mid RPM Volume
Labored Exhaust2 Max RPM Volume
Rod Knock2 Min RPM Volume
Rod Knock2 Mid RPM Volume
Rod Knock2 Max RPM Volume
Generator2 Idle Volume
Generator2 Max RPM Volume
Turbo2 Idle Volume
Turbo2 Max RPM Volume

Page 421 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.6.4 User-defined Alternate Horn Component Volume IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

40
40
40
40
40
40

1
2
3
4
5
6

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Sound
Chime1 Volume
Chime2 Volume
Chime3 Volume
Chime4 Volume
Chime5 Volume
Chime6 Volume

Page 422 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.7

CV 128.PI.SI QSI Component Sound Balance Control

For Quantum systems with two stereo speaker outputs, CV128.PI.SI functions as balance controls for component
sounds.
CV 128.PI.SI: Component Sound Balance Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0



CV 128 is implemented as a two-dimensional table of balance registers, with both CV 49 and CV50 used asindices to these registers. The CV 49 Primary Index corresponds to the overall individual sound. The CV50
Secondary Index corresponds to the component sound.



For a given PI, CV116.PI is a master balance control for the entire individual sound, and CV128.PI.SI controls
the balance of the component sound within the individual sound. For example, CV116.10 controls the overall
prime mover1 balance, while CV128.10.0 controls the motor idle balance within the prime mover1 sound.

Each CV 116.PI can have any value from –127 to +127. A positive value is indicated by a 0 in bit 7 while a “1”indicates a negative value.

To specify a negative balance, add 128 to the unsigned balance value. For example, to specify a balance of -60,
add 128 to 60 to obtain 188.



Negative values decrease the volume of the individual sound coming out of speaker 1 and positive values
decrease the volume of the sound coming out of speaker 2. For example, a value of 31 decreases the volume
coming out of speaker 2 to ((127 – 31) * 100) / 127 = 75%, while leaving the volume coming out of speaker 1 at
100%.
Example: Set the Prime Mover1 Labored Exhaust Balance to 255.
4.
Set CV 49 to 10 to select Prime Mover1.
5.
Set CV 50 to 20 to select Labored Exhaust.
6.
Set CV 128 to 255 to set the labored exhaust balance.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 423 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.7.1 User-defined Horn Component Balance IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

0
0
0
0
0
0

1
2
3
4
5
6

Sound
Chime1 Balance
Chime2 Balance
Chime3 Balance
Chime4 Balance
Chime5 Balance
Chime6 Balance

7.7.2 Prime Mover1 Component Balance IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

10
10
10
10
10
10

0
10
20
30
60
70

Sound
Motor1 Balance
Exhaust1 Balance
Labored Exhaust1 Balance
Rod Knock1 Balance
Generator1 Balance
Turbo1 Balance

7.7.3 Prime Mover2 Component Balance IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

11
11
11
11
11
11

0
10
20
30
60
70

Sound
Motor2 Balance
Exhaust2 Balance
Labored Exhaust2 Balance
Rod Knock2 Balance
Generator2 Balance
Turbo2 Balance

7.7.4 User-defined Alternate Horn Component Balance IdentifiersPrimary
Index

Secondary
Index

40
40
40
40
40
40

1
2
3
4
5
6

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Sound
Chime1 Balance
Chime2 Balance
Chime3 Balance
Chime4 Balance
Chime5 Balance
Chime6 Balance

Page 424 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8

CV 129.PI.SI Diesel Motor Configuration

7.8.1 CV 129.1.0 Speed Steps Per Notch313
Use this CV to specify the number of speed steps between notches for your diesel locomotive.
10

Default Value:

CV 129.1.0: Speed Steps Per Notch Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

D4



This CV specifies how DCC speed steps in 128 speed step mode map to notch levels for automatic diesel
motor notching. In 14 or 28 speed step mode, the speed step is converted to 128 speed step format before
this CV is applied.

Valid values are 1…255. A value of 0 effectively disables automatic notching.

The formula used to map the speed steps to notches is:if ( CV55.21.0 != 0 ) {if ( Speed_Step == 0 ) {Notch_Level = 0;
} else {Notch_Level = ((Speed_Step – 1) / CV55.21.0) + 1;}}

The default value of 10 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…10
11…20
21…30
31…40
41…50
51…60
61…70
71…126



A value of 8 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…8
9…16
17…24
25…32
33…40
41…48
49…56
57…126

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A value of 15 maps speed steps to notch levels as follows:
Speed Step
0
1…15
16-30
31-45
44…60
61…75

313

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Notch Level
0
1
2
3
4
5

CV129.1.0 replaces CV55.21.0 in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 425 of 468

5-Aug-15

76…9091-105106-1266
7
8

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 426 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.2 CV129.2.0 Low Idle Timeout314
Use this CV to specify the time after entering neutral when a diesel motor automatically drops to low idle.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 129.2.0: Low Idle Timeout Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies the time that a diesel motor automatically drops to low idle after entering neutral (speed step 0
and locomotive stopped).

Each unit represents 1 second. For example, if the CV has value 8, then the motor will drop to low idle 8 seconds
after entering neutral.



If the value of this CV is 0, the motor does not automatically drop to low idle.

All function keys and the throttle remain enabled after the motor drops to low idle. By contrast, in the Standby
stage of shutdown, where the diesel motor is also in low idle, most function keys and the throttle are disabled.

The motor remains in low idle until one of the following events occurs:-

The throttle is increased to speed step > 0.

-F6 is double pressed, assuming the Startup (144) feature is assigned to F6.



If you double press F6 after the locomotive enters neutral and before the countdown reaches 0, the motor will not
drop to low idle.



If the locomotive is in Disconnect (F9 double press) when the countdown reaches 0, the motor will drop to low
idle. If the locomotive is then put into Standby, the motor remains in low idle.

This CV is supported only by Q3 firmware running on FX decoders.

314

CV129.2.0 replaces CV55.21.1 in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 427 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.3 CV 129.10.0 Motor Sound Effects315
Use this CV to select motor sound effects.
Default Value:

Depends on Locomotive

CV 129.10.0: Motor Sound Effects Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
ReservedReserved

Reserved

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Transition
Activation
Sound

Transition
Activation
Sound

Bits 0 and 1 of this CV select one of the.following motor transition activation sound effects:
0 – No transition activation sound.
1 – Air Activated Transition2 – Electro-mechanically Activated Transition

315

CV129.10.0 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 428 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.4 CV 129.50.0 Transition 1 SMPH316
Use this CV to specify the speed at which the diesel motor automatically makes a transition.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 129.50.0: Transition 1 SMPH Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies the speed in scale miles per hour that a diesel motor automatically makes a transition. For
example, if this CV has value 22, then the motor will make a transition when the locomotive’s speed reaches 22
SMPH.



If the value of this CV = 0, then the motor will not make a transition.

316

CV129.50.0 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 429 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.5 CV 129.51.0 Transition 2 SMPH317
Use this CV to specify the speed at which the diesel motor automatically makes a second transition.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 129.51.0: Transition 3 SMPH Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies the speed in scale miles per hour that a diesel motor automatically makes a second transition.
For example, if this CV has value 47, then the motor will make a second transition when the locomotive’s speed
reaches 47 SMPH.



If the value of this CV = 0, then the motor will not make a second transition.



If the value of CV129.50.0 Transition 1 SMPH = 0, the motor will not make a transition even though CV129.51.0 is
not 0; that is, both CV’s must be non-zero for the motor to make a first and then a second transition.



If the value of CV129.51.0 is less than or equal to the value of CV129.50.0, the motor will not make a second
transition.

317

CV129.51.0 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 430 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.8.6 CV 129.55.0 Transition RPM Drop Time318
Use this CV to specify the time for the diesel motor to drop in RPM when automatically making a transition.
Depends on Locomotive

Default Value:

CV 129.55.0: Transition 3 SMPH Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



This CV specifies the time for a diesel motor to drop in RPM just before automatically making a transition.

Each unit of this CV represents 0.04 second (40ms). For example, if this CV has value 50, then the motor will take
2.0 seconds to drop the RPM.

318

CV129.55.0 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 431 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.9

CV 130.PI.SI User-defined Horn Component Pitch

7.9.1 CV 130.1-6.0 UDH Chime 1-6 Semitone319
Use these CV’s to specify the semitone of each of 6 chimes for the user-defined horn.
Depends on locomotive

Default Value:

CV 130.1-6.0: UDH Chime 1-6 Semitone Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

These six CV’s specify the semitone for each of 6 chimes. Valid CV values are:
CV130.1-6.0 Value

Semitone

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

None: the chime is not used.
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5

If a value other than those listed is specified, a value of 22 (A4) is used.
For example, a Nathan M3 horn has 3chimes: C#4, D#4, and A4. This corresponds to:
CV130.1.0 = 14
(Chime1 plays C#4.)
CV130.2.0 = 16
(Chime2 plays D#4.)
CV130.3.0 = 22
(Chime3 plays A4.)
CV130.4.0 = 0(Chime4 is not used.)
CV130.5.0 = 0(Chime5 is not used.)
CV130.6.0 = 0(Chime6 is not used.)

7.9.2 CV 130.1-6.1 UDH Chime 1-6 De-tune320
Use these CV’s to specify the de-tune amount of each of 6 chimes for the user-defined horn.
319
320

CV130 is only supported in version 9 firmware.
CV130 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 432 of 468

5-Aug-15

Depends on locomotive

Default Value:

CV 130.1-6.1: UDH Chime 1-6 De-tune Registers
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

These six CV’s specify the de-tune amount for each of 6 chimes.
The value of each CV represents number of cents (0.01 of a semitone).
Valid values are from minus 50 cents (minus 0.5 semitone) to plus 50 cents (plus 0.5 semitone).
Positive values have bit 7 set to 0. Negative values have bit 7 set to 1 (add 128). The CV value for plus 50 centsis thus “50”. The CV value for minus 50 cents is thus “178” (50 + 128).
For example, a Nathan M3 horn has 3chimes: C#4, D#4, and A4. The C#4 is de-tuned by minus 30 cents, and theA4 by minus 40 cents. The D#4 is not de-tuned. This corresponds to:
CV130.1.1 = 158(Chime1 de-tuned by minus 30 cents.)
CV130.2.1 = 0(Chime2 not de-tuned.)
CV130.2.1 = 168(Chime3 de-tuned by minus 40 cents.)

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 433 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.10 CV 131.PI.SI User-defined Alternate Horn Component Pitch
7.10.1 CV 131.1-6.0 UDAH Chime 1-6 Semitone321
Use these CV’s to specify the semitone of each of 6 chimes for the user-defined alternate horn.
Depends on locomotive

Default Value:

CV 131.1-6.0: UDAH Chime 1-6 Semitone Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
D7

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

These six CV’s specify the semitone for each of 6 chimes. See CV130 for a list of valid values.
For example, a Leslie A-125-5A horn has 5 chimes: B3, C#4, D#4, F4, and A4. This corresponds to:
CV131.1.0 = 12
(Chime1 plays B3.)
CV131.2.0 = 14
(Chime2 plays C#4.)
CV131.3.0 = 16
(Chime3 plays D#4.)
CV131.4.0 = 18
(Chime4 plays F4.)
CV131.5.0 = 22
(Chime5 plays A4.)
CV131.6.0 = 0(Chime6 is not used.)

321

CV131 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 434 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.10.2 CV 131.1-6.1 UDAH Chime 1-6 De-tune322
Use these CV’s to specify the de-tune amount of each of 6 chimes for the user-defined alternate horn.
Depends on locomotive

Default Value:

CV 131.1-6.1: UDAH Chime 1-6 De-tune Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Sign

D6

D5

D4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D3

D2

D1

D0

These six CV’s specify the de-tune amount for each of 6 chimes.
The value of each CV represents number of cents (0.01 of a semitone).
Valid values are from minus 50 cents (minus 0.5 semitone) to plus 50 cents (plus 0.5 semitone).
Positive values have bit 7 set to 0. Negative values have bit 7 set to 1 (add 128). The CV value for plus 50 centsis thus “50”. The CV value for minus 50 cents is thus “178” (50 + 128).
For example, a Leslie A-125-5A horn has 5 chimes: B3, C#4, D#4, F4, and A4. The B3 is de-tuned by minus 20
cents, the D#4 by minus 10 cents, and the A4 by plus 10 cents. The C#4 and F4 are not de-tuned. This
corresponds to:
CV131.1.1 = 148(Chime1 de-tuned by minus 20 cents.)
CV131.2.1 = 0(Chime2 not de-tuned.)
CV131.3.1 = 138(Chime3 de-tuned by minus 10 cents.)
CV131.4.1 = 0(Chime4 not de-tuned.)
CV131.5.1 = 10
(Chime5 de-tuned by plus 10 cents.)

322

CV131 is only supported in version 9 firmware.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 435 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.11 CV 133.PI.SI Chuff Configuration
7.11.1 CV 133.1.0 Locomotive TypeUse this CV to specify the locomotive type for your steam locomotive. Error! Bookmark not defined.
1

Default Value:

CV 133.1.0: Locomotive Type Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV selects the locomotive type for steam locomotives. Valid values are:0 – Small
1 – Medium
2 – Large

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 436 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.11.2 CV 133.2.0 Chuff Intensity
Use this CV to specify the chuff intensity.
1

Default Value:

CV 133.2.0: Chuff Intensity Register
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
D7

D6

D5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

This CV specifies the chuff intensity. Valid values are 0, 1, and 2.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 437 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.12 CV 135.PI.SI Upon Stopping Scenario 323
The Upon Stopping Scenario is triggered by turning the bell on in FWD/REV. Use CV51.20 Motive State Change
Warning Signals to enable this scenario.
After you enter NFF/NFR, a single horn blast is played, the headlight and hazard lights change to their NFF/NFR
states, and a long air letoff sound plays.
The factory default values for CV135 gives a scenario consisting of:
A 2 0 second silent period before a single horn blast is played.
A 2.0 second silent period after which the front hazard lights change to their NFF/NFR states.
A 1.0 second silent period after which the front headlight changes to its NFF/NFR state.
A 2.0 second silent period after which a long air letoff sounds plays.
You can use CV135 to specify the duration of the horn blast and the duration of each silent period to the nearest 0.1
second.
For the horn blast you can also specify whether a normal horn blast is played, or whether a hoot is played instead of ashort horn blast or a fancy ending is played at the end of a long horn blast.
You can also specify that the bell turn off automatically after the scenario ends.

323

CV135.PI.SI is not available in firmware built before 1-August-2014.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 438 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.12.1 CV 135.PI.SI Silent Period Duration
Use these CV’s to specify the duration of the silent periods.
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D7 specify the duration. Valid values are 0 to 255.

Each value represents time to the nearest 0.1 second. For example, a value of “15” represents 1.5 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 439 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.12.2 CV 135.PI.SI Horn Blast Duration
Use these CV’s to specify the duration of the horn blasts.
Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0



D0…D6 specify the duration. Valid values for the duration are 0 to 127. If the duration is 0, the horn blast will not
be played.

The duration value represents time to the nearest 0.1 second. For example, a value of “30” represents 3.0
seconds.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value less than or equal to 9 (0.9 second) but greater than 0, then a hoot record isplayed.



If D7 is “1”, and D0…D6 has a value greater than or equal to 10 (1.0 second), then a fancy ending is played at theend of the long horn blast324.

Setting D7 to “1” is equivalent to adding “128” to the value of the CV.

The duration specified is the time from the start of the horn blast to the start of the next silent period. Because thelength of horn records vary, the actual duration of the horn blast may be longer (or shorter if a hoot is played) than
this time.

324

A few horns/whistles do not have a fancy ending record. In those cases, the normal ending for a long horn blast is played.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 440 of 468

5-Aug-15

7.12.3 CV 135.6.0 Bell Hold TimeUse this CV to specify the time the bell continues to play after the scenario ends.
0

Default Value:

CV 135.6.0: Bell Hold Time
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

Hold Time

If the value of this CV is not 0, then the bell will turn off automatically after the scenario ends. Each unit
represents 0.1 second. For example, if the CV value = 53, the bell will turn off automatically 5.3 seconds
after the scenario ends.



If the value of this CV = 0, then the bell will continue to play until turned off manually using a function key.



Default value = 0.

Valid values are 0…255 representing 0.0…25.5 seconds.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 441 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix I
Recommended DCC Command Stations
Command
StationRecommended

Will Support
Service Mode w/
Quantum
Yes(See Comments)

NCE ™

Yes

Wangrow ™

Yes

No

Digitrax ™

Yes

Yes

Comments325

Horn and Bell buttons are available but bell button assigned
to F3 (see QSI CV 37 example). Newer NEC’s apparently
support programming track but older command stations do
not. Programming on the main is easy and straightforward.
Horn and Bell buttons are available but bell button assigned
to F3 (see QSI CV 37 example). No Service Mode but
programming on the main is easy and straightforward.
F0 = Lights, F1 = Bell, F2 = Horn. DT300 will operate inService mode but will not read back value. Long address is
automated with the DT300 and DT400 throttles, which
properly writes CVs 18, 17, and 29. Click to the 4-digit
mode, set address, and answer yes to the enable 4 digit
address prompt. It also automatically resets CV 29 if you
return to 2-digit address.
An exception is the obsolete DT100 throttle, which will only
program Quantum decoders in Ops Mode. Use QSI CV
56.129 to program either CV 1 or CV 17/18. Note that the
DT100 only programs in hex, except for addresses, which
are in decimal. This makes it easy to enter address in Ops
mode.
We have qualified the following Digitrax systems with
Quantum decoders (all support F0-F12):Super Chief with DT400
Zephyr with DT400
DCS100 with DT400
Chief with DT400

MRC ™

Yes

No

Lenz ™
LZ100,
LV200,
LZV100

Yes

Yes(See Comments)

See Digitrax for more information on QSI compatibility at
www.digitrax.com.
MRC does not provide a separate programming function. All
programming is done in Ops mode with noacknowledgement feedback. A resistor is included to limit
current for a Programming Track, which may limit thecurrent below the allowable level for Quantum decoder
programming. For the Quantum system, the resistor may beleft out. For other decodes, the user should follow the MRC
instructions.
F0 = Lights, F1 = Bell, F2 = Horn. Lenz will program in
Service mode providing that a suitable resistor is added inseries to the Programming Track (LV100 requires 20 ohms
and LV200 requires 10 ohms). Note that CV 1, 17 and 18
cannot be programmed on the main in the standard way

325 Many comments and opinions regarding operation with different command stations are the result of user’s letters to QSI or comments on various railroad web forums. QSI is
not responsible for the accuracy of these comments, which are included here only as a starting point for the customer to verify to his own satisfaction the compatibility of theseproducts for use with the QSI Quantum System.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 442 of 468

5-Aug-15

Atlas ™

Yes

Yes(See Comments)

Bachmann™
Zimo ™

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0(see QSI CV 56.129 for alternative way to program ID
numbers). Newer Lenz does support F0-F12 Function Keys.
Early models of the Atlas command station had someproblems with programming. Reports from Atlas on theirrecent versions indicate no problems. Limited number offunction keys available.
E-Z DCC. Works with wireless hand held throttle as well as
standard command station.
All products work with Quantum decoders.

Page 443 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix II A
Programming a Long Address on Digitrax
Select the Loco's Short Address (Usually 3)
Press “Loco” then “3” then “Enter”.

Program "On the main" the new Long Address.


Press “PROG” until “Po” and the Loco's address is shown on the LCD.



Press right turn knob down until it reads “ad4 = ???”

Type in desired four digit address and press “Enter”. Loco verbally responds with “CV 18 = XXXX” where
XXXX is the four digit address.

Once the long address is programmed, you must enable the locomotive to use it.

Enable the Long Address.


Next, press the right turn knob until it reads “ad2 = 000”



Scroll with left knob until you get to “029 = ???”, turn right knob until readout = “029 = 034”; press Enter,
locomotive says “CV 29 = 34”.



Press “Exit” to leave program mode.

Select Loco with the new Long Address.


Press “LOCO” and enter new long address to run locomotive.

Returning to the Short Address
Select the Loco's Long Address (The value you programmed above)Press “Loco” then the Long Address then “Enter”.

Program "On the main" to Enable the Short Address.


Press “PROG” until “Po” and the Loco's address is shown on the LCD.

Scroll with left knob until you get “CV29 = ???”; scroll with right knob until you get “029 = 002”; press Enter;
locomotive verbally responds with “CV 29 = 2”.



Press “Exit” to leave program mode.

Select Loco with the Short Address.


Press “LOCO” and enter Short Address to run locomotive.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 444 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix II B
Programming a Long Address on North Coast Engineering (NCE)
Select the Loco's Short Address (Usually 3)
Press “Loco” then “3” then “ENTER”.

Program "On the main" the new Long Address.


Press the “Program” button. Display reads “Program on Main”.

Press “ENTER”.



Display shows current “003” I.D. on the display…..Press “ENTER”

Press 1 for Address. Display shows “Set ADDR”

Press “1” to set Long Address.

Enter four digit address. Press “Enter” Hear “CV 18 equals XXXX” where XXXX is the four digit address you
entered.



You are now back in Run Mode. Select loco 3. Press “ENTER”.



Once the long address is programmed, you must enable the locomotive to use it.

Enable the Long Address.


Press the “Program” button. Display reads “Program on Main”.

Press “ENTER”.



Display shows current 003 I.D. on the display. Press “ENTER”

Press “3” for Configuration. Display shows “ENTER=NORM 1=REV”.



Progress through and set each variable until you reach “ADDRESS?”.

Enter “1” for “LONG” address. This enables using the long address.



Leave Ops Mode Programming by pressing the red “Emergency Stop” button.



Select locomotives long address and operate.

You are now out of program mode and have completed "the Long Address" sequence.

Returning to the Short Address
Select the Loco's Long Address (The value you programmed above)Press “Loco” then enter the Loco’s Long Address (The value you programmed above) then press “Enter”.

Program "On the main" to Enable the Short Address.


Press the “Program” button. Display reads “Program on Main”.

Press “ENTER”

Display shows current Long Address I.D. on the display. Press “Enter”

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 445 of 468

5-Aug-15



Press “3” for Configuration. Display shows “ENTER=NORM 1=REV”.



Progress through each variable until you reach “ADDRESS?”.



Press “ENTER” for “SHORT” address. This enables using the short address.



Leave Ops Mode Programming by pressing the red “Emergency Stop” button.



Select locomotives short address and operate.

The above procedure was evaluated with an upgraded326 NCE POWER PRO series of DCC command stations. If theabove procedure does not work properly, contact NCE to see if they can upgrade your software.

326 NCE Software Version 1.3, December, 21, 2004.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 446 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix III
DCC Troubleshooting
Operations Mode
My headlight does come on when I start my locomotive but
mysteriously goes off whenever I blow the horn or turn on thebell. Also, if I try to turn off the headlight, it sometimes requires
two pressings for the F0 or FL key.

My brakes, bell, air release, or other sounds come on
sometimes for no apparent reason while operating mylocomotive.

My locomotive makes no sounds except an air release whenpower is applied and will not operate.
My locomotive runs but makes no sounds.

When I turn up my throttle to higher values, the locomotive does
not speed up but instead, the directional lighting comes on.
When I turn on my lighting system with the F0 or FL Key, thelocomotive speeds up at low throttle settings.
Sometimes my locomotive slows down when I blow the whistle
or horn, particularly at high volume levels.

When I blow the horn, the horn continues to play for a half second to asecond. The reaction to releasing the horn button appears to besluggish. This makes it difficult to play a sequence of horn blasts.

In Speed Control Mode, there are no speed changes abovecertain throttle settings.

Under speed control, I do not get 1 scale mile per hour (smph); I
get a larger number about 5 to 10 smph.
In Standard Throttle Control Mode, there are no speed changes
above a certain throttle settings.
My locomotive operates with no problem in DCC, but does notoperate at all under Analog control.
My Lionel Gas Turbine will not operate over 25 smph under
RTC or Speed Control.

F8 key on Digitrax does not mute the locomotive.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Pressing the horn or toggling the bell will cause your command
station to send out a Function Group One command, whichcontains the lighting information. Not all command stations
automatically send this information unless FL, F1, F2, F3 or F4
is pressed. Regarding turning off the lighting with the F0 key,
the state for the light may already be off at the base station but
not sent. When you press the F0 key, it toggles the lights on
and sends that command and hence the lights stay on. It takes
a second press of the F0 key to send another command to turnoff the lights.
See above. Some functions may already be turned on but not
sent. When you request any function, the entire function groupthat contains that function will be sent and this may trigger otherfeatures already enabled within that group. Hence, you might
request the light be turned on and hear squealing brakes or thebell turn on or off. If your base station display shows thetoggled condition for each of the function keys, you candetermine which feature will turn on or off when a Function
Group One or a Function Group Two is sent.
You have your locomotive in Shut Down. Double press the F6Start-Up key to start your locomotive.
You have Mute on or have turned down your System Volume orindividual feature sound volumes. You may have a broken wire
to the speakers or a faulty speaker.
Your locomotive is set for 14 speed steps but your base stationis set for 28 or 128.
Your locomotive is set for 28 or 128 speed steps but your basestation is set for 14.
The Quantum Sound system takes additional power to blow thewhistle or horn and this loads your power pack. This can lower
the voltage on the track and your locomotive will slow down.
Purchase a power pack with good line regulation to prevent thisproblem.
If CV51.2 bit 0 is “1”, then Horn Triggered Doppler and Horn
Fancy Ending are enabled. The decoder waits an additional 0.5
second at the end of each horn blast before ending the horn
blast to see if the doppler trigger or fancy horn ending trigger isbeing applied. By setting CV51.2 bit 0 to “0”, disabling the horn
triggered doppler and horn fancy ending, this 0.5 second delay
is eliminated, making the horn more reactive to horn button
releases.
The top speed of your locomotive is dependent on the gear
ratio, load on the locomotive and the available voltage applied
to the track. Asking the locomotive to go faster results in nochange. (See CV 56.10, BEMF to SMPH Scale Factor tochange throttle range).
Check your speed step setting on your base station. To get 1smph you need to be in 128 speed steps.
Try a different speed curve or define your own to provide fullrange of throttle motion.
Make sure Analog operation is enabled. CV 29 bit 2 must be set
to 1.
This is correct for diesel operation. This is an internal limit on
top speed when the locomotive is under diesel operation. The
prototype would not travel over 25 mph under diesel power.
Switch to turbine operation to gain higher speeds.
The Digitrax DT400 model we examined behaves incorrectly
when the F8 key is pressed sending 1010DDDD instead ofPage 447 of 468

5-Aug-15

1011DDDD. Ask Digitrax for a Software Upgrade.
Make sure your throttle is at speed step zero before applying
brakes. Also, earlier Quantum systems only required that the F7
be pressed to trigger the brakes. Later Quantum decoders
required F7 to be on (1) before brakes will apply. If F7 was
already on when the throttle was turned down it will not
automatically apply brakes. Pressing it would turn F7 off (0) so
a second pressing was required to turn in on.

The F7 Key does not apply brakes.

When I set CV 17 and 18, the Extended Address, I must explicitly set
CV29 bit 6 to 1 before the Extended Address is effective. With nonQSI decoders, I don’t have to do this. Why isn’t it automatic with QSI
decoders? ,Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

If CV62 bit 0 is “1”, which enables Programming Verbal
Acknowledgement, then your QSI decoder speaks out “C V 1 7 equalsx x x x” when you program the extended address. During the time theacknowledgement is being spoken, all incoming DCC packets are
discarded. If your controller attempts to program CV29 during thistime, the packet for CV29 is discarded by the decoder. Set CV 62 bit 0
to 0, and your QSI decoder will not discard the CV 29 packet.

Page 448 of 468

5-Aug-15

Service Mode Operation using the Program Track
My Quantum equipped locomotive will not program in Service Modewith my command station.

Occasionally, when programming a CV, the reported value is off by
one digit.
When I try to do a complete reset of all CV’s using
CV 56.128.255 in Program Mode, not all of the CV’s reset to factory
values.

Some command stations do not provide sufficient current to power the
Quantum system. If you are using a command station that has
selectable track voltage for the different scales try using the O-Scaleor G-Gauge alternative. If this does not work, use Ops Mode
programming. You can also purchase from Tony’s Train
Exchange®327, a simple, inexpensive power booster (PowerPak™ by
DCC Specialties) that will allow you to program on the program trackwith any DCC command station.
This is a timing issue with some command stations. Either program in
Ops Mode or consider using a PowerPak from DCC Specialties.
Resetting all CV’s takes considerable time. Some command stations
only allow a fixed short amount of time to power the programming
track after a command is sent. When you ask for a complete reset, not
all of the CV’s will be reset if the power shuts down part way throughthe procedure. We recommend doing a full reset in Ops mode. Or you
can do individual reset operations such as “all NMRA CV reset”, and“all QSI CV reset”, etc. until you have all groups of CV’s reset tofactory defaults.

327 Tony’s Train Exchange; 1-800-978-3427; info@ttx-dcc.com .

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 449 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix IV
Using the Quantum Hardware Reset and Volume Controls:
Quantum software can be programmed by the operator to reset the system to factory defaults. As a safety precaution,
Quantum decoders also have a backup hardware method to do a system reset. Either method can be used to reset
the locomotive to original factory settings. In case your Quantum Sound and Train Control System misbehaves andsimply turning the power off from 5 to 15 seconds does not return it to normal operation, you can reset yourlocomotive using CV 56.128. Or you can use the hardware Reset Jumper found on earlier Quantum Systems or the
Magnetic Wand to activate a reed switch included on more modern Quantum Systems.
Quantum system volume can be adjusted using software by programming CV 51.0 or by a hardware volume
adjustment. Earlier Quantum systems used a potentiometer volume control and later models use a magnetic wand.

Reset Jumper Models
Both early Quantum Steam and Diesel locomotives used jumpers and volume potentiometers to control reset andsound volume. The diagram below shows a Quantum circuit board used in some Steam Locomotive tenders. The
jumper and volume potentiometer is located on the bottom board as shown in the diagram below.
To Reset the Locomotive:







Turn off the main track power.
For Steam Locomotives, remove the tender body or water filler hatch to reveal the circuit board. If it is aplastic tender, there are no screws; it is a press fit to the chassis. Die cast tenders will have retaining screws
under the chassis. Most Diesels will have a removable access panel over the Quantum circuit board on theroof. The location of the access panel will be shown in the Steam or Diesel Model Specification sheet thatwas included with your locomotive instructions.
To reset the Quantum system to its default values, locate the black “clearing” jumper (see below) and remove
by pulling it up.
Reapply main track power, and press a function key, for example, F0, to send the locomotive an Ops Modecommand. After a few seconds the locomotive should say the word “reset”.
Turn main track power off and reinstall jumper, and tender cab or access panel. The locomotive has now
been returned to original factory settings including all Analog and DCC settings.

Note: Do not try to perform the jumper reset operation on the Program Track under Service Mode power. Always
perform this operation under full power.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 450 of 468

5-Aug-15

To Adjust the Volume Using the Potentiometer:

Locate the Manual Volume Control under the access panel on the roof of your Diesel or Electric locomotive orunder the water hatch on Steam locomotive tender as shown in the Model Specification sheet that was
included with your instructions.
Turn on main track power. You may want to turn on and leave on some of the significant sound effects suchas horn/whistle and bell.
Use a small screwdriver to turn the volume clockwise to increase volume or turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the volume.
Replace the access panel or water hatch cover.

Note: Volume can also be adjusted digitally using the programming methods described in the programming
sections of this manual.

Magnetic Wand Models
Modern Quantum Steam and Diesel models use a glass enclosed reed relay to reset the Quantum System or adjust
the volume. The reed relay will close its contacts when the magnet supplied with your locomotive is placed in close
proximity. The advantage of this method of adjusting your locomotives volume or resetting it to factory defaults is thatyou do not need an access panel to gain access to the controls. Also the wand does not need to touch the body; it
can be held a reasonable distance from the roof area to prevent possibly marring the painted surface.

Reed Relay

SpeakerQuantum small diesel board with a reed relay mounted in a narrow-body diesel

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 451 of 468

5-Aug-15

To Reset the Locomotive:

Locate the reed relay area as shown in the Diesel or Steam Model Specifications sheet that was included withyour model.

Turn off the track power.

Place the Magnetic Wand over the reed switch area, re-apply track power, and press a function key, forexample, F0 to send the locomotive an Ops Mode command. Leave the wand there until you hear the word“reset”. Remove the magnetic wand; your locomotive is now reset.
The locomotive has now been returned to original factory defaults including all DCC and Analog values.
Note: Do not try to perform this reset operation on the Program Track under Service Mode power. Always
perform this operation under full power.

To Adjust the Volume Using the Magnetic Wand:

Locate the reed relay area on the locomotive’s roof as shown in the Diesel or Steam Model Specifications
sheet that was included with your model.

Power up locomotive and leave in Neutral.



Place the enclosed Magnetic Wand over this reed switch area on the roof of the locomotive perpendicular to
the track and wait as you hear the volume increase or decrease in incremental amounts as the Horn hoots
about every second. Move the wand away and again place it over the reed area to change the direction(louder or softer) of the volume change. Remove the wand when you reach the desired volume level.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 452 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix V
Recommended Reading:Ames, S., Friberg, R., and Loizeaux, E. Digital Command Control. Allt om Hobby 1998
Ireland, Zana (Editor In Chief), The Digitrax Big Book of DCC, Digitrax, 1999.
Strang, Lionel, DCC Made Easy, Kalmbach Publishing 2003
Polsgrove, Mike,DCC Projects & Applications, Kalmbach Publishing, 2006.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 453 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix VI
Application Notes:
Using DC Power Conversion for Block Signal Control
CV 29, Bit 2 =1. Applications for DC Power Conversion: Block Signal Control
DCC Power Conversion as described under CV 29, bit 2, was implemented into Quantum decoders in a way thatallows for simple block signal control. Using DC power conversion allows the operator to enable a red signal lightto stop a train smoothly, using its internal momentum settings, without having to use the throttle. If Bit 2=1 for CV
29, a DCC controlled locomotive will automatically engage DC Power Conversion when it enters a section of trackthat is powered with standard DC. If the polarity would normally power the analog locomotive in the direction it isgoing when it enters the DC section, the locomotive will continue through the DC block at the same speed. If thepolarity would normally power the locomotive in the Reverse direction, the locomotive will smoothly come to astop in the DC section.

The diagram below shows a DCC section connected to a DC section of track. The DC section is powered fromthe DCC power signal rather than from a separate power supply or battery. For this application, it is only
necessary to insulate the one rail as shown by the two insulated rail joiners at either end of the DC section; theother rail is electrically connected to the DCC section by conductive rail joiners.

D1
DCC AC PowerSW 1
SPDT SwitchA

DC Power

DCC AC Power



D2


B

SW2
SPST
Switch

DCC Section

Conducting Rail
Joiner

DC Section

Conducting Rail
Joiner

DCC Section
Insulator

Insulator
Direction of Travel

When switch 2 (SW 2) is open, the DCC signal is half-wave rectified by diodes D1 or D2 to produce a positive DC
signal to the DC section when Switch 1 is at position A or a negative DC signal when Switch 1 is at position B. If
Switch 2 is closed, the DCC signal is connected directly to the DC section and D1 and D2 have no effect on
applying DC power to the DC section.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 454 of 468

5-Aug-15

If DC power conversion is enabled in CV 29 (bit 2 = 1) and SW 2 is open, the polarity on the DC section can beused to stop the Quantum equipped locomotive or let it precede, depending on the position of SW 1. If thelocomotive is entering the DC section from the right, and SW 1 is set to A, the locomotive will continue at its
current speed setting through the DC section. The locomotive, of course, will not respond to DCC signals until it
leaves the DC section and reenters the DCC powered section at the far left. On the other hand, if SW 1 is set toB, the polarity on the DC section is opposite the locomotive’s direction and the locomotive will slow to a stop at its
DCC momentum setting. If the polarity is reversed again to be consistent with the locomotive’s direction, thelocomotive will accelerate at its current DCC momentum setting to leave the DC section. Alternately, SW 2 could
have been closed to cause DCC signals to be applied to the stopped locomotive, which would also have caused
the locomotive to accelerate at its current DCC momentum value to its DCC speed setting.
Since the DC portion is powered from the DCC signal, there are no short circuit problems between the DCC
powered section and the DC section as the locomotive wheels pass over the track insulators. In addition, since
the Quantum locomotive is equipped with large filter capacitors, the reduced power of half-wave rectification will
not affect the power available to operate the locomotive so there is minimal slow down effect. Also, if the train is
made up of a series of Quantum locomotives in a Consist, and the polarity is set to stop the train, each locomotive
in turn will couple the DCC signal through to the DC section until the last locomotive has passed over theboundary. Only then will the entire Consist come to a stop.
The above diagram is simplified to make it easy to describe the basic concept. Switch 1 can be a relay poweredby a train detector on the next block to do automatic train control. In addition, Switch 1 could have extra contacts
to control red and green signals for the actual block signal. Switch 2 could also be part of a relay network for all
DC blocks to disable or enable block signal operation.
D1 and D2 should be rated at 2 amps minimum and have a breakdown voltage of 30 volts or more.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 455 of 468

5-Aug-15

Appendix VII
Binary, Hexadecimal, Decimal Conversions
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Binary00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
0000011000000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
0000111000001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
0010010000100101
0010011000100111
00101000
00101001
00101010
00101011
0010110000101101
0010111000101111
00110000
00110001
00110010
00110011
0011010000110101
0011011000110111
00111000
00111001
00111010
00111011
00111100
00111101
0011111000111111

Decimal
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

Binary01000000
01000001
01000010
01000011
01000100
01000101
0100011001000111
01001000
01001001
01001010
01001011
01001100
01001101
0100111001001111
01010000
01010001
01010010
01010011
0101010001010101
0101011001010111
01011000
01011001
01011010
01011011
0101110001011101
0101111001011111
01100000
01100001
01100010
01100011
01100100
01100101
0110011001100111
01101000
01101001
01101010
01101011
01101100
01101101
0110111001101111
01110000
01110001
01110010
01110011
01110100
01110101
0111011001110111
01111000
01111001
01111010
01111011
01111100
01111101
0111111001111111

Decimal
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191

Page 456 of 468

Hex
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF

Binary10000000
10000001
10000010
10000011
10000100
10000101
10000110
10000111
10001000
10001001
10001010
10001011
10001100
10001101
10001110
10001111
10010000
10010001
10010010
10010011
10010100
10010101
10010110
10010111
10011000
10011001
10011010
10011011
10011100
10011101
10011110
10011111
10100000
10100001
10100010
10100011
10100100
10100101
10100110
10100111
10101000
10101001
10101010
10101011
10101100
10101101
1010111010101111
10110000
10110001
10110010
10110011
10110100
10110101
10110110
10110111
10111000
10111001
10111010
10111011
10111100
10111101
10111110
10111111

Decimal
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF

Binary11000000
11000001
11000010
11000011
11000100
11000101
11000110
11000111
11001000
11001001
11001010
11001011
11001100
11001101
11001110
11001111
11010000
11010001
11010010
11010011
11010100
11010101
1101011011010111
11011000
11011001
11011010
11011011
11011100
11011101
1101111011011111
11100000
11100001
11100010
11100011
11100100
11100101
1110011011100111
11101000
11101001
11101010
11101011
1110110011101101
1110111011101111
11110000
11110001
11110010
11110011
11110100
11110101
11110110
11110111
11111000
11111001
11111010
11111011
11111100
11111101
1111111011111111

5-Aug-15

Appendix VIIIQS Industries License Agreement
These license terms are an agreement between QS Industries, Inc. (QSI) and you. They apply to any hardware,
software, firmware and any method you receive it, if any. The terms apply to any QSI

updates,

network/internet-based services,

support services,sound records,

firmware,

software,

hardware, andanything incorporating any QSI technology and/or QSI intellectual property

By using any of the above (herein “PRODUCT”), you accept these terms. If you do not accept them, do not use thisPRODUCT. Instead, return it the seller for a refund or credit.
If you comply with these terms, you have the rights below to use this PRODUCT1.

OVERVIEW: QSI PRODUCT may include one or more of the following
a. Sound Files: that incorporates sounds that may or may not been processed,
b. Software: the software includes control and operation processes, methods, documentation,c. Firmware: code in QSI hardware product,d. Hardware: Product produced or licensed by QSI, and/or
e. Anything that incorporates QSI technology and/or QSI Intellectual Property.

2. SCOPE OF LICENSE: The PRODUCT and incorporated intellectual property is provided with a license, notsold. This agreement only gives you limited rights to use the PRODUCT. QSI reserves all other rights. ThisPRODUCT is copyrighted and incorporates QSI technology and/or Intellectual Property. Unless applicable law
gives you more rights despite this limited license, you may use the PRODUCT only as expressly permitted inthis agreement. You may nota. Work around any technical limitation in the PRODUCT,
b. Reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the PRODUCT,
c. Make copies of this PRODUCT ,Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 457 of 468

5-Aug-15

d. Publish any portion of the PRODUCT for others to copy,e. Make a derivative work of this PRODUCT,
f.

Rent, lease or lend the PRODUCT, andg. Use any portion of PRODUCT together with an unauthorized product.
QSI grants a limited license to use PRODUCT in its normal intended use provided thata. both the copyright notice and this limited permission notice appear in full,b. use of such PRODUCT is for personal non-commercial use,c. PRODUCT shall not be reproduced (in whole or in part in any manner) or posted anywhere (in whole
or in part) on any computer, included in any computer software, and/or broadcast in any media,
d. in the event that an injunction exists against QSI or an affiliate (any party working with QSI in any
capacity), the aforementioned permission to use PRODUCT in any manner is revoked,
e. in the event that any lawsuit is filed against QSI or an affiliate, the permission to use the PRODUCTby the plaintiff or any affiliates thereof and/or defendant or any affiliates thereof in any manner isrevoked,f.

no derivative works or modifications of any of the PRODUCT may be made,g. any oral or implied licenses are hereby revoked to the PRODUCT without a written agreement
signed by both parties, andh. any other use of the PRODUCT requires express written permission signed by both parties.
3. SERVERABILITY: In the event that any portion of this agreement is found invalid, all other portions remain in
effect.
4. AUTHORIZED PRODUCT: QSI Authorized are those products which are authorized by a mutual signed
agreement with QSI.
5. APPLICABLE LAW
a. United States. If you acquire the PRODUCT in the United States, Oregon State law governs theinterpretation of the agreement and applies to claims for breach of it, regardless of the conflict oflaws principals.
b. Outside United States. If you acquire the product in any other country, the laws of that countryapply
6. INTELECTUAL PROPERTY NOTICE: The PRODUCT (Quantum Hardware, Software and Firmware) are coveredby one or more U.S. Patent No. 4,914,431; 5,184,048; 5,267,318; 5,394,068; 5,448,142; 5,633,985;
5,832,431; 5,896,017; 5,940,005; and Foreign patents. One or more patent pending. QSI PRODUCTS are
copyrighted and registered.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 458 of 468

5-Aug-15

7. LIMTATION ON AND EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES. You can recover from QSI and its suppliers only direct
damages up to the amount you paid for the PRODUCT. You cannot recover any other damages including
consequential, lost profits, special, indirect or incidental damages
This limitation applies toAnything related to the hardware, software, firmware, sound files, services, content (includingcode) on third party internet sites or third party program and

Claims form breach of contract, breach of warranty, guarantee or condition, strict liability,
negligence, or other tort to the extent permitted by applicable law

It also applies even ifRepair, replacement or a refund of the product does not fully compensate you for any losses or

QSI knew or should have known about or the possibility of the damages

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so theabove limitation of exclusion may or may not apply to you. They also many no apply to you because ofyour country many not allow the exclusion or limitation of inconsequential, consequential or otherdamages.
8. NO OTHER RIGHTS: QS Industries, Inc. retains title and ownership of all Quantum Hardware designs,
Quantum Programmer™, associated operating Software/Firmware code and PRODUCT. Except as statedabove, this agreement does not grant you any rights to intellectual property rights and or Copyrights to the
Quantum Software, Firmware, Hardware or PRODUCT. The use of any trademarks or intellectual property
as herein authorized does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark or any other Intellectual
Property owned by QSI.
9. LICENSE TERMINATION: If you breach any portion of this agreement (material and/or immaterial), yourlicense is automatically terminated, without notice.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 459 of 468

5-Aug-15

IndexA
Acceleration Adjustment (CV 23) ..................................... 50, 54, 59, 64
Acceleration Rate (CV 3) .................................... 19, 27, 43, 50, 59, 64
Accessory Decoder .......................................................................... 64
Acknowledgement
Advanced ............................................................................ 36, 64
Service Mode ............................................................................. 35
Verbal ....................................................................... 36, 404, 448
Air Brakes ....................................................................................... 26
Apply using F7 ........................................................................... 21
Feature ID=176 ........................................................................ 121
Volume (CV52.37) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.37) .......................................... 118
Air Dryer
Air Dryer Maximum Interval (CV 55.13.2) .................................... 149
Air Dryer Minimum Interval (CV 55.13.1) ..................................... 148
Volume (CV52.30) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.30) .......................................... 118
Air Pumps
Pump2 Volume (CV52,17) ......................................................... 118
Pump2 Volume Balance Control (CV116,17) ............................... 118
Volume (CV52,16) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116,16) .......................................... 118
AirWire ......................................................................................... 359
Alternate Horn
CV131.PI.SI User-defined Alternate Horn Component Pitch .......... 434
Selection ................................................................... 28, 104, 126
Feature ID=2 ...................................................................... 121
Select using F11 ................................................................... 21
Volume (CV52.40) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.40) .......................................... 118
Analog Operation ................................................... 16, 42, 45, 63, 102
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Antialiased BEMF Measurements .................................................... 357
Atlas ............................................................................................. 443
Atmospherics Level (CV 51.16) ....................................................... 114
Automatic Bell (CV55.3.5)............................................................... 136
Automatic Features .......................................................................... 31
Automatic Mute Timeout Value (CV 51.5) ......................................... 108

B
Bachmann E-Z DCC ...................................................................... 443
Bell .............................................................................................. 126
Actuator................................................................................... 105
Automatic Bell (CV55.3.5) ......................................................... 136
Bell Type (CV55.3.1)................................................................. 134
Feature ID=3.............................................................................. 122
Metallurgy (CV55.3.7) ............................................................... 138
Pitch Shift (CV118.8) .......................................................... 414
Ring Period (CV55.3.6) ............................................................. 137
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Turn on using F1 ........................................................................ 21
Volume (CV52.8) ...................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.8) ............................................ 118
Bell Button.................................................................................... 23
BEMF Offset (CV 56.8)................................................................... 368
BEMF to SMPH Calibration Distance ............................................... 403
BEMF to SMPH Trim (CV 56.9) ....................................................... 369
BEMFSC (see Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control) ................... 20

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Blinking Light ......... See Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead
Beacon Light
Block Signal Control ...................................................................... 454
Blow Down ..................................................................................... 57
Feature ID=13 ......................................................................... 122
Volume (CV52.30).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.30) .......................................... 118
Blowers and Fans........................................................ 29, 55, 67, 126
Feature ID=8 ........................................................................... 122
Turn on using F4 ........................................................................ 21
Volume (CV52,19).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116,19) .......................................... 118

C
Cab Lights .......................................... See Front or Rear Cab Lights
Calibrate BEMF to Scale MPH ................................................ 365, 369
Feature ID=200 ........................................................................ 122
Calibrated Speed Control (CSC) ..................... 20, 42, 45, 64, 360, 372
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Chuff .............................................................................................. 24
Chuff Cutoff Minimum Inertia (CV 51.10) .................................... 109
Chuff Rate
Chuff Interval Scale Factor (CV 56.12) .................................. 373
Chuff Interval Trim (CV 56.13) .............................................. 374
Synchronization with Wheel Rotation ... 357, 358, 359, 367, 373,
374
Chuff2 Pitch Shift (CV118.11) .......................................... 414
Chuff2 Volume (CV52.11) ......................................................... 118
Chuff2 Volume Balance Control (CV116.11) ............................... 118
Chuffs Per Wheel Revolution (CV 56.14) .................................... 375
CV133.PI.SI Chuff Configuration ................................................ 436
Pitch Shift (CV118.10) ....................................................... 414
Volume (CV52.10).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.10) .......................................... 118
Chuff Intensity (CV133.2.0) ............................................................ 437
Command Station.................................................................... 66, 360
Doppler Shift Activation............................................................... 25
Function Keys ............................................................................ 66
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 447
Programming CV29 .................................................................... 64
Programming Extended Address ................................... 51, 53, 391
Programming Primary Address .................................................. 390
Recommended Command Stations ............................................ 442
Service Mode ........................................ 35, 41, 53, 389, 442, 449
Component Balance Identifiers .................................................. 424
Component Volume Identifiers ........................................................ 421
Configuration Data #1 (CV 29) .......................................................... 63
Common Settings ...................................................................... 65
Consist ............................................................................. 20, 54, 455
Consist Address (CV 19)............................................................. 54
Consist Address Active for F13-F20 (CV56.36.0) ......................... 387
Consist Address Active for F1-F8 (CV 21) ..................................... 55
Consist Address Active for F21-F28 (CV56.36.1) ......................... 388
Consist Address Active for FL and F9-F12 (CV 22) ........................ 57
Speed Matching Locomotives in Consist............................. 360, 361
Cooling Fans
Feature ID=8 ........................................................................... 122
Max Power (CV 55.8.12) ........................................................... 142
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.8.18) ................................................. 144
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.8.17) ..................................................... 143
Volume (CV52.19).................................................................... 118

Page 460 of 468

5-Aug-15

Volume Balance Control (CV116.19) .......................................... 118
Coupler Sounds ................................................................. 23, 55, 126
Coupler Air-Lines........................................................................ 23
Coupler Crash ............................................................................ 23
Coupler Lift Bar .......................................................................... 23
Coupler Trigger/Arm ................................................................... 23
Feature ID=211 ................................................................... 122
Trigger/Arm using F3 ............................................................. 21
Coupling Pin .............................................................................. 23
Volume (CV52.34) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.34) .......................................... 118
Crew Talk
Volume (CV52.52) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.52) .......................................... 118
CSC (see Calibrated Speed Control) ................................................. 20
Cylinder Cocks .................................................................... 19, 24, 26
Arm ................................................................................... 31, 104
Arm using F7 .................................................................. 21, 22
Feature ID=6 ...................................................................... 121
Volume (CV52.15) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.15) .......................................... 118

D
Deceleration Adjustment (CV 24)..................................... 50, 54, 60, 63
Deceleration Rate (CV 4) .............................. 19, 26, 27, 44, 50, 60, 63
Diesel Generator
Volume (CV52.26) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.26) .......................................... 118
Diesel Motor
CV129.PI.SI Diesel Motor Configuration...................................... 425
Low Idle..................................................................................... 29
Low Idle Timeout .............................................................. 152, 427
Motor Parameters ..................................................................... 150
Motor Rev ............................................................................ 24, 29
Sound Effects .......................................................................... 428
Speed Steps Per Notch ..................................................... 150, 425
Transition 1 SMPH ................................................................... 429
Transition 2 SMPH ................................................................... 430
Transition Activation Sound ....................................................... 428
Transition RPM Drop Time ........................................................ 431
Volume(Motor Idle) CV52.10 ........................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control(Motor) CV116.10................................................................ 118
Diesel Turbo
Volume (CV52.14) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.14) .......................................... 118
Digitrax ......................................................................................... 442
Compatibility with QSI equipped decoders .................................. 442
Programming a Long Address.................................................... 444
Returning to the Short Address ............................................. 444
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 448
Direction Control .................................................................. 19, 43, 63
Direction Key ................................................................................... 19
Directional Lighting ........................................................ 19, 21, 22, 63
Disconnect ................................................................................ 29, 31
Ditch Lights
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Activate using F0 ............................................................ 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.84.1-4) ........................ 209, 210, 211, 212
Feature ID=84..................................................................... 121
Dim Intensity (CV 55.84.10) ....................................................... 215
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=86 .............................................................. 122

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

On/Off Feature ID=85 .......................................................... 123
Strobe Feature ID=87 .......................................................... 125
Initial State (CV 55.84.0) ........................................................... 208
Max Intensity (CV 55.84.12) ...................................................... 217
Min Intensity (CV 55.84.11) ....................................................... 216
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.84.16) ................................................ 219
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.84.18) ............................................... 221
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.84.15) .................................................... 218
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.84.17) ................................................... 220
Strobe Hold Time (CV 55.84.5) .................................................. 213
Strobe Period (CV 55.84.6) ....................................................... 214
Doppler ShiftFeature ID=65............................................................................ 123
How to Trigger ................................................................... 25, 104
Trigger using F6 ......................................................................... 21
Double Press ............................................................................ 29, 31
Dynamic Brakes ................................................................ 24, 29, 126
Fans Max Power (CV 55.5.12) ................................................... 139
Fans Ramp Down Time (CV 55.5.18) ......................................... 141
Fans Ramp Up Time (CV 55.5.17) ............................................. 140
On/Off Feature ID=5 ................................................................. 123
Turn on using F5 ........................................................................ 21
Volume (CV52.28).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.28) .......................................... 118
Dynamo ........................................................... See Steam Generator

E
Engine Makes No Sounds .......................................................... 447
Engine Room Lights
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=120 ........................................................ 123
Max Intensity (CV 55.120.12) .................................................... 331
Ramp Time (CV 55.120.17) ....................................................... 332
Engine Room2 Lights
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=121 ........................................................ 123
Extended Address (CV 17,18) .............................................. 16, 51, 64
Alternate Ops Mode Procedure .................................................. 391
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 448
Exterior Lights
Initial State .............................................................................. 346

F
F0 (see also FL) .............................................................................. 21
F1
Bell ..................................................................................... 21, 23
Output Location (CV 35) ............................................................. 72
F10
Output Location (CV 44) ............................................................. 90
Status Report ...................................................................... 21, 28
F11
Alternate Horn Selection ....................................................... 21, 28
Lights........................................................................................ 21
Output Location (CV 45) ............................................................. 92
F12Lights........................................................................................ 21
Output Location (CV 46) ............................................................. 94
F13
System Volume Decrease ........................................................... 32
F14
System Volume Increase ............................................................ 32
F15
Grade Crossing.......................................................................... 32

Page 461 of 468

5-Aug-15

F2

Horn/Whistle ........................................................................ 21, 23
Output Location (CV 36) ............................................................. 74
F26
Fuel Loading Scenario ................................................................ 33
F27
Maintenance Scenario ................................................................ 33
F28
Water Loading Scenario .............................................................. 33
Water Scoop Scenario ................................................................ 33
F3Bell (on some DCC controllers) .................................................... 23
Coupler Sounds ................................................................... 21, 23
Output Location (37) ................................................................... 76
F4
Blower and Fans ........................................................................ 21
Output Location (CV 38) .............................................................. 78
F5
Dynamic Brakes ................................................................... 21, 24
Output Location (CV 39) .............................................................. 80
F6Doppler Shift .................................................................. 21, 25, 34
Neutral ...................................................................................... 34
Output Location (CV 40) .............................................................. 82
Start Up ........................................................... 21, 29, 31, 34, 104
F7
Air Brakes ............................................................................ 21, 26
Troubleshooting ............................................................... 448
Cylinder Cocks Arm ........................................................ 21, 26, 34
Gas Turbine/Diesel Transition ...................................................... 21
Output Location (CV 41) .............................................................. 84
Squealing Brakes ................................................................. 26, 34
F8Doppler Shift .............................................................................. 126
Mute ................................................................................... 21, 27
Output Location (CV 42) .............................................................. 86
F9Heavy Load ............................................................. 21, 27, 34, 57
Output Location (CV 43) .............................................................. 88
Shut Down ............................................................... 21, 29, 34, 57
Factory Default Settings ........................................................... 21, 126
Feature Identification Numbers ........................................................ 121
Feature to Port Mapping (CV 115.PI.SI) ........................................... 410
FireboxInitial State............................................................................... 347
Max Intensity (CV 55.122.12) ..................................................... 335
Mid Intensity (CV 55.122.13)...................................................... 336
Min Intensity (CV 55.122.11)...................................................... 334
On/Off Feature ID=122.............................................................. 123
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.122.16) .............................................. 338
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.122.18) ...................................... 340, 345
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.122.15) .................................................. 337
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.122.17) .................................................. 339
Firebox2
Max Intensity (CV 55.122.22) ..................................................... 342
Mid Intensity (CV 55.122.23)...................................................... 343
Min Intensity (CV 55.122.21)...................................................... 341
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.122.27) .................................................. 344
Firmware Information ............................................................. 392, 393
FL (see also F(f) and F(r))
FL Location (CV 29 bit 1)............................................................. 63
FL(f) ......................................................................................... 57, 63
Directional Lighting ..................................................................... 21
Output Location (CV 33) .............................................................. 68
FL(r) ......................................................................................... 57, 63

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Directional Lighting ..................................................................... 21
Output Location (CV 34) ............................................................. 70
Forward (FWD) ................................................................. 19, 55, 119
Forward Trim (CV 66) .................................................................... 407
Front Cab Lights.............................................................................. 29
Automatic ................................................................................ 350
Activate using F12 .......................................................... 21, 22
Configuration ...................................................................... 314
Feature ID=116 .................................................................. 121
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=117 ........................................................ 123
Initial State .............................................................................. 313
Max Intensity (CV 55.116.12) .................................................... 315
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.116.16) .............................................. 317
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.116.18) ............................................. 319
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.116.15) .................................................. 316
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.116.17).................................................. 318
Front Marker Lights
Automatic ................................................................................ 349
Activate using F11 .......................................................... 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.104.1,2,3) ........................... 282, 283, 284
Feature ID=104 .................................................................. 121
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=105 ........................................................ 123
Initial State (CV 55.104.0) ......................................................... 281
Max Intensity (CV 55.104.12,13,14) ........................... 285, 286, 287
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.104.16) .............................................. 289
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.104.18) ............................................. 291
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.104.15) .................................................. 288
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.104.17).................................................. 290
Front Number Board Lights .............................................................. 29
Automatic ................................................................................ 349
Activate using F11 .......................................................... 21, 22
Configuration ...................................................................... 264
Feature ID=100 .................................................................. 121
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=101 ........................................................ 123
Initial State .............................................................................. 263
Max Intensity (CV 55.100.12) .................................................... 265
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.100.16) .............................................. 267
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.100.18) ............................................. 269
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.100.15) .................................................. 266
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.100.17).................................................. 268
Fuel Sounds
Feature ID=15 ......................................................................... 123
Fuel Type ................................................................................ 107
Volume (CV52.32).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.32) .......................................... 118
Function Keys ................................................................................. 21
Active in Consist (CV 21,22) .................................................. 55, 57
Active in Consist (CV56.36.0) .................................................... 387
Active in Consist (CV56.36.1) .................................................... 388
F0-F12 Standard .................................................................. 21, 66
F0-F8 Standard.................................................................... 21, 66
Features which can be assigned to Function Keys ....................... 121
Common Assignments .......................................................... 21
Function Group 1 ....................................................................... 63
Function Key Outputs ................................................................. 66
Troubleshooting .................................................................. 447

G
Gas Turbine
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Turbine Whine

Page 462 of 468

5-Aug-15

Volume (CV52.15) ............................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.15) ..................................... 118
Turbine Whoosh
Volume (CV52.13) ............................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.13) ..................................... 118
Turbine/Diesel Transition............................................. 21, 104, 154
Turbine/Diesel Transition Feature ID=24 ..................................... 122
Grade Crossing ............................................................... 32, 126, 351
Feature ID=154 ........................................................................ 123
Graph
C5 Affect on Applied Motor Voltage .............................................. 45
CV 2 Affect on Applied Motor Voltage ........................................... 42
Speed Table Selections .............................................................. 61

H
Hardware Reset ............................................................................ 450
Head End Power On/Off ID=208...................................................... 123
Headlight
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Activate using F0 ............................................................ 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.70.1) ................................................... 155
Feature ID=70..................................................................... 121
Dim Intensity (CV 55.70.10) ....................................................... 156
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=72 .............................................................. 122
On/Off Feature ID=71 .......................................................... 123
Initial State (CV 55.70.0) ........................................................... 154
Max Intensity (CV 55.70.12) ...................................................... 157
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.70.16) ................................................ 159
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.70.18) ................................................ 161
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.70.15) .................................................... 158
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.70.17) .................................................... 160
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Heavy Load..................................................................... 27, 104, 126
On/Off Feature ID=179.............................................................. 123
Turn on/off using F9.................................................................... 21
HelperEnd Helper .......................................................................... 56, 58
Lead Locomotive .................................................................. 55, 57
Mid Helper ........................................................................... 55, 57
Horn ............................................................................................. 126
Alternate Horn Select (CV55.1.2) ............................................... 130
Blow using F2 ............................................................................ 21
CV130.PI.SI User-defined Horn Component Pitch ........................ 432
Fancy Ending ................................................... 104, 351, 415, 438
Feature ID=1............................................................................ 123
Horn Reverb Amount (CV55.1.10) .............................................. 131
Horn Reverb Distance (CV55.1.11) ............................................ 132
Horn Type (CV55.1.1) ............................................................... 127
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Volume (CV52.0) ...................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.0) ............................................ 118
Horn Button............................................................................... 23, 25

I
Imperial Units ................................................................................ 357
Indexed CV’’s .................................................................................. 96
Shorthand Notation ........................................................... 100, 101
Individual Sound Identifiers ............................................................. 118
Individual Sound Selection (CV 116.PI.SI) ........................................ 413
Inertia ............................................................. 20, 26, 27, 43, 44, 361
Interior Lights
Initial State............................................................................... 347

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

LLabored Sounds (see also Sound of Power) ........................... 20, 24, 29
Lashups (see also Consists) ............................................................. 54
Lenz ............................................................................................ 442
License Agreement........................................................................ 457
LightsFeature to Port Mapping (CV 115.PI.SI)...................................... 410
Load Compensated BEMF Speed Control (BEMFSC) ................. 20, 361
Locomotive Scale (CV 56.25.SI) ..................................................... 384
Locomotive Type (CV133.1.0) ........................................................ 436
Long Address (see also Extended Address) ....................................... 51
Long Air Let-off ............................................................................... 31
Feature ID=9 ........................................................................... 124
Volume (CV52.21).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.21) .......................................... 118
Low Idle Timeout (CV129.2.0) ........................................................ 427
Low Idle Timeout (CV55.21.1) ........................................................ 152

M
Magnetic Wand ............................................................................. 451
Disable ................................................................................... 358
Reset ................................................................................ 36, 452
Volume Adjustment .................................................................. 451
Manufacturer Unique CV’s................................................................ 96
Manufacturer’s ID (CV 8) .................................................................. 49
Manufacturer’s Version Number (CV 7).............................................. 48
Marker Lights ................................See Front or Rear Marker Lights
Mars Light
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Activate using F0 ............................................................ 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.76.1-4)................................ 176, 177, 178
Feature ID=76 .................................................................... 121
Configuration (CV 55.76.1-4) ..................................................... 175
Dim Intensity (CV 55.76.10) ...................................................... 181
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=78.............................................................. 122
On/Off Feature ID=77 .......................................................... 124
Strobe Feature ID=79 .......................................................... 125
Initial State (CV 55.76.0) ........................................................... 174
Max Intensity (CV 55.76.12) ...................................................... 183
Mid Intensity (CV 55.76.13) ....................................................... 184
Min Intensity (CV 55.76.11) ....................................................... 182
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.76.16) ................................................ 186
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.80.16) ................................................ 203
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.76.18) ............................................... 188
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.76.15) .................................................... 185
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.76.17) ................................................... 187
Strobe Hold Time (CV 55.76.5) .................................................. 179
Strobe Period (CV 55.76.6) ....................................................... 180
Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor (CV 51.13) .......................... 111
Metric Units .................................................................................. 357
Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor (CV 51.12) ........................... 110
Momentum (see also Inertia) ...................................................... 43, 44
Motive State Change Warning Signals (CV 51.20) ............................ 115
Motor Sound Effects (CV129.10.0) .................................................. 428
MRC ............................................................................................ 442
Multifunction Decoder ...................................................................... 64
Multiple Automatic Lights #1 ........................................................... 126
Activate/Deactivate Feature ID=136 ........................................... 124
Configuration ........................................................................... 348
Multiple Automatic Lights #2 ........................................................... 126
Activate/Deactivate Feature ID=137 ........................................... 124
Configuration ........................................................................... 349

Page 463 of 468

5-Aug-15

Multiple Automatic Lights #3 ........................................................... 126
Activate/Deactivate Feature ID=138 ........................................... 124
Configuration ........................................................................... 350
Multiple Heading (see also Consist) ................................................... 54
Multiple Units (MU’s) (see also Consist) ............................................. 54
Mute ......................................................... 27, 55, 126, 405, 406, 447
Automatic Timeout (CV 51.5) ..................................................... 108
Feature ID=64 .......................................................................... 124
Mute using F8 ............................................................................ 21
Mute Volume (CV 51.1) ............................................................. 103

N
NCE ............................................................................................. 442
Programming a Long Address.................................................... 445
Returning to the Short Address .................................................. 445
Neutral ..................................................................................... 19, 55
Neutral From Forward (NFF)................................................ 19, 119
Neutral From Reverse (NFR) ............................................... 19, 119
NMRA .......................................................... 16, 37, 43, 96, 389, 406
CV’s Supported by Quantum ....................................................... 37
Standards .................................................................................. 16
Null Output
Feature ID=0............................................................................ 124
Number Board Lights..... See Front or Rear Number Board Lights

Feature ID=12 ......................................................................... 124
Volume (CV52.29).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.29) .......................................... 118
Power Conversion
Stopping Distance .................................................................... 402
Power Source Conversion .................................................. 50, 63, 454
Predefined Speed Curves ................................................................ 61
Primary Address (CV 1) ................................................. 16, 41, 54, 64
Alternate Ops Mode Procedure .................................................. 390
Primary Index (PI) (CV 49) ................................. 40, 96, 100, 101, 119
Prime Beacon ........ See Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead
Beacon Light, See Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead
Beacon Light
Prime Mover1
Volume (CV52.10).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.10) .......................................... 118
Prime Mover1 Component Balance Identifiers .......................... 424
Prime Mover1 Component Volume Identifiers .......................... 421
Prime Mover2
Volume (CV52.11).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.11) .......................................... 118
Prime Mover2 Component Balance Identifiers .......................... 424
Prime Mover2 Component Volume Identifiers .......................... 421
Product Model Number .......................................................... 392, 393
Programming on the Main ................................................................ 36
Programming Track ....................................................................... 442

O
Odometer ............................................................................. 394, 397
Odometer Mode ....................................................... 358, 395, 398
Odometer Readout ................................................... 356, 394, 397
Reset Odometer ....................................................... 389, 394, 397
Service Mode Read Back .................................................. 395, 398
Use for Speed Calibration.......................................................... 370
OHBLSee Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead Beacon Light
Operations Mode
Programming ..................................................................... 36, 390
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Output Feature Assignment (CV 53.PI.SI) ........................................ 119
Overhead Beacon Light .................................................................. 239
Automatic
Feature ID=92..................................................................... 121
Automatic OHBL Configuration (CV 55.92.1) ............................... 241
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=93 .......................................................... 124
Initial State (CV 55.92.0) ........................................................... 240
Max Intensity (CV 55.92.12) ...................................................... 244
Min Intensity (CV 55.92.11) ....................................................... 243
Period (CV 55.92.6) .................................................................. 242
Pulse 2 Max Intensity (CV 55.92.19) ........................................... 249
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.92.16) ................................................ 246
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.92.18) ................................................ 248
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.92.15) .................................................... 245
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.92.17) .................................................... 247

P
Packet Time-out Value (CV 11) ................................................. 50, 108
PID Parameters (CV 56.18-21.SI) .................................................... 376
Pitch
Individual Sounds
Individual Sound Pitch Shift (CV118.PI.SI) ................ 414
System Pitch Shift (CV 51.15) .................................................... 113
Polarity ..................................................................... 63, 64, 454, 455
Pop-Off ........................................................................................... 29

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

R
Ready to Move Scenario
Configuration (CV 120.PI.SI) ..................................................... 415
Motive State Change Warning Signals (CV 51.20) ....................... 115
Rear Cab Lights .............................................................................. 29
Automatic ................................................................................ 350
Activate using F12 .......................................................... 21, 22
Configuration ...................................................................... 323
Feature ID=118 .................................................................. 121
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=119 ........................................................ 124
Initial State .............................................................................. 322
Max Intensity (CV 55.118.12) .................................................... 324
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.118.16) .............................................. 326
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.118.18) ............................................. 328
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.118.15) .................................................. 325
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.118.17).................................................. 327
Rear Ditch Lights
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Configuration (CV 55.88.1-4)........................ 225, 226, 227, 228
Feature ID=88 .................................................................... 122
Dim Intensity (CV 55.88.10) ...................................................... 231
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=90.............................................................. 122
On/Off Feature ID=89 .......................................................... 124
Strobe Feature ID=91 .......................................................... 125
Initial State (CV 55.88.0) ........................................................... 224
Max Intensity (CV 55.88.12) ...................................................... 233
Min Intensity (CV 55.84.11) ....................................................... 232
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.88.16) ................................................ 235
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.88.18) ............................................... 237
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.88.15) .................................................... 234
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.88.17) ................................................... 236
Strobe Hold Time (CV 55.88.5) .................................................. 229
Strobe Period (CV 55.88.6) ....................................................... 230
Rear Marker Lights
Automatic ................................................................................ 349

Page 464 of 468

5-Aug-15

Activate using F11 ........................................................... 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.106.1,2,3) ............................ 295, 296, 297
Feature ID=106 ................................................................... 122
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=107 ........................................................ 124
Initial State (CV 55.106.0).......................................................... 294
Max Intensity (CV 55.106.12,13,14) ............................ 298, 299, 300
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.106.16) .............................................. 302
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.106.18) .............................................. 304
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.106.15) .................................................. 301
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.106.17) .................................................. 303
Rear Mars Light
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Configuration (CV 55.80.1-4) ........................ 192, 193, 194, 195
Feature ID=73..................................................................... 122
Dim Intensity (CV 55.80.10) ....................................................... 198
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=82 .............................................................. 122
On/Off Feature ID=81 .......................................................... 124
Strobe Feature ID=83 .......................................................... 125
Initial State (CV 55.80.0) ........................................................... 191
Max Intensity (CV 55.80.12) ...................................................... 200
Mid Intensity (CV 55.80.13) ....................................................... 201
Min Intensity (CV 55.80.11) ....................................................... 199
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.80.18) ................................................ 205
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.80.15) .................................................... 202
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.80.17) .................................................... 204
Strobe Hold Time (CV 55.80.5) .................................................. 196
Strobe Period (CV 55.80.6)........................................................ 197
Rear Number Board Lights ............................................................... 29
Automatic ................................................................................ 349
Activate using F11 ........................................................... 21, 22
Configuration ...................................................................... 273
Feature ID=102 ................................................................... 122
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=103 ........................................................ 124
Initial State............................................................................... 272
Max Intensity (CV 55.102.12) ..................................................... 274
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.102.16) .............................................. 276
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.102.18) .............................................. 278
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.102.15) .................................................. 275
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.102.17) .................................................. 277
Rear Overhead Beacon Light .......................................................... 250
Automatic
Configuration (CV 55.96.1) ................................................... 253
Feature ID=97..................................................................... 122
Explicit
On/Off Feature ID=97 .......................................................... 124
Initial State (CV 55.96.0) ........................................................... 252
Max Intensity (CV 55.96.12) ...................................................... 256
Min Intensity (CV 55.96.11) ....................................................... 255
Period (CV 55.96.6) .................................................................. 254
Pulse 2 Max Intensity (CV 55.96.19) ........................................... 261
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.96.16) ................................................ 258
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.96.18) ................................................ 260
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.96.15) .................................................... 257
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.96.17) .................................................... 259
Recommended Reading: ................................................................ 453
Reed Switch (see Magnetic Wand) .................................................. 451
Disable .................................................................................... 358
Regulated Throttle Control (RTC) ........................................ 20, 64, 361
Reset
Reset Odometer ....................................................... 389, 394, 397
Reset Trip Odometer ................................................................ 400
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 449

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

using CV56.128 ....................................................................... 389
using Jumper ..................................................................... 36, 450
using Magnetic Wand ................................................. 36, 451, 452
Reverse (REV) .................................................................. 19, 55, 119
Reverse Light............................................................................ 57, 58
Automatic ................................................................................ 348
Activate using F0 ............................................................ 21, 22
Configuration (CV 55.73.1) .................................................. 165
Feature ID=73 .................................................................... 122
Dim Intensity (CV 55.73.10) ...................................................... 166
Explicit
Dim Feature ID=75.............................................................. 123
On/Off Feature ID=74 .......................................................... 124
Initial State (CV 55.73.0) ........................................................... 164
Max Intensity (CV 55.73.12) ...................................................... 167
Ramp Down Rate (CV 55.73.16) ................................................ 169
Ramp Down Time (CV 55.73.18) ............................................... 171
Ramp Up Rate (CV 55.73.15) .................................................... 168
Ramp Up Time (CV 55.73.17) ................................................... 170
Reverse Trim (CV 95) .................................................................... 409
Reversed Motor Polarity ................................................................. 359
Reverser
Volume (CV52.41).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.41) .......................................... 118
Reverser Type .............................................................................. 107
Rotary Light ........... See Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead
Beacon Light
RTC (see Regulated Throttle Control) ................................................ 20
RTC Minimum BEMF (CV 56.5) ...................................................... 362
Rule 17 .......................................................................................... 19

S
Scale (see also Locomotive Scale) .................................................. 384
Scale Miles per Hour (smph) ............................ 20, 360, 369, 372, 447
Speedometer Report ................................................................ 356
Scale Wheel Diameter (CV 56.26.SI) ............................................... 385
Scenario
Fuel Loading ..................................................................... 33, 126
Feature ID=146 .................................................................. 123
Fuel Type........................................................................... 107
Volume (CV52.55) .............................................................. 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.55)..................................... 118
Gas Turbine Turbine/Diesel Transition.......................... 21, 104, 122
Maintenance ...................................................................... 33, 126
Feature ID=148 .................................................................. 124
VolumeBalance Control (CV116.56) ........................................... 118
Volume (CV52.56) .............................................................. 118
Ready to Move .................................................... 115, 116, 415
Shut Down ................................................................................ 29
Feature ID=145 .......................................................... 123, 124Start Up .................................................................................... 31
Feature ID=144 .................................................................. 125
Upon Stopping .................................................................... 438
Water Loading ................................................................... 33, 126
Feature ID=147 .................................................................. 125
Volume (CV52.53) .............................................................. 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.53)..................................... 118
Water Scoop ..................................................................... 33, 126
Feature ID=150 .................................................................. 125
Volume (CV52.54) .............................................................. 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.54)..................................... 118
Secondary Index (SI) (CV 50) ..................................... 40, 96, 101, 119Service Mode ...........................................35, 102, 103, 389, 390, 442

Page 465 of 468

5-Aug-15

Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 449
Short Address (see also Primary Address) ......................................... 41
Short Air Let-off
Feature ID=10 .......................................................................... 124
Volume (CV52.22) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.22) .......................................... 118
Shut Down ........................................................................ 29, 31, 447
Activate using F9 ........................................................................ 21
Feature ID=145 ................................................................ 123, 124
SMPH/BEMF Ratio (CV 56.7.SI) ..................................................... 364
Snifter Valve
Volume (CV52.20) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.20) .......................................... 118
Sound of Power ...................................................................... 24, 29
Sounds on Power Up ..................................................................... 357
Special Sound Effects Enable (CV 51.2) .......................................... 104
Special Sound Effects Enable (CV 51.3) .......................................... 107
Speed Control (see Calibrated Speed Control) .................................... 20
Speed Curves ........................................................................... 46, 61
Fast Start (convex) ............................................................... 61, 62
Linear........................................................................................ 61
Recommendations ...................................................................... 46
Slow Start (concave) ............................................................. 61, 62
User Defined (CV 67-94) ..................................................... 61, 408
Speed Step 1 Delay (CV 56.6) ........................................................ 363
Speed Step to SMPH Scale Factor (CV 56.10) ................................. 372
Speed Steps....................... 19, 20, 43, 44, 59, 60, 63, 360, 372, 447
Speed Step Mode (14,28,128) ..................................................... 63
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Speed Steps Per Notch (CV129.1.0) ................................................ 425
Speed Steps Per Notch (CV55.21.0) ................................................ 150
Speed Table Selection
CV 25........................................................................................ 61
CV 29 bit 4................................................................................. 64
Speedometer Readout ..................................................................... 28
Spitter Valve
Spitter Valve Maximum Interval (CV 55.12.2)............................... 147
Spitter Valve Minimum Interval (CV 55.12.1) ............................... 146
Volume (CV52.29) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.29) .......................................... 118
Squealing Brakes ............................................................................ 26
Feature ID=215 ........................................................................ 123
Trigger using F7 ......................................................................... 21
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Volume (CV52.24) .................................................................... 118
Squealing Brakes + Air Brakes ........................................................ 126
Feature ID=216 ........................................................................ 123
Standard Throttle Control (STC) .......................................... 20, 64, 360
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Standby .................................................................................... 29, 31
Start Up ...................................................................... 29, 31, 55, 126
Activate using F6 ........................................................................ 21
Feature ID=144 ........................................................................ 125
Status Report .......................................................................... 28, 126
Configuration (CV 55.178.0) ...................................................... 356
Feature ID=178 ........................................................................ 125
Trigger using F10 ....................................................................... 21
STC (see Standard Throttle Control) .................................................. 20
Steam Generator ............................................................................. 22
On/Off Feature ID=218.............................................................. 125
Volume (CV52.26) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.26) .......................................... 118
Step Lights .................................................................................... 349
Max Intensity (CV 55.113.12) ..................................................... 310
On/Off Feature ID=113.............................................................. 125

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Ramp Time (CV 55.113.17) ....................................................... 311
Strobe Light ........... See Overhead Beacon Light or Rear Overhead
Beacon Light
System Configuration 0 (CV 56.0) ................................................... 357
System Configuration 1 (CV 56.1) ................................................... 359
System Pitch Shift (CV 51.15) ......................................................... 113
System Volume (CV 51.0) .............................................................. 102
System Volume Balance (CV 51.14) ................................................ 112

T
Table
Alternate Horn Type Identifiers .................................................. 130
Binary, Hexadecimal, Decimal Conversions ................................ 456
CV 29 Common Settings ............................................................. 65
Example of 2 Dimensional Table (PI & SI) .................................. 101
Examples of Common Train Numbers .................................. 52, 391
Factory Default Settings ............................................................ 126
Feature Identification Numbers .................................................. 121
Function Key Outputs ................................................................. 66
Horn Type Identifiers ................................................................ 127
Individual Sound Identifiers ....................................................... 118
Prime Mover1 Component Balance Identifiers ..................... 424
Prime Mover1 Component Volume Identifiers ..................... 421
Prime Mover2 Component Balance Identifiers ..................... 424
Prime Mover2 Component Volume Identifiers ..................... 421
Recommended Command Stations ............................................ 442
Speed Curves ............................................................................ 62
Supported CV’s.......................................................................... 37
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Balance Identifiers......................................................................................... 424
User-defined Alternate Horn Component Volume Identifiers......................................................................................... 422
User-defined Horn Component Balance Identifiers .............. 424
User-defined Horn Component Volume Identifiers .............. 421
User-defined Horn Semitone Identifiers ...................................... 432
Temperature
Internal Temperature Report ..................................................... 356
Room Temperature (CV 56.32.0) ............................................... 386
Throttle Mode (CV 56.4) ................................................................. 360
Traction Motor Whine Volume(CV52.10) ............................................................................... 118
Traction Motor Whine Volume Balance Control (CV116.10) ............... 118
Transition 1 SMPH (CV129.50.0) .................................................... 429
Transition 2 SMPH (CV129.51.0) .................................................... 430
Transition RPM Drop Time(CV129.55.0) .......................................... 431
Trip Odometer............................................................................... 400
Reset Trip Odometer ................................................................ 400
Service Mode Read Back .......................................................... 400
Trip Odometer Readout .................................................... 356, 400
Truck Lights
Max Intensity (CV 55.109.12) .................................................... 307
On/Off Feature ID=109 ............................................................. 125
Ramp Time (CV 55.109.17) ....................................................... 308

U
Upon Stopping Scenario
Configuration (CV 135.PI.SI) ..................................................... 438
User Defined Speed Table (CV 67-94)....................................... 61, 408
User Sound Effect
2 Volume (CV52.47) ................................................................. 118
Looped Play Feature ID=26....................................................... 125
Single Play Feature ID=25 ........................................................ 125
Single Play Feature ID=27 ........................................................ 125

Page 466 of 468

5-Aug-15

Volume (CV52.46) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.46) .......................................... 118
User Sound Effect2
Looped Play Feature ID=28 ....................................................... 125
Volume Balance Control (CV116.47) .......................................... 118
User-defined Alternate Horn
Component Balance (CV 128.40.SI) ..................................... 424
Component Pitch (CV131.PI.SI) ................................................. 434
Component Volume (CV 127.40.SI) ..................................... 422
User-defined Horn
Component Balance (CV 128.0.SI) ....................................... 424
Component Pitch (CV130.PI.SI) ................................................. 432
Component Volume (CV 127.0.SI) ....................................... 421

V
Valve Rod Clank
Volume (CV52.13) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.13) .......................................... 118
Verbal Feedback
CV Readout ..................................................................... 404, 406
Odometer Readout ........................................................... 394, 397
Programming Acknowledgement Disable/Enable ......................... 404
Status Report ............................................................... 21, 28, 356
Trip Odometer Readout............................................................. 400
Volume (CV52.50) .................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.50) .......................................... 118
Version Number .............................................................. 48, 392, 393
V-High (CV 5) ............................................................................ 45, 62
V-Mid (CV 6) ................................................................................... 47
VolumeComponent Sounds
Component Sound Balance Control (CV 128.PI.SI) ................. 423
Component Sound Volumes (CV 127.PI.SI) ........................... 420
Individual Sounds
Individual Sound Balance Control (CV 116.PI) ........................ 412
Individual Sound Volumes (CV 52.PI) .................................... 117
Maximum Sound of Power Scale Factor (CV 51.13) ..................... 111
Minimum Sound of Power Scale Factor (CV 51.12) ...................... 110
SystemQuantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Hardware Volume Controls .................................................. 450
Adjust with Magnetic Wand ............................................. 451
Adjust with Potentiometer ............................................... 451
Mute
Automatic Mute Timeout Value (CV 51.5) ......................... 108
Mute Feature ID=64 ....................................................... 124
Mute using F8 ........................................................... 21, 27
Mute Volume (CV 51.1) .................................................. 103
System Volume (CV 51.0).................................................... 102
System Volume Balance (CV 51.14) ..................................... 112
System Volume Decrease
Feature ID=63 ............................................................... 125
Using F13 ....................................................... 21, 32, 126
System Volume Increase
Feature ID=62 ............................................................... 125
Using F14 ....................................................... 21, 32, 126
V-Start (CV 2) ........................................................................... 42, 62W
Wangrow ...................................................................................... 442
Water Injector
Feature ID=14 ......................................................................... 123
Volume (CV52.31).................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.31) .......................................... 118
Wheel Diameter (CV 56.24.SI) ........................................................ 383
Wheel Diameter (CV 56.26.SI) ........................................................ 385
Whistle ......................................................................................... 126
Blow using F2 ............................................................................ 21
Fancy Ending .................................................. 104, 351, 415, 438
Feature ID=1 ........................................................................... 125
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 447
Volume (CV52.0) ..................................................................... 118
Volume Balance Control (CV116.0) ............................................ 118

Z
Zimo ............................................................................................ 443

Page 467 of 468

5-Aug-15

© 2015 All rights reserved. QS Industries (QSI) grants limited permission to use any Documents (e.g., white
papers, press releases, datasheets, user manuals, FAQ’s), does not grant permission to create any derivative
works, with the limited permission to use provided that (1) that both the copyright notice and this limited
permission notice appear in full, (2) use of such Documents is for personal non-commercial use, (3) shallnot be copied into (in whole or in part) or posted anywhere (in whole or in part) on any network computer,computer software, or broadcast in any media, (4) in the event that an injunction exists against QSI or anaffiliate, the prevailing parties permission to use Documents in any manner is revoked, (5) in the event thatany lawsuit is filed against QSI or an affiliate, the permission to use the Documents by the plaintiff ordefendant in any manner is revoked, (6) no derivative works or modifications of any the Documents may be
made, and (7) there are no oral or implied licenses to the Documents without a written agreement signed byboth parties. Any other use of the Documents requires express written permission signed by both parties.
QSI AND/OR ITS RESPECTIVE SUPPLIERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THE
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE DOCUMENTS AND RELATED GRAPHICS PUBLISHED FOR ANY PURPOSE.
ALL SUCH DOCUMENTS AND RELATED GRAPHICS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND. QSI AND/OR ITS RESPECTIVE SUPPLIERS HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITHREGARD TO THIS INFORMATION, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL QSI AND/OR ITS RESPECTIVE SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROMTHE SERVICES.
THE DOCUMENTS AND RELATED GRAPHICS PUBLISHED COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR
TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN. QSIAND/OR ITS RESPECTIVE SUPPLIERS MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND/OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S)AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED HEREIN AT ANY TIME.
Printed in the U.S.A. Information in this publication supersedes that in all previous published materials. The contents and the
product it describes are subject to change without notice. QSI and Quantum are registered trademarks of QS Industries, Inc. Q1,
Q1a, Q2, Q3, Quantum System, Quantum Revolution, Quantum Engineer, Sound-of-Power, Scale Sound, Regulated Throttle
Control, RTC, Standard Throttle Control, STC, Inertial Control, Q1a Upgrade, Q2 Upgrade, Quantum CV Manager, Quantum
Programmer, Magnetic Wand, Random Sequence Sound, Quantum Analog Remote Control and QARC are trademarks of QS
Industries, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Quantum DCC Ref Manual Ver 5.2.0

Page 468 of 468

5-Aug-15